Home

Intermate i5 Stepper Machine User Manual

1. True type file text Font name PCh a x9 xoc File name Symbol Sete 2 3 7 20 329 19 557 395 39 m 1 CodePage850 2 CodePage852 3 Baltic 4 CodePage858 5 Cyrillic 6 CyrilEuro 7 1808859 9 Latin 5 Turkish 8 1808859 7 Greek Type Face x Wk BO 0 65535 Member name in FONT file F4 List F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here you fill in the symbol set a type face and a member name for the FONT file Use 1 Codepage850 as default Use 2 Codepage852 if you intend to use the font for Latin2 codepages and use 4 Codepage858 if you intend to use it for a western europe euro codepage e WARNING amp Note that the type face specified should not be the same as any type face of the resident fonts on the printer In order to avoid this it is recommended to use type faces i with the number 32768 or above Use of an imported True Type Font requires that a font number with the same type face is created and that the font file member corresponding to the font number is specified to be automatic downloaded User s Manual for InterForm400 285 File transfer HP SFP Font files from a PC If you have HP PCL fonts in the DOS format SFP these can be file transferred to InterForm400 as they are The file on the AS 400 to receive the PC file is APF3812 FONT The SFP file is stored as a file member in this file The rules for the file transfer is the same as described in the previous section 286 Users Manual for InterF
2. startposition length or or or 0 lines Output heads are to have __ lines On the screen above you tell InterForm400 how to detect the last line of the input header The number keyed in _ lines will be added to the line number where the condition above is met So if the condition e g is found in line 5 and you have 8 in this place then the first 8 lines are considered to be a header The number in Output heads are to have __ lines tells InterForm400 the minimum number of lines for the output header However the number of lines in the output header can never be lower than number of lines in the header of the input spooled file Press Enter and you will come to this screen Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Input head Levelbreak is found in head line S startpos length __ and line us startpos length __ and line v startpos length __ Page number within level is to be printed in output line position Line id is to be printed in all output lines in output position F3 Exit F12 Cancel Each time there is a new customer InterForm400 will have to make a page break in the new spooled file Above you state how InterForm400 can determine that If the information found in the place pointed to by Levelbreak is found in head changes then InterForm400 will do a level brea
3. 405 APF3812 APF3812 405 APF3812 APFCLRLNK 403 APF3812 APFEDTPRT 413 APF3812 APFLNK 05 403 APF3812 APFRPT 404 APF3812 APFWRKOUTQ 121 414 430 APF3812 CRTPBSPLF 406 APF3812 CVTPCLSPLF 409 APF3812 DSPBWIMG 415 APF3812 ENDAFCJOB 404 APF3812 EXPCHT 401 APF3812 HPMACRO 416 APF3812 IMPCHT 05 402 APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF 410 APF3812 MRGSPLFZPL 410 APF3812 PCLTOMBR 418 APF3812 PRTTIFF ssss 419 APF3812 PRTXREF 420 APF3812 RSTLIBFLR 402 APF3812 SAVLIB2FLR 402 APF3812 SNDMAIL 420 APF3812 STRAFCJOB 405 APF3812 STROSCJOB 405 APF3812 TIFTOMBR 422 APF3812 WRKCHT suse 436 APF3812 WRKMAILADR 420 APF3812 WRKPRFJOB 420 APF3812 WRKSTMFLCK 421 APFE3812 ZIP cd usd mee fur 412 MRGSPLFZPL 0 055 410 CL programs 403 405 416 AFC exit programs 146 APF3812 AFCADM 132 APF3812 OSCADM 246 APF3812 STRWTRCHK 27 E mail exit program 197 PageBuilder Program 409 PRSCOPY etc doi ann Rake eios 153 SAP100C nes oe tu ace ee phage ere 152 Split exit pr
4. Type choices press Enter Primary target device PRITGTDEV PRT PRT DSP F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Additional Parameters Bottom User s Manual for InterForm400 351 Special parameters for this command include COLORSUP BMKDEF CERTIFIC OUTTYPE TOSTMF NAMEDEF REPLACE TOATTACH FROMADR ENCRYPT Specify if the PDF output is to be B W or color If wanted you can refer to a bookmark definition and get bookmarks in the created PDF file See on page 238 how you create a bookmark definition This value can also be determined by a used PDF file name definition refer to the description of the NAMEDEF parameter You can digitally sign the PDF file with this reference For description of digital signatures refer to page 480 for more information This value can also be determined by a used PDF file name definition refer to the description of the NAMEDEF parameter Specify EMAIL for creating an E mail with the PDF file as an attached file STMF to create a PDF stream file in IFS or VIEW to view the result directly in Acrobat Reader if associated with PDF When creating a PDF file using the STMF option on the OUTTYPE parameter you state where to place it and what to call it on the TOSTMF parameter E g if you state ODLS APF3812 DEMO PDF you create a file called DEMO PDF
5. IF400DEMO File set n ox X 3 SAMPLE Primary secondary i KPRT Copies dome e cuu Me ve IT Input spooled file Jobname QPADEV0002 Userprofile KSE Jobnumber 092247 oDAte vox ow ow ow S00l D4 25 SOTA ne ae Sots xu x CE U2 ESO ELS Filename QPRINT Filenumber 0004 Number of pages 0000007 Kim Egekjaer AFC Definition Entries The AFC function screen gives the possibility of entering sequence lines which will all be executed for each spool entry getting RDY in the input queue for the AFC definition 138 Users Manual for InterForm400 Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Pr bprary soa Sa APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program Seqnbr Function 1 0 a 1 Merge with overlay 9 Exit 2 Send Network Spooled File A Change Attributes 3 Transform AFPDS to USERASCII B Split spooled file 4 Copy Spooled File C Prepare for Finishing 5 Move Spooled File D Sort Spooled File 6 Hold Spooled File F Change writer 7 Delete Spooled File P Send PDF E mail 8 Call Program Comment F3 Exit F12 Cancel When selecting a function the first screen will allow you to enter the spool file attribute s used as criteria for executing this sequence line Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC_IN
6. PRI PRI SEC POrmwetyDpe sedie eM T ep rhum Sec es Copies of each page INPUT 01 99 F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel Overlay name File set Overlay selector Primary Secondary Set Form Type Copies The Overlay you want to merge with Use F4 to get a list The file set containing the above overlay Use F4 to get a list If the above is not filled in it means you intend to use an Overlay Selector in order to search the spool data for special conditions that will select the overlay See page 122 On how to use the Overlay Selector This option will decide if the Primary or the Secondary set of copies of an overlay are to be processed The two sets of copies are defined in Copy Management page 46 if the Global Setting Copy Management is set to Y If this setting is N for the overlay the overlay is regarded as Primary PRI is default for this option The Form type of the resulting print out It is recommended to use STD for all output in order to avoid prompting for change of forms from the queue You can decide how many exact duplicates you want of each page in the spool entry Note that if you want different contents for the duplicates you must define this in Copy Management for the overlay or you can define another sequence line in this AFC definition which processes the same spool entry once more but with a different overlay This screen is only shown if you are merging with a
7. InterForm 400 file set KARTSET Character value Report name RAPNVN Character value If missing link to spool NOLINK CANCEL BYPASS TOMKLICHE If link to unknown spool entry NOSPOOL CANCEL BYPASS TOMKLICHE Output queue OUTQ Name JOB Giga 42 5th m Jer MM UN coats der cit ae Name LIBL Form type 0406 woe 9o ow os cos EORMIYBE Character value STD COPE my hie x ge x xu X duo ser er sS CORRES 01 99 Printer type PRTTYP IBM3812 IBM3816 IBM4019 Interface Yo x owl oe a yel e ee INTERE SYSTEM SYSTEM850 ASCIIR8 Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys AFC and OSC Commands The End Auto Forms Control Job Command The APF3812 ENDAFCJOB command can be used for ending a specific Auto Forms Control job The job can either be stopped immediately or controlled This command can be used in conjunction with the APF3812 STRAFCJOB command 404 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The Start Auto Forms Control Job Command The APF3812 STRAFCJOB command can be used for starting one specific Auto Forms Control job Using this command it is e g possible to schedule a CL program calling this command in order to start merging and printing at a giving time Remember in order for the job to become active it is necessary that the AUTO FORM subsystem is active Refer to page 133 The Start
8. User s Manual for InterForm400 197 3 Definition variables Change variables MAI315D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Variable Length Description RV ub Company name V2 25 Contact person SMS _ 4 Customer number V4 _50 Subject V5 EN V6 Ew V SEN V8 Ln V9 v F3 Exit F12 Cancel Up to 9 variables can be defined They are read from the contents of each spool file page The variables can be referred to in the subject e mail text the name of the attached PDF file the receiver E mail address and receiver name The variables are inserted as V1 V9 use upper case V Above only the length of the variables are defined Later on we define from where the variables should be fetched That could depend of the contents of each page 4 Default PDF file name Here you can specify a default name for the attached PDF file This name can be overridden for specific e mail text definitions Work with Default PDF file name MAI305D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Default PDF file name IFA400DEMO PDF 5 Definition E mail text Cover page text InterForm400 provides you with the possibility to include various texts in the e mail depending on who you are e mailing to To do that you simply create 2 or more e mail texts Below one E mail
9. 004 290 User s Manual for InterForm400 487 OCRB soft font 0 290 Soft font example 298 Soft fonts eee va eee ee eee a 293 Form type table 000005 170 Overlay selection entry field 170 Forms server for non AS 400 environments 426 Frame tooth Une res oho is ENDS 54 Function Keys E92 mA qunm E Ed 40 ET4 nosse LEER Dena 431 FAG sees nie uen En e EAS 42 AEI EE md otra xe ge AT EMI 43 Function keys for display of a spool file 40 G HP GL 2 File 0 0000 eee eee 71 Getting familiar with Auto Forms Control 155 Same queue for Input and Output 160 Separate queues for Input and Output 155 Getting familiar with overlay selectors 126 Getting familiar with overlays 76 Getting familiar with soft fonts and barcodes 298 Getting started 20005 21 About the print results 31 Installing InterForm400 21 Preparation 0 00055 21 Setting up the system 25 Work with overlay AFC sample 29 Global settings for overlay 37 Graphical Designer amp amp CHA Local save 474 Installation llle 462 Limitations llli 462 Port numbers used 461 Requirements ssesss 461 Settihgs 2 604 ase re eere EY E 465 Starting the Designer 463 Work with profile jobs
10. 420 Graphical view Graphical designer 470 POLI S m abe aU Ta ae d ds 42 430 PDE ivi Veios Got 42 430 Horizontal line 2 000000 55 How the manual is organized 14 HP MACROS Automatic execution 416 417 CL programs call suus 416 MACROID eseeeeeee 417 HP GL 2 file llle 71 HPMACRO CL command 416 HTML commands in e mails 199 Isim age ouest ete b rere ER 66 IBM 3812 font ID information 382 Compatible font list su 383 It D T a ise Me CAE ete An RTO 67 NAR 3 ever onal ERSTES SES 68 Image TIFF format 0 00 66 Images sn ERR m 319 JPEG for PDF output 392 rotation sc eL ee ee 67 IMPCHT CL command 402 Import Chatts 4i e Ceo tenes 402 Resources osse Rats ose e exem 343 Import PCL overlay from PC print file 325 Ink svi veERIPCbISUE eae 59 Examples on use of ink 59 Install remote sites sss 362 Installation 00000 000 21 356 First time installation 356 Graphical Designer 462 License codes 2 0 6 eee eee eee 356 PCL viewer 2 000000000 430 Performance 2 00 5 363 488 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Relations to other applications 362 Release update 2 357 System requirements 356
11. CTLO1 Font Tuenbtifier d dur utu tw sl xd 011 Point SPEO 4x ex ok dox ox oae NONE Form feed x x Bee ki Ghee Rte es Bees st AUTOCUT Press Enter to continue F3 Exit Fll Display keywords F12 Cancel Make a note of the Port Number 2 the Switch setting 3 and the Attached controller CTLO1 2 In order to make changes or delete the device description you must end the printer writer PRTXXX The following command will end the writer immediately ENDWTR WTR PRTXXX OPTI ON I MMED 3 Now you must vary off the device by the following command VRYCFG CFGOBJ PRTXXX CFGTYPE DEV STATUS OFF 4 You are now able to delete the 5219 device description by this command DLTDEVD DEVD PRTXXX 5 Continue from step 5 in the previous section but use the controller number port and address settings from the old device description User s Manual for InterForm400 367 Attaching through a TCP IP Raw Socket Port 9100 3700 Some LAN Print Servers from e g HP Lexmark Kyocera and IBM offer the possibility of attaching through a raw TCP IP socket which enables the host to communicate bidirectionally with the printer using HP PJL Support for this print method was introduced with OS 400 V3R2 and V4R1 The advantage of this method compared to standard LPD printing is that the host receives status reply from the printer 1 The following information for the device must be provided by the system administrator IP address and
12. GIF images can only be inserted in PCL output Note that if you place two images at the exact same position then only the first will be j printed If you place a color image and then a black and white image at the same position then only the color image will be printed when merging with color support and 392 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Sui overlay name sign distance top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL R8 PPL points per line g8 SC new command recognition character string R8 L2 plot name member in APF3812 GL2 sign distance to top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance to left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL hight INPEL width INPEL Prints an overlay containing the definitions listed in an overlay created in InterForm400 Changes the font type for the rest of the page Changes the line density for the remaining text lines on the page Changes the command recognition character string from amp amp Prints a HP GL 2 plot with the same rotation as the paper rotation i e which edge is regarded as the upper edge is of no importance If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relatively to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current print line If hight
13. IN indicates measurement in inches PEL indicates measurement in Pels Leading zeros must be filled in If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relative to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current line If position 28 43 is filled in the line will be repeated as many times as stated in position 41 43 Draws a line between 2 points The line is oriented to the paper rotation regardless of rotation of the contents IN indicates measurement in inches PEL indicates measurement in Pels Leading zeros must be filled in If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relatively to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current print line If position 36 51 is filled in the line will be repeated as many times as stated in position 49 51 User s Manual for InterForm400 391 Command TXT i4 NOTE 4 amp amp EXT sign distance top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL rotation font text for print amp 4MG image name sign distance to top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance to left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL resolution 600 300 150 100 075 R reverse image file
14. OD sign distance to top end point distance top end point to top paper edge INPEL sign distance to left paper edge distance to left paper edge INPEL sign bottom end point distance bottom end point to top paper edge INPEL line width PPP 0 31 sign move right move right INPEL sign move down move down INPEL number of moves 88 IN 1 Point sign distance top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL 2 Point sign distance top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL line width PPP 0 31 round sharp ends R S sign move right move right INPEL sign move down move down INPEL number of moves Draws a horizontal line The line is horizontal to the paper rotation regardless of rotation of the contents IN indicates measurement in inches PEL indicates measurement in Pels Leading zeros must be filled in If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relatively to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current line If position 28 43 is filled in the line will be repeated as many times as stated in position 41 43 Draws a vertical line The line is vertical to the paper rotation regardless of rotation of the contents
15. Transfer to production y TFRPROD YES YES NO PROMPT Display 4errorss ts Jee js oe coe crt wey DSPERR YES YES NO Restrictions This command can only run from an interactive job Parameters SAVF This is required Specifies the qualified name of the save file to be used to restore the resources The name of the save file can be qualified by one of the following library values LIBL All libraries in the job s library list are searched until the first match is found CURLIB The current library for the job is searched If no library is specified as the current library for the job the QGPL library is used Library name Specify the name of the library to be searched Optional Parameters TFRPROD Specifies whether resources are transferred to production in InterForm400 YES Copy resources to the import library APFIMPORT and then transfer all resources to production the InterForm400 system PROMPT Copy resources to the import library APFIMPORT and then prompt the user whether to transfer all resources to production the InterForm400 system NO Only import resources to the import library APFIMPORT DSPERR Specifies whether any errors are displayed when running the IMPAPFRSC command YES Display errors NO Do not display errors Examples Example 1 Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB EXPORT INV save file to the import library APFIMPORT and then transfer all resources to production the
16. 400 Display TIFF image 415 Domino 400 2 verme reed rx 460 Dots definition lees 292 Drawer selection By number 0000 376 By paper type 38 331 376 DSPBWIMG essese esee 415 DSPNETSVRXA i e eret se eta 400 Duplex WAR eese eb re e ES 39 Back Page Overlay 39 Forced front page 4 39 Margin 54 esee pe eid er Loma n 39 Pref ciere EL GNE DC Sos 40 Duplex options sees 39 E mails Sending 410 459 Distibution AFC 218 Distibution Finishing def 195 Interactively 0 000 415 Send with attachments 420 Special for PDF output 349 With HTML commands 199 Work with mail addresses 420 EAN Barcodes 000 0005 294 Edit a spooled file 00 413 Encrypt PDF files 2 480 Requirements 000 480 End AFC job 00 0c eee ee eee 404 ENDAFGJOB 7 tr eee ene dee 404 ENDNETSVR s duissseIELA tLs3 Yes ca 401 Error message Overlay inuse lslsesessne 35 EXPGLIT ast ek otter prp ma eg 401 Export Charts ois eho e 401 Resourees nnana eee 341 Export printtoPC 005 329 Extended page definition 45 FEPCOL FIEE S yesu hose nasu kocp lnu kae ve 70 A inuasit eth des eae T E PE 40 128 PIS A EE
17. By pressing F5 you will get a list of service options Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text Demo overlay for InterForm 400 Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Select one of the following options l Move the placement on the page 2 Move definitions to another sequence number 3 Copy definition into this overlay 4 Delete lines 5 Resequencing 6 Print overlay definition Option With these you can organize the overlay definitions 1 Move the placement on the page Here you can enter an interval of sequence lines and adjust them horizontal and vertical in a single action instead of changing entering each line In this function you can move the overlay up down or left right on the page Line interval to be moved 0000 0000 Distance to move to the right downwards 2 Move definitions to another sequence number If you made a lot of lines you might want to reorganize them in order to get a better overview With this option you define an interval of sequence lines to be moved to another line number In this function you can move an interval of definition lines to another sequence number Sequence number from to to be moved 0000 0000 Inserted at sequence number s A 3 Copy definitions into this overlay This option allows you to copy definitions in the same overlay or from another overlay 50 Users Manual
18. Following pages Maximum number of blank lines between 2 detail lines This indicates how many detail lines that there is room for on the first page for each document or customer after a level break The page header will be excluded from the second and following pages That should make room for more detail lines You type how many lines there are room for here As a part of reformatting there might be some new blank lines within the detail lines Here you can limit the number of the blank lines Press lt Enter gt and you will get a list of rule lines describing how the detail lines should be handled and build up Type a new sequence number and press the lt Field Exit gt key to create a new line Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Reformating detail lines Rule 02 All non empty detail lines 01 All non empty detail lines Rule Description 1 0 If position S l 378 length a 1 30 compare type MES gt lt NAU compare value occurrence s ALL FIRST LAST Number of lines to handle 1 99 VAR Action a REFORMAT DELETE Line ID code Call user exit program NO YES F3 Exit Fll Delete F12 Cancel Here you first enter a condition to select only this specific type of detail line This condition will only be considered for the lines after the header 224 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Position The starting position of the text c
19. Line type For charts with the type LINE this decides the type of line representing this observation set The various types can be seen above under Define layout of the Y1 and Y2 axis The types used for grid lines are the same as these types Line width Define the width of the line representing this observation set Color Color used for the line representing this observation set Pattern Define the pattern inside the bars representing this observation set Pattern Description 0 100 white 1 2 shading 2 10 shading 3 20 shading 4 35 shading 5 55 shading 6 80 shading 7 99 shading 8 100 shading Pattern color Color filling for the bars Point marker For charts with type LINE this decides the form of the points representing this observation set 444 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Marker Description Blank No point C Point 0 filled C1 Point 2 filled C2 Point 10 filled C3 Point 20 filled C4 Point 35 filled C5 Point 55 filled C6 Point 80 filled C7 Point 99 filled C8 Point 100 filled When you press Enter you will return to Work with Observation sets Now it is possible to appoint values to this observation set Select option 12 Work with sample observations and this will be displayed Work with Sample observations CHS200D Chart mom amp o m ims m er S vr SAMPLELINE VDC 2 25 qe de voies RISE TT LINE Observation set S1 Demo Enter va
20. OVERLAY The overlay that has been merged with FILESET File set of the merged overlay You can print out the text Page X out of Y where X is PAGENBR and ENDPAGE is Y Place the text Page outof using option 5 Text and then place the two 58 Users Manual for InterForm4009 7 INK fill pattern for succeeding sequence lines Seqnbr Type 150 7 Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern 8 blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading F3 Exit F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view Normally the system overwrites whatever might be the original contents while leaving the background unaltered With this overlay element the Ink can be changed enabling printing white on black background a pattern transparently on another pattern etc The possibilities are numerous Pattern For the pattern the following are valid 0 100 white shading erases background 1 2 shading 2 10 shading 3 20 shading 4 35 shading 5 55 shading 6 80 shading 7 99 shading 8 100 shading A 1 shading 600 DPI B 3 shading 600 DPI C 696 shading 600 DPI D 8 shading 600 DPI E 24 sharding 600 DPI Horizontal lines Vertical lines Diagonal lines to the right Diagonal lines to the left Horizontal and vertical lines X Crossing diagonal lines Examples on use of Ink We have first made four large frames with fill pattern diagonal stripes W refer t
21. Other options are Create directory Specify if you want InterForm400 to create the necessary directories or not Replace file method Use Y if you want to replace existing PDF files if found N will result in an error message if the file exists and G Gen will append a number to the filename if it already exists Note that this number will be appended after e g pdf as the very last of the file name 5 Page selections and Document breaks This works much like 5 Definition recipient ID for the E mail fax finishing definition Refer to page 199 for more information Normally it is sufficient with just one sequence line without any Page selection criteria You should however create one sequence line for each different layout if the variables and or keys moves depending on the layout of the SCS spooled file If you use more than one sequence line you should use the Page selection criteria User s Manual for InterForm4006 209 As the document break definitions you need to state a place on the spooled file that will trigger a break i e whenever this information changes a new PDF file will be created This will normally be the positions of the key s but it does not necessarily need to be so After creating a sequence line you must remember to use option 8 Keys and variables to state where the variables and keys are placed for this selection of pages ie WARNING DO remember to specify the position of all the keys
22. Work with Auto Forms Control output queues AFC300D Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Start AFC job 9 End AFC job Opt Outq Library Description 2 AFC INPUT1 APF3812 Job for sample printout End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Note that it is not necessary to end the AFC job in order to make changes to an AFC definition Changes will take effect immediately 156 Users Manual for InterForm400 Update Auto Forms Control Definition AFC302D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 HiDrary ost xe Nee APF3812 Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Description Job for sample printout Autostart Ob x cu Y N Code page u e oe se eom a SOY SGVAL Number SYSVAL F4 List Default output output queue and printer type Output queue AFC OUT1 BUB Tad yn qe iat to a EA m IM 4 APF3812 InterForm 400 printer type HPIII lncsPPaQge 1 3 50r tK tg ASCII850 Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Output queue Library F3 Exit F4 Prompt F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel We do not make changes to these settings but press Enter once more Step 4 Defining move of print jobs with type STD On the next screen we notice that we have two definitions already Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queues ros AFC_INPUT1 TaD Ray Oe a ee he See APF3812
23. A very strong feature of InterForm400 is the ability to handle spool entries with randomly positioned text lines so each line gets an individual formatting The general description on using sub overlays are described on page 67 zIf then The following is an example of a print job consisting of a random number of Item groups each containing a random number of Item lines The Item groups will furthermore appear in random line positions and there will be a footer appearing in a random line position Page 1 NERA ee vd eet bare aree et E RR edd te a eret b SEED Mahle Esse E NOME ct 1 2 Testing remap of item lines with random line positions 3 4 5 ITEM Fish 6 Shark 7 Flounder 8 Herring 9 Salmon 10 dr 12 ITEM Pets T3 Cat 14 Dog 15 Chinchilla 16 Parrot 17 Hamster 18 ITEM Riding animals T9 Horse 20 Camel 21 Elephant 22 23 This should be a fixed footer Page 2 S MEET PROTON S aces ET REDE Pathan attest DM 7 MEME MOOD DS PDC CT Osa Aner 1 2 Testing remap og item lines with random line positions 3 4 5 6 ITEM Cars 7 Rover 8 Porsche 9 Volvo 10 Mercedes 11 Opel 12 Audi 13 14 ITEM Aeroplanes 15 Ellehammer 16 Boing 17 MIG 18 19 This should be a fixed footer Line numbers are not part of the spool entry We want to format this print job as follows 1 The text ITEM should be placed as a header of each item group with a 16 point font 2 The Item group na
24. Description Autostart job venen je Y N Codes pages Xe Number SYSVAL F4 List Default output output queue and printer type Output queue hibrav w d ee es ee a a eo InterForm 400 printer type Interface 4 oe Bee Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Output queue Library F3 Exit FA4 Prompt F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel After entering the output queue you can press F10 to insert or change additional parameters 136 Users Manual for InterForm400 Additional parameters Type additional info and press Enter Press F12 to exit F12 Cancel Job name AUTO FORM job OUTQ OUTO Name Job description DEFAULT DEFAULT Name IDEE S ha ie eX x xul x Library list option JOBD CURRENT JOBD SYSVAL NONE Separator drawer NONE NONE 1 9 20 39 Output Queue Library Description Job name Auto Start Code page Name of output queue AFC should be monitoring for incoming spool files INPUT QUEUE The output queue you intend to use for AFC functions should not have a printer device attached The reason for this is that the AFC sub system only works on spool entries that gets the status RDY in the queue If the queue also had a printer device attached you could risk that the jobs would be printed before the AFC system managed to complete its automatic functions See Getting Familiar with AFC Example 2 for an alternativ
25. END F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys In the upper right corner we see that the first print line starts in line 3 DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 15 Function 1 Columns 1 78 Search for Alt uberedd2cadelecfeacleduecdevcaduQqed cg ae cP IS set oS e Exe es Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code F45 44A2971 1 81 20 01 3A 320 44A9032 3 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver to call our technical support hotline on 45 72 26 04 00 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on you are welcome END F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys Blank lines will not be displayed in a spool file Therefore we must type 1 in the function field and press Enter until the subject header line Re Your new Is located just below the ruler If you pressed Enter one to many just correct 1 to 1 and press Enter to move in the opposite direction In the upper right corner we now see that the line number for the subject header is 15 The ruler shows us that the text starts in
26. Note 1 Required for new X axis points Description Adds or changes the layout of an X axis point Delete X axis point DLXP 01 a Ts X axis point ID Description Deletes an X axis point 454 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Observation set commands Add change observation set layout OSLO 01 5S 00000000 ow LY w mmum al afoso o o a a osans m m an nieo OO O a efs 77000 a ofen 7 Cor rm S a ofw OS s they or oe tewannpons SSS wo m memewez Notes 1 LINE charts only 2 BAR charts only Description Adds or changes the layout of an observation set Delete observation set DLOS 01 os Observation set ID ALL Description Deletes an observation set User s Manual for InterForm400 455 Observation set commands continued Clear observation set data CLOS 01 s se of as ctos Observation set ID ALL Description Clears a single or all observation sets 456 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Data commands Add change data by ID OSDA 01 el z w LL mE 18 Chart name 25 Observation set ID m evaesmemgmn e efas w ri omenainos SSCS m wvaesmem mn o w se waespema m afose Description Adds or changes data in an observation set by observation ID User s Manual for InterForm400 457 Print chart commands Print sample chart PRSM 01 Description Prints a sample cha
27. The command gives you the possibility of down loading an overlay in the printer where it is stored as a macro which can either be printed automatically on every succeeding page or activated on macro calls in your print data This command is very useful if you want to create an overlay that should be activated on all pages printed from the printer and when printing word processing documents containing advanced features such as Justification super sub script fonts etc The macro can then be activated from a word processing document e g Office DisplayWrite 400 by inserting a command in the header or the footer text in the document e g on an Intermate interface you could enter the text 1B amp f999y3X in a header text to add the overlay defined as MACRO ID 999 to the printout You can also have the macro called as a sub overlay from an overlay definition This is done by the zif then command see page 67 The overlay name entered in the If then sentence should be MACROXXXXX where the XXXXX denotes the HP Macro ID entered 416 Users Manual for InterForm4009 into the HPMACRO command Overlay name Printer type Interface Macro id 0 32767 Output queue Library Form type F3 Exit F24 More keys Type choices press Enter InterForm 400 file set Automatic on every page Place into Flash Memory F4 Prompt Download overlay as a HP macro HPMACRO ne m ts dite KARTSET Character value Cate su ust uiros
28. This product can be order from IBM for free You must have installed this on your iSeries Product 5722JV1 Option 6 Java Development Kit JDK 1 4 If you are running OS400 V5R2 you need this PTF SI10101 for product 5722SS1 In order to be able to open encrypted or digitally signed PDF files you need to run Acrobat Reader version 5 or newer on the PC PDF files that are digitally signed cannot be created in the folder system within QDLS NOTE After including a signature in a PDF file the current job cannot create any PDF files within QDLS 480 Users Manual for InterForm4009 i WARNING When you recover a system that includes Cryptographic Access Provider 5769AC1 1 5769AC2 or 5769AC3 the Cryptograhic Access Provider product fails when you use iit You must reinstall Cryptographic Access Provider after completing the recovery i process in order to use it EPEE PEE E A E EERE EE A EISSRISPNIRINCS RIRINN EDR A EE EE A E ERR BASEEERESREDRIN EROS UEDSSERSURIREEIEUNUNESRSRETRCEIUSHNA id NOTE if you try to generate PDF files in QDLS with signatures or if you try to generate PDF file Hn QDLS after using signatures in the current job you will receive the error message iCPE3524 Function not allowed Function is not allowed in a job that is running with i multiple threads Technical details The PDF Encryption used is Standard PDF Encryption 1 4 Version 2 Revision 3 128 bit RC4 encryption
29. gt Greater than a number entered in the following field Equal to a number or a text string case sensitive ora number entered in the following field lt Less than a number entered in the following field N Not equal to a number or a text string case sensitive or a number entered in the following field A Acceptable characters All the characters in marked interval must be one of the characters in the following field U Unacceptable characters None of the characters in the marked interval must be one of the characters in the following field See page 66 for a tip on use of gt and lt Stating B will remove the text string or the number which has been used for the condition from the resulting print out With the Tabulator the function is relevant for displaying the spool entry in order to determine lines and columns for the tabulator F18 prompts the command DSPSPLF with the job information used for merge in option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay page 117 Pressing F18 will only work if this merge has been done prior to entering this menu ie WARNING If two or more overlapping tabulators are defined the first defined will take the text it i needs and leave blank positions in the relevant m for the next tabulator A maximum You can use a tabulator left or unadjusted to delete areas of text Just tabulate the area over the edge of the paper e g 14 This will not produce unnecessary code i
30. 431 to display the NetServer Name and Domain of the AS 400 The Netserver name is the name that you should use for your AS 400 when configuring Client Access Express i4 WARNING amp The NetServer Name should not be the same as the AS 400 System name The system name can be displayed with the command DSPNETA If the names are identical you 3 Start the NetServer with the command APF3812 STRNETSVR 4 The person that should be able to view must have full authorisation over the folder system qdls apf3812 view You can grant these rights with the command CHGDLOAUT DLO VIEW FLR APF3812 USRAUT PUBLI C CHANGE i4 NOTE i When viewing graphically PCL or PDF a file will be created in the APF3812 VIEW folder that others can access view To avoid that you can specify that the PUBLIC authority of these temporary files should be EXCLUDE Refer to page 27 for more information 5 The user must be added to the system directory You can add a user to the system directory with the following command ADDDIRE USRID KURT SYSTEM USRD Jensen Kurt USER KURT 6 Create a new AS 400 connection in Client Access stating the new AS 400 server name 7 Start up a new session and change the new network name to Qxxxxxxxx under option 2 Setup default output queue and printer type in 80 Administration Menu 8 If you are running Client Access Express you should also make sure to start the Netserver on the AS 400
31. An optional set of values used if the remapping should be executed on a certain condition Position Only activate the Remap Window If the character string read by the Remap Window matches this character string according to the following condition Is gt lt N Only run tabulator if this following field contains a text string or a number which match one of the following valid operators gt Greater than a number entered in the following field Equal to a number or a text string case sensitive or a number entered in the following field lt Less than a number entered in the following field N Not equal to a number or a text string case sensitive or a number entered in the following field A Acceptable characters All the characters in marked interval must be one of the characters in the following User s Manual for InterForm400 65 field U Unacceptable characters None of the characters in the marked interval must be one of the characters in the following field See page 66 for a tip on use of gt and lt Blank After Stating B will remove the text string or the number which has been used for the condition from the resulting print out If you specify B for Blank original above the text removed cannot be used for any i conditions If Then If you want to combine the two then do not blank the original in the Min Instead insert an additional line tabulating typez8 the unwanted text
32. It is the customers responsibility to correct existing definitions Function 5 Move Spooled File in Auto Forms Control is NOT supported in the light version The CL Command APF3812 does not work in the light version A light code must be entered with Type L Following example enters code 16345126 as a light code APF3812 APFSECUR CODE 163451A6 TYPE L 388 Users Manual for InterForm4009 13 No PDF and e mail support Conditions for new features will be added as they are being implemented User s Manual for InterForm4006 389 Appendix H Commands in Spooled Files The system contains a command interpreter This means you have a possibility of inserting command lines as a part of the print out When InterForm400 identifies a command line the system will execute the command instead of just printing it A command line is a line where the first two positions contain a command specification The command recognition characters amp amp are normally used A special command can change these characters into something else The requirement for the commands in the spool file to take effect is that the spool file is merged with an InterForm400 overlay e g in Auto Forms Control The overlay used for the merge do not need to contain any format definitions i e the line spacing font selection rotation etc can be set to INPUT INPEL is an abbreviation of Inches and Pels and must be written with preceding zeros e g 03120
33. Move Righ t Move Down Extra times regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Thickness of a the line in pels 1 240 Zero means no border Inch pels of the right movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for left edge Inch pels of the vertical movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for Top edge Extra copies of the line excluding the original Extra copies will be displaced relative to each other according to the settings of Move right and Move Down A limitation of this line definition is that it is ignored when using a HPII type PCL4 of printer definition in InterForm used on back page overlays on HPII and HPIII type printers If you are making horizontal and vertical lines it is recommended that you use definition 2 and 3 and only use this definition for making diagonal lines 5 TEXT This can be used to insert text constants with varying fonts in the overlay Seqnbr Type Inch pel 26 0 5 Text constant From top edge From left Rotation t Font F4 List Text F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr From Top Inches pels absolute to the top edge of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left Inches pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Rotation The available values for rotation are 000 030 090 120 180 210 270 300 degree Values
34. Page Number Remap Pattern Red Text This is fixed red text Pattern Black Image Remap H Conditional TEST5 Conditional FIRST ONE Bottom Press this icon to move the marked element upwards in the list In the screen above it would move Pattern Black above the Text command Press this icon to move the marked element downwards in the list Deletes the marked design element You can also just mark an element and press the Delete key Design elements can also be moved by simply dragging with left mouse key the element to the new position You can also use the normal clipboard option cut copy paste to change the elements as well as undo and redo the last changes All elements are placed between Top and Bottom Activate the position between Top and Bottom where you want to insert the element The new element will be placed after this position After activating an element you need to place it on the result view on the right Here are the elements you can insert Insert a Text line Refer to page 57 for more information Rotate text 30 degrees will rotate the text additional 30 degrees if activated and open up the possibility to outline the text Print Info Refer to page 58 for more details Inserts an imported TIF BMP image in the design This image must have previously have been imported in InterForm400 472 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Line Insert
35. Personal Certificate MY CERT If you state in the E mail finishing definition that the sender of the E mail should be the owner of the spooled file or if the digital certificate should be either OWNER or SENDER then this information is used First InterForm400 will search for a match for both the user profile and organisation If not found InterForm400 will take the information where there is a match for the user profile only If the is not match found here either a match with the organisation is looked for User s Manual for InterForm400 205 The File Naming Finishing Definition By creating a finishing definition of type 06 PDF File naming you can create PDF files in InterForm400 using advanced functions without any programming You can use information from the spooled file to break up the spooled file as it is merged into PDF files and let information from the spooled file be a part of the PDF file name and or the path where it is placed The functionality is simular to the E mail fax finishing definition but more advanced You can e g define and use up to 34 variables and 3 keys for the path and PDF file names and use exit programs for the variables if necessary id NOTE 4 In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classic When you create a new PDF file naming finishing definition you will see this screen Work with PDF Filenaming PNM300D Definition name DEMO M
36. Primary secondary PRI SEC Overlay for contents Overlay name File set or selector Primary secondary PRI SEC F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Overlay or Overlay Selector for envelope will only appear if we have selected 2 Printed envelope This overlay could contain logo sender address and a franking mark The definition for placing the Recipient name and address on the printed envelope should also be defined in the envelope overlay The envelope overlay MUST be in the same file set as the overlay for the contents Overlay or Overlay Selector for contents should be filled in as per the requirement Note if Copy Management is defined in the overlay for the contents this will also be handled by InterForm400 The overlay for the contents MUST be in the same file set as the overlay for the Envelope IMPORTANT When defining a 1 Merge with overlay in the Sub system AutoForms Control following a Finishing definition the overlay name that should be referred to is the overlay for the Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions in the Auto Forms Control menu Press F6 to create a new Finishing definition and select 01 to make it valid for the MailPrinter Update Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name PFEDEF1 Description Finishing Definition for PFE MailPrinter Type of Finishing 04 PFE Mail Printer Envelope type 2 Printed envelo
37. Report name may be up to 10 characters long Position 1 must be a letter A Z No blanks or special characters are allowed in the name only underscore is permitted Select an existing composition or type in a name of the composition you want to create and press Enter If you want to copy a report composition from another report you can type in a name of the new report composition you want to copy to and press Enter Press F9 to enter a report composition to copy from and press Enter If the report composition is not know or if placed in another file set press F9 to get a list of file sets Select the file set containing the report composition you want to copy from Select the report composition you want to copy from and press Enter 258 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Report Description Monthly Report F3 Exit F9 Copy from another report F12 Cancel Work with report composition APF310D name MONTH REP Description A descriptive text for the report you wish to make This text is used solely in connection with the displaying of a list of reports in this file set Designing a Report Composition Work with report composition APF310D Report name MONTH_REP Description Monthly Report Segnbr Type Overlay Overlay description Seqnbr Type 140 ga 1 Empty overlay 2 Overlay with index 3 Overlay spool entry F3 Exit Empty overlay The reference to the overlay where all text is defined as
38. Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 d DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0002 6 Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function F3 Exit F5 Service F13 Fold Unfold The first line defines the merge and printing of the demo spool entry used in the Getting Started section The second line defines that the demo spool entry should be Held after processing That means the demo spool entry will remain in the queue after it has been used to create a new spool entry with overlay which is sent to the printer We now add an AFC function as the first line We type 0 1 and press Field Exit Here we select function 5 move spooled file We press Enter and we define the criteria STD which means this AFC function should only be processed for spool entries having formtype STD User s Manual for InterForm400 157 Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Wiprary Sox eco APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0002 6 Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function 0 1 5 Move Spooled File New output queue AFC OUT1 DEFAULT USER LIZD Sa y mr ke aea A u ae e APF3812 Hold output spooled file NO NO YES Save output spooled file NO NO YES F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel We want to send all spool entries with formt
39. This can be done with the command STRHOSTSVR SERVER ALL You should also make sure to use the AS 400 system name on the PC and in InterForm400 that you can find using the Explorer and opening the Other Computers folder 9 Boot your PC and connect to the new server name Qsxxxxxxx via the Operations navigator 10 If you are running Window95 98 is it necessary to have to same User ID and password on the PC as on the AS 400 You can choose to map a Network drive to QDLS from Explorer on your PC Choose Tools and Map Network drive and lt Netserver name QDLS as the folder This When configuring Netserver and share these commands could be very helpful All are placed in library APF3812 NetServer commands DSPNETSVRA Display NetServer Attributes CHGNETSVRA Change NetServer Attributes STRNETSVR Start NetServer ENDNETSVR End NetServer 432 Users Manual for InterForm4009 NetServer share commands ADDFILSHR Add NetServer File Share ADDPRTSHR Add NetServer Printer Share RMVNETSHR Remove NetServer Share Troubleshooting problems using SwiftView If you receive an error when starting up SwiftView using e g F14 you might get some help here When using the full Client Access the AS400 system name used on the PC can be found by choosing Start Programs IBM AS400 Client Access AS400 Connections Additional information for Client Access Express can be found below Problem When pressing F14 from th
40. This is useful for revealing reprinted lines bolding which is not displayed with F18 DSPSPLF Remember to subtract the first 4 positions containing SKIP SPACE information when calculating coloumn positions in the DSPPFM view Considerations for Zebra overlays i4 NOTE Creation of ZPL output in InterForm400 requires purchase of the ZPL module or the For overlays intended to be used for label printers the Design Overlay screen will look like this Design ZEBRA overlay ZEB300D Overlay name TEST Overlay text Label length 000 Label width Aunt Temperature xs 300 30 Print speed 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 inches second Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Font 0012 INPUT fontnumber F4 List Copy management ng Y N F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set print parameters The especially Zebra related parameters are Label length width The length and width of the labels to print on Temperature The temperature to use for the printing head This number is a relative value 30 to 30 for the temperature to use for the print head of the Zebra printer This value will be added to the Darkness value specified on the printers display That is if Darkness is 10 and temperature is 5 the actual Darkness value for merges with this overlay will be 15 If the sum of temperature and Darkness is outside the range 0 30 the nearest value is used Pri
41. Windows At the Windows desktop select My Computer and select Printers If the printer is not defined select Add Printer and follow the wizard instructions 2 From the Client Access folder select Accessories and then select Start Configure Session At the Configure PC5250 screen select an AS 400 system and enter a printer User s Manual for InterForm400 369 name in the Workstation ID field This definition is the same as for a 5250 SNA printer emulation sessions and is saved in the 5250 section of the user s workstation profile as are SNA connections Under Type of emulation click the Printer option and then click the Setup button 3 At the PC5250 Printer Emulation Setup screen specify the message queue and library where print messages should be sent The default is QSYSOPR Select Transform Print Data and Printer model HP Laserjet III 4 A host session is started The Session panel is displayed with an overlying printer status panel whose title bar contains the AS 400 system name and the printer ID If you didn t specify an ID at the Configure PC5250 panel the AS 400 automatically creates a printer device if the AS 400 s system value QAUTOVRT is not set to 0 and its name is displayed Select Printer Setup from the Session panel s File menu 5 At the Printer Setup screen check that the correct PC attached printer is highlighted as the default printer You can ignore the Setup button It takes you to a panel that lets you defi
42. aby X xA Xu E EuERHZL F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel We define that all spool entries with form type DEMO should be deleted but only if the spool file attribute SAVE NO If SAVE YES there might be a good reason for it which means we should leave them alone We press Enter to save We have not considered what to do with spool files with other form types than STD or DEMO They will therefore just stay in the queue with status RDY Now one might wonder if the spool files with form type STD also remains in the queue but they are automatically deleted when the writer has printed them User s Manual for InterForm400 165 Step 7 Activating the AFC job AFC INPUT1 We now press F3 to exit our AFC definition and we select option 8 to start the AFC job Work with Auto Forms Control output queues AFC300D SEALE WEGA ar leer te Kae ae Se Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Start AFC job 9 End AFC job Opt Outq Library Description AFC INPUT1 APF3812 Job for sample printout 8 AFC INPUT2 APF3812 DEMO queue for both Input and Output End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Step 8 Testing the new AFC definition AFC_INPUT2 We can now try to release a demo spool entry using option 1 Create Demo Spool Entry under 12 Service Functions in the Administration menu If you made the changes to AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 according to Example 1 the demo spool entry will automaticall
43. correspond to which physical drawer Therefore please consult your printers technical Stapling This option defines if the copies should be stapled This option can only be used on the printers stated below Remember to use printer type HP4 PJL or HPAD PJL when merging Primary printout Secondary printout Copy 1 2 Do you want stapling Y F3 Exit F13 Set print parameters Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name TEST Overlay text Number of copies of each page Select paper from the follo Stapling primary printout Select printer type for stapling printer type 1 HP5Si Mopier 2 Lexmark Optra N 3 IBM NP24 IP32 40 4 Kyocera 7000 9000 5 Xerox N24 N32 N40 6 Xerox DC 240 255 265 7 Oc 3165 Notice Stapeling requieres use of printertype HP4_PJL or HP4D_PJL F3 Exit F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 47 Measuring Methods All coordinates entered in InterForm400 must be dissolved into inches and pels Digits before the decimal point specify inches and the digits after the decimal point specify pels and must not exceed 239 An inch is dissolved into 240 pels Examples of values 1 1 000 1 000 1 1 240 2 1 120 1 1 6 1 240 6 1 040 1 5 6 1 240 6x5 1 200 1 85 1 240x0 85 1 204 You will notice that it would be most convenient to use a ruler indicating lines per inch When multiplying and subtracting values it might seem a little more complic
44. customer number department or name These are the identifiers that are looked for in the spool file You can decide to call a mail exit program The finishing definition name all keys and variables are transferred to the program that can return e g what e mail address to send to Sources for mail exit programs can be seen in member MAILEXIT MAILEXITO2 and MAILEXITO3 in source file APISRC in library APF3812 MAILEXIT MAILEXITO2 MAILEXITO3 This is the first demo source that was made Use format 01 when calling this This program is mainly included backwards compatibility This is called with parameter format 02 With this you can return the type of text for the contents of the e mail Refer to the description of Text and format on page 199 for more details Called with parameter format 03 Includes the functions of MAILEXITO2 and includes also the possibility to return an additional receiver of the e mail CC i4 WARNING All exit programs called by InterForm400 must be owned by QSECOFR If it is not the AFC job will halt with an error message Change the owner with the command i In this example we intend to use the 4 digit customer number as the only key If the spooled file includes the E mail address in every page the keys are not necessary just select 3 Find in spooled file in option 1 How to find E mail address Fax number and specify the position in option 6 Definition recipient ID
45. page 46 By pressing enter we get the screen for definition of Copy Management Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo overlay Number of copies of each page Primary Set 4 wo 2 VAR 1 9 Secondary set I VAR 1 9 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here we fill in 2 copies for the Primary Set which means we would like two pages generated from each page in the source spool entry Note that the number of copies entered here include the original refer to page 46 For detailed info on Primary Set We will not use the Secondary set so we just enter 1 refer to page 46 We now press Enter to fill in the drawers 98 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Copy Primary Secondary 1 T d Valid drawers 2 4 1 255 valid paper types F4 List Do you want stapling Y N N F3 Exit F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM We define that the originals copy one should be taken from drawer 1 and copies from drawer 2 Note that we are inserting the PCL value 4 as the second drawer Refer to page 376 for more information on how to select drawers We can later in the design window specify for each forms element boxes lines images etc if it should be used for the original the copy or both see Copy Management page 53 We will not use the secondary set in this exercise so we just fill in 1 in the remaining field We will not use stapling in this exerc
46. sent to the printer where the paper type is translated into a drawer number depending on the setup of the printer It is possible to move a merged spooled file intended for a printer with one drawer setup to another printer with a totally different drawer setup The requirements for selecting drawer on the printer using the paper type The printer needs to support the possibility to select the drawer by the paper type instead of the drawer number You need to manually make sure that all of your printers have the same paper type setup so that the correct drawers are selected e g drawers with PREPRINTED paper type should always contain preprinted paper with the company logo These are the standard paper types known by printers PLAIN 376 Users Manual for InterForm4009 PREPRINTD LTRHEAD TRNSPRNCY PREPUNCHD LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK Note that these names may be translated into your native language on your printers but InterForm400 will still select the same correct paper type Refer to page 38 for a description of how to put this into production Refer to page 331 for information of how to select drawers on printers not supporting paper type User s Manual for InterForm400 377 Appendix D Interfaces Protocol Converters Note that it is recommended always to use ASCII850 as the interface in InterForm400 as this will work in the majority of setups printers ClientAccess PC support Pa
47. the size of the barcode in the horizontal or vertical direction in this manner to a maximum value UCC EAN Like EAN128 it requires that the data to be converted into the barcode fits with this standard For general descriptions of barcodes see page 293 User s Manual for InterForm400 311 Using soft fonts for printing on Zebra When you create fonts in the range 5000 9999 this screen is shown Create ZEBRA font ZEB370D POMEN AO Dd Or duo eror ar 5655 Other fonts DESCTIPETON 3 39 u 4 5 5 3 5 Arial 12 HeuxghE x5 ph ae R RR ZI S 12 00 1 00 792 00 Relative width 1 00 0 20 5 00 Special EBCDIC codepage Soft font member name per symbolset Western due tee tele Se ce ARIAL Central European ES Baltee ew a 4 uxo x wx TURKISH iy Sed weise ous Ree ees d ue ad Oa can Greek Hebrew w wlkbuecgy cies R Spec adu i Seip Sh enm F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Height The height of the font Relative width The relative width of the font i e 1 equals the standard width and 2 equals a font twice as wide as the standard font Special EDCDIC codepage The EBCDIC codepage to use when printing using this font if the default codepage is not to be used In this manner you can print text in several different codepages on one label Soft font member Specify previously installed soft fonts for each symbolset that you want to use i4 NOTE If you install and use a fixed soft
48. to copy overlays from an installed InterForm400 on another AS 400 using DDM Distributed Data Management When applying Yes to this option the function key F10 will be available from the design menu when copying from another overlay see page 36 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 5 1 The Name that is used for this AS 400 under Other computers on PC s Networkname QS4449079 Sharename Public authorisation to files that are created in the APF3812 VIEW folder 1 0 1 EXCLUDE ALL F3 Exit F12 Cancel This screen is used to define the network name of the AS 400 when accessed by TCP IP connected Windows PCs This name is usually the AS 400 system name e g QS4449079 but can be changed when configuring the Client Access TCP IP connection You can verify this name in the Client Access Connections on the PC Note that all users using the InterForm400 PCL viewer function must have the same system name configured in their Client Access TCP IP connection This feature is used for the PCL and PDF viewer Refer to page 26 for more information of the parameters above 270 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 6 1 Select primary language for 1 The language of displays 2 The language of the manual Language code GB DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English F3 Exit F12 Cancel This menu sets the primary language for th
49. width Defines the maximum length of the justified text line Inch pels Right margin adjustment Defines when a text line should not be justified This is based on the percentage of text characters versus blank spaces left on the last line of a remapped paragraph 0 100 Escape sequences Used when working with spool files having escape sequences integrated See Appendix H page 390 Opens up for Extended Adjustment for definition of Underline of text in the Remap Window and or a line of periods known as punctuation or dot leaders made after the text following options appear when is entered Adjustement The adjustment of the underlined or punctuation lines Values U L C R or N according to the above Underline Underlining of text in the Remap Window spaces are not underlined Punctuation Length If the last position of the text line in the Remap Window defined by the second Input Position field is a period sign a line of punctuation will be printed The punctuation will start after the last printable character and end at the position inches pels stated in this field counting from the position stated in From Left Only Adjustment values U and L can be used No punctuation will be made if other values are used if no period sign is found or if the text exceeds the punctuation length Font The new font of the formatted text Blank original B specifies that the original text should be removed Condition
50. 000 C In this function you can copy lines into this overlay definition Overlay to be copied from blank this overlay Sequence numbers from to to be copied 0011_ 0015 Inserted at sequence number 16 F4 overview overlays F24 shift to look at FROM overlay We define the copies of line 11 to 15 to be inserted from sequence line 16 and onwards By using F18 we find the item lines to range from line 30 and onwards We estimate the last possible item line to be in the line just before the lower part of the body text i e line 42 We enter each sequence line from 16 to 20 and correct the line interval to 30 42 but leave all other values untouched Seqnbr Type 16 0 9 Remap window Input line 30 42 Position 8 14 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge 000002 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment C ULRCN IB E Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original _ B blank original version Condition Position ees Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel 90 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Seqnbr Type IT 9 Remap window Input line Position 15 25 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment ULRCNBE Rotation Font F4 List Blank original blank original version Condition Position
51. 132 characters However you can extend the 132 as the maximum width to 198 if you override the QPRINT printer file before calling this command OVRPRTF FILE QPRINT PAGESIZE 255 198 OVRFLW 255 ie WARNING 6 The OVRPHTF will override the qprint printer file for the current job Subsequent use of i this printer file in the same job may be influenced by this override To avoid any problems The APF Work Output Queue Command The command APF3812 APFWRKOUTOQ looks and acts like the WRKOUTQ command except that this command opens up a Swiftview window on the PC if a spool file containing PCL codes is displayed with option 5 Two other things differs from the standard OS 400 WRKOUTQ If you have used a PJL printer type in InterForm400 when you did the merge you can actually change PAGERANGE on the merged PCL spooled file if you change this attribute through option 2 on this command In this manner you can print only a part of the merged spooled file Note however that the full spooled file will be downloaded to the printer even though only a part will be printed This requires that the printer is PJL compatible If you select option 1 Send for a spooled file you will get this screen 414 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Output Queue APFOUTOD Queue AFC INPUT2 Library APF381 A04 Status RLS Type options press Enter GH SSeS SSS SS sas SSS SSS SS SS SSS SSeS SSS Sea SSeS ase 7 Messages Send spooled file Select one of
52. 138 Auto Forms Control definitions 136 Entering queue and job names 136 Auto Forms Control sub system 132 Bar COd6S mieie Sak tioned See pE 292 Assigning ID 0005 295 Calculating height 292 Code 128 EAN128 293 Gode39 sciunt Ir EE AA 293 Create soft fonts for barcode 293 Create Softfont 00 293 Downloading sses 296 EAN8 EAN13 UPC A 294 For Zebra printers 00 310 Interleaved 2015 24 294 PBF417 z oe es eee ae i Ss 294 PostNet isses rr pes 294 Bl efax i ocu nes AU REA s 67 Bookmarks in PDF Define bookmarks 238 Getting familiar with 241 Use infin def 0 020 204 Use in PDF file naming 211 Via command in SCS splf 396 Cassette Selection 00 376 Gentered text e coraa peadas aira 61 64 Certificates Import 4 22 t e a e a 481 Type supported 481 Change a spooled file 413 Change Netserver Attributes 400 Chart onere eR LET LA EET 435 amp amp CHA commands 446 Bar charts sei ie nh 435 Line charts sioner eer eae S tare 435 Work with charts 436 Cheque printing 000 eee 290 CHGNETSVRA 00000 e eens 400 CLcommands 0 0 eee ee ee 400 APF3812 AFPTOASOII
53. 180 and 270 can be used with HPGL 2 compatible printers only PCL5 or PCL5e Values 030 120 210 and 300 requires a HPGL 2 compatible printer Font The font ID of the formatted text Text Text field User s Manual for InterForm400 57 6 Print info Print information Seqnbr Type Inch pel 1 0 6 Print info From top edge From left Rotation Font ME F4 List Info type F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel From Top Inches pels absolute to the top edge of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left Inches pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Rotation The available values for rotation are 000 090 180 270 degree Values 180 and 270 can be used with HPGL 2 compatible printers only PCL5 or PCL5e Font The font ID used for printing out the information required below Info type Type of information to be printed can be prompted with F4 Here you can specify to either print out page numbers or information about the job that created the spool file Value Prints out PAGNBR Page number of the actual page ENDPAGE Total number of pages MUPPAGNBR The actual page number when using Multi Up JOBNAME The job name USER Userprofile used for the job JOBNBR Job number of the job JOB All information above about the job PGM The program that created the spool file PGMLIB Library of the program that created the spool file
54. 254 Specify Grouping and separator page 0c eee eee 255 Define resulting output QUeUES 1 ees 255 Specify automatic start scheduling 00 cee eee eae 256 Specify automatic start options 0 2 0 0 eae 256 Specify output queue for processed spooled files 257 Specily jOD priory ses cius etes taka wend SEG te hea ea YEAR id 257 1 Compose Joint Report 00 ee 258 Designing a Report Composition 0 0 0 eens 259 1 Empty Overlay front page 0 0 eee eee 260 2 Overlay with index 0 2 0 0 ee 260 3 Overlay Spool entry 0 0 eee 261 2 Test Print Report Overlays 0 000 262 3 Test Print Report 1 Page per Overlay 000 cca 262 4 Print Report eeu oc ad ee Dine ee ee eet Dak ee eee 262 Administering InterForm400 Environment and Users 266 1 Appoint Administrator 000 00 267 2 Configure InterForm 400 00 c eee eee 268 4 Work with InterForm400 Users 000 eee e eee eens 272 8 Users Manual for InterForm400 5 Work with file sets llle ees 273 6 Connect Users with Overlay File Sets 0000 0c eee eeeee 274 Working with Fonts s es 278 Hc Work With FONTS i3 do xke n REOS deae e a Re dea 279 1 Description of Additional Fonts lisi eleleleenn 279 Example of Defining a Resident Printer font 281 2 W
55. 270 degrees Absolute margin from top edge of the page dissolved in inches and pels see Measuring formats page 48 Absolute margin from the left edge of the page dissolved in inches and pels see Measuring formats page 48 Note that this value will be added to the left margin value of the overlay command type 8 Tabulator This option defines the order which the pages should be output from InterForm400 Normal The output order matches the input order Pages in reverse order The output order of the entire print job is reversed Reverse order per recipient The output order is only inversed within the same recipient according to the level break conditions Press Enter to continue defining the Pitney Bowes pre processing Inserting equipment Max pages per envelope Can there be code for out Sorting in the printout If YES to the above Line number POSILLOH ao co fe penta p Value 2 ow 9 wo F3 Exit Update Finish Definition PRS310D What to do if more than max pages to a recipient Pitney Bowes 1 Outsorting 2 More than 1 envelope 1 Yes 2 No F12 Cancel Max pages per envelope This indicates the maximum pages to be inserted into an envelope InterForm400 will insert a close envelope command at this point User s Manual for InterForm400 193 What to do if more than max pages to a recipient Outsorting InterForm400 will inform the Insertion system t
56. 4297 Symbol LwuBod 16686 Times New Roman 16901 Univers 4148 Windings XE XE Y 6826 31402 i6 WARNING amp j Not all typefaces are supported on all PCL printers and the actual typeface number can j i If you want to use a font typeface that is known by only some of your printers you could consider to install a TTF file with the same font and auto download it to the printers 386 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 387 Appendix G Limitations of the Light Version The following are rules given for the Light version 1 10 11 12 Spool entries for manual merge can only be selected from the queues named AFC_INPUT1 and AFC INPUT2 The program will support only two sets of AFC print queues These queues are named AFC INPUT1 AFC OUT1 AFC INPUT2 and AFC OUT2 The queues can be mixed e g AFC_INPUT1 gt AFC_OUT2 and input from e g AFC_INPUT1 can by the existing AFC functions be split up to print merged data to both AFC_OUT1 and AFC_OUT2 The queues AFC INPUT1 and AFC OUTHI is the set of queues installed according to the Getting Started section These queues can of course be used in production also but care should be taken when calling the program AFCINSTALL as all definitions in the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 will be overwritten by the sample definitions All 4 queues must be placed in the library APF3812 Therefore in the screen shown when choosing F6zadd under 1
57. 4400 9999 4400 4499 PDF417 barcode 4500 4599 EAN8 EAN13 UPC A soft fonts 4600 4699 Code 39 soft fonts 4700 4799 Code 128 soft fonts 4800 4899 IDA bar codes 4900 4999 Interleaved 2 of 5 soft fonts 5000 9999 Other fonts F3 Exit F12 Cancel Additional fonts must have a font ID in the interval 5000 9999 i e you can define up to 5100 fonts in addition to the standard fonts refer to page 382 The other areas are reserved for bar code soft fonts refer to the Bar code section on page 293 In order to define a new font we could for instance enter 9990 and we would get the following screen Description additional fonts APF360D Pobb ox al w ae a ae 9990 Dther fonts Description SPACING Ao n 4 W WW oM do AT nS O Fixed 1 Proportional DICH i al at lin af tlre af we 2205010 0 10 49 99 Hexghlt u oa i a ew oe ow 20 00 300 792 00 Sty Oi cl val a EO O Upright 1 Italic 4 Condensed 5 Condensed italic Stroke weight O0 7 7 0 Medium 0O Light gt 0 Bold VDypeface dM Xll oa ie oe 0 0 65535 Symbol Set v E Toe ee i a blank standard Override spacing blank standard F11 Delete F4 Prompt F12 Cancel The description text will appear on overviews of fonts prompt with F4 The following information for your specific font can be collected by printing out a font list from your printer This is a facility of the HP printers and is common for many other compatible printers al
58. 9 for InterForm Erom POSPITE o mcos Color9 Filename without BMP PLORS d ke odere Be cep Oe pee Xp 1 1 Matte 2 Glossy Render 1 1 Contone 2 Device best dither 3 Smooth contone 4 Basic contone Color treatment e 1 1 Standard RGB 2 Vivid colors F3 Exit F4 List F12 Cancel Enter your selection of image details regarding Finish Render and Color treament 322 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Work with Zebra images Images that you want to use for Zebra printers must be installed for Zebra using option 11 Work with Zebra images You cannot use images installed for PCL or PDF output id NOTE 4 Creation of ZPL output for Zebra requires the purchase of the ZPL module for InterForm400 11 Work with ZEBRA images Work with Zebra images Positron to s 2 2 4 Image name Type options press Enter 2 Change description 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Display attributes Opt Image name Description LOGO Company Logo NEWLOGO New Company Logo F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 Read from Folder F12 Cancel ZIM350D 6 Print You can install TIFF images in the formats noted on page 319 TIFF images can only be installed from the shared APF3812 folder d NOTE Even though you can specify up to 10 characters form the installed image name you ishould strict the name to max 7 characters if you plan download the image into the flash User s Manual for InterForm400
59. APFMENU When entering InterForm400 for the first time you will be asked to appoint an administrator Enter option 80 Administration Menu and go through the menu points 1 6 as follows 1 Enter 1 Appoint Administrator to appoint an administrator of InterForm4008 e g QSECOFR It is recommend to allow access to ALL until the system enters production 2 Enter 2 Configure InterForm 400 3 Type in a default output queue Select printer type according to the supported HP PCL emulation of your printer It is recommended to select HP4 or HP4D D for duplex in order to have support for all fonts used in the overlay sample Refer to page 374 for other values Always select ASCII850 as interface type see list of Interface types page 378 in the user guide Enter Y N Yes No whether you want to Allow Users to override default printer type Answer Y if in doubt Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 1 7 Specify default output queue for users with no individual output queue Users may override value when using the system Output queue PRTO1 Library S vile 4 QUSRSYS Specify default printer type Printer type HP4 IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 HPII HPIID HPIIP HPIII HPIIID HPIIIP HP4 HP4D HP4_PJL HP4D_PJL HP5C HP4500 HP4500D ZEBRA203 ZEBRA300 Interface ASCII850 SYSTEM SYSTEM850 SYSTEM852 ASCIIR8 ASCII850 ASCII852 WORKSTN WS31N WS347N WS348NIDA3X IDA5219 IDA812N Allow users to override default printer type
60. Command 0 00 cece eee eee eee 416 The Import InterForm400 Resources Command 418 The PCL file from folder to Member Command 418 The Print PCL member Command 0 000 cee a eeee 419 The Print TIFF File Command 0 0 00 cece eee nee 419 The Print X Ref List Command 0000 cece eee eee 420 The Send Mail Commnd 0 000 cece eee eens 420 The Work Mail addresses Command 000 eee eee 420 The Work with Profile Jobs Command 00000 ees 420 Work with Stream File Locks 0 0000 cece eee eee eee 421 The TIF file from folder to member Command 422 Appendix J Merging overlays with OV 400 and InterWord400 print jobs 424 Appendix K Forms Server for non AS 400 environments 426 Adding Overlays to SCS PC Print Jobs PC Mail Merge 426 Adding overlays to ASCII PC printjobs PCL 0 00005 427 Appendix L PDF and PCL Viewing 0 430 PDE VIEWING ceu ER RE FC LER X ka ae wie hare RUN EE 430 POL Viewing scum cedem wea nm EH RU RR Sak RE PCR HE tesa 430 Appendix M InterForm400 charts llle 435 The Work with Charts command WRKCHT 000000 uues 436 12 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The amp amp CHA Chart commands sseee eA 446 Appendix N Sending E mails from the AS 40
61. Command Use the command APF3812 PRTTIFF to print TIFF file placed in the IFS The TIFF file must be black white and in a format supported by InterForm400 Refer to page 319 for a list of the supported TIFF formats User s Manual for InterForm4008 41 Print TIFF file PRTTIFF Type choices press Enter From IFS path name PATH Output queue w OUTO JOB Name JOB poh eth a e ee oan ae Name LIBL Forme type 1 1 9 Se Se FORMTYPE STD Character value STD Paper SIze sie vw l4 SIZE A4 LETTER LEGAL LEDGGER COPTES E ede etu ries YTAN COPIES 1 1 255 DRAWS J 59rwt fete CBee Cs DRAWER PRINTER 1 256 PRINTER BODGUIOH ea fpa ga en a ae ROTATION AUTO AUTO 0 90 180 270 Besoclubtlom x 20x ou ox RESOLUTION AUTO AUTO 75 100 150 200 Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys The Print X Ref List Command The command APF3812 PRTXREF prints a list of all InterForm400 resources and lists any reference to each resource including the autodownload specifications Refer to page 339 for more information of this list The command has no parameters it prints to the default output queue of the job The Send Mail Commnd The APF3812 SNDMAIL command can be used for sending an E mail from the AS 400 with up to 30 attached files of your choice but it does not support an InterForm400 merge in the same manner as APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF Note
62. Do you want to use duplex print X N only active for HP LaserJet IID IIID 4D and HP4500D F3 Exit F12 Cancel If you have chosen a file set which already exists you may delete it or change the descriptive text associated with it If you have chosen a new name you must also enter User s Manual for InterForm400 273 text The purpose of the text is primarily to ease the management for users with access to more than one file The Printer Class specifies the type of printers which this file set should include overlays for Depending on this selection the menus and available functions will change throughout the program Note that screen shots in this manual correspond to a selection of 1 Black White Note When choosing printer class 1 instead of 2 you are restricting the overlay definitions in this file set from using any colour resources e g colour images and selecting colours with the INK lines Printer class 3 are used for file sets for Label printers e g Zebra printes Only if you answer Y to duplex screens related to design of overlays will include queries about duplex e g back page overlay 6 Connect Users with Overlay File Sets The system may contain any number of file sets With this option you can specify which file sets the individual users may operate on The program starts with the following screen Connect users with overlay and report file sets A user can be connected with one or more spec
63. Exit F12 Cancel On the top you can enter a user exit program This program must be owned by QSECOFR like all InterForm400 exit programs On the middle of this screen you can specify if you want the reformat definition to call the program each time a new header is made or not If you state YES then the up to 3 fields specified in the top of the screen will be transferred to the user exit program when called The program can return up to 3 fields that are placed as stated in the bottom of the screen above For an example of such a user exit program look in member RFMEXIT in source file APF3812 APISRC This program must be owned by QSECOFR like all user exit programs called by InterForm400 Note that the same program can be called when handling each detail line later The parameter amp CALLID will indicate if the program is called from a header or detail line WARNING Do NOT place any programs or other objects in the APF3812 library as these objects will Detail lines Select this option and you will get to the screen below User s Manual for InterForm400 223 Definition name Description Following pages between 2 detail lines F3 Exit Work with reformat definition Number of detail lines per output page lst page per level break Maximum number of blank lines RFM300D DEMO_REFOR Reformat the Demo spooled file F12 Cancel You fill in the fields 1st page per level break
64. Form Type CODICES NC TEE And if filled in merge with File set Overlay name Primary Secondary set Form Type Copies SACS OUR NMR ae teh F3 Exit F4 List F12 Cancel PRI SEC 1 99 INPUT PRI SEC 1 99 INPUT PRI SEC l 989 INPUT This screen contains the possibility to produce three different print outs of the spool entry with individual overlays attached All sets will be printed on the same queue defined by the 170 Users Manual for InterForm400 AFC definition 1 Merge with overlay which has Find overlay in forms type table Y refer to page 140 File set The file set where the overlay is placed Prompt available file set with F4 Overlay name The overlay to use from the above file set Form type The form type for the merged output It is recommended to use STD in order to avoid messages from the writer about changing forms Copies The number of copies produced from each page of the input spool entry User s Manual for InterForm400 171 172 Users Manual for InterForm400 Split Definitions With the Split Definition you will be able to select specific pages in a spool entry on basis of contents of these pages A split function will create a new spool entry with pages meeting the criteria The conditional selection of pages works in the same way as the overlay selector described on page 122 When entering 3 Split definitions in the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Contro
65. Form type STD 0002 9 STD Exit Seqnbr Function 3 0 1 Merge with overlay Overlay name IF400DEMO File set SAMPLE or overlay selector Primary Secondary set PRI PRI SEC Form type od STD Copies of each page INPUT INPUT 01 99 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel If you have worked through section Getting Familliar with Overlay Selectors You could enter the selector MYSELECT instead of an Overlay name It is very important that we define the form type to be STD The resulting spool entry of this AFC function will be sent back to the same queue AFC_INPUT2 and get status RDY That means the first two AFC definitions we defined will be executed for the new spool entry However the second line 9 EXIT on formtype STD will see to that the merged print is not processed once more by sequence line 3 but instead processed by the writer as result of sequence line 12 CHGWTR which defined the writer to process jobs with formtype STD We now press Enter to decide the spool file attributes of the merged print out Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC INPUT2 Library o tee is x APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 F Change writer OUTQ Form type STD 0002 9 STD Exit Seqnbr Function 3 0 1 Merge with overlay Output spooled file name INPUT Name User data S ES IFA400DEMO INPUT JOB USER Seperator drawer NONE DEFAULT Nummer Hold output
66. Forms Management System Congratulations with your new InterMate 400 software InterMate 400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform advanced data remapping and copy management of you existing SCS print data InterMate 400 exploits the advanced features of standard HP PCL printers and is the chosen forms management solution for several hundreds of organisations The following license code s will be needed to activate InterMate 400 permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code 200 P10 4449079 a F2 E7 20 AA F35 P20 44B2031 2 AA BB 01 23 E60 P30 44D3971 1A BC DE 44 F45 P20 44A1460 TO 022 181 F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys We now enter item 3 Split definitions on the Auto Forms menu Create Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFLETTER__ Description Extract InterMate letters F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here we press F6 to add a Split definition which we assign the name IFLETTER User s Manual for InterForm400 177 Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFLETTER Description Extract InterMate letters Seqnbr Split detail description Seqnbr Split detail description 1 0 Split InterMate MateSerter AND OR Print line Position Oper Compare value 15 21 29 EQ InterMate F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel We press 1 and Field Exit to create a ne
67. HP printer will print the back page of a duplex print first in order to have it faced down in the output tray This means pre printed forms has to be turned upside down in the input paper tray depending on the print being simplex or duplex When stating F front as code for placement you will not have to do this as the system will reverse the order before printing Function keys for display of a spool file F13 Set view print parameters This function is used to set the attributes of the spool file you want to merge the overlay with This must be done prior to selecting F14 F18 or F19 40 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Overlay name Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Code page Form type Copies View format Library F3 Exit or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set _ 1 Primary 2 Secondary Spool file no Drawer Paper type Output queue Select Parameters for view Print APF730D Number ONLY LAST Number INPUT A4 cl 1 255 PRINTER__ PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 255 Name 1 PCL 2 B W PDF 3 Color PDF Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown F4 List overlays Overlay Name Primary Secondary Set Overlay Selector Spooled File Name of an overlay in the file set you want to view together with a spool file when using the PCL viewer F14 This is required though the information is used for PCL viewing only If you have defined Copy
68. ID Use a divided user address from a directory list see contents using the WRKDIRE command or a distribution list see possible distribution lists using the command WRKDSTL User s Manual for InterForm400 143 Address Refer to the above Data format You can either use RCDDATA or ALLDATA RCDDATA can be used for SCS files While ALLDATA is required when sending merged PCL files For more information refer to the description of the DTAFMT parameter of the OS 400 SNDNETSPLF command 3 Transform AFPDS to USERASCII Seqnbr Function 1 0 3 Transform AFPDS to USERASCII Output queue for ASCII print Library Ces wee te Soe ue ue Om hs InterForm400 printer type Interface usce um Goel Velum hus F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel AFPDS Advanced Function Printing Data Stream spool files are made for printer devices with AFP YES which can only be printed out by IPDS printers This feature gives the possibility of printing advanced print consisting of lines frames different font types etc directly from an application program By using this transformation feature it is possible to print out these advanced definitions on an ordinary PCL printer Output queue library Output from the transformation will become a spool entry by the type USERASCII This output queue must therefore have a PCL printer attached which is defined as a 3812 device If a specific queue Printer type and Interface typ
69. IFA00DEMO at this stage if you intend to User s Manual for InterForm400 31 Illustration of the demo spool entry merged with the overlay IFA00DEMO delivered with InterForm400 The illustration is a screen shot of the InterForm400 PCL viewer function inter mate Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 9000 Battleaxe 1004 PH 13 09 99 DK Denmark Att Martin Merman Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Serial No No of dev License Code 44A2971 81 20 01 3A 44A9032 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on 45 72 26 04 00 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on http www intermate com Regards INTERMATE A S Intermate A S Kongevejen 194A DK 3460 Birker d Tel 45 72 26 04 00 Fax 45 72 26 04 04 32 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Menu Structures and General Operation The InterForm400 system can be included in one of your menus and can be called from here refer to the section Relations to other applications page 362 You can also enter the InterForm400 system via a comma
70. KLICHE Character value Bt Lt te TE PRTTYP IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 ee ee ee INTERF SYSTEM SYSTEM850 ASCIIR8 ee ee ae MACROID 0 32767 AUTOMATIC NO YES FLASHMEM NO HP4 IBM4039 v CET Ae px OUTO Name JOB DILDO Ts Name LIBL xeu utu a FORMTYPE Character value Bottom F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display KARTSET KLICHE PRTTYP INTERF MACROID AUTOMATIC FLASHMEM OUTQ FORMTYPE Defines the name of the file set in which you have defined the overlay you wish to download as an HP macro Is the name of the overlay you wish to download States the printer type you wish to use If you are using another printer type than the ones listed in PRTTYP you should select HPII Refer to page 374 for further information on the printer types Defines how the printer is connected to the AS 400 system Refer to page 378 and 268 for further information on the interface types An HP macro must be given an ID in the interval 0 32767 The printer can store a number of different macros If a macro is down loaded with the same macro ID as one already resident in the printer the new macro definition will override the old one If you choose to work with several macros in the printer simultaneously you should number the macros unambiguously This parameter defines if the macro should be executed on all pages YES or only when called from a macro definition incorporated in the print dat
71. MD5 Hash Algorithm The security of the PDF files when encrypting them in InterForm400 is using the most secure encryption that is supported by Acrobat Reader at the moment Acrobat Reader version 6 0 It cannot be garanteed that this encryption cannot be broken or disabled Intermate A S cannot be held responsible for any such security problems The PDF Signature inserted in the PDF files is Standard Adobe PPKMS signature handler PKCS 7 Signature Format encapsulation The certificates that you can use must be PKCS 12 w x 509 certificate Refer to page 481 for description of how to install a certificate in InterForm400 Details of how you can encrypt or insert a digital signature can be found on the pages below In combination with The APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF command Refer to page 349 The PDF file naming finishing definition Refer to page 211 The E mail finishing definition Refer to page 203 The Encrypt InterForm400 PDF file command Refer to page 416 20 Import Certificates If you have bought the PDF security module of InterForm400 you can add digital signatures to PDF files Refer to page 480 for more information of this module In order to get a certificate you should contact your local provider of certificates After the User s Manual for InterForm400 481 certificate has been installed on your PC you can export it so it can be installed on other machines Make sure that you export the certificate as a PKCS 12 with
72. N Y N Drawer Papertype PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 255 Name F4 List Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side Z5 Copy management N Y N F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters 14 PCL view We have now made a copy of the IF400DEMO overlay from file set SAMPLE and stored it by the same name in file set TEST We can now exit to the design menu with F3 User s Manual for InterForm400 127 Step 2 Examining Spool Entry Selection Criteria Before we create the overlay selector we need to examine the spool entry in order to find something that distinct the pages Press F13z Set view print parameter Enter the overlay name and go to the bottom of the screen to enter the Output Queue where the spool file resides Find the DEMO spool entry in the output queue and select it with option 1 Press Enter Select Parameters for view print APF730D Overlay name IF400DEMO or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Spool file no Mm Number ONLY LAST l Primary 2 Secondary Code page Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Form type STD Copies LE 1 255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue AFC_INPUT1_ Library X A 6x4 APF3812 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel In the desi
73. Navn User dete 20k ox RS Box x INPUT JOB USER a Seperator drawer NONE DEFAULT Number Hold output spooled file NO YES Save output spooled file NO YES Archive in InfoStore 400 1 PCL 2 PCL and SCS Archive ID F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel Output spooled file name This entry controls the spool file name User data You can change the spool file description of the resulting print data so the spool file can be located on the output queue By entering PAGES InterForm400 will display the number of pages included in the output from the merge process in the User data field This is convenient when using the interface types ASCII850 and ASCIIR8 These types produces output with datatype ASCII which result in the spool queue displaying 1 for number of pages When inserting the keyword PAGES the following field will be displayed 142 Users Manual for InterForm400 Seqnbr Function 1 0 a Merge with overlay Output spooled file Text before number of pages User data s H ed Seperator drawer F3 Exit F12 Cancel mmer Hold output spooled Save output Spool face ccc Mage ee ee eines Stew age ate INE IS Archive in InfoStore 400 1 PCL 2 PCL and SCS Archive STD Lk o4 Jes ger ee F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel Here you can type in a help text which will be added before the number of pages as the first 4 characters in the user data field JOB or U
74. OSC Job Command The APF3812 STROSCJOB command is equivalent to choosing option 1 Run OSC for a specific output queue on the Work with OSC definitions screen see page 252 Remember that in order for the job to become active it is necessary that the OSCCTL subsystem is active Refer to page 246 Utilities relevant for AFC Exit programs The Transform AFPDS print Command The APF3812 AFPTOASCII command converts AFPDS spool files to ASCII spool files This command operates in the same manner as function 3 Transform AFPDS to USERACII in Auto Forms Control Description and limitations can be seen at page 144 Note if you want to make use of this function and the AFPDS spool files are using resource libraries not listed in the system library list then the job description APF3812 AUTO FORM must be changed in order to include these libraries in the library list The APF3812 Overlay Merge Command The command APF3812 APF3812 is intended to be included in CL programs so a spool entry created in a program can be merged with an overlay within a job The command contains the following parameters Press F9 to display all the parameters including OUTDOC OUTFLR and REPLACE User s Manual for InterForm400 405 Merge spooled Type choices press Enter InterForm 400 file set Overlay name v D Ue or Overlay Selector name Primary Secondary set Spooled file Job name User Job number Spooled file number Code
75. OSC will handle multiple spool files independently of document type and produce a new single spool file in SCS format sorted e g according to the recipient name OSC jobs works differently than Auto Forms Control jobs OSC jobs are not running at all times OSC jobs wake up at specific times of the week and will merge all spool files waiting at a specific output queue into one large SCS spool file This new spool file can be sorted and distributed and then merged using Auto Forms Control When all waiting spool files have been handled the OSC job goes into sleep mode again and awaits the next wake up call Output Schedule Control can help you print out in these situations 1 You have large spool files to print It is not necessary to print them out immediately after they are created You want to automatically print them out during the night when the printers are idle 2 You are going to print out very large spool files and you want to automatically distribute the workload on several printers 3 You have 2 or more spool files that are to be distributed to the same customers For easy and low cost distribution you want to merge all the spool files to one and sort it so pages for the same customer are collected and printed together 4 You have the situation as described in example 3 but the customer information is placed on differently on the page depending on the type of spool file 5 You want to use the solution de
76. Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Tamaya gh ee APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save New output queue Seqnbr Function 1 0 B Split spooled file Split definition name IFLETTER Fll Delete F12 Cancel The Split definition will cause the demo spool entry to have pages extracted and another SCS spool entry with form type IFLET is created and placed after the original spool entry in the queue User s Manual for InterForm400 179 We can now merge the new spool entry with an overlay conditioned by the Formtype IFLET or by using an Overlay Selector Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Riper 2x E45 x 3 QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save New output queue 0001 B DEMO Split definition IFLETTER Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 2 0 1 FOr type so se 9 0 vov vow eo o lELET Save attribute Jobname UNES Spooled file name Device file Library 2 a amp o x Program that opened file i S ozs ho CREDE F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel Seqnbr Function 1 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print AFC OUT1 IuDPaby 25 O55 Sat hes Ue a iar APF3812 InterForm 400 printer type HP4 Interface dou uh x 0x E24 300 04 14 ASCII850 Find overlay in forms type table N Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel 180 Users Manual for InterForm400 Finishing Definitions T
77. Overlay name e e e e gt AE E o coo arta Rs or overlay selector Primary Secondary set PRI PRI SEC pave smail sow ee e TET e NO_ NO YES This function is used to distribute E mails Note that the spool file first has to be handled by a E mail finishing definition before this function See page 195 And 218 Refer to page 459 for information of how to set up SMTP on the AS 400 id NOTE 4 In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classis package ifor InterForm400 N PDF File naming and save 3 0 N Save spooled file as PDF Overlay Name sw s 4594 7 IF400DEMO_ Ple SSG Cee obo eee XI ON SAMPLE or overlay selector Primary Secondary set PRI PRI SEC Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES PDF File naming definition KSE PDF This function executes a PDF file naming finishing definition It will create PDF files that are the result of a merge with the specified overlay or overlay selector Refer to page 206 for more information of the PDF file naming finishing definition id NOTE 4 In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classic package ifor InterForm400 Comment Seqnbr Function 1 0 E Comment Use comment lines to great extent in order to keep track of what the AFC functions do It makes future changes quicker and more safe Convert SAP spool entries datatype IBM
78. PDF by using option 8 Update fonts If you then press F6 to add a new font you get the screen below Add Auto download Soft Font PGR332D Printer group name PDF Font number z F4 List Symbol set number EY 1 Western 2 Central European 3 Baltic 4 Turkish 5 Cyrillic 6 Greek 7 Arabic 8 Hebrew Font member name 0 F4 List When to embed font ALLWAYS ALLWAYS PRI SEC NEVER F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel The font number must have the same characteristics as the soft font bold italic condenced proportional fixed With When to embed font you can state when you want to download the font PRI will download the soft font only when you do a primary merge and SEC will download the soft font only when you do a secondary merge In this manner you can include the soft font only in PDF files where it is needed and save the space if the soft font is already installed on the PC s that are to open the PDF files 288 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Even though the same font member can not be used for both PCL and PDF output you ican associate one font number to a PCL font member and a PDF font member 2 Therefore if you install a TTF as a PCL font member and a PDF font member you can 5 Create barcode soft font The support of barcodes is described on page 292 7 Install True Type font for PDF This option enables you to install a True Type Font to be used in PDF output Install True
79. PDF file naming finishing definition can now receive up to 20 parameters A new demo source is included Refer to page 210 for details The datamatrix barcode is now supported for ZPL output For PCL and PDF output this barcode is not supported yet A new version of Swiftview is included in InterForm400 Please reinstall Swiftview on the PCs to get this update The graphical designer is now able to change the font for many lines at a time Refer to page 475 for more information If overprinting have been used in the original SCS spooled file to print in bold this bold will now also be printed as bold if you print out the PDF file resulting from a merge in InterForm400 User s Manual for InterForm400 17 Additional copies of each page can now be printed by inserting the command amp amp CPY in the SCS spooled file that you merge Refer to page 396 for more information Stapling is now supported for additional printers Stapling for additional Minolta Ricoh and Lexmark printer models have been added Selection of the printer model have been restructured to make it easier to find the right printer model Refer to page 47 and 190 for more information about stapling in InterForm400 What is new in this manual This lists the major changes to the manual that does not concern the new functions The changes additions are An alternative way to install the graphical designer has been included Installing via the installation files f
80. Port Number most print servers uses port 9100 as raw socket HP Lexmark and Kyocera while IBM Print Servers uses port 3700 or 2501 Consult the user manual of your IBM printer for correct port no 2 The following CL command will create a new device description called PRTXXX for a 3812 model 1 on port 9100 and IP address 222 2 1 235 CRTDEVPRT DEVD PRTXXX DEVCLS LAN TYPE 3812 MODEL 1 LANATTACH IP PORT 9100 FONT 11 FORMFEED AUTOCUT PARITY NONE STOPBITS 1 TRANSFORM YES MFRTYPMDL HP4 RMTLOCNAME 222 2 1 235 SYSDRVPGM HPPJ LDRV PRTERRMSG I NFO If you are not able to fit the entire command on the command line you can prompt the command CRTDEVPRT with F4 and fill in the rest j It is a good idea but not necessary to specify PRTERRMSG INFO This value will make the printer job automatically recover from a message if possible if e g the printer iruns out of paper the printer job halts with an error When you add paper the printer job See a list of some of the possible port numbers at this site http iwww 912 ibr com s _dir sikbase ns 1a066549a21 4021 88625680b0002037e 94e739641979e38886256903007 1998 7OpenDocument amp ExpandSection 3 amp Highlight 0 printing port number _ Section 3 Vary on the device with the following command VRYCFG CFGOBJ PRTXXX CFGTYPE DEV STATUS ON 13 Start the printer writer with the following command STRPRTWTR DEV PRTXXX Attaching through a 5250 Terminal A 5250 term
81. Roman8 ASCII data The protocol conversion language is determined automatically from the system code page SYSVAL QCHRID ASCII850 Transforms EBCDIC data into transparent PCL PC 850 ASCII data The protocol conversion language is determined automatically from the system code page SYSVAL QCHRID Note that if the attributes of a spool file indicate code page 870 Eastern Europe ASCII852 will automatically be selected for conversion of this spool file ASCII852 Same as above but for Latin2 character set Eastern Europe You can also use ASCII850 for Latin2 characters set ASCIIR8 or ASCII850 should be used if you encounter any problems with the code conversion table of your interface This selection will convert all data to ASCII before they are sent to the printer transparently This method may require slightly more CPU i power from the AS 400 and you will not be able to view or determine the number of pages of the spooled print job after it has been merged with an overlay On the other t hand this method gives the greatest insurance that the character conversions are made 378 Users Manual for InterForm4009 WORKSTN Used for the Client Access PC support printer session Note that the Rumba printer session can not be used with the InterForm400 system This selection will imply the Printer Conversion table to work with the HP ASCII symbol set PC 8 When using IBM Client Access a print function table that matches the
82. Send Network Spooled File 20 00 e eee eee 143 3 Transform AFPDS to USERASCI 00 0000 144 4 Copy Spooled File 0 0 00 eee 145 5 Move Spooled File 0 00 cece tees 145 6 Hold Spooled File 2 0 00 c cece tee 146 7 Delete Spooled File 0 000 cece eee 146 8 Call Program 2 oce now a3 wed ome ew oy ee ena Pe 146 QHE Xi is 2 8 ted ed Spee wae hen ae ie ll ag eee oe Dee aes wad 147 A Change attributes 0 cee 147 B Split spooled file 0 0 tevion Enei a Ee o 148 C Prepare for Finishing 000 cee eee eee eee 148 D Sort Spooled File rerni eet PE are pein oe be ree wierd 149 F Ghange Writer e rosei weet EnRe xcMbes Si EE ene ee 150 G Archive to MultiArchive 400 00 0c eee eee eee 151 H Archive in InfoStore 400 000 eee 151 P Send PDF E mail simrer epia e idee oe be ares weed 152 N PDF File naming and save 002 cece eee eee 152 COMMEN M22 sends Ge eet od we en eh ee ag bared 152 Convert SAP spool entries datatype IBMSCS 152 SAP spool entries datatype IBMSCS2 s 153 Generating multiple copies in input spool entries 153 Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control esee 155 Example 1 Using Separate queues for Input and Output 155 Step 1 Checking the Writer llli 155 Step 2 Checking if Auto
83. Soft Font PGR332D Printer group name ALLPCL Bonk number xx xw xG 3 F4 List Symbol set number 3 O All symbol sets barcodes only l Roman 8 2 PC 8 DM 3 CodePage850 4 CodePage852 5 Baltic 6 CodePage858 7 Cyrillic 8 CylillicEuro 9 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish A ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek B CentralEurope w Euro Font member name 0 IF OCRB F4 List Font member name 90 F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel 290 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The selection of Symbol set should match the code page you are using The section Getting Familiar with Soft fonts and Barcodes includes download of the OCRB font User s Manual for InterForm400 291 Barcode Support When using a HP PCL compatible printer the system can print bar codes If you are using an IDA converter interface IDA3X IDA5219 or IDA812 it is possible to use the bar code facilities of the protocol converter refer to the manual delivered with the protocol converter In order not to lock up your installation on one particular interface type it is recommended to use a soft font or to use the InterForm400 s ability to create barcode soft fonts InterForm400 currently support generation of the following barcodes in any size Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 Code 39 Code 39 Extended EAN128 Postnet EAN13 EAN8 PDF417 UPC A The barcodes created by InterForm400 are automatically stored as members in the physical
84. Where Device is the name of the Device containing the media If you are using the systems default CD ROM drive you can use OPT instead of the Device parameter You are now prompted to choose your preferred language for the installation Note If the installation detects an existing version of InterForm400 on your system you will at this point get prompted to selected installation method Refer to page 357 for more information on release updates User s Manual for InterForm400 21 GB DE DK ES FR GB PT InterForm 400 version 2004 M01 INTERO3 Wahlen Sie bitte eine Sprache aus w hrend verwendet zu werden installieren Eingabetaste Weiter Velg sprog for instruktioner under denne installation Tryk pa Enter for at forts tte Seleccione por favor un lenguaje para ser utilizado durante instalan Pulse Intro para continuar Veuillez choisir la langue utiliser pendant l installation Appuyez sur ENTREE pour continuer Please select a language to be used during install Press Enter to continue Favor selecionar uma lingua a ser usada durante a instala o Aperte Enter para continuar DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English PT Portugu s F3 Exit F12 Cancel Confirm on the next screen with Enter that you are installing InterForm400 The screen after that requires you to enter a valid licence type in order to allow the installation to proceed You can also leave
85. and 1 add enclosure Example 1 Non sorted We want all sets of pages from 1 to 3 pages to be inserted in the same order as the original spool entry Sets of pages from 4 to more pages should not be inserted but be printed to the upper bin All envelopes should have en enclosure w Pages per envelope group 1 Enclosure group 1 P Pages per envelope group 2 Enclosure group 2 s Pages per envelope group 3 Enclosure group 3 x Pages per envelope group 4 Enclosure group 4 DE Pages per envelope group 5 Enclosure group 5 m Try stating 1 instead of 3 in the above sample for Pages per envelope Group 1 and run the test spool entry with this definition combined with the definitions of either example 1 on page 213 Or example 2 on page 214 You will then notice that the letters for Florence Flowers are not inserted as the number exceeds the maximum number of sheets in one envelope defined above When filled in press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition Example 2 Sorting in Ascending Weight Same example as above but all envelopes with only one page should be printed first then envelopes with 2 pages and finally all envelopes with 3 pages 188 Users Manual for InterForm400 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 1 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope
86. bookmark definition you are presented with this screen Create PDF Bookmark definition BMK310D Bookmark definition name FIN REPORT Description xxx a amp amp Bookmarks_for_financial_report Display bookmarks at open 1 O No 1 Yes Here you state a name for the bookmark definition a description and select if the bookmarks should be displayed when the PDF file is opened or not When you press Enter F3 F12 you will see this screen Work with PDF Bookmark details BMK320D Bookmark definition BOOKMRK1 POSIT LOM EO ys Poe Bo Q4 Sequence number Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Rename Opt Seqnbr Description 000 All pages F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Here you can define one or more rules for when and how bookmarks should be inserted Press F6 to add a new one 238 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Create PDF Bookmark details BMK330D Sequence number 000 DescrrpELOm yew ea ae Type option Press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition Page selection Initial open level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Page selection If you want to use more than one rule or sequence for the bookmarks in one spooled file you need to restrict the sequence to some of the pages only by specifying rules in Page selection Otherwise skip this part Refer to page 212 232 for details Initial open level You can d
87. can send to The addresses are identified by the keys defined earlier For each set of key s the e mail fax address the name of the person e mail text version and a password for the attached PDF if used are registered NOTES 00000000 0 This option is only open if you have selected 1 By key in option 1 How to find E mail address Fax number WARNING Password protection of the PDF file requires a purchase of the PDF security module for InterForm400 Work with E mail addresses and fax numbers MAI320D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file POs VE LOR Ee xXx Customer number Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Customer number 1004 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Press F6 Create to add a new E mail address or fax number User s Manual for InterForm400 201 Create E mail address Fax number MAI330D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Customer number 1001 Recipient name Herring Marine Research E mail address Herring intermate com Or Fax number CC Recipient name CC E mail address E mail text version GB F4 Prompt PDF User Password F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel The Recipient name above can be referred to as TO in the e mail text definiti
88. data To gain full benefit of this section you should have worked through the section Getting Familiar with Overlays Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control This chapter will lead you through a real life example of using Auto Forms Control You will be guided step by step through the entire procedure To gain full benefit of this section you should have worked through the section Getting Started Getting Familiar with Soft fonts and Barcodes This section is structured as a learning by doing example which makes extensive use of download fonts and bar codes Throughout the manual you will find the following symbols which will provide you with special information 14 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 15 16 Users Manual for InterForm4009 What is new in the 2006 version This Users Guide describes functions available in version 2006M01 and newer Below are listed most of the new features added in InterForm400 since the last Users Guide version 3 28 intended for InterForm400 version 2004M01 Bookmarks and links can now be added to output PDF files via a command in the SCS spooled file Refer to page 396 for more details of the amp amp BMK and amp amp URI commands Grey TIF images are now supported in InterForm400 Until now only sharp black white images have been supported LZW compressed files are also supported This will greatly improve the quality of the output images and ease the inst
89. defined for each additional output queue with a capable printer attached 332 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Create Output Sorter Definition Output queue x ox PRTO2 ldD dEy vex QUSRSYS Sorter type ey ter Jen w he HP5SI Default output bin s 1 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Output Queue The output queue holding the HP5Si or Lexmark Optra printer Sorter Type Not yet inspected Any value entered for Sorter type will default to HP5Si This type can be used for both HP5si and the Lexmark Optra series Default output bin This bin will be used for any User or Overlay which does not match any criteria defined in Output Sorter Details A bin number from 1 to 11 can be defined for a HP5Si Bin 1 The standard face down bin Bin 2 The standard face up bin which is only selectable if the sorter unit is not installed Bin 3 The upper face up bin of the sorter unit Bin 4 11 The 8 face down bins of the sorter unit When pressing Enter the following screen will appear Work with Output Sorter Details Output queue PRTO2 Wier exin ixU QUSRSYS SEAE WCE aoea eee ETA Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Overlay Pri Sec User profile Binno No output sorter details Press F6 for create End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to add Sorter details to you Sorter definition User s Manual for InterForm400 333 You can add additional Sorter Det
90. dx x eee a8 APF3812 Type choices press Enter Insert into Input spooled file Line Position Form Gy Pee hu wea eges ge too 110 Job name Job number Spooled file es nox bo xod Spool file MOs eke ee i J 120 Device file e LEYbratw uw o ok ex Program that opened file Library The same placement will be used for all pages Use a area that is blank for all pages in the input output queue F3 Exit F12 Cancel In the above entry screen we define where the sort criterias should be inserted in the spool files that will be used in the OSC output queue ie WARNING The positions selected above must be positions where now other information will be stated If the original spool data are in the same positions as specified above they will be over written User s Manual for InterForm400 253 Define Sort Fields Work with OSC sort definitions OSC330D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 TaD Pariyi gt B s ges uet ow peie AS APF3812 POSICION CO 4 4 4 4 Sequence Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Change sequence Opt Seqnbr Description 2 1 Find inserted sort fields End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new Sort Definition Enter 2 in front of an existing sort definition to change Change OSC sort definition OSC335D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 DIDEALY eee Kee oe heeled RAT APF3812 Sequence 1 Descri
91. file APF3812 FONT When printing a bar code it appears to be placed a little to the right of the specified location It is because the start code is as wide as 2 digits and has the two thin lines that form the start code placed in the right side of the symbol You can select whether the soft font is to be used on a HPII PCL4 or a HPIII PCL5 printer A font for a HPII can be used on HPII HPIII HP4 and all printers emulating a HP printer HPIII fonts can only be used with HPIII HP4 and compatible printers The advantage of using HPIII fonts is the much faster download speed For HPIII printer types PCL5 it does not matter what you enter as orientation The font can be used for all four orientations When a font is used on a HPII it can only be used in the orientation it is intended for If you want a number to appear below the bar code you must specify your overlay definition to read the number from the data with a 9 Remap Window and place it on the desired position Barcodes in PDF output All the barcodes in InterForm400 are also supported for PDF output Note however that there is a difference to the way that the barcodes for PDF are generated compared to PCL output The barcodes appearance in PCL output are based on the soft font only The appearance in PDF output is based on the specifications in the used font number Normally that will not be a problem but if you manually have created the font number you should make sure that
92. for InterForm4009 In this function you can copy lines into Overlay to be copied from Sequence numbers from to to be copied Inserted at sequence number F4 overview overlays F24 shift to look at FROM overlay this overlay definition TES 0000 0000 T 1 blank this overlay Delete lines This option you delete an interval of lines instead of entering each lines and press F11 In this function you can delete an interval of definition lines Interval 0000 0000 Resequencing If you have deleted lines you will get in the situation that you have free line numbers to insert new overlay definitions on This option will sort all remaining lines numerical In this function you can resequence the lines in this overlay definition Press ENTER for resequensing Press F12 for unchanged Print overlay definitions This option will print out a detailed list of the existing overlay definitions on your default printer User s Manual for InterForm400 51 Overlay Element Selection Filters When entering a sequence number and you press Field Exit the following entry screen will appear Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text IF400DEMO Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type Page control 1 0 _ 1 Frame 2 Horizontal BLANK all pages 3 Vertical 4 Line 1 first page only 5 Text 6 Print
93. for the page numbers Prompt by F4 Is dissolved in n 240 inch For example 6 lines per inch corresponds to 40 240 inch If there are more index lines in the table that can be contained within this limit defined in Inches pels from the upper edge of the page the system will automatically continue on a new page A specific drawer the paper for the index page should be taken from Default is OVERLAY specified in the global settings of the overlay 3 Overlay spool entry Index text Include in F4 Prompt Seqnbr Type Description 3 0 3 Overlay spool entry Overlay dame 9 44 et ege Name F4 list E ETE RE OE E A EE OVERLAY 12 3 4 6 Profit Report AOE ose Soke eee E LU Y N pumbefting osoner RU Y N For each spool entry you intend to include in the report there must exist a definition of which overlay should be used for this particular part of the report The order of insertion of this sequence line in the report composition must therefore be in the same order as you wish the input overlay entries appear in the report Overlay name Index text Include in Index Reset numbering Drawer The overlay used for this spool entry to be included in the report A text for recognition of this spool entry in the index optional Y Includes the above text in the index Reset continuous numbering Only state Y if you want to start each spool entry used in the report with page number 1 A s
94. from the folder APF3812 This function provides a possibility to restore a spool file from a folder which has originally been saved through menu 6 Save spooled File to the folder APF3812 Reprint Spooled File from the APF3812 Folder Document name F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel 8 Print Resource X reference When selecting this option InterForm400 will create a spooled file containing all resource cross references in InterForm400 The spooled file will be created on the output queue of the current job You can steer where it will be created e g by going to a command line and execute the command CHG OB OUTQ outq name gt prior to selection of this option The CHGJOB command will change the default outg for the current job You can also find the spooled file after execution if it has not been printed out if you from the same job execute the command WRK OB OPTI ON SPLF This will list spooled files created by the current job The cross reference list will list the following For all images colors PCL files fonts etc it will list in which lines in which overlays in what file sets the resource is used If font numbers are used in overlay headers or extended page definitions then these will also be listed as OVLHD and EXTPAG in the used in column All overlays are listed If there is a reference to the overlay by use of an If Then you will see a line with CONDOVL stating the overlay and line numbe
95. function 8 Call Program and specify program RUNSFI and library APF3812 See Description of the RUNSFI program below Create SFI definition SFI110D SFI definition DEMO DessriptioBl 4 4 4 4 dd My_test Search text Total errors 0 PO e y we Ri tie o toe og tos LAST ANY FIRST LAST Print Line x x 2x INANE EIU POSICION es 2 8 ae 2 ach amp NL NS New form type If text found SAME Form type SAME if not Bound x x3 s ERROR Form type SAME When AFC invokes the RUNSFI program it will look for a SFI definition having the same name as the form type of the spooled file l e if the form type of your spooled file is DEMO the SFI definition named DEMO will be used The RUNSFI program then scans the spooled file for the search text string specified in the SFI definition within the specified page line and position limits If the text string was found the form type of the spooled file will be changed to the value specified in the New form type If text found field Likewise the form type will be changed to the value specified in the If not found field if the text string wasn t found Finally the RUNSFI program will hold and release the spooled file in order to let AFC process the spooled file with the new form type unless the value for New form type is SAME then the spooled file will not be held and released Note If a SFI definition with the name of the spoo
96. going up or down Line width Width of the Y 1 axis in dots Minimum Specifies the smallest value for the Y 1 axis Increment Specifies the difference between the Y1 grid lines measured in Y1 units Maximum Specifies the maximum value for the Y 1 axis Edit word Defines placement of commas punctuation and minus sign The value is written like Values font color Defines the font and color used for writing the values on the Y1 axis The type or pattern of the grid line The type number corresponds to the pattern as follows apostrophes must be included Grid line type efines the width and color of the grid line CJ 0 090 Eug gr R GON Grid line width color 442 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Define observation set When selecting Define observations from the Create chart definition menu the following will be displayed Work with Observation sets CHS100D Ghari hoe else tus Jer US MYBAR TYDG Jo Axe vr ee UE Jay ee UNT DS BAR Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Assign new seq nbr to observation set 12 Work with sample observati Opt Seq number Obs set Text No Observation sets to display F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel ons End Here it is possible to work with existing observation sets It is also possible to create a new observation set using F6zCreate which will result in the display below For charts with type BAR the entry screen lo
97. in pels Thickness of a the line in pels 1 240 Zero means no border Move right Inch pels of the right movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for left edge Move Down _Inch pels of the vertical movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for Top edge Extra times Extra copies of the line excluding the original Extra copies will be displaced relative to each other according to the settings of Move right and Move Down 4 LINE Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition n O 2 Line Endpoint 1 from top Move right from left Move down Endpoint 2 from top Extra times _ from left Thickness in pels HERE F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr This definition works similar to the two previous definitions It distinguish itself by enabling lines to be diagonal This also means you will have to define coordinates for each endpoint Endpoint 1 From Top Inches pels absolute to the top edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page 56 Users Manual for InterForm4009 regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Endpoint 2 From Top Inches pels absolute to the top edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page Thickness in pels
98. indicates 31 2 inch 390 Users Manual for InterForm4009 pon sign top border upper border distance to edge INPEL sign left border left border distance to edge INPEL sign right border right side distance to edge INPEL sign bottom border distance bottom border to edge INPEL line width PPP 0 31 round sharp corners R S pattern for filling sign move right move right INPEL sign move down move down INPEL number of moves Draws a frame of which the upper and lower borders are defined relatively to the top edge of the paper and the left and right borders are defined relatively to left edge of the paper IN indicates measurement in inches PEL indicates measurement in Pels Leading zeros must be filled in If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relative to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current line If position 39 54 is filled in the frame will be repeated as many times as stated in position 52 54 XA sign distance to paper top edge distance to top edge INPEL sign left end point distance left end point to left paper edge INPEL sign right end point distance right end point to left paper edge INPEL line width PPP 0 31 sign move right move right INPEL sign move down move down INPEL number of moves amp S
99. info 2 page 2 and succ 7 Ink 8 Tabulator 9 last page only 9 Remap window I Image If then F PCL file G HP GL 2 file S Suboverlay Comment F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entry The right side of the screen will contain entries for Copy management or Page control depending on the value for Copy management in the global settings of the overlay Page Control The Page Control fields are used to assign this specific sequence line to all printed pages or to selected pages only The entry fields for Page control will appear if N has been selected for Copy Management in the global settings of the overlay see Copy Management page 39 Seqnbr Type Page control LU 1 Frame 2 Horizontal BLANK all pages 3 Vertical 4 Line 1 first page only 5 Text 6 Print info 2 page 2 and succ 7 Ink 8 Tabulator 9 last page only 9 Remap window I Image If then F PCL file G HP GL 2 file S Suboverlay Comment F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr WARNING amp Do not use page control in conditioned overlays The overlay called by an If Then line If S or L is filled in for Duplex Print for the global settings of the overlay the Page Control will be extended with a possibility of entering if page numbering should be made on odd or even pages only 52 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Seqnbr Type Page control T 1 Frame 2 Horizontal M BLA
100. install and use it In this menu overlay definitions and manipulation with spool data are defined Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters Overlay names can be up to 10 characters long The first character must be a letter A Z No blanks or special characters can be used in the name ONLY underscore is permitted Selecting an existing overlay Press F4 to get a list of existing overlays to select from or type the name of the overlay You may be refused access with the message Overlay in use by user XXX in designer job NNN a Graphical Designer job is editing the same overlay If you are sure that this other job can be stopped you can do so by selecting option 80 Administering InterForm400 and 52 Work with Designer job overlay locks Stop the job with option 4 Remove Creating a new overlay Type in a name of the overlay you want to create and press Enter User s Manual for InterForm400 35 Copy Overlay from Another Overlay Type in a name of the new overlay you want to copy to and press Enter Press F9 to enter a overlay name to copy from and press Enter Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Name of overlay to copy from F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Copy from another file set F12 Cancel F10 Copy from another AS 400 Press F9 to enter a overlay name to copy from and press Enter or press F10 to enter the name of a
101. it blank and fill it out later INS0125 InterForm 400 version 2004 M00 INTERO3 Type license information press Enter InterForm 400 license code Notice License type and code must match InterForm 400 cannot be used before a valid license code is entered F3 Exit F12 Cancel In the following screen you can set the preferred language used in InterForm400 The language can be changed later if needed This is done by option 2 at the Administration menu to change the global settings for InterForm400 or use option 4 to select language for specific InterForm400 users Note InterForm400 CL commands like MRGSPLFPDF APF3812 etc will be installed in the language chosen here and can not be changed unless a re installation is made 22 Users Manual for InterForm4009 INSO121 InterForm 400 version 2004 M01 INTERO1 Select primary language press Enter Primary language GB DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English PT Portugu s Primary language is used for 1 The language of commands 2 The language of displays 3 The language of the manual Notice Language of commands can only be selected during install Primary language can be changed at the administration menu option 2 F3 Exit F12 Cancel If this is the first time InterForm400 is installed on your system you should leave the default values Refer to page 340 for more information on journaling INS0122 I
102. most significant for the sort 232 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Print Line The print line in the spool entry to search Position The column interval to search Ascending Select the way you want to order this sorting field If you leave it decending blank it will default to ascending Examples Using Sort The following makes use of the demo spool entry delivered with InterForm4009 You can print this from the menu 12 Service Functions under the administration menu On all pages the Customer ID is always four digits found in line 13 position 57 60 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE FEIER xx 4 44 QPRINT Page Line 3 13 FURCELOR x 1 Columns 178 Search for denn S ERE EE A E A ds sine o server ae cals expan tine a D E eer NE A E a Te e 1001 PH 30 04 97 Re Your new InterMate 400 Forms Management System Congratulations with your new InterMate 400 software InterMate 400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform advanced data remapping and copy management of you existing SCS print data InterMate 400 exploits the advanced features of standard HP PCL printers and is the chosen forms management solution for several hundreds of organisations The following license code s will be needed to activate InterMate 400 permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code 200 P10 4449079 ad F2 E7 20 AA F35 P20 44B2031 2 AA BB 01 23 E60 P30 44D3971 1A BC DE 44 F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Ri
103. new releases Enter the PTF number you have received and copied into the folder APF3812 l e if the file was named APF0015 PTF type 0015 346 Users Manual for InterForm4009 60 Install Swiftview at drive C With this option library APF3812 is created on a PC s C drive and the Sview exe file is copied from AS 400 folder QDLS APF3812 to the created C APF3812 See further information about the PCL viewer SwiftView on page 430 70 Install InterForm Designer on your PC This installs the InterForm400 graphical designer on the C drive of the PC See page 461 for the installation procedure of the graphical designer 80 Prepare server to support InterForm Designer This option starts the servers necessary for running the graphical designer Refer to page 461 for more information User s Manual for InterForm400 347 348 Users Manual for InterForm4009 How to create PDF files InterForm400 is capable of creating PDF output This can be done using the CL command APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF Merge Spool File PDF This command merges a spool file with an overlay or overlay selector like a normal PCL merge Note You can also create PDF files with the PDF File naming finishing definition Refer to page 206 for more information about this function When prompting the command with F4 all parameters can be seen when pressing F9 Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter InterFo
104. number of sequence lines each defining a part of the overlay like frames lines text constants etc When entering a screen with existing sequence lines the last entered lines will be displayed The system simply believes that you intend to continue entering overlay elements You can scroll through the lines using page up and page down Each line in the overlay definition is accessed via its sequence number If you select an existing sequence number you will be able to update or delete this particular line If you select a line number not already in the definition it means you wish to add a new line Sequence numbers can be entered with 1 decimal position This opens up the possibility of inserting a new line anywhere in the definition as the specification of a line with a decimal results in the addition of 1 to the sequence numbers of all succeeding lines in the definition The new line is placed in the vacant space in the reference series As example entering 12 1 will insert a sequence number between line 12 and 13 When saved the inserted sequence line is assigned number 13 and the following lines are incremented by one After entering a sequence number press the Field Exit key to add or edit this line The key mapping of keyboards varies from one PC to another The Field Exit key could be assigned to e g the right Ctrl key the Enter key or the key of your numeric keyboard User s Manual for InterForm400 49 Service Options
105. of the InterForm400 main menu the AFC definitions i AFC INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2 will be preserved if your current InterForm400 configured as a test or production version the text LIGHT version is not displayed in the heading of the InterForm400 main menu the AFC definitions AFC INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2 will be overwritten by the default definitions of the InterForm400 demo Insert the InterForm400 CD into the iSeries and enter the following on a command line LODRUN DEV Devi ce Where Device is the name of the Device containing the media If you are using the systems default CD ROM drive you can use OPT instead of the Device parameter InterForm400 first tests if any user exit programs called by InterForm400 are not owned by QSECOFR They must be owned by QSECOFR because of security If any such programs are called from the current InterForm400 installation they are listed below You will not see the screen if all is OK User s Manual for InterForm400 357 System INTERO3 CKCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck Security changes required Owner of all InterForm exit programs must be changed to QSECOFR Press F3 or F12 to cancel Press F10 to change owner to QSECOFR id Ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckc
106. of the InterForm400 system OS 400 will report a message if such unsupported attributes are found in the spool entries when the Copy spool file operation is carried out There are however two ways to avoid using the Copy spool file operation and still add overlays to complex office print jobs 1 Merging with OfficeVision jobs with limited overlay features Merge in Auto Forms Control or 3 Merge spool entry with overlay are used as normal but the overlay must not include any of the following elements Tabulators Remap Window If then statements Copy management Extended page definition Besides this the Interface must be ASCII850 or ASCII852 and Finishing functions are not allowed In addition the main overlay definitions Line Spacing Rotation Font and Drawer should all be set to INPUT InterForm400 will add the overlay and make conversions of the advanced word processing features of the Office Spool file SCS DCA If however just one of the above restrictions are not obeyed the spool file will be regarded as a normal SCS spool entry and the advanced features will be ignored 2 Downloading the overlay as a macro The overlay should be downloaded as a HP macro and the command APF3812 HPMACRO see page 402 416 should be used to create the spool entries containing the HP macro The macro can then be called directly from the document by inserting a call command in the header or footer text Note that this method neither uses A
107. of this feature Page 1 Testing remap of item lines with random line positions ITEM Fish Shark Flounder Herring Salmon ITEM Pets Cat Dog Chinchilla Parrot Hamster ITEM Riding animals Horse Camel Elephant This should be a 14 User s Manual for InterForm400 113 Page 2 Testing remap og item lines with random line positions ITEM Cars Rover Porsche Volvo Mercedes Opel Audi ITEM Aeroplanes Ellehammer Boing MIG This should be a footer 114 Users Manual for InterForm400 User s Manual for InterForm400 115 Main Menu Local Environment Setup 2 Test Print Overlay With option 2 on the main menu you are able to make a test print of an overlay The choice of overlay is made in this display Test Print Overlay APF720D This program prints a test version of a given overlay No data is merged with it Overlay name Page control Blank all definitions of the overlay 1 overlay printed as page 1 2 overlay printed as page 2 and following 9 overlay printed as last page Code page SYSVAL SYSVAL Number Form type STD Copies CL 1 255 Drawer papertype PRINTER PRINTER OVERLAY 1 9 20 39 251 255 F3 Exit F4 List overlays Overlay Name Name of an overlay in the file set you have open F4 will prompt for overlay names Page Control Inserting 1 2 or 9 is used if Page Control is used and you want to test the definitions wh
108. on other AS 400 USQGCDDM eren kg oo SEY Y Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel Enter the Network name NetServer Name of the AS 400 you work on This name can be found with the command APF3812 DSPNETSVRA or can be found under other computers on your Client Access connected Windows PC This option is used in relation to the PCL viewer and the DDM features If you 26 Users Manual for InterForm4009 are in doubt you can also specify the IP address of the AS 400 without surrounding Sharename can be used for situations where you do not want to share the complete QDLS In InterForm400 it used mainly for the possibility of a graphical view If you instead have shared either the APF3812 folder or the APF3812 VIEW folder you can state the sharename here Note that you need to add the share before InterForm400 will accept this sharename Use e g the command APF3812 ADDFILSHR to share a folder Public authorisation When you view a merge graphically a temporary file is created in APF3812 VIEW You can restrict access to this file so that the public authority is EXCLUDE Then only the file creator and users profiles with authority ALLOBJ have access to the file i NOTE The change of PUBLIC authority of the files in QDLS APF3812 VIEW is only used when creating new files not when replacing existing To use the new authorisation delete the files in QDLS APF3812 VIEW that holds the names of your end users Do not not delete
109. page Output queue Library Form type Copies Printer type Interface S 5 Be does Output spooled file name Drawer S UE Seperator drawer User data EP dn E Hold output spooled file Save output spooled file OULtput e w xs eus Output document Output folder file and overlay KARTSET KLICHE SELNAM VRSION FILNVN JOB SPLNBR CODPAG OUTO FORMTYPE COPIES PRTTYP INTERF SPLFNAME DRAWER SEPDRAWER USRDTA HOLD SAVE OUTPUT OUTDOC OUTFLR APF3812 Character value Character value Character value PRI SEC Name NONE Name Name 000000 999999 Number ONLY LAST Number INPUT Name JOB INPUT Name LIBL Character value SID 01 255 INPUT IBM4019 IBM4029 SYSTEM SYSTEM850 Name INPUT PRINTER INPUT NONE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Character value INPUT NO YES NO YES PRINT VIEWER OUTDOC haracter value Q Replace document F3 Exit F4 Prompt F24 More keys F5 Refresh REPLACE NO_ F12 Cancel O YES Bottom F13 How to use this display The OUTPUT parameter is used to select what kind of output you want PRINT Using this value the output is a merge PCL spool file The file is placed in the output queue specified in the OUTQ parameter VIEWER This will merge and open Swiftview to display the result Should only be used in an interactive job OUTDOC This value requires the OUTDOC OUTFLR and REPLACE par
110. page 212 232 212 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Print Line The print line in the spool entry to search Position The column interval to search Oper The operator relating to the compare value The operators used are standard Query operators EQ Equal to compare value NE Not equal to compare value LT Less than compare value LE Less than or equal to compare value GT Greater than compare value GE Greater than or equal to compare value Compare value The character string case sensitive or numeric value which the operator should compare with The comparison is in reality done on hexadecimal values This means that eg the figure 1 which has EBCDIC value Fth is greater than the character Z which has EBCDIC value E9h Example 1 Level Break on Page Counter The page selection criteria will primarily be used when the spool data contains numbered recipient pages eg runs of invoices where each new invoice in the spool entry indicates paget By displaying the test spool entry we find a page count in Line 3 column 72 DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 3 F nctrionm e sss h Columns N78 Search for Hp Um E um a ee BO FO PP PT I Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 9000 Battleaxe DK Denmark Att Martin Merman 1004 PH 30 04 97 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver By stating the following information for the page selection criteria we make a level break every time the
111. page count is reset to 1 User s Manual for InterForm400 213 Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value 3 72 72 EQ 1 In the test spool entry you will discover that the two letters for Florence Flowers are numbered in succession The above definition will therefore see it to that no level break occur between these two letters which means they will be inserted into the same envelope or stapled together Go to section Using the Finishing Definition with Auto Forms Control in order to test the definition Find Recipient ID in the Following Positions This feature will make a level break on recipient variations found in the spool entry These fields can be combined with the Page Selection Criteria but they are more likely to be used alone If Page Selection Criteria is used then one of the three criteria lines must be true in order for the recipient ID fields to be checked The level break is made when one or more characters changes within one of the defined line and column intervals Print Line The print line in the spool entry to monitor Position The column interval to monitor Example 2 Level Break on Change in Customer Info The most commonly used method will be to monitor a Customer ID in a certain position A customer ID will most likely be printed on all pages for one recipient The following example monitors the customer ID in our test spool entry That means if the Cu
112. pels and printed in the font 1051 Times New Roman 10 pt User s Manual for InterForm4000 1 11 Creating the sub overlay for formatting the footer We press Enter and F3 and we enter 1 Design Overlay again to create our second sub overlay SUB2 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name SUB2 Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 9 Remap window 01 070 pos 01 070 top 7 000 left 1 000 L Seqnbr Type 1 0 B Remap window Input line Lt Position 70 Print From upper edge 7 000 Line spacing 40 From left edge 1 000 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment L ULRCNSIB E Rotation 000 Font 11 F4 List Blank original B B blank original version Condition Position see sees Is gt lt N Fll Delete Blank after E B Blank condition after We are not quite sure how many lines and positions the footer consists of We therefore define both the line interval to 1 5 5 lines are remapped from the Main overlay and position interval to 1 70 in order to be sure we get everything We define an upper edge of 7 7 000 in order to place the sub header one line below the header We select font 11 which is a Courier 10 and press Enter to save the definition 112 Users Manual for InterForm400 The result Below is the result when the spool entry is merged with the overlay MAIN The result is not intended to be a graphical wonder in any way but is merely intended to demonstrate the flexibility
113. position 8 and ends in position 40 User s Manual for InterForm400 85 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Segnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 I Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text 110 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kongev Seqnbr Type 8 0 8 Tabulator Input Line 2 15 15 Position B 70 Pring From left edge 4 Adjustment C U L C RN B Font 9906 F4 List Condition Position oS oe Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel As we can not be sure the subject header will not exceed position 40 we define a safety margin by including characters up to position 70 We define that the text should be centered around the middle of the page by defining 4 inches for the horizontal position and C for adjustment We select from the font list F4 a 18 point Univers font for the text We press Enter to save sequence line 8 86 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Step 7 Formatting the body text We now want to format the body text to print centered with a proportional spaced font We use the same procedure as in the
114. prt 8 See above Color 3 1 Black 2 Grey 3 Red F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view This enables printing of spool data text constants lines and frames in color on PCL compatible color laser printers TROUBLE SHOOTING Remember to select a color printer when printing to a PCL compatible color laser printer i4 NOTE 4 i Ink commands in main overlays will have not effect in conditioned suboverlays called 60 Users Manual for InterForm4009 8 TABULATOR Paragraph tabulation A tabulator performs formatting and horizontal movement of an interval of lines in the spool date Almost the same result can be obtained by using command type 9 Remap Window The line and position numbers to be entered are those appearing in the input regardless of a general margin or extra blank lines defined for the overlay Seqnbr Type 1 8 Tabulator Input Line poc des ce Position EA Rm Print From left edge Adjustment U L C RN SB Font F4 List Condition Position EM ERN Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr Input Line The line interval to read including both lines entered here Input Position The Column interval to read including both positions entered here From left Inches pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay If moved beyond the
115. release the demo spool file in output queue AFC_INPUT1 you will see that AFC will process the spool file according to the AFC entries made in the TEMPLATE definition however the resulting spool file will still be directed to the default output queue AFC_OUT1 which we have defined for AFC output queue AFC_INPUT1 User s Manual for InterForm400 169 2 Form Type Table An alternative to stating the Form Type directly in 12 Merge with Overlay refer to page 139 is to create a table which has all available form types listed Apart from having the forms listed in a well arranged manner the form types table gives the possibility of defining 3 copies with 3 different overlays for each page in the input spool entry Note that an AFC definition must be defined which lets the selection from the Forms type table take effect When selecting the menu point 2 Form Type Table from the Auto Forms Control administration menu the following screen will appear Enrollment of Form Types to Auto Forms Control AFC310D Form type of spooled file F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add form type Fll View 2 F12 Cancel The overlay selection entry field Pressing F6 to add a new form type results in the screen below Add form type to form type table AFC310D Form type Merge with File set Overlay name 3 Primary Secondary set Form Type COpIS S oublie And if filled in merge with File set Overlay name i Primary Secondary set
116. remap as we do not know how many item lines each item group will consist of We define a negative movement of 1 6 0 040 We press Enter and we get the following Screen Vertical cursor repositioning before execute of sub overlay Position related to actual position Number of pels 40 7599 5 99 5 Or reposition related to previous non blank input line Number of pels COs 999 F3 Exit F12 Cancel In this screen we offset the cursor 1 6 40 pels downwards to compensate for the negative movement we just made This may seem strange but the purpose is to generate an extra line between each item group This is needed because we want to split the ITEM header which was originally a single line into two lines We now press Enter to save the If then line and we define a new If then line that will 108 Users Manual for InterForm400 search for the footer Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MAIN Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 If lin 001 070 pos 011 014 ITEM Then SUB1 Seqnbr Type 2 0 I f 25 ZXnput line 1 70 Position 11 14 Is gt lt N This Then Overlay SUB2 Nos of lines to remap 05 Upper edge A A Left edge A _ Blank after _ B blank original text F3 Exit Fll Delete F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM We are not sure in which line the footer will appear so
117. same user profile will be the owner of the merged spooled file e WARNING 6 All exit programs called by InterForm400 must be owned by QSECOFR If it is not the AFC job will halt with an error message Change the owner with the command 146 Users Manual for InterForm400 O Exit This function will cause all remaining AFC functions sequence lines to be skipped If you want to insert AFC functions that are to be executed for all spooled files not specifically handled in previous lines you could use this function Just after handling a specific spooled file insert this function to exit from AFC Example Below we have defined that spooled files with form type DEMO should be merged with overlay IF 00DEMO spooled files with form type DEMO2 should be merged with overlay RULER and all other spooled files should be moved to output queue PRTO1 where they will be printed Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue AFC_INPUT1 Library APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0002 9 DEMO Exit 0003 0004 1 DEMO2 Merge Overlay RULER Fileset SAMPLE 0005 9 DEMO2 Exit 0499 0500 5 Move spooled file new outq PRTO1l library QUSRSYS F3 Exit F5 Service F13 Fold Unfold A Change attributes Seqnbr Function 1 0 A Change attributes Borm Type wh oda Form type SAME U
118. save sequence line 15 If you made a test print of the overlay or a PCL view with F14 at this stage you will discover that both the original text and the remapped text is printed as illustrated below This is just a temporary issue and is dealt with in step 17 400 permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model p cMsdg Seii P No Neiab odev No g d se chase Code 200 P10 4449079 F2 E7 20 AA User s Manual for InterForm400 89 Step 9 Making Equal Distance between Item Line Columns We now want to perform the same actions for the item line columns below the dotted line As the horizontal positions of the item line columns are identical to the column headers we can copy the sequence lines 11 to 15 and just correct the vertical position from upper edge and the input line numbers We select F5 for service functions and select 3 Copy definitions into this overlay Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0009 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0010 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0011 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 08 014 top 5 060 left 2 000 C 0012 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 15 025 top 5 060 left 3 000 C 0013 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 26 039 top 5 060 left 4 000 C 0014 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 40 053 top 5 060 left 5 000 C 0015 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6
119. see the APF3812 APF3812 command at page 405 Only additional parameters compared to the APF3812 APF3812 command are these Print mode PRINTMODE TEAROFF mean that you will manually tear of the labels REWIND can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll This requires special hardware installed PEELOFF will print only one label at a time waiting for the current label to be peeled off This also requires additional hardware CUTTER requires hardware cutter normally cuts the media for each print job unless you use CONTINUOUS then CUTTER will cut out each label Labels Continuous MEDIATRACK Select LABELS if the media contains of separate labels 410 Users Manual for InterForm4009 select CONTINUOUS if the media is not separated into labels in this case you would probably select CUTTER for the print mode parameter Media type MEDIATYPE Select TRANSFER if you use a non heat sensitive media otherwise use THERMAL i NOTE Creation of ZPL output from InterForm400 requires the purchase of the ZPL module for InterForm400 The Print ASCII File Command The APF3812 PRTASCF command prints a ASCII file to an output queue as a SCS spool file The ASCII file must be placed in IFS The contents of the ASCII file must be PRTCTL FCFC which means the first character of each line is a control code for the printer E g a 1 in position 1 is specifying that this line is to be printed as th
120. set SAMPLE you i should copy them to another file set prior to the following Also changes made to AFC definitions in AFC job queue AFC_INPUT1 will be overwritten by the default definitions of the InterForm400 demo 4 WARNING Do not place any user objects like output queues or programs in the APF3812 library Relations to Other Applications The InterForm400 system is developed for co existence with other applications Note the following The InterForm400 system does not change the library list and it is not necessary to have the library APF3812 in the library list You should not place any objects in the APF3812 library as this library is exchanged when upgrading InterForm400 Only InterForm4009 resources are copied to the new APF3812 library The InterForm400 system does not change local data areas If the InterForm400 system is called from another system the system does not SIGN OFF instead it returns to the calling program APF3812 APFMENU is not the initial program of the user If InterForm400 is running as a group job the InterForm400 main menu will show that you can suspend the InterForm400 system by pressing the ATTN button The system may create files in library QTEMP An abnormal termination will never harm the InterForm400 system 362 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Performance Printing InterForm400 generates very compact PCL code You will notice that using large image
121. shown in the PDF file Inserts bookmark in PDF output files If there is no lines with bookmark level code 0 the bookmarks will be shown automatically when opening the PDF file If there are more than one line with level 0 the last one will be used Level 0 lines outside the pagerange will be ignored Level 1 to 6 must be written in order and holes in this order are allowed Refer to page 238 for another way to insert PDF bookmarks Inserts addtional copies of each pages This works until the end of the spooled file or until another amp amp CPY command overrides it INPEL is an abbreviation for 2 chars defining inches and 3 for pels Use preceding zeroes The web address to link to followed by one or more spaces If additional text is found after the spaces this text will be shown in the PDF file for this link Insert the text below in the SCS spooled file to insert a link in the resulting PDF file to www intermate com with the text company appearing in the PDF file i amp SURI 03000 02120 000 0011 www intermate com company 396 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Example of using Escape Commands in the Data Stream Using the Edit Print Command APF3812 APFEDTPRT in InterForm400 below example has been created based on the Demo Spool Entry in InterForm400 In the example below we have made use of the escape commands for Font Frames images and Block formatting Furthermore we have created 2
122. sorted this way The function should be used prior to an overlay merge or a prinserter or PFE MailPrinter pre process Enter Menu point 5 Sort Definitions on the menu 5 Work With Auto Forms Control The following screen will appear Work with Sort Definitions SOR300D Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Name Description No Sort definitions F6 to create End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new sorter definition One sorter definition is specific for one type of print job and can be referred to by any number of queues defined in AutoFormsControl Update Sort Definition SOR310D Definition name PETER DesScrtptxOre us ceu quentes ue Sort IF400DEMO Insert separator page before start of new group YES NO YES Insert separator page if break in sort field no 1 l 5 F3 Exit F12 Cancel 230 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Definition name This name will be referred to by the AFC function D Sort Spooled File hidden Insert Pages before start of new group Stating YES will produce an extra page in the sorted spool entry with the text SEPARATOR PAGE inserted between each sorted group within the resulting spool entry The page will include the character string which met the sort criteria Insert separator page if break in sort field no This option defines the detail level for insertion of the sepa
123. specific Zebra ZPL parameters Printing speed and relative temperature Copy Management Here you can activate or change the attributes of Copy Management Refer to page 46 for more information Page definitions refers to Extended Page definitions Open up this folder and insert new lines by use of the this icon Create Additional Page Definition For more information of extended page definition refer to page 45 468 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The spool view When you design you can view the original spooled file and the resulting spooled file on the right Select the Spool view to see the original spooled file Text that has already been remapped or tabulated will be shown in grey Input Conditional 1004 PH 13 09 99 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code 44A2971 81 20 01 3 4449032 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on If the mouse pointer is placed in the spool view the current position is shown in the bottom to the right If you mark a conditional ele
124. specify if you want to encrypt or digitally sign the attached PDF file if you e mail Here is the explanations of the fields to fill in Encrypt PDF File State Y if you want to encrypt the PDF file User s Manual for InterForm4006 203 PDF Master Password State a password if needed that will open all the created PDF files with authority to do all User access limitations NONE Use this if you want no limitations on what the receiver can do with the created PDF file NOPRINT This limitation make it impossible to print the PDF file NOCOPY Disables the possibility to copy the contents text or graphics of the PDF file NOEDIT Makes it impossible to edit the PDF file Digitally Sign PDF File Enables inclusion of a digital signature in the PDF file Personal Certificate Here you can either state the name of an already installed certificate or refer to the certificate of the spooled files owner or sender Organisation If you state OWNER or SENDER as the personal certificate then the organisation stated will be used for looking up in the table shown in option 8 Work with E mail senders on the Auto Forms Control menu In this manner you can insert different signatures for the same sender owner depending on the organisation related to the current distribution or finishing definition Refer to details of 8 Work with E mail senders below for more information id NOTE 2 Digital signatures and passwords can only
125. spool entry If a default queue has been defined the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field Hold output spooled file This affects the status of the copied spooled file on the receiving queue Save output spooled file This will affect the spool file attribute SAVE of the copied spooled file 5zMove Spooled File Seqnbr Function 1 0 5 Move Spooled File New output queue DEFAULT Name DEFAULT USER LibraTw Bw wwe wee oo Hold output spooled file NO_ NO YES Save output spooled file NO_ NO YES F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel New Output queue Output from this process will move the spool entry to a new output queue Following sequence lines will therefore not process the spool entry If a default queue has been defined for this output queue see page 137 the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field The value USER indicates that the spooled file should be moved to the preferred queue of the spooled file owner Refer to page 244 for details of the user output queues and an example id NOTE If USER is used and the specific user is not on the list see page 244 the 6 Move command is ignored an exit is performed and the spooled file remains in the output Hold output spooled file This affects the status of the moved spooled file on the receiving queue User s Manual for InterForm400 145 Save output spooled file This will affect t
126. spooled file NO_ NO YES Save output spooled file NO_ NO YES As user data we state the same name of the overlay which will allow us to verify the spool entry on the output queue AFC_INPUT2 164 Users Manual for InterForm400 We press Enter to save this AFC definition Step 6 Cleaning up processed jobs The spool entry which was used for creating the new spool entry with overlays will stay in the queue with status ready unless we define an AFC function to handle it We have several possibilities We could just hold it with function 6 but we could also choose to move it to another queue in order to save it This queue could then be cleared every Friday when we are sure no re prints are needed Finally we could choose just to delete the job which we intend to do in sequence line 4 Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue i AFC INPUT2 Library Axe APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 F Change writer OUTQ Form type STD 0002 9 STD Exit 0003 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 4 0 7 Form EypeaU s a es e Be oe Re DEMO pave qUELPIBUDE 3 0 ee N Jobnatie x 39 Sess To Bs IR TEC 9s 13S Spooled file name D vice file uoce ox we RUSO Dubrarby x X5 A M3 oe xc SS tee VR NS Program that opened file Lib
127. ssses eee ee eee 400 ADDPRTSHR 000 eee eee 400 Administration llle 266 WALIE 20i h don b sine bona herbes 267 Add delete user 272 Appoint administrator Ls 267 Connect users with overlay files 274 Create delete file sets 273 Work with users 2 0 272 Advanced use of sub overlays 107 AFC Functions Archive to MultiArchive 400 151 Call program eee eee eee 146 Change attributes 147 Change writer 0 000 150 Copy spooled file 145 Delete spooled file 0 146 EXD uc cuc Re Eme Sanne a side 147 Hold spooled file 146 Merge with overlay 140 Move spooled file 145 Prepare for finishing 148 Send network spooled file 143 Sort spooled file 00 149 Split spooled file 0 0 148 Transform AFPDS to USERASCII 144 AECOPER 3 xem pee dr lere 132 AFP data stream 0055 132 144 AFPTOASCII CL command 405 APF3812 CL command 405 APF3812 ADDFILSHR s 400 APF3812 ADDPRTSHR 400 APF3812 APFMENU 00 5 33 APF3812 CHGNETSVRA 400 APF3812 CPYCPISPLF 406 APF3812 DSPNETSVRA 400 APF3812 ENDNETSVR 401 APF3812
128. te DIbraBy Mets ors CSS ODE wx D Program that opened file Tpprary x gum woe ue OX In this example we only want to E mail spool files with the form type EMAIL Press Enter to get the view below Seqnbr Function 2 0 P Send spooled file as PDF email Overlay mame X See Ato Ae ie k IF400DEMO_ Pale Be Lxx arara ARX xA SAMPLE or overlay selector Primary Secondary set PRI PRI SEC Merge overprint lines NO NO YES Save emadl 4055 Stee ge de ede vers NO_ NO YES Notice As the Finishing definition is splitting up the original spool file the P function is executed for each of the splitted spool files This is done in order to keep track of what E mails that got though and which ones that did not In this manner it is easier to resend a specific mail if necessary ie WARNING amp You have to make sure that Auto Forms Control executes a Finishing Definition of type i 5 E mail for the spool file prior the function P Send PDF E mail If you fail to do that the Auto Forms Control job will halt with an error AFC7002 InterForm unable to send email ifrom output queue library output queue C R I i IMPORTANT When defining a merge with overlay for a pre processed PFE MailPrinter finishing definition the overlay or selector name entered must be for the contents of the envelope ie WARNING The Prinserter are in reality HP PCL5e com
129. text definition is made 198 Users Manual for InterForm400 Change E mail cover page text MAI345D Definition name DEMO Descriptioh d xxx Distribution of the Demo spool file E mail text version GB Description w m Seok Qe ex Demo spool file English ver __ E mail subject 4 amp 4 V4 Text and format H T Text H HTML R Raw HTML E mail text 20 voe Por V2 4 WVLb Please read the attached file containing a message for you from Intermate The reason why you have received this mail is that you are registered as our contact person at Vl Please let us know if that is incorrect PDF file name 2 x 2 2 4 DEFAULT Fax cover page overlay IFA400DEMO Name NONE F4 Prompt Pule eet x x 2 2 Se x x SAMPLE F3 Exit F12 Cancel The E mail text version is a name identifying this e mail text Here we have created a text definition that could be used for the english speaking customers GB Text and format With this you specify how the e mail text is to be presented in the final e mail T Text The contents is shown in a fixed font courier H HTML HTML codes automatically inserted so the contents are shown in a proportional font arial R Raw HTML Raw HTML codes in the contents can be included As the subject of the mail the subject from the spool file is used V4 In the message text we insert both the name of the receiver V2 and th
130. the service function to adjust the vertical positioning of the entire range of lines from 16 to 20 We press F5 and we select option 1 Move the placement on the page User s Manual for InterForm400 91 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0017 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 060 left 3 000 0018 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 060 left 4 000 0019 E Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 060 left 5 000 0020 9 Remap window 38 042 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 DEGA In this function you can move the overlay up down or left rigth on the page Line interval to be moved 0016 0020 Distance to move to the right downwards 0 040 1 line at 6 Ipi is 1 6 equaling 40 pels 40 240 meaning our vertical movement should be 0 040 When we press Enter we discover that the top position of the entire range changes from 5 060 to 5 100 Step 10 Defining the Column Headers White on Black Now we would like to make the column headers appear with white text on a black background First we will need to define a black box which is created as a frame with black filling It is very important that the frame is defined in a sequence line before the text in order to place it as a background for the text We therefore insert a line before line 11 which is the remapping of the column header Model Insertion between li
131. the Overlay Spool Data Before we start changing things we will make a printout of the overlay so we know what we have to begin with We press F3 to exit to the main menu Enter menu 3 Merge spool entry with overlay Merge Spooled File with Overlay APF730D Overlay name MYDEMO or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Spool file no l Primary 2 Secondary Number ONLY LAST Code page CI Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Form type STD Copies aa 1255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Libbaby 42 x 2 APF3812 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel MYDEMO is already filled in because it was the last overlay active in the design menu Now go to the lower part of the screen and fill in queue AFC_INPUT1 and library APF3812 In the Getting Started section page 30 we created a DEMO spool entry This is still placed in the queue with the description PRTCTL If you can t find the spool entry you can create it using option 1 Create demo spool entry see page 337 We press Enter to look at entries in queue AFC_INPUT1 User s Manual for InterForm400 79 Work with Output Queue Queue AFC_INPUT1 Library APF3812 Type option Press Enter 1 Select 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 8 Attributes Opt
132. the Windows installation JRE You need to restart your PC to complete the installation Installing and setting up the InterForm400 Graphical Designer 462 Users Manual for InterForm4009 You install the graphical designer from InterForm400 by entering InterForm400 with the command APF3812 APFMENU and selecting 80 Administering InterForm 400 12 Service functions and 70 Install InterForm Designer on your PC If this installation fails you can also find the installation file for the graphical designer in the IFS APF3812Home Designer Find the directory with the highest number and download the exe file to your PC and double click on the file Starting the Graphical Designer If you have chosen to install a shortcut or Quick launch during install you can click on that af to start up the graphical designer The icon looks like this InterForm Design You can also start up the graphical designer by selecting Start Programs InterForm InterForm Design and InterForm Design You will be presented with this screen InterForm Design xj Username kse Password rois AS 400 Server asebat bi ores State your user profile password and the Netserver name or IP address of the iSeries that you run InterForm400 on and click on Login Wait about 10 seconds depending on the PC and the iSeries and the graphical designer will start up If you are not
133. the file set FRINV for customer A TEAM B are designing a Danish credit note named CREO02 in the file set DKINV for customer B Then TEAM A and TEAM B both need to distribute their overlays to the customers First TEAM A creates a library named TEAMA and export the overlay INVOO3 from file set FRINV Then TEAM A creates a distribution a save file named EXPORT INV in library TEAMA At the same time TEAM B creates a library named TEAMB and export the overlay CRE002 from file set DKINV and creates a distribution a save file named EXPORT CRE in library TEAMB The TEAMA EXPORT INV save file can now be sent to customer A and the TEAMB EXPORT CRE save file can now be sent to customer B Restoring the savefile TEAMA EXPORT INV at customer A s site and running the APFIMPRSC command will import the INV003 overlay to customer A s system Likewise Restoring the savefile TEAMB EXPORT CRE at customer B s site and running the APFIMPRSC command will import the CREO02 overlay to customer B s system The CL program to restore the overlay at customer A s site might look like this PGM RSTLIB LIB TEAMA DEV TAPOI APF3812 1MPAPFRSC SAVF TEAMA EXPORT I NV ENDPGM User s Manual for InterForm400 479 Appendix Q The PDF Security module The PDF Security module of InterForm400 is installed with InterForm400 and can be enabled if you insert the correct license code It opens up for the possibility to Encrypt PDF files creat
134. the following options s Form Type PEY DEMO 5 1 Send Network Spooled File 1001 5 2 Send PDF E mail 1003 5 1004 5 Option F3 Exit F12 Cancel End gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve Fll View 2 F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom F20 Writers F21 Description F22 Printers So if the spooled file is SCS you can use option 2 to merge the spooled file with an overlay and send the merged PDF file as an attachment in an e mail In this manner you can send the e mail interactively The Display Black White image Command The command APF3812 DSPBWIMG can be used for graphically viewing a black and white TIFF image using SwiftView If the image has been imported to InterForm400 via option 8 Work with Images in the Administration Menu only the parameters IMAGE and RESOLUTION has to be filled out then the TIFF image is a member in the APF3812 IMAGE file If the image is not placed in the APF3812 IMAGE file this image can be viewed by stating FILE as the IMAGE parameter and the file and member name as the FILE and MBR parameters Display Black White image DSPBWIMG Type choices press Enter Image v uve du ue out ub ie uS NI um NI ecu MAGE FILE Name FILE RESOLUCION Su x xx ouo ox uoc RESOLUTION 300 Ty 100 X350 200 IDA NU PN NS ES MES CDS Ab hits FILE Name Library LIBL Name LIBL CURLIB Member s4 ou wl e 4815 4e Wet MBR um a Name Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Ca
135. the pitch and height of the font number are exactly the same as stated in the description of the barcode soft font Calculating barcode height The height of the font is entered in dots 1 300 of an inch The following relations will assist you when entering the barcode height in dots 292 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Inches and dots 1 inch 240 pels 300 dots Centimeters and dots 1 cm 95 pels 118 dots 5 Create bar code soft font Selecting option 5 Create bar code soft font will result in the following screen Create barcode Soft font FNTOOO Select one of the following options Code 39 Code 128 EAN 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 EAN8 EAN13 UPC A BACON Dp Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel 1 Code 39 This bar code can consist of the alphanumeric characters 0 9 A Z Capital letters and some special characters e g 96 You can define if a Checksum should be calculated and if unrecognized or unprintable characters should be replaced with blanks Extended code 39 The extended code 39 is a general purpose code which can code any ASCII character any character you can enter from the keyboard by normal means This code is double the size of the standard code 39 as it uses two code 39 characters for each of the 128 ASCII characters To enable extended code 39 enter YES for Full ASCII mode 2 Code 128 and EAN128 These barcodes can consist of all alphanumeric chara
136. the report in its entirety 262 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Print Joint Report APF710D Report name Form type A4 Copies a 1 99 F3 Exit F4 Overview report definitions Report name The name of the report you wish to print out If you do not remember the name you can press F4 to get a list of report names to choose from Form type The Form type of the resulting printout Default STD Copies 1 99 of the entire report Once you press Enter the system begins to create the report For each individual printout in the report which requires input in form of a spool entry you have to complete the following screen Print Joint Report APF730D Report name Report description MONTH_REP Monthly report Print out type 3 Overlay PROFIT Description Profit Report Corresponding print out is in spool entry Job name User Job number File name 2 Spool file no no ONLY LAST Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue Library F3 Exit F12 previous display Fl6 print empty overlay This screen shows which Overlay is being merged with the spool entry you fill in on the lower part of the screen Corresponding print out is in spool entry Spooled file attributes can be entered here User s Manual for InterForm400 263 If you do not know the identification or perhaps find it too labourious to enter all information you may instead specify the ou
137. to start working with Zebra output you need to create a Zebra File set Refer to page 273 for how to do that This module is included in the classic package User s Manual for InterForm400 19 The PDF and E mailing Module If you want to create PDF files in InterForm400 and or send E mails with attached PDF files you need this module This module is included in the classic package The PDF Security Module If you want to encrypt PDF files created by InterForm400 and or digitally sign them then you need this module Note that you also need to buy the PDF and E mailing module if you do not have the classic package Refer to Appendix Q on page 480 for more information The InterWord400 Module Can be used as a substitute for OfficeVision400 It converts OV 400 documents into RTF format Offers also the possibility to do mail merge directly on the iSeries Ask your local InterForm400 reseller for more details The InterFax400 Module The InterFax400 module enables distribution of the InterForm400 documents via facsimile The InterFax400 modules ensures a correct translation of the InterForm400 documents This is done in combination with the E mail Fax finishing definition in InterForm400 Note that InterFax400 is only supported for V5R1 or newer 20 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Getting Started The idea of the following procedure is to give you a safe and easy start on the InterForm400 system No knowledge on InterForm400 is re
138. type the command APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF KARTSET SAMPLE KLI CHE IF400DEMO FILNVN QPRI NT SPLNBR LAST BMKDEF DEMOSPOOL OUTTYPE VI EW This will create a pdf file with the same name as your user ID in the APF3812 VIEW folder If you have access to this folder from your PC and you have associated PDF with Acrobat Reader it will show you the result automatically Go through the setup described in Appendix L if Acrobat Reader does not start or does not show the PDF file User s Manual for InterForm400 243 User Output Queue This feature offers the possibility to move any spooled file to a user dependent output queue It can be reached from the InterForm400 Main Menu by first selecting 5 Work with Auto Forms Control and then 7 User output queue Work with user output queues AFC315D EOSTELON TO Wo WW e User profile Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete Opt User profile Output queue Library _ KSE HP5SI QUSRSYS _ PDC PRTO1 QUSRSYS SR IMA7000 QUSRSYS F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Here you state a preferred output queue for each user profile You distribute spooled files depending on the spooled file owner by use of a 5 Move Spooled File line in AFC Refer to page 145 for details Example Distribute Spooled Files depending on Spooled File Owner The table of User Output Queues above can e g be used for a task like this Several users use an application that always prints to one
139. value 40 Failure to fill in this value will default to a linespacing of zero resulting all text to be printed in one line Enabling this option will cause all blank lines to be discarded formatting of the character string Valid values are U Un formatted The character string is printed without any changes to formatting and spaces L Left adjustment Spaces proceeding the first character in the character string are removed causing the string to be left adjusted at the position indicated by From left C Centred Spaces within the character string before and after printable characters are being removed and the string is centred around the position indicated by From left R Right adjustment Spaces following the character in the character string are removed causing the string to be right adjusted at the position indicated by From left N Numeric Indicates if the characters in the character string should be considered as numbers amounts B Print succeeding spaces in barcode data Indicates if the spaces in the coloumn interval succeeding the barcode data should converted to barcode This only apply to the barcodes 128 and 30f9 The barcodes will always be left adjusted E Full Justification aligning both left and right margins This function enables changes to the number of letters per line based on the font size and the max line width of the justification Distance between words is automatically adjusted Maximum line
140. was specified when the file set was created Answer Y to confirm that the chosen file set should be connected with the user The display changes as you can see here User s Manual for InterForm400 275 Connect users with overlay and report file sets A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets Several users may be connected with the same file set User profile PETER Peter Hansen This user is connected with the following file sets TEST Peter Hansen s personal test file set Specify name of file set to be connected with disconnected from user Connect file set with user Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel Press F3 when all required file sets have been assigned 276 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 277 Working with Fonts InterForm400 exploits resident and down loaded PCL fonts of HP compatible printers independent of their attachment to the AS 400 Intermate InterForm400 has a built in conversion table between IBM font ID s known from the IBM 3812 page printer and the substituted look alike PCL fonts of the HPII PCL4 HPIII PCL5 and HP4 PCL5e compatible printers This means that the native font conversion tables of interfaces the Client Access printer sessions or other protocol converter functions are NOT used for selection of fonts in the forms overlays or the spool entries being used for filling of the forms RESIDENT FONTS Appendix F refer t
141. with X axis points for the specific group as seen below 440 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Work with X axis points You can assign X axis points to an existing X axis group by using option 12 Work with X axis points in front of the group as described above In the example above where we have created a group called Month we might add 12 X axis points for that group marking the 12 months of the year Work with X axis points CHX200D Chart e 08 20 2 NE T SAMPLELINE Tepe IAS Aene M Nt LORS UE Jus LINE X axis group I CONT E G1 Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Assign new seq nbr to X axis point Opt Seq number ID Text Spc No X axis points to display End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel If you press F6 Create to create a new X axis point the following is displayed Create X axis group CHX110D Chast RENE MYBAR Type fe sev her Sek ey Saves ar Be fee US BAR Seq number 1 X axis group ID A TEZE a enr Be e t VY ae Ie a Jan Text FONT s e p 6 u 5 715 ali Text font color v Relative spacing 60 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Seq number Sequence number which decides the order of the axis points X axis point ID ID of the X axis point for this specific X axis group This ID must be unique i e no other X axis point can have the same ID not even in other X axis groups Text Text below the chart to mark this poin
142. word are moved to the next line NL New line forces the following text to begin at the next line Half line up superscript Half line down subscript End half line up down End underlining ends half line up down and set font to font specified in the amp amp BLA command font number Change to APF font number amp amp BLO Block BLO Adds a line of text to the block Text to be printed incl any esc sequences The line of text will be included with other amp amp BLO commands and wrapped to fit the line width specified in the amp amp BLA command A amp amp BLA command must proceed any BLO command User s Manual for InterForm400 395 Command amp 8 amp BMK Bookmark level code 0 6 Code telling if bookmark on higher level should be open to start with 0 Closed 1 Open Colour number Non numeric will be interpreted as black Code for focus 0 Show page 1 Show specific place on the page specified by Y coordinate sign distance top edge Blank is absolute is relative to place of the command Y Coordinate Absolute relative distance from the top of the page Insert as inches and pels IIPPP with preceding zeroes Bookmark text 8 CPY Number of copies amp amp URI Sign distance top edge Distance to paper top edge INPEL Sign distance left edge Distance to left paper edge INPEL Rotation Font Link Optionally followed by lt Space gt and text to be
143. x 509 certificate Select this option and you will see a list of the installed certificates Work with Certificates CER200D POSICION ie v nio n a eh n Certificate Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Certificate Description Valid to Cert type No Certificates to display End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F11 View 2 F12 Cancel Press F6 Create to add a new certificate and you will see the screen below 2 If you get the error Program import not found after pressing F6 Create and you run OS400 V5R2 you should make sure that you have PTF SI10101 or superseding PTF e g 8113932 for product 5722SS1 installed Create Certificate CER302D Type choices press Enter Certificate File Information Certificate s a x AU SE Description Certificate for Kim Egekjaer Path hs dedo tis Jay esie Jey e aere CURES IIS gt Filename e 4 ne gt KSE CPRCEITO gt Dette alias 2 4 ac vie gt Password Certificate Behaviour Information Cert type COMP COMP ORG PERS Cert authority PUBLIC PUBLIC user profile Active period 01 01 05 12 31 05 Secure from move Y Y Yes N No Imported Certificate Information Cert usage 3 Gears bey US Valid period 01 01 01 01 01 01 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Expand F12 Cancel The fields on the screen have these functions Certifi
144. you are only using one laser printer for manual merges option 3 in the main menu you can specify it here If you have more than one laser printer you may wish to assign printers to users individually This is done under Work with InterForm400 users The advantage of operating with standard output queues is clearly that users avoid having to select an actual output queue each time they enter the InterForm400 system The system supports a number of different printers Besides the types mentioned in the above screen the system supports all other laser printers which emulates an HP printer If your printer is not mentioned you should specify HPII in the field Printer type Refer to page 374 for detailed information on supported printers You must also specify how your printer is connected to the AS 400 See page 378 for detailed information on supported interfaces protocol converters Use ASCII850 if in doubt If you have more than one printer type connected to AS 400 you should allow users to override the default printer type Press Enter and the next screen is displayed 268 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 2 7 Specify default form type for the InterForm 400 system Users may override value when using the system Form type STD Select paper size 4 1 LETTER 5 COM 10 A LEDGER 2 LEGAL 6 MONARCH B A3 3 EXECUTIVE 7 C5 C A5 4 A4 8 DL Do you want to define paper size on the ind
145. 0 sese 459 Setup of SMTP ost teaser n ERREUR ERI AE 459 Combining SMTP and Domino 400 on the same machine 460 Requirements forthe PC 000 eee eee 461 Requirements for the network 0000 eee eee eee 461 Limitations of the Graphical Designer llle 462 Installing the Graphical Designer ssl 462 Installing JAVA Environment iles eere 462 Installing and setting up the InterForm400 Graphical Designer 462 Starting the Graphical Designer 00 0 0c eee eee 463 Start designing an overlay 0 0 c eects 463 Create a new overlay 0 0 c cece 464 Edit an existing overlay 0 0 c eee eee 464 Open a Spooled File 00 00 c eee eee 464 Settings and tools forthe design 0 0 cee eee eee ee 465 Changing the displayed size 0000 eee eee 465 Previewing the result in Acrobat reader or SwiftView 465 Other Design preferences 000 cece eee eee 465 Designing the overlay 000 cee ete 467 The spoot VIEW wif ce analieow 24 etek ERO os eine eee Du 469 The Result Views re acucckESSSseRCRESEERe eORSDERUMEENUERISR 470 Inserting design elements 0 000 eee eee eee 472 Local save in the designer 0 0 0 eee eee eee 474 Movement of elements in the result view 0005 474 Grouping and ungrouping elements 00 eee eae
146. 0 manual for additional information on general operation of Auto Forms Control Activate the Finishing pre process definition In the following we have created a new AFC queue called PFE IN and we define our first AFC definition line to be CzPrepare for Finishing By entering a Form type we can limit the preparation to specific input spool entries in this case spool files with Form type DEMO Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue PFE IN Library QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program No functions defined Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 1 0 C PFOCM CYPE du AJ see cer er War vee fey www gw vs DEMO Save attribute Jobname xps Spooled file name Device file Library x ox ee a Program that opened file Library V ve pep Portes EFE FOf ES Fs F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel This function will read a spool entry with Form type DEMO and create a new spool entry with Form type PFEREADY and return it to the output queue PFE IN Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue PFE IN Library QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program No functions defined Seqnbr Function 1 0 Cc Prepare for Finishing Finish definition name PFEDEF1 Output queue for prepared print PFE IN rr 2 MEN ee oe a GS QUSRSYS Form type s PFEREADY__ F3 Exit F4
147. 0 and 9999 which are already occupied In the following we have chosen font ID 7001 to represent our 70 point Univers font Description additional fonts APF360D PR a ule aqu m que Be S 7001 Other fonts LOSCHLBELDON vos 14 ue ue i Univers Bold Italic 70 Point SPACINGS M E NES d O Fixed 1 Proportional DT Chit ah RS _0 10 0 10 49 99 Height ou ee eae eae s _70 00 1 00 792 00 Styber al eo vig S uuum us 1 O Upright 1 Italic 4 Condensed 5 Condensed italic Stroke weight 9 7 7 0 Medium lt 0 Light gt 0 Bold Tepeface gy uw tay de deos _4148 0 65535 Symbodbtset war Aber Ash oh ur 6 blank standard Override spacing blank standard F11 Delete F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Now font 7001 and the description Univers Bold Italic 70 point will appear in the list of available fonts prompted by F4 anywhere in the InterForm400 system where you can insert a font ID If you press F4 in this menu you will get a list of the user defined fonts and bar codes only Printing HELLO with Font 7001 will now give this result H f i i 282 Users Manual for InterForm4009 2 Work with soft fonts for PCL This function gives you the possibility to work with soft fonts create soft fonts from TTF files and to download soft fonts to printers Work with PCL Soft Fonts FNT310D POSICION TO siapa r Font member name Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print 8 Dsp attributes 9 Download Opt Member
148. 00 You can print this from the menu 12 Service Functions under the administration menu Our intention is to make a selector which prints all letters of the spool entry regarding the MateSert 400 driver with the overlay IFA00DEMO delivered with this system For pages regarding InterForm we want to use the modified version MYDEMO which was created in section Getting Familiar with Overlays Step 1 Placing overlays in One File set As one selector is limited to operate with overlays from the same file set we will first make a copy of the overlay IFAO00DEMO from fileset SAMPLE into file set TEST First make sure you are standing in file set TEST check upper right corner If not you should change file set with option 8 on the main menu Enter option 1 Design Overlays on the main menu Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO F3 Exit F4 List overlays F12 Cancel Here we can type in the same name as the overlay in file set SAMPLE There will be no conflict of names as they are located in separate file sets Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF 400DEMO Overlay text Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions _0 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _0 0 99 Font 0066_ INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def N X N Drawer Papertype PRINTER
149. 00 is in use while the upgrade is taking place Then inform the InterForm400 users to leave InterForm400 before pressing F10 to continue when the Confirm update of InterForm screen appears 360 Users Manual for InterForm4009 INS0123 InterForm 400 version 2006M01 INTERO2 Select installation method press Enter Installation method 2 l Rename without warning 2 Rename with warning During install the library APF3812 will be reanmed APF38120LD For method 2 a display will be shown before the library is renamed and subsystem AUTO FORM will be ended F3 Exit F12 Cancel Select whether to start subsystem AUTO FORM automatically when installation is complete INS0124 InterForm 400 version 2006M01 INTERO2 Select AFC subsystem start option press Enter Start AEQ x5 xm ke Bee See Be ox 1 1 Start subsystem 2 Do not start subsystem Select whether to start subsystem AUTO_FORM automatically when installation is complete F3 Exit F12 Cancel If you selected option 2 for nstallation Method the following screen will be shown when InterForm400 is ready to complete the release update Press F10 when you are ready to complete the installation Press F10 to begin the upgrade INS0129 InterForm 400 version 2006 M01 INTERO2 Start installation with selected options DEGC We too x Bek Be es Qe ea i OPTO1 Category t eo Mex eee ed OPT CISC RISC ir an Lio URS CAL oA fas US RISC Licen
150. 009 Step 3 Create font ID for the Arial soft font 8 Before we can use the arial font in an overlay we must describe the font to the system We select option 7 Work with fonts in the InterForm400 administration menu and then option 1 Description of additional fonts We will define a font number for our Arial font 9 We enter 5001 and get the following screen Create Font APF370D HOME Mo al ak tad a tk 8 d 5001 Other fonts Description Arial 24 point Italic Bold Spacingss 2 2 2 3 8 33 3 8 1 O Fixed 1 Proportional PICO SA tc te Re ee Be oe ES 1 00 0 10 49 99 Herghb Wales Md d rs 24 00 1 00 792 00 Si ACAD ot oe ois ate is obs 18 ca a T O Upright 1 Italic 4 Condensed 5 Condensed italic Stroke weight 3 7 7 0 2Medium 0O Light gt 0 Bold Typeface r o3 o5 o oye os 33000 0 65535 Symbol Set x 3 5 ARASA uS blank standard Override spacing blank standard F3 Exit F12 Cancel First we state the Font ID 5001 which has the highest priority after the Symbol set which was defined as CodePage850 under step 4 Then we state proportional spacing 1 for the Pitch Pitch is not used for Proportional spaced fonts 24 point Height Italic style and Stroke weight bold 23 For the typeface we use any number in the interval 32769 65535 We select 33000 in this case Step 4 Define auto download of fonts Arial and OCRB Finally we need to add download information for the
151. 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text T10 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Konge Select one of the following options 1 Move the placement on the page 2 Move definitions to another sequence number 3 Copy definition into this overlay 4 Delete lines 5 Resequencing 6 Print overlay definition Option We select option 6 And press Enter and the definitions are being printed Step 5 Adding Round Corners to the Address Field The first thing we want to do with our overlay is to make round corners on the address field frame This frame has sequence line number 4 We type 4 in the option field and press Field Exit as it is a numeric field The screen will then show all the available overlay element types Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 E Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text T10 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Konge Seqnbr Type Page
152. 07 120 Seqnbr Type 3 1 7 Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern 8 blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We enter 8 for 100 shading Black and we press Enter to save our new line 4 User s Manual for InterForm400 97 Step 14 Defining the Copy Management We will now add the text COPY on page two copies only To do this we will first have to enable and configure the copy management We press F12 to exit to the global settings Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name ITF 400DEMO Overlay text Line spacing 040___ in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions 0 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _0 0 99 Font 0066_ INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def N Y N Drawer PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 9 20 39 Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side Copy management Y Y N Duplex print N N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin EE in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement _ B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view We state Y for Copy Management in order to be able to let our overlay control the number of copies and the overlay elements which should be used on each copy refer to
153. 12 60 Install SwiftView at drive C 70 Install InterForm Designer on your PC 80 Prepare server to support InterForm Designer Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel 1 Create Demo Spool Entry If you want to study the Auto Forms Control sample delivered with this program this option will create a spool entry in a format which could have been the output from a common AS 400 application Create Demo Spooled File SMP001D This program will print a demo spooled file in the APF3812 AFC INPUT1 outq The printout is intended for being merged with the IF400DEMO overlay from the file set SAMPLE If the AUTO FORM subsystem is started the merge operation is carried out automatically by Auto Forms Control Output from the merge operation will be placed in the APF3812 AFC_OUT1 outq from where it can be printed on a HPIII or similar PCL5 printer Before the AUTO FORM subsystem is started for the first time you must call the APF3812 AFCINSTALL program The subsystem is then started with this command STRSBS APF3812 AUTO FOR Press Enter to create the printout F3 Exit F12 Cancel You can create the same spool entry several times which gives you the possibility to experiment with different attributes for the spool entries SAVE YES NO formtype change etc User s Manual for InterForm400 337 5 Display All Displayable Characters This option is meant as a tool to solve problems with charac
154. 2 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text 110 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kongev 0008 8 Tabulator lin 015 015 pos 08 070 left 4 000C font 9907 t Seqnbr Type Inch pel E PR E T Image From top edge 09 100 From left 02 120 Image name DEMOIMAGE Reverse Image R R Reverse Image Resolution 150 75 100 150 200 300 600 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We position the logo where a signature would usually be placed namely in the bottom of the page We select the same image file as used for the top logo We state R to reverse the image and we press Enter to save the corrections to the new sequence line 2 The logo is created for printing in 300 dpi so in order to scale to double size we simply define the resolution to be 150 dpi that means we simply get twice as much space between every dot in the image The logo now needs to be dimmed in order to appear as a watermark For this we change the ink of the image This is the same procedure we used for printing the column headers white on black We insert a sequence line just before the image by entering line 1 1 and we select 7 for Ink 96 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Ov
155. 323 12 Work with images in ZEBRA flash memory Position to 4 Delete Opt Outq ZEBRA ZEBRA ZEBRA ZEBRA F3 Exit F5 Refresh Type options press Enter Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS F6 Create Work with images in Zebra flash memory Outq Library Image member Image member Orientation LOGO E LOGO N LOGO S LOGO W F12 Cancel Flash drive E E E E With this feature you can download images onto the flash memory of a Zebra printer Only images with names consisting of up to 7 characters can loaded into the flash memory When you add an image to this list a spooled file is created that will do the load of the image This spooled file will also print out the downloaded image with the specified rotation Rotation can be N E W or S for North East West and South These equals rotations 000 270 090 and 180 degrees in the same order 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images This option will work exactly as option 19 with the same name on the 7 Work with Fonts menu Refer to page 316 for more information 324 Users Manual for InterForm4009 9 Work with PCL Files The InterForm400 system features a possibility to import PCL files from a PC by the following methods From a PCL spooled file USERASCII on an AS 400 output queue PCL print file placed in folder APF3812 using Client Access Shared Folder The PCL file can be created in any PC P
156. 33 Measuring senim r seka ir eer re os ec 48 Menu structures and general operation 33 Merge overprint lines 118 Merge spool entry with overlay 117 Merging overlays with OfficeVision print 424 MICR printing 0 22005 290 Modules of InterForm400 19 Move Spooled file 0008 145 Spooled file depending on user 145 244 MRGSPLEPDE wie ium ue epe 410 MRGSPLFZPL ssss esses 410 IIE UD 5a ode cz Rn e Rein pte ce 38 MultiArchive400 200005 151 Nesting of overlays 00008 67 Netserver commands ADDFILSHR 0 000 400 ADDPRTSHR 0 000 400 CHGNETSVRA sess 400 DSPNETSVRA ssssss 400 ENDNETSVR sssssesss 401 RMVNETRSHR 00 055 401 STRNETSVR 00000 eee eee 401 N tmeriG 5 5 aos ch EC aes 61 64 OCRA i ab RR adn 290 OCHRCB cii em pue Tee ux 290 298 OfficeVision Merging with 5 424 Using HP Macro 424 OneWorld ss saio eee a ae es 409 OneWorld spool file Convert 409 Operalots o oe ek Me einer eee 124 174 Orientation of design elements 48 OSC Output Schedule Control 246 Other Environments Mail merge llle 426 Merging with ASCII 427 Output Bin support 00 332 Output Schedule Control 246
157. 4 will prompt for overlay names If you have defined Copy Management for the overlay see page 53 and 46 you can test if you have made the correct selection of overlay elements by printing the overlay elements for one of the two sets only If this field is left blank default the system will as default pick the Primary set If you have defined an Overlay Selector you can test if it is able to pick the correct overlay In this case Overlay Name above must be blank refer to section Working with Overlay selectors page 122 Spooled file attributes can be entered here There is an alternative to typing all the information manually If you type the name of an output queue in the bottom of the screen and press Enter you can retrieve the information about the spool entry from a view of the selected output queue by selecting with option 1 User s Manual for InterForm400 117 Queue PRTHP3 1 Select 2 Change gt Work with Output Queue Library QUSRSYS Type options press Enter 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 8 attributes Opt File User User Data Sts Pages Copies Form Type Pty i OPRINT INTERMATE INVOICE RDY ae 1 STD 5 QPRINT INTERMATE PROFIT RDY 5 1 STD 5 Parameters for option 2 F3 Exit Fll View 2 F12 Previous F21 Description F24 More keys Code page Merge overprint lines Form type Copies Drawer If the system is used by multiple countries national characters may get printed di
158. 4101 4113 4197 16901 24591 24623 24703 and 25093 are printed as Times New Roman Courier is used for all fonts with fixed width If you want to use other type faces you have to install the font as a True Type Font TTF See page 289 IFS directories used by MRGSPLFPDF When using the MRGSPLFPDF command a directory called APF3812Mail is created in IFS Inside the APF3812Mail directory another 3 directories are created APF3812Mail Log If you specify SAVE YES in order to save the e mail the e mail will be saved as an Outlook mail in this directory APF3812Mail MergeLog In earlier versions of InterForm400 a copy of each created PDF file was saved in this directory It is a good idea to clean up this directory APF3812Mail OutBox This directory holds the e mails that can not be sent if e g the Mail Server Framework is not started This can be started with the command STRMSF APF3812Mail PDFtemp Directory for temporary work files used when creating PDF files Used files are automatically deleted User s Manual for InterForm400 353 Refer to page 459 for information of how to enable SMTP on the AS 400 354 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 355 Appendix A Installation System Requirements Your AS 400 system must run at least OS 400 version 4 release 4 modification O or newer Note that from the next year version i e the 2006 versions only OS400 V5R1MO or newer will be sup
159. 475 Appendix P Import Export extension esee 477 Multiple Export Libraries MEL feature 0000 0c eee eee 477 Descriptio saure ud mee ae ee hide ha aren E RE Giese 477 Activation deactivation 00 00 c eee ee 477 Usage eed hey ars Retake hie Pe eee lan hapa dte 477 The Import InterForm Ressources IMPAPFRSC command 477 RestrictiOnSs os cared tye a RC Ru ae RR Super oes 478 Parameters siisii aa aa a a a a a a a aara aa 478 Examples ss gane wok ae fare dt new e aee od tes 478 Escape messages 0 cee ees 479 Sample scenario of using MEL and the IMPAPFRSC command 479 Appendix Q The PDF Security module esee 480 Requirements for the PDF security module 0 00 0000 480 Technical details llli 481 20 Import Certificates 0 eh 481 Recommendations related to JAVA Performance 2 5 483 OS 400 System values 0 0 0 484 OS 400 Subsystem settings 00 00 cece eee 484 La gt eee eRe ee eee PP SP eee 486 User s Manual for InterForm400 13 About This Manual This manual is intended for the person or people responsible for production printing on the site For instance the system administrator InterForm400 is designed to operate completely transparent to the user which means this manual is only used for designing overlays setting up printers and for configuration of sub system handling t
160. 7 290 Sonoran Serif 8 pt Roman Medium typ 751 Sonoran Serif 10 pt Roman Medium typ 1051 Sonoran Serif 10 pt Italic Bold typ 1053 Sonoran Serif 10 pt Italic Medium typ 1056 Sonoran Serif 12 pt Roman Medium typ 1351 Sonoran Serif 16 pt Roma Bold yp Ios typ 2103 Sonoran Serif 24 pt 384 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Shipped Zebra Fonts These fonts are known by the Zebra printers and the font definitions are shipped with InterForm4008 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 24 28 30 36 48 72 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 Triumvirate 6 pt Triumvirate 7 pt Triumvirate 8 pt Triumvirate 9 pt Triumvirate 10 pt Triumvirate 11 pt Triumvirate 12 pt Triumvirate 13 pt Triumvirate 14 pt Triumvirate 15 pt Triumvirate 16 pt Triumvirate 17 pt Triumvirate 18 pt Triumvirate 20 pt Triumvirate 22 pt Triumvirate 24 pt Triumvirate 28 pt Triumvirate 30 pt Triumvirate 36 pt Triumvirate 48 pt Triumvirate 72 pt OCR A OCR B atrix 9 x 5 dots atrix 11 x 7 dots atrix 18 x 10 dots atrix 26 x 13 dots atrix 60 x 40 dots User s Manual for InterForm400 385 Typefaces known by PCL Printers PCL printers normally have several resident fonts Below a few possible resident fonts and the most likely typeface number are listed Albertus 4362 Antique Olive 4168 Arial 16602 CG Omega 4113 CG Times 4101 Clarendon Cond 4140 Coronet 4116 Courier 4099 Garamond 4197 Letter Gothic 4102 Marigold
161. 812 Type options press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition Specify input spooled file priority Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output Define sort fields Specify grouping and separator page Define resulting output queues Specify automatic start scheduling Specify automatic start options Specify output queue for processed spooled files Specify job priority Mie Me Me IME NIE NM MEM F3 Exit F12 Cancel 252 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Specify input spooled file priority Specify input spooled file priority OSC300D Output queue l OSC_OUTQO1 PAPE ra We se oe oe oe aS APF3812 Type choices press Enter Sorting Input spooled file priority Eom typen 2 S Ae u Se Be 8 _10 Job name Job number Spooled file Spool file no x 20 Device file bor DEST Y G2 cete ueste Program that opened file Library This sort sequence will be used for pages defined at Define sort fields having identical sort values Lowest number have highest priority F3 Exit F12 Cancel In the above entry screen we define which sort values should be used and what priority they have Above we have selected that the FORM TYPE of the document have highest sort priority and following the SPOOL FILE NO should be used Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output OSC300D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 ibrary
162. ADLTOTJ Additional number of total jobs Increase this from default of 10 to 50 QMAXACTLVL Maximum activity level of system Ensure that this is NOMAX NOMAX is default QPRCMLTTSK Processor multi tasking Make sure that this is set to 1 on 1 is default QTOTJOB Total number of jobs Increase to 1000 35 is default OS 400 Subsystem settings Increase the number of QSQSRVR initial jobs The value should be the number of expected concurrent transactions plus jobs for the application server The default value is 5 used for native JDBC An increased number increases overhead slightly Make sure that the maximum number of uses is 200 default Use this command to change the number of initial jobs CHGPJE SBSD QSYS QSYSWRK PGM QSYS QSQSRVR Increase the number of QZDASOINIT jobs Same rules as for QSQSRVR The default value is 1 for toolbox JDBC Use this command to change the number of initial jobs CHGPJE SBSD QSYS QSERVER PGM QI WS QZDASOI NI T 484 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 485 Index Comment 45s exse ese t aem 72 amp amp Commands 0 000008 390 amp amp CHA commands 0 00 eee 446 amp RCPY st cies tse sack ana cell aS ae pmi 396 About this manual 2 05 14 Access to the file is not permitted 433 Add file share 0000 c eee eee 400 Add printer share else 400 ADDFILSHR
163. AN Description Demo for manual Select one of the following options 1 Receipient Key Definition 2 Variable Definitions PDF File Name Composition Ww Page selections and Document breaks Receipient ID Information Closing User Exit Encryption and Signature PDF bookmark definition wo 00 10 0 Option F3 Exit F12 Cancel 1 Receipient Key Definition This function works exactly as 1 Key definition for the e mail fax finishing definition You can define up to 3 keys identified as KEY1 3 They can be referred to in the PDF file name path later in 3 PDF File Name Composition The keys are also used in 6 Receipient ID Information where you can state a PDF password depending on who the PDF file is intended for You can also let a user exit program return the passwords to be used Refer to source file APF3812 APISRC member PNMEXIT for more information A program based on this source can be called with amp Entrystep ID Refer to page 197 for more information of definition of the keys 2 Variable Definitions Select this option and you will see a list of the defined keys and variables Press F6 to add new a variable 206 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Create Variable Definition PNM325D Definition name DEMO MAN Description Demo for manual Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Varrable io o mox XR VA VA VZ V1 V9 Desc
164. APF3812 APF3812 12 Now we must specify which fonts should be down loaded automatically In the screen Work with auto download soft fonts we select option 8 Update 302 Users Manual for InterForm4009 fonts for printer group PCL and we press F6 to add a download font to our printer group Add Auto download Soft Font Printer group name PCL Font number set etw cos BOL Symbol set number 3 Font member name 0 ARIAL Font member name 90 F3 Exit F4 Prompt PGR332D F4 List 0 A11 symbol sets barcodes only l Roman 8 2 PC 8 DM 3 CodePage850 4 CodePage852 5 Baltic 6 CodePage858 7 Cyrillic 8 CylillicEuro 9 1S0 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish A ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek F4 List F4 List F12 Cancel 13 Here we enter our Arial font ARIAL Note that if the font is stored as a file member with Codepage850 Note that it is not necessary to define the font in 90 as the PCL5 compatible printers will rotate the font For PCL4 HPII compatible printers the font member name should be specified for both 0 and 90 Now we will define the OCRB font This font is delivered with the system and IBM font number 3 is already reserved for these fonts which means we do not have to describe this font to the system as we did with the Arial font in step 9 Like in step 12 we press F6 to add a font Add Auto download Soft Font Printer group name AP CT Font number 2 4 2 204 2 4 3 Symbol set numbe
165. Arial and OCRB fonts to our printer group 10 We select option 7 Work with fonts in the InterForm400 administration menu and then option 3 Auto download soft font User s Manual for InterForm400 301 Work with auto download soft fonts PGR300 Start with 2 4 wow 3e 7W5 ox Type option press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 6 Update output queue 8 Update fonts Opt Printer group Description PCL Automatically created by auto download _ PDF Output to PDF files F3 exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel In this case the PCL printer group was automatically created when we created the barcode earlier If you do not have any other printer group than PDF you must create one with F6 Add and create a new printer group 11 Enter 6 update output queues for the Printer group PCL Work with auto download soft fonts PGR300 Printer group name PCL BOREE WEG 4 e esa V4 ATA Type option press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete Opt Output queue Library ALLPCL F3 exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Here we add output queue ALLPCL if not already there Note that you can specify either of the values below instead of a specific output queue ALLPCL Download the soft fonts in this printer group if used to any printer or file if merging to OUTDOC with the command APF3812 APF381 2 OUTDOC Download the soft fonts in this printer group if used to all files if merging to OUTDOC with the command
166. Bem see ae INPUI 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 12 Characters per inch INPUT 5 10 12 13 3 15 Overflow line number INPUT 1 255 PONE ALDH 7 ck Mit Re odeur ete Go uc 0c oos INPUT CPI 3y 55 1l 1272 Degree of page rotation INPUT AUTO COR 0 90 POPM EYDG oue qe cac uos LELET INPUT Character value STD Spool file name INPUT USER JOBNAME Name User data Ree et cse UR Use cus ver Wess ver ge ge ge mmu 5o AALNBPUTIT USER AUOBNAME Hold spooled file NO__ INPUT NO YES Save spooled file e INPUT NO YES F3 Exit F12 Cancel We have defined that the spool entry containing the InterMate 400 letters should be sent to queue AFC_INPUT1 which means back to our AFC input queue We define NO for hold spooled file which means the spool entry will here get status RDY We are changing the form type to IFLET This is done to enable the AFC functions to process the spool entry on basis of the form type The original spool entry containing both MateSert 400 and InterMate 400 letters will still be available with the original form type DEMO We press Enter and F3 to exit this screen We press F5 to verify the creation of the Split definition and press F3 to leave the Split menu In an AFC definition we can activate the split definition IFLETTER by using function B Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D
167. Bottom edge 07 120 Thikness in pels 001 NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S S Radius unde oct Fill pattern F4 List F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel The line should start just below the black frame defined in sequence line 11 We add 4 pels to the bottom of the black frame and we get 5 072 for the top of the item line frame We set the left edge equal to the black frame 1 120 and we set the right edge 1 inch higher minus a few pels 1 120 0 004 1 116 This will give a small space between each column frame We measure the bottom edge to be around 777 7 120 As we have precisely 1 inch between each column we can move right 1 inch and repeat 4 times to get 5 identical columns User s Manual for InterForm400 95 We press Enter to save our new sequence line 20 Step 13 Defining the logo as a water mark Instead of a signature we want to place the logo as a watermark in the bottom of the page For this we use the logo already used in the top of the overlay but manipulate it to work as a watermark We intend to do the following compared to the original logo see page 32 Reverse it Scale it to double size Grayscale it We define the sequence line for the logo just after the other logo by entering sequence line 1 1 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 T Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 07
168. Ctrl key and marking each element in the result window By first making sure that no element is selected by e g clicking in an area in the result window where no element is found and then holding down a mouse button and dragging a red frame around the elements you want to select After you have selected elements in this manner you can still hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and mark additional elements as described above While you have grouped several elements you can change the font for all the elements at one time by selecting the common font in the lower left corner of the designer You can ungroup the elements in these manners By holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on an element you will remove this element from the group By clicking anywhere in the result window without holding down lt Ctrl gt all the elements will be removed from the group User s Manual for InterForm400 475 476 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Appendix P Import Export extension This Appendix describes the following extensions to InterForm 400 import export functions The multiple export libraries feature Description of the Import InterForm400 Resources IMPAPFRSC command Multiple Export Libraries MEL feature Description By default InterForm 400 only allows you to export resources to a library named APFEXPORT The purpose of the MEL feature is to allow developers to export resources to other libraries as well Activat
169. DATAxx Here you state the starting position of this text Use STRPOS to use the position where Find string text is found Pass data length Works like the previous field This just determines the length of the spooled file data to move to the page builder program FILE Spooled file name of the SCS spooled file to operate on JOB Job name user profile and job number of the spooled file SPLNBR Spooled file number APPIDPARM Application ID parameter This is transfered onto the page builder program as a parameter This can be useful if you e g want to call the same pagebuilder program from different uses of the CRTPBSPLF command OUTQ The output queue where the new and changed spooled file will be created INPUT will make the command create the new spooled file on the same output queue as the original spooled file FORMTYPE The formtype of the new changed spooled file SPLFNAME The name of the new spooled file Example CRTPBSPLF PAGBLDPGM LIB1 BPSAMP DTAPARM INVOICE NO 10 10 1 80 51 51 ANY 99 11 11 12 408 Users Manual for InterForm4009 12 FILE QSYSPRT JOB SPLNBR LAST APPIDPARM MY ID OUTQ DIAG This will process the last QSYSPRT spooled file for the current job calling the program BPSAMP in library LIB1 for every page in this spooled file Keyword DTAPARM describes where to find the values for parameters DATAO1 DATA10 see PageBuilder program parameters below which are passed to prog
170. E 42 43 45 62 P4 eN E a ee ee T 38 Fax module w dere Lech md rc ret alaa 20 File Set iorreo kr weed oie gee 417 KARTSET 545r AS LU 417 Select ive bebe Love ikiE ERES 119 Fill patterns nce E 59 Finishing 2 2 5 esse oh oc alee eae 148 181 Copy Management 153 For Insertion systems 192 For Prinserter 224 181 For Stapling us tae 2384 eee ee 190 Level Break definitions 212 Finishing definitions 181 Defining PFE MailPrinter amp Pre process Definition 186 Insertion pre process definitions 192 Level Break conditions 212 Prinserter fixed number of pages 181 Prinserter variable number of pages 183 Reformat SCS spool 221 Stapling pre process definitions 190 Using finishing definition with AFC 216 First time installation 356 Flash Memory 20000 e eae 417 FNC1 in code128 barcodes 293 FONTS is db aaea 38 278 Adding fonts 0 279 additional fonts 4 279 Auto Download 301 Auto download soft fonts 287 Defining a resident printer font 281 describing example 281 in Flash SIMM 00005 284 Interface rules llle 284 MICR soft font 00 290 OCR B or Eh flee tnde ee ames 298 OCRA soft font
171. FAULT will place the temporary spooled files on the ouid where the printer is attached and making it Form type The form type entered here should be used as condition for a 1 Merge with overlay following this AFC definition The formtype could typically be FNSHREADY Finish ready If you use an E mail finishing definition this screen will appear Seqnbr Function 10 0 C Prepare for Finishing Prepare for E mail requires settings for print that will not be send Output queue non E mail print LIDA xc cw lE s EOL ENDE ett Cur Ce s s F3 Exit F12 Cancel On this screen you specify on which output queue you want to place the pages that cannot be e mailed no receiver was found This should normally be an AFC monitored output queue so that a InterForm400 merge and print can be done ie WARNING Make sure that you are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a finishing definition If you e g create new spooled files with a finishing definition and these new spooled files are placed back on the same outq then the new spooled file s D Sort Spooled File Seqnbr Function 2 0 D Sort Spooled File Sort definition name Outque for sorted print D DEFAULT Tito Paley Casas iq oa er tie cae s POEM GY DEE 2 owe GRA ee S3 CETUR C F3 Exit Fll Delete F12 Cancel This function is used to sort the spool entry accoding to criteria defined in a Sort Definition Refer
172. FC_INPUT1 Ti Dea si wes AeA ee APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 5 STD Move spooled file new outq AFC OUT1 library APF3812 0002 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0003 6 Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function 2 4 5 Move Spooled File New output queue gt AFC INPUT2 DEFAULT USER Ju PAL Xon xe px EE fe Bere pd ex APF3812 Hold output spooled file NO_ NO YES Save output spooled file NO NO YES F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel Print jobs having neither STD nor DEMO as form type will be put on hold on queue AFC_INPUT1 by the last sequence line Press Enter to save the new sequence line 3 and press F3 to exit the AFC definition window Step 6 Testing new functions in AFC INPUT1 We can now try to release a demo spool entry using option 1 Create Demo Spool Entry under 12 Service Functions in the Administration menu You will notice that the demo spool entry is printed with overlay IFAO00DEMO to the queue AFC_OUT1 just as we experienced in the Getting Started section Now try changing the default output queue for your current job to be AFC_INPUT1 This is done by the following command CHG OB OUTQ APF3812 AFC I NPUT1 Try to make a screen dump or print a log or another system report Example PRTDEVADR CTLOI It will now be printed to queue AFC_INPUT1 but as it has formtype STD it will be moved to queue AFC_OUT1 a
173. FE Mail Printer 05 Prepare for E mail Fax 06 PDF Filenaming 07 Reformat Spooled File F3 Exit F12 Cancel We are creating a new finishing definition for the InterForm400 Demo spool file Press Enter to create the finishing definition User s Manual for InterForm400 195 Work with E mail Fax definition MAT300D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Select one of the following options 1 How to find E mail address Fax number 2 Key definition 3 Definition variables 4 Default PDF file name 5 Definition E mail text Cover page text 6 Definition recipient ID 7 E mail addresses and Fax numbers 8 Senders E mail address 9 Encryption and Signature 10 PDF bookmark definition Option __ F3 Exit F12 Cancel Below we go through the elements of the E mail finishing definition and do the necessary setup in order to distribute the Demo spool file 1 How to find E mail address Fax number Work with E mail Fax definition MAI300D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spooled file How to find E mail address Fax number Select one of the following options l By key 2 By user exit program 3 Find in spooled file Option F3 Exit F12 Cancel On the screen above you define how you intend to determine the e mail address or fax number to send to for the individual pages The selection
174. File User User Data Sts Pages Copies Form Type Pty 1 QPRINT PETER PRTCTL HLD 2 1 DEMO 5 Parameters for option 2 gt F3 Exit Fll View 2 F12 Cancel F21 Description F24 More keys We select the file with option 1 and press Enter Merge Spooled File with Overlay APF730D Overlay name MYDEMO or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set E l Primary 2 Secondary Spooled file Job name DSPO10700 User PETER Job number 073534 File name QPRINT_ Spool file no 0005 Number ONLY LAST Codepage Number INPUT Form type STD Copies E 1 99 Drawer PRINTER PRINTER OVERLAY 12 3 4 5 6 Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue Library F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel We notice that all the spool file attributes have now been inserted We can now press Enter to print the Overlay MYDEMO merged with this spool entry and we will automatically be returned to the main menu Compare your print out with page 32 In the next sections we will start to re design the overlay If you select option 3 merge spool entry with overlay again later you will notice that the overlay name and the spool file attributes are remembered That means we do not need to select the spool file again for successive printout as long as you do not leave the InterForm400 menus An alternativ to printing the overlay is to use the function F14 PCL View in the overlay design window Thi
175. Font description TTFFONT TrueType TTFFONT _ BARCODE39 Code 39 HPIII 7 69CPI 72 0 Heigh BAR128 Code 128 Portrait 9 09CPI 72 0 Heigh CODE128 Code 128 Portrait 9 09CPI 48 0 Heigh oF CODE128_0 Code 128 Portrait 6 81CPI 42 48Heigh CODE39 Code 39 Portrait 5 76CPI 48 0 Heigh EAN8 MICRO EAN 8 13 UPC A PCL5 14 28CPI 41 76Heigh EAN8JJ EAN 8 13 UPC A Portrait 10 71CPI 79 68Heigh FONT2501 Interleaved 2 of 5 HPIII 4 68CPI 32 4 Heigh ES IF OCRA OCRA PC 850 i IF OCRAEXT OCR A Extended PC 850 IF_OCRB InterForm 400 OCRB portrait IF OCRB L InterForm 400 OCRB landscape More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Here you can specify 2 Change The description of a soft font can be changed 4 Delete Delete a soft font This will also delete the corresponding member from the apf3812 font file Note that you cannot delete a soft font if it is specified to be auto downloaded 5zDisplay Displays a soft font This will prompt you for what code page to use and then open up the PCL Viewer SwiftView on a PC showing a sample of the soft font Note that the current version of SwiftView does not support True Type Fonts 6 Print Prints out a sample of the soft font You are prompted for which code page output queue and form type to use 8 Dsp Attributes Shows the attributes of the soft font e g pitch and height For True Type Fonts it will also show you the type face used The type face should be
176. Form4009 The header of the chart Font used for the header text prompt with F4 Color used for the header text prompt with F4 Height and width of the frame in which the chart is printed The distances from the chart to the frame The line width in dots and color of the frame Distance from left edge of the frame to the text of the first observation set Distance between text of the various observation sets Distance from bottom edge of the frame to the text of the observation sets Define layout of the X axis When defining the layout of the X axis it is possible to define the layout of the axis it self but also direction and displacement of the text belonging to the X axis groups if used Define layout of the X axis CHA300D Chart EH SAMPLELINE TYDE s EE Ee ose ray Bee es m cas PR D LINE Type choices press Enter X axis line width ur Dots X axis line color X axis text direction l Right 2 Up 3 Down Displacement grp texts Inches pels Bar width G3 _20 1 100 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel X axis line width color X axis text direction Displacement grp texts Bar width in Specifying the width and color of the X axis of the chart The direction and rotation of the text for the X axis Right means horizontal text Up or down means vertical text going up or down Distance from bottom edge of the chart to the text of the X axis groups Width of bars The is measured in percentag
177. Forms Control is running 155 Step 3 Entering Auto Forms Definition AFC INPUT1 156 Step 4 Defining move of print jobs with type STD 157 Step 5 Defining move of Print jobs with Formtype DEMO 158 Step 6 Testing new functions in AFC_INPUT1 159 Example 2 Using same Queue for Input and Output 160 Step 1 Checking the Writer liliis 160 Step 2 Creating the AFC Definition llle 161 Step 3 Restricting the writer to process type STD jobs only 162 Step 4 Preventing following AFC functions to process type STD 162 Step 5 Defining the Overlay Merge 0000 eee eeee 163 Step 6 Cleaning up processed jobs islsulsesuss 165 Step 7 Activating the AFC job AFC_INPUT1 166 Step 8 Testing the new AFC definition AFC_INPUT2 166 Using a TEMPLATE AFC defintion 00 00 cee eee eee 167 2 Form Type Table 2 0 0 0 cc tees 170 The overlay selection entry field 00 000 cea eeeee 170 6 Users Manual for InterForm400 Split Definitions llena nasci See ahs ees misce modas D e ease n Sean aaa 173 Split Definition Entries llle 173 Calling a User Exit Program with the extracted spool pages 175 Defining the spool file attributes for the result of a Split 176 Example Using Split discret S mye dit aaa aa ai aiii e A m
178. Functions attached to output queues the Library field will not be displayed Make sure the Light code is entered in the old version before making a Release Update APFRELUPD make sure the Main Menu indicate Light before you rename the APF3812 library to APF3812OLD If the light code is not entered prior to the update the AFC definitions in the AFC job queue AFC_INPUT1 in the new version will not be updated with your AFC definitions from library APF3812OLD When running a Release Update existing AFC definitions other than AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2 will be updated as well even though the Light code has been entered prior to the Release Update However it is the customers responsibility to change the Output queue and the AUTO FORM job names of these AFC job queues to either AFC_INPUT1 or AFC_INPUT2 or to set Auto start N for the AUTO FORM jobs Attempts to start AFC jobs with other names than AFC_INPUT1 or AFC INPUT2 will result in error conditions It is the customers responsibility not to start AFC jobs with other names avoid by setting Auto start job N Attempts to start the AFC jobs AFC_INPUT1 or AFC INPUT2 updated by a Release Update with AFC definitions containing other queue names than AFC INPUT1 2 or AFC_OUT1 2 will result in error conditions It is the customers responsibility not to change the names Output queues updated by a Release Update defined under 2 Forms Type Table must be either AFC_OUT1 or AFC_OUT2
179. Getting Familiar with Soft fonts and Barcodes 298 Step 1 Installing the Arial True Type Font 000e eee eee 298 Step 2 Creating the Code128 Barcode ls sesess 300 Step 3 Create font ID for the Arial soft font 0 0000005 301 Step 4 Define auto download of fonts Arial and OCRB 301 Step 5 Testing the Barcodes in an Overlay 000 eee eens 305 Work with Zebra fonts sese RR 308 11 Description of Zebra fonts 2 0 0 0 ee 308 CG Tri rmvirate ets wet ae teal ween rn eerte ee 309 Dot Matrix x derri o e RES Sacre eae ere eee eae Gt 310 Defining barcodes for Zebra printers 000e0 eee ee 310 Using soft fonts for printing on Zebra 0000 0 eee 312 12 Work with ZEBRA soft fonts llis 313 13 Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory 00000 eee ee 314 Download a soft font into flash memory 20 0005 314 Delete a soft font from flash memory 00020 ee eee 315 14 Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts 00 000 e eee eee 315 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts andimages 316 User s Manual for InterForm400 9 8 Work with images cerne 319 Working with black and white images eslslslseesnss 320 Importing black and white images 00e0 eee eeeee 320 Working with c
180. HPMACRO 152 402 APF3812 RMVNETSHR 401 APF3812 SNDMAIL s sess 420 APF3812 STRNETSVR 401 APF3812 WRKMAILADR 420 APF3812 WRKPRFJOB ss 420 APF3812 WRKSFID sssssse 412 APE93812 ZIP ner EEED IA 412 APE3812P ec cacget ens huded pn 406 APFCLRLNK CL command 403 APFEDTPRT CL command 413 APFLNK CL command sss 403 APFRPT CL command 404 APFWRKOUTQ 0 000 0c eee eee 414 Archiving InfoStore 400 luus 142 143 MultiArchive 400 0 151 Attaching printers to the AS 400 365 Attach through 5250 terminal 368 Attach through PC printer port 369 Attach through TCP IP LPD printer server AR SL Ne Roseto eoa tds palo Scales 371 Attachment methods 365 486 Users Manual for InterForm4009 TCP IP LPD printer server 370 TCP IP Raw socket Port 9100 3700 368 Testing the connection 372 Twinax Protocol Converter 365 AUTO FORMS CONTROL APF3812 AUTO FORM 132 CALL APF3812 AFCADM 132 Change attributes 147 Manual start 0 0 00 137 Move Spooled File 145 Program call 00 0005 146 Send Network Spooled File 143 Start sub system 133 247 Auto Forms Control definition entries
181. INPUT PRINTER 1 255 Name F4 List Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side Copy management N Y N Duplex print N N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin zd in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement _ B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Copy from another overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view Since we are actually creating a new overlay we can use F9 to copy from another overlay file set 126 Users Manual for InterForm400 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Name of overlay to copy from F3 Exit F9 F4 Prompt copy from another file set F12 Cancel We know that the IFA00DEMO overlay is in another file set so we have to press F9 to get a list of file sets to choose from Overview InterForm 400 file sets 1 Select 1 SAMPLE _ TEST InterForm 400 Samples Test file set F12 Cancel F3 Exit F4 Prompt Overview overlays Start with 1 Select 1 IF400DEMO InterForm400 demo F12 Cancel Now we select overlay IFA00DEMO and press Enter Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text InterForm 400 Demo Overlay Line spacing 40 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 000 090 180 270 Extra left margin positions 8 0 99 aximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _4 0 99 Font d qom INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def
182. In WRKOUTQ 000 eee 120 Requirements for running SwiftView 430 Set view print parameter 40 128 Setting up a SwiftView user 431 Setup Target AS 400 270 SwiftView licenses 430 PGCLTIES x 202 222 een nbs wea keds eels 70 Import from PC 24 325 PC applications 325 Read PC print into PCL file 325 PCLTOMBR CL command 418 PDF Creating PDF files 349 410 PDF Bookmark command 396 PDF File Bookmarks 238 PDF sec rity eee coe Re 480 PDF Viewer 0000000 0 42 430 PDE417 es dtt dr t RT RN es 294 Escape code character 294 Line separator eee 294 Max line height 295 Max line width 295 Performance eee eee eens 363 PFE Define Pre process Definition 186 Using finishing definition with AFC 216 Positioning the design elements 48 Prinserter 000 eee eee eee 181 Print cross reference 420 Printer Config Terminal attached 379 Printer Types 222 05 374 417 standard printer 268 Protocol converter 365 378 PRSCOPY AFC program 153 PRIBSHEE ct iene p ez ard ois 419 PRTXREF amp amp CHA oor pie iaa fdas 420 PIF ees top Soe he E eX RIPE n
183. InterForm400 System MPAPFRSC SAVF CUSTI NVLI B EXPORT I NV Example 2 Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB EXPORT INV save file to the import library APFIMPORT and then prompt the user whether to transfer all resources to production the InterForm400 system MPAPFRSC SAVF CUSTI NVLI B EXPORT INV TFRPROD PROMPT Example 3 Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB EXPORT INV save file to the import library APFIMPORT and then transfer all resources to production the InterForm400 system In case of an error no display is shown MPAPFRSC SAVF CUSTI NVLI B EXPORT I NV DSPERR NO 478 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Escape messages CPF9801 Object amp 2 in library amp 1 not found CPF9810 Library amp 1 not found APF9801 Error code amp 1 loading InterForm400 resources Possible error codes for message APF9801 Error code Description IMP0001 The InterForm APFIMPORT library can not be used IMP0002 The InterForm import library APFIMPORT is in use IMP0003 The InterForm import library APFIMPDST already exists IMP0004 Error installing the InterForm import library APFIMPORT IMP0005 Error installing the InterForm import library APFIMPDST IMP0006 One or more InterForm resources was not transferred to production Sample scenario of using MEL and the IMPAPFRSC command Two developer teams at the same AS 400 are using InterForm400 to enhance printouts TEAM A are designing a French invoice named INV003 in
184. InterForm4009 eForms amp Intelligent Document Management for ib iSeries amp AS 400 2 Users Manual for InterForm400 Document IF 003 29 Users Guide for Intermate InterForm400 V2006 M01 Printed in Denmark 2006 No part of this guide may be photocopied or reproduced in any way except where noted without the written consent of Intermate A S All the names in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to existing people or firms is purely coincidental Copyright Intermate A S 2004 All rights reserved AS 400 iSeries and i5 are registered trademarks of the IBM Corporation HP PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard All other trademarks mentioned in this document are registered trademarks of their respective owners User s Manual for InterForm400 3 Table of Contents Table of Contenls osien ra eer e i eaaa a ava ma aca L a naa i a Um LR Da a RYE a ran 4 About This Manual 552i sete aa bake e b Dat v dno b gue deed DE G 14 How the manual is organized illis eere 14 What is new in the 2006 version ee 17 What is new in this manual RR RR IRR IRR III 18 The modules of InterForm400 cess eee eee 19 The Basic InterForm400 package 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 19 The InterForm400 Classic package 0 cece eee eee eee 19 The ZPLEMOodUle ete dcr tod Be dy ateet Keene 19 The PDF and E mailing Module leise 20 The PDF Securit
185. Interface types ASCII850 0 eee eee 378 ASCIIRB8 ei rp REL te aoe 378 SYSTEM 2 54 s eee at SR dite tes 378 WORKSTN ssssese esses 378 Interfaces serpere pu 378 Interfax i os p eae PALA SS 20 InterForm400 light version 388 Interleaved 2 of 5 Barcode 294 Intermate twinax interfaces 378 InterWord400 0000000 357 J D Edwards 0 0 cee eee eee 409 Joint ropot a rc htec 258 COMPOSE 2 ies el ye RE eee 258 Designing a report composition 259 Print report 0 0055 262 test print ders boas eem mite pe 262 Test print report overlays 262 Test print report 1 page per overlay 262 KEICHE ii uem gales a ta 417 Left adjusted text 2 5 61 64 License CONG EE 356 Limitation of the light version 388 Line Horizontal 2000000000 55 SIPING afegia RR C Eae pns 56 Venica 15 54 reed ee order set n Pn wach 56 Links in PDF files 4 396 MAGROID Pep pPReS es anh 417 Main menu local environment setup 116 Merge spool entry with overlay 117 Select file set 00 119 Select output queue 120 Test print overlay 0 116 Work with output queue 120 Managing the Auto Forms Control Sub system End sub system 0 0 133 Start sub system 133 247 Work with active sub system 1
186. Is gt lt N Blank after Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Seqnbr Type 18 0 g Remap window Input line Position 26 39 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment ULRCN IB E Rotation Font F4 List Blank original blank original version Condition Position Is gt lt N Blank after Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Seqnbr Type 19 0 9 Remap window Input line Position 40 _53 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment ULRCNBE Rotation Font F4 List Blank original blank original version Condition Position Is gt lt N Blank after Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Seqnbr Type 20 0 9 Remap window Input line Position 54 70 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment ULRCNIB E Rotation Font F4 List Blank original blank original version Condition Position Is gt lt N Blank after Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel The vertical position from the upper edge of sequence line 16 to 20 are currently identical to the column headers in sequence line 11 to 15 but the item columns are supposed to start 1 line lower than the column headers We could now edit each line from 16 to 20 and correct that However instead we use
187. Jee As Spooled file name Device file LEYBTATW LL ar as m Se a Program that opened file Library AFC305D Program F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue oos x AFC INPUT2 Library WE D we eed APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 F Change writer OUTQ Form type STD 0002 9 STD Exit Segnbr Function 3 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print DEFAULT BEDEA Y uw fw xenon InterForm 400 printer type Interface u Wo Xe o Merge overprint lines NO NO ES Find overlay in form type table N Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel We select function 1 Merge and enter DEMO as condition for processing this sequence line We press Enter and we define DEFAULT for the output queue which should receive the merged print The default is AFC_INPUT2 according to the previous screen Note that DEFAULT include Library Printer Type and Interface User s Manual for InterForm400 163 We define that we do not want to search an overlay table and we press Enter to get the entry field for defining the overlay Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC INPUT2 Library NES NUS TNT APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 F Change writer OUTQ
188. L ULRCN IB E t Rotation 000 Font 1653 F4 List Blank original B B blank original version Condition Position uen ae Is gt lt N Fll Delete Blank after B Blank condition after The first data delivered from our If then line in the main overlay will be line 1 ITEM Fish line 2 Shark line 3 Flounder line 4 Herring line 5 Salmon line 6 line 7 Originally the line interval for this item group were 5 11 but the sub overlay sees the lines as a spool entry consisting of the lines beginning with the first line that meets the conditions of the If then line until the last line before the condition is true again ITEM Pets in line 8 The text ITEM is therefore found in line 1 position 10 14 and we just position this text as we normally do with a remap line The main overlay defines that the item group should be placed relative vertical to where the text ITEM was found in the data stream and we therefore define 0 as the upper edge We select font 1653 which is a 16 point Times Roman 110 Users Manual for InterForm400 We press Enter and we define a new Remap Window line that will remap the item sub headers Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name SUB1 Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 9 Remap window 01 001 pos 10 014 top 0 000 left 2 000 L Seqnbr Type 270 9 Remap window Input line c Position 15 _70 Print From upper edge 0 040 Line spacing 40 From left e
189. L files that are already installed in InterForm400 With this command you can print such an installed black white PCL file Print PCL member PRTPCLMBR Type choices press Enter Member cus Wu AA He amp Be MEMBER ame ROEQUCLODn e s uu uq uw ROTATION Oin 0 90 180 270 TOP OELSE cubecubuscemis eue TOPOFFSET 0 1200 1200 Le tt otfSet eu gevue uec uem we LEFTOFFSET 0 1200 1200 Output queue e OUTO JOB ame JOB Lilia y o s pU testet tede shee tye ame LIBL Form type FORMTYPE STD Character value STD Pape Sa Zeek Qo er Cr SIZE A4 LETTER LEGAL LEDGGER GOD TES in e Corte ge en Cane ETE A COPIES d 12255 Output spooled file name SPLFNAME MEMBER ame MEMBER DRAWS eo Od RE vs RE Lure IOS DRAWER PRINTER__ 1 255 PRINTER User data set Sues ee Sk 9s USRDTA MEMBER Character value MEMBER Hold output spooled file HOLD NO_ NO YES Save output spooled file SAVE NO NO YES Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys After installation and preparation the installed B W PCL files are saved as members in the PCL file in InterForm400 The unit used for displacement is dots measured in 300 dots per inch A negative value for an offset will move the PCL file up left compared to the original Remember that any top margin is removed from the PCL as a part of the install in InterForm400 The Print TIFF File
190. LE Name TE Da EY 44b e lt a Wr E EAT ie a us LIBL Name LIBL Member prefix PREFIX A Z2 NONE Add extension to member name MBREXT NO NO YES Delete PC file after copying DLTDOC NO__ NO YES Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys A member prefix can be specified A Z or NONE If the prefix is a letter then the member name of the TIF files will be the name of the PC file preceded by this character Note that in order for being able to use the TIF files when designing the PC files have to be placed as members in the APF3812 IMAGE file TIF files not placed in IMAGE can only be used by inserting amp amp commands in the spool file PCL files can be inserted with a simular command as seen on page 418 422 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 423 Appendix J Merging overlays with OV 400 and InterWord400 print jobs If the system should operate on print jobs from OfficeVision 400 you should be aware that some specific word processing features will disappear from the print job during merge with an InterForm400 overlay The features in question are sub script super script font changes and justification bold and underline might work depending on the method used in the document The reason is that OS 400 does not allow these attributes with the Copy spool file function which is one of the basic operations
191. Left end Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Right end Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Thickness in pels Thickness of a line in pels 1 240 Zero means no border Move right Inch pels of the right movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for left edge Move Down Inch pels of the vertical movement of a duplicate of the line relative to the value for Top edge Extra times Extra copies of the line excluding the original Extra copies will be displaced relative to each other according to the settings of Move right and Move Down User s Manual for InterForm400 55 3 VERTICAL LINE Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 1 3 Vertical line From top edge Move right From left Move down Lower end Extra times EE Thickness in pels F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr From Top Edge Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Lower end Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Thickness
192. Management for the overlay see page 53 and 46 you can test if you have made the correct selection of overlay elements by printing the overlay elements for one of the two sets only If this field is left blank default the system will as default pick the Primary set If you have defined an Overlay Selector you can test if it is able to pick the correct overlay In this case Overlay Name above must be blank refer to section Working with Overlay selectors page 122 Spooled file attributes can be entered here There is an alternative to typing all the information manually If you type the name of an output queue in the bottom of the screen and press Enter you can fetch the information about the spool entry from a view of the selected output queue by selecting with option 1 User s Manual for InterForm400 41 Work with Output Queue Queue PRTHP3 Library QUSRSYS Type options press Enter 1 Select 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 8 attributes Opt File User User Data Sts Pages Copies Form Type Pty i OPRINT INTERMATE INVOICE RDY ae 1 STD 5 QPRINT INTERMATE PROFIT RDY 5 1 STD 5 Parameters for option 2 gt F3 exit Fll View 2 F12 Previous F21 Description F24 More keys Code page This defines if a specific code page should be forced for the spool entry SYSVAL means that the default code page specified for the system will be used unless a specific code page is defined as attribute for the spool
193. NG Global settings of the sub overlay inserted by the S Suboverlay will be ignored as well as 6 Print info COMMENT This function will insert a comment in your overlay definition Introducing a comment line in the overlay definition is for easy overview purposes only and will not affect the resulting print 72 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Seqnbr 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 Seqnbr 1 0 Type O x ox oH Type Overlay definition Insert Intermate Logo in Upper Right Corner Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 Recepient Frame Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right Remap Recepient Adress into Recepient Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 Comment Insert Intermate Logo in Upper Right 180 04 120 frame 160 left 1 000 L Corner bottom 02 160 User s Manual for InterForm400 73 How the sequence lines in overlay design are executed The execution order is of the sequence lines is depending on the type of the line They are executed in this order Frames Lines Text option 5 Print info Ink Images PCL files HP GL files and Suboverlays 9 Remap Window f Then 8 Tabulator Normally it is not necessary to remember this order but when you mix them you could get a problem If you specify to blank out remapped text by use of option 9S2ZRemap Window then you cannot use the text for a condition in If Then This can be solved by not blanking out the text
194. NK all pages 3 Vertical 4 Line 1 first page only 5 Text 6 Print info 2 page 2 and succ 7 Ink 8 Tabulator 9 last page only 9 Remap window I Image I BLANK all pages If then F PCL file 1 odd pages G HP GL 2 file S Suboverlay 2 even pages Comment F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr Copy Management The entry fields for Copy Management will appear if Y has been selected for Copy Management in the global settings of the overlay see Copy Management page 39 Seqnbr Type T n l 3 2 5 2 7 9 VE G k F3 Exit Frame Vertical Text Ink Remap Window If then HP GL 2 file Comment 2 Horizontal 4 Line 6 Print info 8 Tabulator I Image F PCL file S Suboverlay F12 Cancel Copy management From To Primary Secondary F18 View Spool entr The Copy management field is used to assign this specific sequence line to all printed copies or to selected copies only The following are examples of definitions for copy control Use this overlay element on all copies of Primary and Secondary sets all fields left blank 1 T 1 Frame 2 Horizontal From To 3 Vertical 4 Line Primary n 5 Text 6 Print info Secondary 7 Ink 8 Tabulator Use this overlay element on the first copy the original of the Primary set only 1 1 1 3 5 7 Frame Vertical Text Ink 2 Horizontal 4 Line 6 Print info 8 Tabula
195. OUTO iussishvssunsisbkbeemikes5iEnts 417 Select L4 com deett ode 120 work with 0 00 0000 120 Overlay Backpage 52 Ea 39 Copy an existing overlay 77 Duplex print es 4 nemo nonen 39 Merge spool entry with overlay 117 Special line 000 eee 63 Test print 116 262 Overlay element selection filters 52 Overlay elements 0 0 ee eee 54 Frame pil een See A Eu 54 Horizontal line 204 55 HP GL 2 File 0 0 0 0 eee eee 71 It THEN iv ror er ye ren Pens 67 Image 2 h tI ER IBRLDUR GE 66 VINK es ee aad oh etra bt ee EO eant 59 LING MEHR RES 56 Page Page number 58 PGLE EIle 5 sum DS Le met ien Eats 70 Remap window less 63 Tabulator erisia ieg aene etae 61 Text pea aea siasi ibp eaga debe dene 57 Vertical lig un rro 56 Overlay selectors lulu 122 126 Overlay Global settings 37 Overlays iicet unea Puce e eds 76 Overview of Auto Forms Control 134 Input queue lessen 134 Template ss occ eee leni 134 Page Page number 2 58 Page Builder Program 406 Page Control secs osi vetere staat 52 Page range Merged spool 2 2 cee ee ee eee 121 Pages per side sususs 38 Password protection of PDF files 480 PCL Soft fOntS 3 oua ee ae ene 278 PCL Viewing 2 086 vt es Iv ot 347 430
196. PF300D Name of overlay to copy from F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 copy from another file set F12 Cancel We know that the IFA00DEMO overlay is in another file set so we have to press F9 once more to get a list of file sets to choose from Overview InterForm 400 file sets 1 Select 1 SAMPLE InterForm 400 Samples _ TEST Test file set F12 Cancel F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 copy from another file set F12 Cancel Overview overlays Start with 1 Select 1 IF400DEMO InterForm400 demo F12 Cancel Now we select overlay IFA00DEMO and press Enter Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text InterForm 400 Demo Overlay Line spacing _40 in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Rotation 000 000 090 180 270 Extra left margin positions 8 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _4 0 99 Font MESE F4 List Extended page def N Y N Drawer PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 9 20 39 Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side Copy management N Y N Duplex print N N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin __0 in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement _ B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel 78 Users Manual for InterForm4009 We have now made a copy of the overlay IF400DEMO from file set SAMPLE and stored it by the name MYDEMO in file set TEST Step 2 Make a Test Print of
197. PJL can in some cases delete downloaded resources Use this PJL printer type to be able to be able to use page range on the merged spooled file see tip above HP4D For HP4Si HP5Si and compatible PCL5e duplex printers Note that some printers such as OptraE are not preset to PCL and therefore needs a PJL command to switch to PCL In these cases the setting HP4D_PJL must be used HP4D_PUJL Same as HP4 but using PJL Printer Job Control language e g to set resolution to 600 dpi Note that the use of PJL can in some cases delete downloaded resources Use this PJL printer type to be able to be able to use page range on the merged spooled file see tip above Color printer types HP5C For HP5 Colour Laserjet and compatible color laser printers HP4500 For the HP4500 Laser Color Printer HP4500D As for HP4500 with Duplex support Zebra printer types ZEBRA203 To be used for 200DPI Zebra printers ZEBRA300 Intended for 300DPI Zebra printers User s Manual for InterForm400 375 Cassette Mapping Drawers Selecting the drawer on an overlay can be done either by specifying a drawer number INPUT PRINTER 1 255 or a paper type Whenever possible it is recommended to select the drawer by use of the paper type as described below Selecting drawer by drawer number When selecting a drawer in Design InterForm400 Overlay in the InterForm400 system you should be aware of the differences between various printer types InterF
198. PUT1 L3b5aty u EGS APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0002 6 Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 1 0 1 POEM type se oS So 322 my ee ce DEMO Save attribute Jobname A oan Spooled file name Device file Libt ry ca de nena na V Program that opened file Library ap tar Ue niu atid NUR eS Lethe cS F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel When entering more than 1 spool file attribute the selected attributes have to be valid before AFC will execute the sequence line Logical AND function If an entry is left blank the spool file attribute is ignored User s Manual for InterForm400 139 1 Merge with Overlay Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue PRTHP3 AFC Library x uox xw wi QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program Seqnbr Function 1 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print TaD ae E MUN T InterForm 400 printer type InterfdaOog X oso reuera Verna Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Find overlay in forms type table N Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll1 Delete F12 Cancel In this screen the specifications for the output device is entered Output queue library The queue to receive the resulting print out If a specific queue Printer
199. Press F6 to create a new Overlay Selector Add Overlay selectors AFC300D Selector name Description File set End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel 122 Users Manual for InterForm400 Selector Name The name you will be referring to in the AFC function 1 Merge with overlay in Functions attached to output queues see page 140 and when making interactive merge using option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay page 117 Description For your information File set The file set which the overlay selector should be restricted to select overlays from Selection Criteria Entries Add Overlay selectors AFC300D Selector name INTERMA_ Description Selection for INVOICE File set TEST Seqnbr Overlay name Overlay description Seqnbr F12 Cancel You can now enter the specific requirements your spool entry data should meet for selecting a certain overlay You can have several sequence lines checking on many different types of spool entries under the same selector definition or you can make selectors for each print job type If the conditions for a sequence line are true for a given page of the spool entry being checked the rest of the sequence lines will be ignored When entering a sequence line you will get the following screen User s Manual for InterForm400 123 Selector name Description File set sa Segnbr Overlay name Overlay description Add Overla
200. Prompt F12 Cancel 216 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Finishing Definition name Finishing Definition created with option 4 Finishing Definitions on the Auto Forms Control menu Output queue The Finishing pre process will generate a SCS spool entry This spool entry will be formatted with Finishing preprocessing information can be viewed from position 341 using DSPSPLF This spool entry should normally be printed to the same AFC input queue in order to merge it with an overlay Note that sending this spool entry directly to the PFE MailPrinter Prinserter or printer with Finishing equipment will have no effect Form type The pre processed spool entry should have a Form type defined which allows a following 1 Merge with overlay line to create a PCL formatted output for the PFE MailPrinter Prinserter or printer with Finishing equipment Merge with pre processed Finishing spool entry We can now merge the new spool entry with an overlay conditioned by the Formtype PFEREADY or by using an Overlay Selector Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue PFE IN Library QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 G DEMO Finish def PFEDEF1 outq PFE IN library QUSRSYS form type Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 2 0 1 POPIO EVDO vt es re my s dr ot ny ee PFEREADY Save mBCPIDUDG a wal aoe ceo el ela ea 4 xs JG ame dure cout mus to
201. Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel In order to determine which lines should be formatted by the tabulator we press F18 to display our spool entry This is actually just a shortcut to the command DSPSPLF but the entries to the command is automatically fetched from the values we saw in the screen 3 Merge spool entry with overlay TROUBLE SHOOTING If pressing F14 F16 or F18 has no effect it means no spool attributes is available in the window we filled in on page 80 The reason could be that you have performed that step tin another terminal session Either define these attributes with F13 in the screen with the overlay global settings or exit this screen and print once using 3 Merge spool entry with overlay and re enter the above screen or alternatively display the spool file in 84 Users Manual for InterForm4009 DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 3 Function Columns i ou8 Search for Webs ers rem Ze ue Ola tase di te oa A OORE oa Dig edited Pia te oat S eseese we esse HE Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 9000 Battleaxe DK Denmark 1004 PH 30 04 97 Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s
202. RAL 8470 DATABASE 8471 User s Manual for InterForm400 461 DTAQ 8472 FILE 8473 NETPRT 8474 RMTCMD 8475 SIGNON 8476 SVRMAP 449 TCP server Port number DDM 446 Apart from that this port number must be open in order for to be able to activate Swiftview Service Port number Microsoft DS 445 Limitations of the Graphical Designer Barcodes are not displayed correctly Only an image looking like a barcode in about the same size is shown PCL files included are not shown in the graphical designer Only a frame indicating the PCL file is shown If you want to see the actual output you can activate Acrobat Reader or SwiftView from the graphical designer to see the exact result after saving the design SwiftView will display the PCL files Installing the Graphical Designer Installing JAVA Environment Before installing the graphical designer you need to install JAVA Runtime Environment if not already installed The Java Runtime Environment can be installed in these manners 1 From the InterForm400 menus by selecting 80 Administering InterForm 400 12 Service functions 70 Install InterForm Designer on your PC and 2 Launch JAVA Runtime Environment JRE setup program 2 From the iSeries IFS by downloading and then run the file APF3812Home Designer jre 1 5 0 windows i585 exe 3 You can download the installation file from the web site http java sun com j2se 1 5 0 download jsp Select
203. RC The exit program will be called with amp Entrystep CLS 210 Users Manual for InterForm4009 id NOTE Any program called by InterForm400 must be owned by QSECOFR You can change ithe owner if you have enough authority with the comman HGOBJOW ie WARNING NEVER place any objects e g programs or output queues in the APF3812 library Those objects will NOT be copied to the new release when later doing a release update of InterForm400 8 Encryption and Signature This option works exactly like option 8 of the E mail fax finishing definition Refer to page 203 for more information d NOTE Password protection and or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the 9 PDF bookmark definition If you decide that the PDF file should include bookmarks you can specify what bookmark definition to use here If you want no bookmarks you can state NONE Refer to page 238 for more information about the PDF bookmarks When you are done defining the PDF file naming definition you can go on and insert it in production or test You insert it in Auto Forms Control by inserting a function N Create PDF File Refer to page 152 for more information of how to do this User s Manual for InterForm400 211 Define Level Break Conditions for Finishing The screen below appears automatically in the process of creating any finishing definition This section is used for creating definitions for determina
204. SCS The program SAP100C delivered with InterForm400 is used to convert the SAP systems propriatary spool format with datatype IBMSCS to ordinary spool entries with SCS The program can be called from the AFC function 8 Call Program The SAP format is intended to be additionally formatted by the native PCL drivers embedded in SAP and can not be sent to a printer directly 152 Users Manual for InterForm400 Control commands CR LF FF in SAP spool entries are formatted as text and not as hex values For instance is ODhOCh formatted as FOhC4hFOhC3h SAP generated spool entries has no meaningful attributes like page length width Instead the formtype indicates the format eg DINA4 or 51X132 InterForm400 does not use this information as the page size definition is controlled by the overlay The source code for the program is placed in the file SAPSRC in the APF3812 library as there might be other flavours of SAP print IBMSCS which has not yet been considered and which a programmer may need to adjust to SAP spool entries datatype IBMSCS2 The latest releases of SAP software is creating spool file format with datatype IBMSCS2 which is the same as SCS and can by used directly in InterForm400 Generating multiple copies in input spool entries When defining a finishing definition for which you want to use an overlay containing Copy Management you will need to enter an overlay containing the number of copies in the Pre proc
205. SER can also be specified making the user data field contain either the job name or the user profile of the original spool file Separator Drawer See page 119 for explanation Hold output spooled file This affects the status of the output spooled file on the queue Save output spooled file This will affect the spool file attribute SAVE of the output spooled file Archive in InfoStore 400 InterForm400 automatically detects if InfoStore 400 is installed If that is the case then this and the next option emerges enabling direct archiving from InterForm400 in InfoStore 400 Here you can decide to archive the merged PCL spool file or both the PCL file and the original SCS spool file Archive ID Archive ID in InfoStore 400 where the spool files are to be stored InfoStore 400 is an archiving system developed by Solitas AG Read more about InfoStore 400 on http www solitas com 2 Send Network Spooled File Seqnbr Function 1 0 2 Send Network Spooled File Send to User ID Address Data format on ge Se d RCDDATA ALLDATA F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel A spool entry can be sent to another system for processing or a processed job can be sent to another system for printing For instance could an AFC output queue have the function 1 Merge with APF3812 overlay defined and the receiving output queue for the result is an AFC input queue could have 2 Send Network Spooled File defined User
206. STRWTRCHK as a validity checker and specify which particular form type the printer writer is restricted to process In case you do not want to use this general change you can specify a specific form type when starting or changing writer jobs as seen below Printer Writer Twinax or TCP IP TN5250E or Raw Socket If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue the following command will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue AFC_INPUT2 If the writer is not started just replace CHGWTR with STRPRTWTR CHGWTR WTR PRTXXX OUTQ APF3812 AFC NPUT2 FORMTYPE STD Defining formtype STD for the writer will limit the subsystem QSPL to process jobs with this formtype only thus leaving all jobs regardless of formtype to be processed by subsystem AUTO FORM Remote Writer TCP IP LPD You can not change a remote writer to use another queue as it is the queue itself which contains the definition of the writer IP address You should instead follow the procedure explained on page 370 Attaching through a TCP IP Print Server in order to configure queue AFC INPUT2 as a remote writer Note that remote writer must be started 160 Users Manual for InterForm400 with formtype STD in order to limit the subsystem QSPL to process jobs with this formtype only thus leaving all jobs regardless of formtype to be processed by subsystem AUTO FORM STRRMTWTR OUTQ APF3812 AFC OUTI FORMTYPE STD When using the sa
207. Soft font Auto download 0005 287 Import for POL secos he mes 284 Import for PDF lsllsulssns 289 Import for Zebra lssleslsss 313 Sort definitions 0000 230 Examples using sort 233 Find sort fields 232 Page selection criteria 232 Special line 0 eee eee eee 63 Split definitions 0 173 Calling a user exit program 175 Condition entries 173 Defining the spool file attributes 176 Example using split 177 Stapling p r recipient a ss c sac leere 190 GOples oce evi ee oie ethos 47 Start AFC Job CL command 405 Start Netserver 00 0000 e eee 401 User s Manual for InterForm400 489 Start OSC Job CL command 405 Storing macros permanent 416 STRAFCJOB CL command 405 STRNETSVR ll oo ade ess 401 STROSCJOB CL command 405 STRWTRCHK 0 000 e eee eee 27 Sub overlays 000000 000 67 107 Suboverlay Conditioned 02 eee 67 Unconditioned 000 72 Support information lesse 2 Supported printer types 374 SwiftView 0 30 347 356 430 SwiftView troubleshoot 433 Access to the file not permitted 433 Unusual file access failure 433 System requirem
208. TQ You can also see the number of pages that a merged spooled file consists of If you have used a PJL printer type for the merge in InterForm400 you can even change the page range of the merged spooled file with option 2 change spooled file Option 1 on the APFWRKOUTQ command has been extended compared to the OS400 WRKOUTQ In APFWRKOUTQ you can also chose to merge a selected spooled file into a PDF file and send it as an e mail If you need an AS 400 command line and you do not have a second session and you ido not want to exit the InterForm400 menu you can use this option to obtain a command line User s Manual for InterForm400 121 Working with Overlay Selectors An Overlay Selector will allow you to make conditioned overlay selections on certain character combinations in the print data of the spool entry The overlay selector decides what overlay to merge with for each page of the merged spool file It is not necessary to define an AFC definition to let the Overlay Selector take effect Ani overlay selector can be used when making an interactive merge using option 3 Merge When selecting option 4 Working with Overlay Selectors on the main menu the following screen appears Work with Overlay selectors AFC300D Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Selector File set Description No overlay selectors End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel
209. The Result Now we print the overlay merged with the spool entry using 3 Merge Spool entry with overlay If your printout looks like the illustration on the next page and you understood what went on you can consider yourself quite familiar with InterForm4009 We have brought you through the heaviest kind of design you will experience with InterForm400 A vital feature of the system which we did not use is import of PCL files made in graphical applications e g Windows The actual insertion of the PCL file is so simple that we decided to leave it out from this example more info on PCL files on page 70 and 325 You will probably realize that even if you create your complete overlay in Word PageMaker JetForm or another graphical tool and import it into your overlay definition you will have to make some formatting within InterForm400 regarding copies re mapping conditional selections etc With this section our intention was to show you the potential of InterForm400 as a Forms Management System and we haven t even talked about the Auto Forms Control features yet A similar example on Auto Forms Control features are made on page 155 TROUBLE SHOOTING Not the result as the following example Q Did you use a PCL5 compatible printer Q Are you sure all your entries was correct iA Try locating the overlay elements which went wrong and check the corresponding i TROUBLE SHOOTING Everything looks fine but t
210. This is basically just an extra set of copies made from the same spool entry The secondary set is mainly intended to be used to create an extra set with a fixed number of copies independent of the variation of copies in the main set Stating a number for Secondary set will not force a printout of this set The secondary set will only be printed if the Auto Forms Control definition 1 Merge with overlay states Primary Secondary Set SEC see page 140 or if you in 3 Merge spool entry with overlay page 117 have stated 2 secondary Source Drawers for Copies After having stated the number of copies pressing Enter will extend the screen to include definitions of source drawers Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text Demo overlay for InterFomr400 Number of copies of each page Primary set 2 VAR 1 9 Secondary set d VAR 1 9 Select paper from the following drawers Copy Primary Secondary 1 Valid drawers 2 1 255 Valid paper types F4 List Do you want stapling Y N A F3 Exit F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM Here you can define from which drawer each copy should be taken from See Cassette Selection page 376 for more information of selecting by drawer number Refer to page 376 and 331 for information of how to select drawer by paper type WARNING Different printer manufacturers have diverting opinions of which value should
211. Type font for PDF from the folder APF3812 FNT451D Document name PDFFONT TTF MONG Damen doch ub Sede ad True Type Font for PDF Member name PDF font file F4 List F3 Exit F12 Cancel First specify the document name to be installed i e the name of the TTF file in the APF3812 folder Press F4 to see available documents Select with option 1 Enter a member name to contain the soft font After pressing Enter the soft font can be referred to in option 3 Auto download soft fonts where you have to add the soft font and a connected font number to the printer group PDF The font number is created by using option 1 Description of additional fonts i Even if you upload a bold and or italic True Type Font you still have to specify bold and or italic when defining font numbers using this soft font in 1 Description of iadditionalfonts d InterForm400 Predefined Soft Fonts Besides the predefined fonts ID s which selects resident fonts in the printer InterForm400 includes some pre defined softfonts User s Manual for InterForm400 289 MICR Soft Font Font ID 3998 The MICR E 13B font is used for check printing in USA and exist per definition only in one size The font include the decimal digits 0 9 plus four special characters The fours characters will be printed when the following characters is included in the text A Amount symbol D Dash symbol O On us symbol T Transit symbol It is therefore predefin
212. Work with resources in export library lille 342 Work with distribution 00 ccc ee 342 22 Import of InterForm400 Resources 0 0 eee eae ences 343 Work with resources in import library 0 00 0000 343 Transfer resources to the production library 344 40 Install upgrade InterWord 400 000 cee eee 346 50 Apply PTF from folder APF3812 0 0 e eee 346 60 Install Swiftview at drive C liliis 347 70 Install InterForm Designer on your PC 0 0000 eee eeeee 347 80 Prepare server to support InterForm Designer 0005 347 How to create PDF files esee 349 Resources that can be used for PDF output 353 Fonts used in PDF output 0 00002 eee 353 IFS directories used by MRGSPLFPDF sssss 353 Appendix A Installation ele 356 System Requirements ssssesseseese eee 356 First Time Installation 20 0 0 cee I 356 License Codos na seo erac ees te epe ere be nee hate et C ay 356 Release Update ssusulseeseesssele eh 357 Upgrade remote sites liliis 362 10 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Relations to Other Applications 000 cece ee 362 PerfOrmatice 3 e D dre RR EHE TRAE E ERU S ARR RA TUE na doa 363 Printing REPE 363 Processing bag eei ad x aes add he weeks 363 Appendix B Attaching P
213. Y YN F3 Exit F12 Cancel When you press Enter you are presented with the screen below Here you decide what form type to use as default use STD if in doubt the paper size and whether or not the InterForm400 users are allowed to override the paper size on overlays See more on page 38 User s Manual for InterForm4008 25 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 2 7 Specify default form type for the InterForm 400 system Users may override value when using the system Form type STD Select paper size 4 1 LETTER 5 COM 10 A LEDGER 2 LEGAL 6 MONARCH B A3 3 EXECUTIVE 7 C5 C A5 4 A4 8 DL Do you want to define paper size on the individual overlays Y Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel Leave the macro offset value at 0 Refer to page 269 for additional info Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 3 7 Number to be added to the macro numbers the system works with lo The reason to add a number can be that printers are equipped with flash simm cards that does not correspond to the HP standard saying that a macro in the printers internal memory should be selected even if it has the same number as a macro in the flash simm F3 Exit F12 Cancel If you do not intend to exchange overlays between a number of InterForm400 installations you can answer N to using DDM Refer to page 270 for more information on using DDM Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 4 1 Do you want to use DDM to InterForm files
214. YS Form type qos STD F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel 314 Users Manual for InterForm4009 This will create an entry in the list above that InterForm400 will use for remembering NOT to download this soft font when used on this output queue This will also create a spooled file on the specified queue which should be the one where the printer is attached The spooled file name will be ZEBRAFONT and the user data field of the spooled file will be named the same as the downloaded This spooled file will do the actual install of the soft font in the flash memory as well as print a sample of the soft font Delete a soft font from flash memory If you use option 4 Delete for an installed soft font you will be asked to confirm and to specify the form type of the spooled file that will do the delete from the flash memory Confirm delete of fonts FNT481D Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4 Delete Press F3 or F12 to return to change your choices Opt Outq 4 ZEBRA Output queue ZEBRA QUSRSYS Form type STD F3 Exit F12 Cancel F3 Exit F12 Cancel The entry of this soft font in the list above will be removed and a spooled file will be generated on the assigned output queue This spooled file has the name DLTZEBFONT and a user data field containing the flash drive and the soft font that will be deleted 14 Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts The resident fonts of the
215. Zbrsaty 2z muneEu Ri APF3812 Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Description m Job for sample printout Autostart Job eee ee ay Jen v Y N Code page SYSVAL Number SYSVAL F4 List Default output output queue and printer type Output queue AFC_OUT1 Peary 2x x2 we eee ee APF3812 InterForm 400 printer type HP4 PJL Interface xw oce ws ASCII850 Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Output queue TEMPLATE __ Library fe ce wes ez gens Je QGPL F3 Exit F4 Prompt F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel Rather than making the same AFC entries for a lot of simular monitored output queues we create an AFC defintion with entries which will operate as a template for other AFC definitions Create an output queue without a device attached CRTOUTQ QGPL TEMPLATE Create an AFC definition as per below using option 1 Functions attached to output queue from the AFC menu option 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Press F6 to create Update Auto Forms Control Definition AFC302D Output queue TEMPLATE __ IG DESTW ox xo Go V OGPL Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Description Template AFC definition Autostart Job 4 x xj Se ee OF Y N Code page SYSVAL Number SYSVAL F4 List Default output output queue and printe
216. Zebra printers only support Western codepages However in order to be able to print other codepages and use the internal fonts when possible InterForm400 provides with the option to specify to substitute the resident font with a previously installed soft font for each code page User s Manual for InterForm400 315 Substitution for internal fonts when printing non western code page Substitute for Substitute for Code page triumvirate dot matrix font Central European Baltic Turkish Cyrillic Greek Arabic Hebrew F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images As you install and delete resources in the flash memory of a Zebra printer the amount of free space in the flash memory will gradually decrease empty blocks in the memory from previously installed elements cannot be reused In order for you to workaround this issue InterForm400 provides you with this function It will erase a specific flash memory drive and rewrite all registered resources in onto the flash memory WARNING amp i As all data in the specified flash memory drive will be erased you should make sure of i this before executing this option i f Are all your InterForm400 related resources in flash memory registered in InterForm400 2 If you have downloaded other resources into the flash memory not registered in InterForm400 these should be reloaded after the memory has been rewritten Do you
217. a NO This parameter indicates if the macro should be stored in e g the optional Flash SIMM module on a printer Valid values are No HP4 Only downloaded to the memory of the printer Store in HP Flash SIMM Here the output queue for the final printout is stated The macro will be transformed into a spool entry with the filename MACROnnnnn where nnnnn is the macro ID The description of the spool entry will be the name of the overlay This is the forms type you want the macro to have when placed as a spool entry on the output queue defined by OUTQ The output will be placed in the output queue with status HOLD YES and SAVE YES User s Manual for InterForm4008 417 When you wish to download the macro you only have to release the spool entry The Import InterForm400 Resources Command With this command you can import InterForm400 resources directly into production into the APF3812 library without a lot of menu selections Import InterForm resources IMPAPFRSC Type choices press Enter Save file L 2 Qe wx wes we SAVE Name Library ks ha Jes etis TRU QUU toy DT Je LIBL Name LIBL CURLIB Transfer to production TFRPROD YES YES NO PROMPT Display errors s 4 o DSBEERR YES YES NO Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Refer to page 477 for more information of this command The PCL file from folder to Memb
218. a 0 in front of the checksum digit if 4 EAN8 EAN13 and UPC A When a character string contains 8 digits it will be printed as EANB8 A character string of 13 digits will be printed with EAN13 and 12 digits will be printed as UPC A Using these barcodes with a number of characters other than 8 12 or 13 or with non numeric data results in no barcode to be printed This barcode also supports texts that ends with followed by 2 or 5 digits Postnet Barcode The Postnet barcode exists per definition only in one size It is therefore predefined in InterForm400 and does not need to be generated It can be used immediately by Remap Window a Tabulator and Text constant commands within the overlay design window by selection of font ID 3999 The font will to the user function as a resident printer font InterForm400 will automatically add start and stop codes and check digits Barcode PDF417 This is a two dimensional barcode widely used in e g the automotive industry No soft font is used for this barcode which means it is not required to auto download the font The barcode is solely defined as a font number in the option 1 Description of additional fonts The font can only be used for the remap function in design overlay When using a PDF417 barcode in overlay design you will be prompted for the maximum width of the barcode When you create a PDF417 font number range 4400 4499 you are prompted for these parameters apart f
219. a new queue just replace CHG with CRT 3 Now fill in the following fields Remote System RMTSYS NTNETADR Remote Printer Queue RMTPRTQ PRI Insert the required port name for the queue Some manufacturers require a specific name for the LPD queue in order to allow binary 370 Users Manual for InterForm4009 transfer and others will automatically default to binary transfer if a random name is entered Consult the manual for your Printer Server or try with eg PR1 Examples Use raw1 for the HP JetDirect and Ip for ZebraNet PrintServer See a list of some of the possible queue names at this site http www 912 ibm com s_dir slkbase nsf 1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e b49aa3cf3ce97d0d862565c2007d4393 0penDocument amp Highlight 0 printing port number Writers to autostart AUTOSTRWTR 1 Connection Type CNNTYPE IP Destination Type DESTTYPE OTHER Transform SCS to ASCII TRANSFORM YES This value could be NO if the queue should only be used for print controlled by InterForm4005 Manufac type amp model MFRTYPMDL HP4 This value is not important if you are only printing through InterForm400 as InterForm400 makes the protocol conversion Internet Address NTNETADR 222 5 1 235 The IP address of your Printer Server Consult your system administrator Destination options DESTOPT XAIX This will support e g the number of copies specified on the spool file 4 You can verify the connection to the
220. a registered user of InterForm400 or if you do not have access to any file sets in InterForm400 you will be refused access with the error Lost connection to the host followed by another message indicating the exact problem If you are not a registered user of InterForm400 you can do that as described on page 272 You can get access to file sets by using option 9 File set access in the same screen Start designing an overlay When the InterForm Graphical Designer starts up you will see a window with this heading User s Manual for InterForm400 463 s InterForm Design Job 034236 The job number in the heading refers to the job number of the corresponding job with the name QZRCSRVS in subsystem QUSRWRK on the iSeries Use the command APF3812 WRKPRFJ 0B to display all jobs used by a specific user profile including server jobs Refer to page 420 for more information of this command Now you have these opportunities Create a new overlay To create a new overlay for PCL and or PDF output you can either press the icon looking like this E n Or select File and New overlay If you want to create a new overlay for Zebra ZPL output you press this icon Edit an existing overlay To edit an existing overlay you can either select this icon in the left side Or select File and Open Then you will see a list of the file sets that you have access to Open the file set and select the overla
221. a spool entry and thereby allow varying number of pages to be inserted into envelopes The pre processor can additionally define that the varying pages should be Sorted in to groups where each group contains a fixed number of pages This is in reality a postage group sorting mechanism This function is typically used for mailings which is based on the same number of pages for all recipients Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions on the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 04 for making the definition valid for the PFE MailPrinter Update Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name FINISHPFE Description Finish definition for PFE Mail Printer Type of Finishing 04 PFE Mail Printer Envelope type 2 1 Window envelope Printed envelope F3 Exit F12 Cancel Definition name Referred to by the sub system function C Prepare for Finishing Envelope Type Here we can decide whether we use a window envelope or we want to use a plain envelope where we get the possibility of printing on the envelope 186 Users Manual for InterForm400 Create Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name PFEDEF1 Description Finish definition for PFE Mail Printer Type of Finishing 04 PFE Mail Printer Envelope type 2 Printed envelope Overlay for envelope Overlay name File set or selector M ru LM
222. aT a a 177 Finishing Definitions ee 181 Defining Prinserter Pre process Definition Fixed number of pages 181 Defining Prinserter amp pre process Definition Variable number of pages 183 Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups 0 00000 ee 183 Example 1 Non sorted 0 0 0 cece eee eee es 184 Example 2 Sorting in Ascending Weight 184 Example 3 Sorting in Franking groups 20 0005 185 Defining PFE MailPrinter Pre process Definition 05 186 Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups ulsulusss 187 Example 1 Non sorted 0 0 00 cece eens 188 Example 2 Sorting in Ascending Weight 188 Example 3 Sorting in Franking groups 20 0005 189 Defining Stapling Pre process Definitions lille 190 Defining Insertion Pre process Definitions llle 192 How to distribute E mails and faxes in InterForm400 195 The E mail Fax Finishing Definition llle 195 1 How to find E mail address Fax number 196 2 Key definitions lille eh 197 3 Definition variables 0 0 00 cee eee 198 4 Default PDF file name 0 000 e cece eee 198 5 Definition E mail text Cover page text 22000 198 6 Definition recipien ID 0 000 c eee 199 7 E mail addresses and fax numbers 00000ee ee
223. aa i a a E V eaaa EA IRI 223 TAS E c MT A E a dite 226 FOOLS Bs c rr iiU EA E A ae doe A A E bpd es A ARTE ERE N 228 Insert reformatting in production llli 228 Sort Definitions 1 22 a a a a e verat a 230 Page Selection criteria 2l 232 Find sort fields in the following positions isses 232 Examples Using Sort 0 00 c cece tte eee 233 Example 1 Sort by Type InterMate400 letters first 234 Example 2 Sort by Type MateSert 400 letters first 234 Example 3 Sort by Type and Customer ID 235 Example 4 Sort by Customer ID and type lilius 235 PDF File Bookmarks esses 238 Getting familiar with PDF Bookmarks esee nim 241 User Output Queue s s 2il2ilinuliiuiveicscubiet ean ae rae a d a an 244 Example Distribute Spooled Files depending on Spooled File Owner 244 General Description of OSC Output Schedule Control 246 10 Start OSCCTL subsystem 0 0 ccc esee 247 11 End OSCCTL subsystem 0 0 00 ccc ee 247 12 Work with Active Subsystem OSCCTL 0000 cae eee 247 Describing the OSC definition lines 0 00 248 Principle of OSC Output Schedule Control 250 Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output 253 Define Sort Fields wien Spri sitet ibt or esp eae s Duis
224. additional fonts in InterForm400 Font ID 7510 2 New Times Roman 10 Typeface 16901 Font ID 7610 New Times Roman 10 BOLD Typeface 16901 When you have finished editing the spool file according to the below press F3 to exit and press Enter to create the revised spool entry amp amp FNT amp amp BOX amp amp IMG amp amp BLA amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp BLO 1 2 3 4 5 6 Yee 1 0066 00160 00120 03100 02040 005 R B Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 9000 Battleaxe DK Denmark Att DEMOIMAGE 03100 02120 000 7510 03180 040 080 ULUL Re Martin Merman 01080 05058 300 1004 PH 13 09 99 BO7610 NONORM NLNL Your new MateSert 400 driver NL Congratulations with your new BOMateSert 400 NO driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter
225. adeudad qdamaxau tend wa sut aaxx exaudi ih F45 44A2971 1 81 2 320 44A9032 3 3F 7 Should you have any questions regarding the driver y to call our technical support hotline on 45 72 26 04 00 Or download the latest documentation from the Interne http www intermate com Regards INTERMATE A S Florence Flowers Tulip Road 16 4000 Marigold DK Denmark F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More Keys e Line 1 30 olumns LS E ux xal duel ad Tod as 0 01 3A 8 66 99 ou are welcome t on More We do not need to find the specific page with the value 2 We know it will always appear in column 47 somewhere in the line interval 30 to 42 102 Users Manual for InterForm400 We create a new sequence line 30 and select to make an If then statement Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text MYDEMO Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0025 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C 0026 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 100 left 3 000 C 0027 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 100 left 4 000 C 0028 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 100 left 5 000 C 0029 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 54 070 top 5 100 left 6 000 C Seqnbr Type 30 0 2 If Input line 30 42 Position 47 47 Is gt lt N 2 Then Overlay LIGHT Nos of lines to remap 00 Upper edge 1 060 A Left edge A A Blank after B blank original text F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 C
226. ail lines for each User profile and or each overlay which should result in addressing of a particular sorter bin Create Output Sorter Details Output queue PRT02 pibe 2X xoxtz xcf QUSRSYS Overlay name Primary Secondary _ l Primary 2 Secondary User profile 50e eee de OSECOFR Output bin number 4 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Overlay name Type a name of an overlay which should result in printing to a bin defined in Output bin number If a user profile has been entered also the bin will only be addressed if both Overlay name and User profile match Primary Secondary If Copy Management has been defined for the Overlay this option will decide if only the Primary or the Secondary set of copies will result in printing to a specific sorter bin As you normally do a primary merge you should state 1 when using an overlay name User Profile The AS 400 user profile which should result in printing to a bin defined in Output bin number If an overlay name has been entered the bin will only be addressed if both Overlay name and User profile match Output bin number A bin number from 1 to 11 can be defined for a HP5Si Bin 1 The standard face down bin Bin 2 The standard face up bin which is only selectable if the sorter unit is not installed Bin 3 The upper face up bin of the sorter unit Bin 4 11 The 8 face down bins of the sorter unit The following example illustrate a situa
227. aking soft fonts unnecessary for this purpose You just specify a font number and use that for remap windows in overlay design Use option 11 Description of ZEBRA fonts on the font menu b For most barcodes you are prompted for a barcode with in dots This is to be specified for both Zebra203 200 DPI 200 Dots Per Inch and Zebra300 300 DPI If you want a barcode to have the same width in both 200 DPI and 300 DPI you should define the width for Zebra203 to be 2 3 of the value for Zebra300 The width is measured in dots See page 292 The Datamatrix barcode InterForm400 supports printing of the Datamatrix barcode for ZPL output only Via the screen below you insert the setup of the barcode 310 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Create ZEBRA font ZEB370D Font 4344 Data Matrix Bar Code ECC200 Description Datamatrix_demo_barcode Symbol element size in dots ZEBRAZ0S3 2 ww oe deus A 1 999 AEBRA300 ow we ee ws we OS 1 999 Colums to encode 10 48 or Blank Based on data length Rows to encode AS 10 48 or Blank Based on data length Line separator 1 A blank 2 CR 3 CRLF 4 None WCC BAN aed kf pe Berd GER eiie ut Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel Columns Rows to encode You can optionally insert a number of spooled file columns positions and or rows lines to be used for the barcode If inserted they must be an even number In this manner you can fix
228. al number of pages in the envelope to 6 We decide not to add an enclosure for these envelopes in order to stay in the cheaper postage group We enter the following definitions Pages per envelope group Enclosure group l Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 5 our BRD The above definition will cause all sets of pages of 1 or 2 to be inserted randomly according to the input spool entry but with an enclosure ie max 3 sheets total Secondly all sets with 3 or 4 pages plus an enclosure are processed ie max 5 sheets total Finally we prevent moving into the higher charge which starts with 6 pages per envelope by defining that envelopes with 5 pages should not have an enclosure We do not have to take into account what to do when 6 or more pages are attempted to be inserted as InterForm400 automatically outputs these pages in the upper tray for manual insertion It can then be decided at that stage if the enclosure should be added manually When filled in press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the Prinserter definition User s Manual for InterForm400 185 Defining PFE MailPrinter Pre process Definition This pre processor can on basis of boolean equations determine the level break between pages in
229. allation in InterForm400 Refer to page 321 for more information Support for the DBCS flag on spooled files has been added InterForm400 does not support DBCS but with the 2006 versions spooled files with IGCDTA YES are now also supported for merge in InterForm400 PDF output for InterWord400 spooled files can now be generated IMG commands in the RTF files are not yet supported Soft fonts based on True Type Fonts installed for PDF output can now be restricted only to be included for some PDF files This can be used for reducing the size of the PDF files for PCs that already have this TTF installed Refer to page 288 for details OS400 V4RAMO is the minimum release on which InterForm400 can be installed but notice that the graphical designer requires V4AR5MO and that some parts requires V5R1M0 e g the ZIP command the PDF Security module and the InterFax module The 2007 versions of InterForm400 are planed to support V5R1MO as minimum release The E mail finishing definition have been extended Up to 9 variables can be defined You can present the e mail text in arial You can include HTML commands in the e mail text You can send each part of the spooled file to 2 receivers include a CC You can use e mails found in the spooled file more easily Two new demo sources for exit programs have been included Refer to page 195 for an updated description of the e mail finishing definition The user exit closing program for the
230. ameters to be filled out A PCL file name defined in OUTDOC will be created in the folder defined in OUTFLR The Copy CPI Spooled File Command When you press F19 DSPPFM in overlay design you can see the temporary file QTEMP APF3812P With the command APF3812 CPYCPISPLF you can create another file with the same contents It is mainly intended for spooled files with variable CPI The CPI of the spooled file is placed in position 199 201 The Page Builder Spooled File Command Software developers can update a copy of an existing SCS spooled file by using the InterForm400 PageBuilder feature The Page Builder feature is invoked by entering the Create PageBuilder Spooled File command APF3812 CRTPBSPLF Prior to using the PageBuilder feature a PageBuilder program must be created This 406 Users Manual for InterForm4009 program must be specified for the PAGBLDPGM parameter on the CRTPBSPLF command Description of the Create PageBuilder Spooled File command CRTPBSPLF Create PageBuild Spooled File CRTPBSPLF Type choices press Enter PageBuilder program PAGBLDPGM Name Library fi jas ache Re denen ger os etes Name Data parameter definition DTAPARM u Pune SEPING e de e graec Value PAGE ANY String length e k rie wl eak STR__ 1 256 STR Return Length 29 995 STRLEN 1 256 STRLEN inimum line I 255 aximum Line xoxo 3x ow x I 255 inimum starting position 1 378 aximum s
231. ancel We can expect 2 to appear in any item line from 30 to 62 which means this will be our interval and we enter Position 47 to 47 as we only search for one character We now state the operand equal to represented by a sign We enter LIGHT as overlay name or press F4 to select it from the list The vertical position should be relative to the item lines containing 2 It could seem we do not need to state any value as we want the text to be placed at the same vertical position as 2 But we remember that we defined the text in the sub overlay LIGHT to start 1 down which means we must move 1 up to level this out Additionally we have moved the first line of the item columns 1 4 up with Remap Window commands sequence lines 25 to 29 compared to the original position defined by the global settings of the overlay We therefore need to adjust 1 0 25 totally in negative direction 1 0 25x240 1 060 By stating minus in the field A we define the movement to be upwards relative to the found text 2 The left edge should be exactly as defined in the sub overlay LIGHT Therefore we just state A in the field A which means we use the absolute positioning of the sub overlay We press Enter to save line 30 User s Manual for InterForm400 103 Step 17 Cleaning the Overlay for Remaining Text If you printed the overlay at this stage you will discover that the original text used for re mapping are st
232. and SAVE YES Every time you want to download the font to the printer all you have to do is to release the spool entry The font will then be available on the printer until the printer is switched off or cleared from the printer s operator panel unless your printer is equipped with a flash card and Place Into Flash memory has been filled in It is important that the symbol set of the soft font matches the printer interface you are using When using the SYSTEM IDA3X IDA5219 IDA812 and ASCIIR8 the symbol set has to be Roman 8 When using WORKSTN the symbol set must be PC 8 and when using the ASCII850and SYSTEM850 the symbol set must be PC 850 In order to select the soft font from an overlay is has to be described to the system in 1 Description of additional fonts page 279 Import a True Type Font From the Work with PCL Soft Fonts menu you can also import a True Type Font uploaded from a PC to the APF3812 folder If you press F6 Create you get this screen 284 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Install TrueType font to PCL from the folder APF3812 FNT431D Document name F4 List F3 Exit F12 Cancel Now you can either specify the name of the uploaded TTF file or press F4 to get an overview of all files in the APF3812 folder and then select the TTF file Press Enter and this screen is presented Install TrueType font to PCL from the folder APF3812 FNT431D Document name ves ee es RO CPE PELE TEE Font name
233. and variables found in the spooled file through option 8 Keys and variables If you forget the AFC job will halt with an 6 Receipient ID Information Through this option you can maintain passwords for the receivers of the PDF files per key value Below only the key Customer number has been defined Create Receipient ID PNM365D Definition name DEMO MAN Description Demo for manual Customer Number PDF User Password id NOTE The use of PDF passwords requires purchase of the PDF security module plus 7 Closing User Exit Select this option to specify a program that will be called right after each PDF file has been created You will get this screen when selecting this option Change Closing User Exit Program PNM370D Definition name DEMO MAN Description Demo for manual Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit User exit program NONE Name NONE Libary Ale Aedes LIBL Library LIBL Exit fields variables Poem emet ee KEY1 3 VA 9 Parm 6 10 You can state your own user program that will be called e g to update an index of the created PDF files You can select up to 10 or 20 keys or variables that will be transferred to the program For an example of such a program showing e g the expected parameters look in the source members PNMCLSEXIT Format 01 and PNMCLSEXI2 format 02 in source file APF3812 APIS
234. anual Notice Language of commands can only be selected during install INTERO2 Primary language GB DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English PT Portugu s Primary language can be changed at the administration menu option 2 It is recommend to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812 This journal will be created during install if used If you select another journal then this journal must already exist INS0122 InterForm 400 version 2006M01 Select journal press Enter Journal 2 4 sie 5 e tu s eh E th APFJRN TAPE DY og Wo eee eo ae We APF3812 Current journal APFJRN Dibrsfe sp ce ge 5e Row pe ew APF3812 It is recommend to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812 This journal will be created during install if used INTERO2 If a journal is selected changes are recorded to a journal receiver If you select a journal in a other library this journal must already exist Since the installation is an upgrade you have the possibility to chose the Installation Method The Installation Method lets you decide if you want a warning before the installation ends the subsystem AUTO_FORM and renames the existing APF3812 library to APF3812OLD The InterForm400 system can be used as normal until this takes place and thus reducing down time Select option 1 if no users will need InterForm400 until the installation is complete Select option 2 if InterForm4
235. ar code soft font We select Code 128 Create CODE 128 soft font FNT402D Font number 2 xe ewe we 4700 4700 4799 Font height dots 40 30 1200 Module width dots 3 3 13 Printer type L Lew vou 1 PCL4 2 PCL5 Orientation oe esel Yre 9 ele 000 000 090 FONT file member name GEN GEN Name Auto download Y Y Yes N No F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel 6 We have now defined our bar code The font number to use in design is 4700 the barcode is 40 dots high with a narrow bar width of 3 dots InterForm400 automatically creates a soft font called CODE128xxx where xxx is numbered in the sequence AAA ZZZ This soft font will be downloaded and used when printing in font number 4700 7 After you have pressed Enter you can now edit the font number 4700 if needed From the Work with fonts menu select option 1 Description of additional fonts and 2 Change to edit the details of font number 4700 Change Font APF370D Pont groves dodo ae a a a AT Gode 128 soft fonts Description 4 4 4 4 6 6 Code 12898 3 089 CPI 8 00 points PIEC A De dede Ae tae tea eee ua 9 09 0 10 49 99 Heights de Orie We Over eee S 9 60 1 00 792 00 Character set B only N Y N UCG EAN E28 5 7 19 bee x0 ee ee Bee AN Y N Notice The use of UCC EAN 128 is restricted by the regulations of The Uniform Council and EAN International F3 Exit F12 Cancel 300 Users Manual for InterForm4
236. are structured so you will be brought through a process of improving the visibility of the sample spool entry IFA00DEMO introduced in the Getting Started section The chapter requires you have Run the Getting Started section A PCL5 capable printer attached to your default InterForm400 output queue displayed in the upper right field on the main menu or have configured the PCL Viewer Not made changes to the sample overlay IFA00DEMO delivered with the system It is recommend that you have Two terminal sessions available Quiet surroundings A cup of coffee You can start by printing the overlay IFAO00DEMO if you like to know how the final result will appear Please abstract from the fact that it is not a piece of design artwork We have concentrated mainly on using as many features of the system as possible 76 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Step 1 Making a Work Copy of the Overlay IFA00DEMO In order to keep the original sample we should first make a copy of the overlays to work with To prevent the changes we make to be overwritten by future updates of the SAMPLE file set we will do the changes in our TEST file set which was created on page 28 in the Getting Started section Enter 8 in the option field on the main menu Select File set Select one of the following file sets then press Enter 1 Select Opt File ID Description SAMP LE InterForm 400 Samples 1 TEST Test file set F3 Exit F12 Cancel Now ent
237. argin Duplex margin cu in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Copy from another overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view We keep these default settings as the main definitions of overlay MYDEMO will have higher priority We enter sequence line 1 and select 5 for text User s Manual for InterForm400 101 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name LIGHT Sub overlay for MYDEMO Segnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type Inch pel 1 0 5 Text constant From top edge 1 000 From left _6 120 Rotation 000 Font 9903 F4 List Text Light version F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F11l Delete F12 Cancel We prepare the text to be positioned horizontally just outside the last frame for the item columns 6 120 The vertical position will be controlled by the position where 2 is found and is therefore not critical We state 1 in order to have the text within the page borders if we decide to make a testprint of the sub overlay alone We press Enter to save line 1 and we exit the form by F3 We now enter our overlay MYDEMO again until we are in the design window with our sequence lines Before we create our if then statement we must find out where to find the text value 2 We first take a look at the spool entry by F18 DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE File QPRINT Pag Function 1 G Search for lsutaaw
238. art Chart height Chart width Chart margin left Chart margin right Chart margin top Chart margin bottom Legend margin Legend width Legend spacing Displacement of group texts 6 gt ZL STXt ZX TL STXe ZA c e F c 7 crommoou P11 P12 J P21 P22 B X axis group Gl X axis group Gi Ta I k G om servation set si Observation set 52 ice 0 0 t t dE You can define both types of charts by using the Work with Charts WRKCHT command By using the WRKCHT command you can define the complete layout of your charts including data to be presented in the charts To print a chart enter the amp amp CHT command inside your spooled file The amp amp CHT command also enables you to do the following while printing Change the layout of your chart Change the data to be presented in the charts Create a chart without using the WRKCHT command Note Charts can only be printed out using the following interfaces ASCIIR8 ASCII850 or ASCII852 and only combined with the HP4 printer type HP GL 2 code is generated User s Manual for InterForm400 435 The Work with Charts command WRKCHT When using the Work with Charts command APF3812 WRKCHT the following display is shown Work with Chart definitions CHA100D Position XO 2 4 x a Chart Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print chart Opt Cha
239. as A Re Bie ee ee Re Bees EE BAR Type options press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition R Define general layout Define layout of the X axis R Define X axis points R Define layout of the Yl axis Define layout of the Y2 axis R Define observations F3 Exit F12 Cancel Note R indicates required information Enter 1 next to the definition you want to create or change When finished editing the chart press F3 to exit and save the chart definition User s Manual for InterForm400 437 Define general layout When selecting Define general layout the display below is shown Here it is possible to Set up parameters that describe the general layout of the chart Define general Legend margin Legend width Legend spacing F3 Exit F4 Prompt Chart header Chart header font Chart header font color Chart herght 4 roar oe d Chart width es Cotas Lan Le Chart margin left Chart margin right Chart margin top Chart margin bottom Frame line width Frame line color layout CHA300D Type choices press Enter Inches Inches pels Inches pels Inches pels Inches pels Inches pels Dots pels Inches Inches Pels pels pels F12 Cancel Chart header Chart header font Chart header font color Chart height width Chart margins Frame line width color Legend margin Legend width Legend spacing 438 Users Manual for Inter
240. ated the following are examples and the formulas used to solve it 3 100 1 200 4 300 gt 4 1 300 240 5 060 3 100 1 200 2 100 gt 2 1 240 100 1 140 Orientation of design elements All positions are measured absolute to the upper left corner of the page but depending on the type of overlay element and rotation of the page Text Images PCL files Relative to the upper left corner depending on the rotation specified by Rotation under global settings Frames and lines Relative to the upper left corner of a Portrait page regardless of the rotation specified in the global settings TIP You can print out a ruler from the Service menu option 4 Print ruler see page If you will use an ordinary ruler it is an advantage to find one with indication of 6 lines per inch Using the overlay ruler in file set sample as an sub overlay is also a method 48 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The Design Screen Note Refer to Appendix O on page 461 for information of how to install and use the InterForm400 graphical designer When you press Enter from the previous screens you will finally reach the screen where the entry of overlay elements are made Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text Demo overlay for InterForm400 Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type F3 Exit F5 Service F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr An overlay consists of a
241. ation specified in z F THEN conditional nesting of overlays This feature is useful in the situation where the appearance of the overlay has to be dependent of the text that is merged with the overlay This can be caused by a spool entry containing two or more different print outs say invoices and credit notes and where you want different overlays on the individual printout Another use of the If then feature is the case where a detail in the printout shall result in adding an extra detail to the overlay see example page 101 Finally the If then feature can be used for formatting print lines or groups of print lines appearing in random line positions see example page 107 User s Manual for InterForm400 67 Seqnbr Type 1 0 EE exco m Input line SEN CANEEN Position cs has Is gt lt N Then Overlay Nos of lines to remap Upper edge A t _ Left edge A _ Blank after B blank original text F18 View Spool file Input Line The line interval to read including both lines entered here Input Position Is gt lt N Overlay Number of lines to remap 68 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The Column interval to read including both positions entered here Only call the sub overlay if this following field contains a text string or a number which match one of the following valid operators gt Greater than a number entered in the following field Equal to a number or a text string ca
242. attached printer e g HPLASERD PFT should be used WS31N WS347N and WS348N Optimized for the printer port on 31nn e g IBM 3197 317n e g IBM 3477 and 348n e g IBM 3487 compatible terminals When attaching the printer to a 3197 display station the setup on the display station should be for a 4214 with character set 850 When attaching to a 3477 display station the setup should be for a 5219 with character set Multilingual IDASX An IDA3X 400 external Twinax protocol converter IDA5219 When a HPIID has a built in I data protocol converter IDA812 Used when a HPIIID or HPIIISi is equipped with an IDA812 interface User s Manual for InterForm400 379 Appendix E Codepage Support InterForm400 makes a complete protocol conversion of EBCDIC SCS data to ASCII PCL data This requires the National Code Page ID of the system to be known as well as the available ASCII codepage in the PCL Printer InterForm400 determines the System Code page from the system value QCHRID and makes an EBCDIC to ASCII conversion on basis of this The supported national languages are listed in the table below which also indicates the resulting ASCII symbol set Country EBCDIC Codepage EURO codepage ASCII Symbol Set USA Canada 037 1140 850 Canadian French 260 1140 850 Austria Germany 273 1141 850 Belgium 274 1148 850 Brazil 275 1140 850 Denmark Norway 277 1142 850 Finland Sweden 278 1143 850 Italy 280 1144 850 Japan English 281 n a 850 P
243. ay contain a number of native resident fonts which are most likely not described in the AS 400 Guide to Programming for Printing from IBM These fonts therefore have to be declared to the system under Description of additional fonts page 279 in order to have them listed on the font list generated by the InterForm400 system and in the list prompted by F4 displayed on page 38 382 Users Manual for InterForm4009 IBM Compatible Font List OCRB 10 3 Orator 10 5 Courieri10 10 11 Prestige Pica 10 12 Artisan 10 10 11 Courier Italic 10 10 18 Pica 10 12 Orator Bold 10 38 Gothic Bold 10 10 39 Gothic Text 10 10 40 Roman Text 10 10 41 Serif Text 10 10 42 Serif Italic 10 10 43 Courier Bold 10 10 46 Gothic Text 12 12 66 Gothic Italic 12 12 68 Gothic Bold 12 12 69 Serif Text 12 12 70 Serif Italic 12 12 71 Serif Bold 12 12 72 Script 12 84 Courier 12 12 85 Prestige Elite 12 86 Letter Gothic 12 12 87 Light Italic 12 12 112 Letter Gothic Bold 12 110 Prestige Elite Bold 12 111 Prestige Elite Italic 12 112 Boldface Italic PS 155 Modern PS 175 Boldface PS 159 Essay PS 160 User s Manual for InterForm400 383 Essay Italic PS 162 Essay Bold PS 163 Essay Light PS 173 Document PS 175 Gothic Text 13 13 204 Prestige 15 15 230 Courier 15 15 230 Serif Text 15 15 229 Gothic Text 15 15 230 Courier 5 i e Courier Bold 5 i i Courier 17 17 252 Courier Bold 17 17 253 Courier 17 sub super 17 254 Gothic Text 20 20 281 US IPS 2
244. ay name FONTTEST__ Overlay text Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions 0 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top a0 0 99 Font 0003 INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def Y N Drawer Papertype PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 256 Name F4 List Paper Size 0 F4 List Copy management Y N Duplex print N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin cu in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Copy from another overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view 17 The only thing we change on this screen is the default font We set this to OCRB Font 3 This means the entire spool entry will be printed with OCRB 18 Before we start defining the barcode we will make a printout of the overlay in OCRB We press F3 to exit to the main menu and we enter menu 3 Merge spool entry with overlay Merge Spooled File with Overlay APF730D Overlay name TESTFONT__ or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set Zo l Primary 2 Secondary Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Spool file no no ONLY LAST Code page INPUT Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO NO YES Form type STD Copies LS 12255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Name of output queue to sear
245. be used if you have bought the PDF security module of InterForm400 10 PDF bookmark definition Work with Bookmark definition name MAI390D Definition name EMAILFAX Description emailfax test Bookmark definition name Name NONE F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel If you decide that the attached PDF file if you e mail should include bookmarks you can specify what bookmark definition to use here If you want no bookmarks you can state NONE Refer to page 238 for more information about the PDF bookmarks 204 Users Manual for InterForm4009 8 Work with E mail senders Note This option is reached from the Auto Forms Control menu Work with E mail senders MAI360D Position TO w x x User profile Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt User User name KSE Kim Egekjaer PDC Poul D Christiansen F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel This screen shows edits information that are used for the E mail finishing definition Here you enter user profiles that InterForm400 should recognize as E mail senders InterForm400 can use the E mail address and name you specify here when sending See page 203 Press F6 to add a new E mail sender Create E mail sender MAI365D User profile riirii eii s MYUSER User name eis sns wori w Demo User Profile Organisation ea u gaa som SALES DEP E mail address SENDER INTERMATE COM
246. by entering 2 in front of a vacant color number Enter the RGB combination and press Enter The new color definition will now be available for selection in the INK settings when working with overlays Consequently text frames and shading can be printed in the new defined color User s Manual for InterForm400 329 330 Users Manual for InterForm4009 11 Work with paper control options 1 Paper type to PCL drawer conversion Some few old printers does not support the possibility to select the drawer by paper type For these few printers this function has been added that enables the user to map all of the standard paper types to a PCL drawer number for each printer For a description of how to set this up for the main part of your printers refer to page 376 for more information Paper type to PCL drawer conversion PAP300D Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Outq Library HPII QUSRSYS E PRTO1 QUSRSYS F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Press F6 Create to add a new output queue with a printer attached Create Data PAP305D Output queue feo vl eI eo oe PO s HPII LI PES eulx soe co Kl Wc eh nH eue QUSRSYS PC PC drawer for PLAIN drawer for PREPRINTD drawer for LTRHEAD drawer for TRNSPRNCY drawer for PREPUNCHD drawer for LABELS drawer for BOND drawer for RECYCLED e e dra
247. by the if then line will be ignored as well as 6 Print info User s Manual for InterForm400 69 WARNING amp Only one level of conditioned sub overlays is possible If Then lines placed in ie WARNING Totally blank lines are not considered for the If Then line i e a condition on one or more blank characters on a totally blank line will not trigger a call of the suboverlay The j OS 400 command DSPSPLF will show the lines which can be conditioned FzPCL FILE Insertion of a PCL file might be one of the most important features of the system as designing forms more and more is a job for a PC InterForm400 allows a single overlay to be combined of several PCL forms as well as having standard elements included as described in the previous sections When overwriting updating a PCL file on the system all overlays referring to this PCL resource will automatically be updated An encapsulated PCL file including PCL and or HP GL 2 generated in any PC application equipped with an HPII HPIII or HP4 driver can be transferred to the system by a File Transfer a Virtual Print or copying between shared folders by means of Client Access 400 PC Support see Importing PCL overlay from PC print file page 325 Note that inclusion of PCL files for the Printer Interface type chosen as default has to be confirmed under 2 Set default output queue and printer type page 268 Seqnbr Type Inch pel 1 0 F PCL f
248. can be added as described in step 4 above ADDDIRE Problem When trying to access QDLS through a mapped network drive on the PC and you get this error message An error occoured while connecting Drive to lt ServerName gt QDLS Microsoft Windows Network The local device name is already in use This connection cannot be restored Solution Use the same User ID and password on both the PC and AS 400 or map a network drive to QDLS using the AS 400 user ID and password possible in Windows XP Problem The PC cannot see the AS 400 NetServer Name through a search of the Network Neighbourhood and can because of that not access QDLS Solution Make sure that the NetServer is started on the AS 400 and you are using the NetServer name not the System Name of the AS 400 APF3812 DSPNETSVRA If the AS 400 is placed in another Network it might be necessary to add the AS 400 NetServer name to the HOSTS file on the PC You can also just use the IP address as the Netserver name in InterForm400 configuration User s Manual for InterForm400 433 434 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Appendix M InterForm400 charts InterForm400 supports the following two types of charts Bar charts and Line charts Samples are seen below nas Sample line chart Yl axis T2 w ZL STXe ZA TL STXe 2A POl poz POS PO4 POS 9 observation set S1 Yl axis T1 Yl axis T2 Sample bar ch
249. cate The name of the certificate when it has been imported This is what you want to name it in InterForm400 482 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Description A description of what who this certificate is for Path The path to the certificate file in the IFS not in QDLS that you are importing The path must end with as this is concatenated with the file name File name The name of the file in the IFS containing the certificate Cert alias The alias of the certificate if the file contains more than one certificate Password The password used when you exported the certificate The password is hidden on this display Cert authority States where this certificate can be used PUBLIC means it can be used for all spooled files If you state a user profile only spooled files owned by this user can have this certificate attached Active period The period where this certificate is intended to be used This can later be extended to the validity period of the certificate This option is so you will get a warning when the active period is running out A change of Cert authority or Active period after import require that the password for the certificate is re entered Secure from move Tells InterForm400 if the imported certificate is to follow the APF3812 library If you say Y the certificate will be encrypted with the serial number of the iSeries and must be reinstalled if you move the InterForm400 installation to another machine i
250. ce ALL This option is especially usefull if you are using the same output queue for both input to AFC functions and for output to a printer as a writer never should be started with FORMTYPE ALL on souch an output queue F3 Exit F12 Cancel 4 Enter 4 Work with InterForm400 users Press F6 to enter your AS 400 user ID Later you can add additional users which will have access to configure and or define overlays and merge definitions in InterForm400 5 Enter 5 Work with file sets Press F6 to create an overlay file set called e g TEST select 1 Black White Laser for Printer Class This file set is referred in the Getting Familiar with Overlays section on page 76 Later you can add file sets for different purposes or for specific users 6 Enter 6 Connect users with overlay file sets Connect your user profile to file set SAMPLE and the file set you created in the previous step 7 Start subsystem AUTO FORM From the Select 5 Work with Auto Forms Control from the InterForm400 Main Menu followed by option 10 Start AUTO FORM subsystem You can now proceed to install and setup the PCL PDF viewer please refer to page 430 for further information and the graphical designer refer to page 461 for more information 28 Users Manual for InterForm4009 4 Work With Overlay AFC Sample You are now ready to start working with the overlay SAMPLE delivered with the package First we will make sure that our device is cha
251. ces ALWOBJDIF NONE ALL Restore to library 4 s e oos RSTLIB name SAVLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys The Save Library to Folder Command The command APF3812 SAVLIB2FLR command is intended to be used for support purposes to save a complete library to a folder The file created in the folder can then be sent as an attachment to an E mail The saved file can be restored with the command APF3812 RSTLIBFLR 402 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Save Library into Folder SAVLIB2FLR Type choices press Enter Library 055 tto oo KL Se USES s he LIB Name TO EOB doo xe ose See eee ges TOFLR Tocdocument uu eee er oes cen Se gs TODOC Character value Replace document REPLACE NO Target release sis yiyi ule wis TGTRLS CURRENT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Joint Report Commands The Clear Link to Joint Report Command The APF3812 APFCLRLNK command is intended to be included in your CL programs It helps you to remove unwanted links between a report and spool entries that previous has been linked by the APF3812 APFLNK command Clear link to joint report APFCLRLNK Type choices press Enter InterForm 400 file set KARTSET Character value Report name RAPNVN Character value Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Canc
252. ces i e by tape SNDDST or E mail By using the Export function resources are copied from InterForm400 to a so called Export library The Export and Import libraries can be considered as being temporary libraries as the resources copied to and from these 2 libraries usually are relevant only for a certain distribution The libraries can be deleted when the distribution is completed Use option 1 Create empty export library APFEXPORT to create an empty import library Work with export of InterForm 400 Resources EXPORTD System INTERO2 Version 2002 M01 Select one of the following Create empty export library APFEXPORT Copy resources to export library Work with resources in export library Work with distributions Delete all resources from export library except distributions Delete export library APFEXPORT including all distributions No FPF WNE 8 Display resources in export library Option mt es F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel Copy resources to export library This option gives you the possibility to 1 Copy all the resources created in InterForm400 to the export library 2 Copy selected resources only or 3 Copy the resources used in already copied overlays to export the resources referred to in the overlays already marked for export Copy InterForm 400 resources to export library EXPORTD Select one of the following resource types Selector definit
253. ch if spooled file is unknown Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Librarys x X APF3812 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 305 TESTFONT is already filled in because it was the last overlay active in the design menu Now go to the lower part of the screen and fill in queue AFC_INPUT1 and library APF3812 Here we will select the spool entry created by option 1 Create demo spool entry page 337 We press Enter to look at entries in queue AFC_INPUT1 Work with Output Queue Queue AFC_INPUT1 Library APF3812 Type option Press Enter 1 Select 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 8 Attributes Opt File User User Data Sts Pages Copies Form Type Pty 1 QPRINT PETER SMP001 HLD 2 1 DEMO 5 Parameters for option 2 3 or command gt F3 Exit Fll View 2 F12 Cancel F21 Description F24 More keys We select the file with option 1 and press Enter Merge Spooled File with Overlay APF730D Overlay name TESTFONT or Overlay Selector Primary Secondary set e l Primary 2 Secondary Spooled file Job name DSPO10700 User PETER Job number 073534 File name OPRINT Spool file no 0005 no ONLY LAST Code page INPUT Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO NO YES Form type STD Copies Sot 1 255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue Library F3 Exit F4 Promp
254. change in order for creating a new group You can also specify to insert a separator page when changing groups A group is dealt with as an undividable number of pages If you choose to distribute the workload on several output queues a group will not be broken up Define resulting output queues Specifies on which output queue s to place the resulting SCS spool file including all the pages You can decide that OSC should balance the workload between several output queues Using the workload factor Note that groups defined above are kept together Specify automatic start scheduling Specifies weekdays and times when the OSC job is to autostart and process all waiting spool files Specify automatic start options Specify whether or not to send a message when starting or and when finished It is also possible to decide to start or not to start the OSC job if it could not be started at the scheduled time e g because of an IPL Specify output queue for processed spooled files Specify an output queue for placing the incoming spool files or specify DELETE for deleting them when processed by OSC Specify job priority Specify the priority of the OSC job User s Manual for InterForm400 249 Principle of OSC Output Schedule Control In short OSC merges all spool files into one and sorts the pages by spool file attributes and or text on each spool page This merge can be done at certain times of the week and it can also be
255. choose only to E mail spool files with the form type DEMO Press Enter Seqnbr Function l0 C Prepare for Finishing Finish definition name DEMO Output queue for prepared print INPUT Library het Be he Ae AA POrm YDG r f k eek e kRexexoBMAIB Above an E mail Finishing definition is specified An Auto Forms Control function P z Send PDF E mail should be executed for the form type on the specified output queue Press Enter to continue 218 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Seqnbr Function 1 0 E Prepare for Finishing Prepare for E mail requires settings for print that will not be send Output queue non E mail print INPUT ld ky iex cu AS x LXXX POrm type i Ac Be ai Me Be Be A PRINT On this screen it is specified what to do with spool file pages that are not possible to send One problem can be that InterForm400 is not able to find an E mail address for a key The final task is to insert the actual E mail command in Auto Forms Control You do that by inserting a function P This option is shown on the AFC functions overview if you press F23 More options Below we have entered a function P Seqnbr Function Attributes of input file for which to execute the function 2 0 P EOM Qype Te ute ve Le use WR Van SP ues ue ue us EMAIL Dave SULT DUES s 6 9 9 7 9 3 Jolbrname erans edan ne ae he Cine er me cee a Spooled file name Device filer ua eek eu Cem eel ye e eo
256. cific output queue A copy of the spool file will be created and processed according to the AFC entries made for the monitored output queue Auto Forms Control takes SCS spool files from the spool system adds an electronic form and manipulates the spool data accordingly and sends the resulting spool file containing PCL code back to the spool system When installing InterForm400 Auto Forms Control is also automatically installed During the installation of Auto Forms Control the following objects will be created on the system Sub system description APF3812 AUTO FORM User profile AFCOPER PASSWORD NONE SPCAUT SPLCTL Job description APF3812 AUTO FORM Note that if you want to make use of the feature of InterForm400 to transform AFPDS spool entries into USERASCII and these AFP jobs are using resource libraries not listed in the system library list then the above job description must be changed in order to include these libraries in the library list The setup of the primary functions of Auto Forms Control is managed by selecting menu option 5 on the main menu The same menu can be entered directly by the program call CALL APF3812 AFCADM The menu appears like this InterForm400 Auto Forms Control System INTERO1 Workstn ID QPADEV0003 Select one of the following options User ID PETER Functions attached to Output Queues Forms Type Table Split Definitions Finishing Defin
257. command 03h This command is a standard feature according to the 5250 attachment standard and should be supported by most interfaces emulating 5219 or 3812 The interface should preferably be configured to the system as 3812 model 1 SCS Printer device If another SCS device description eg 4214 is specified enabling host print transform will allow ASCII transparency to be sent to this device as well Refer to section Attaching through a 5250 Terminal System Configuration by Auto Configuration The easiest way to create the device description for the protocol converter is using Auto Configuration 1 Enable Auto Configuration with the following CL command CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL QAUTOCFG VALUE 1 User s Manual for InterForm400 365 An available Twinax device address 0 6 should be provided by the system administrator Follow the instructions of your protocol converter in order to alter this switch setting Attach the protocol converter to the Twinax network and power it on After a while a printer device and an output queue is created on the system The name of the device and the queue will be identical and will normally have a notation like PRTO5 or PRT010305 Type the following command and scroll to locate the new printer device WRKDEVD PRT The device will indicate the text Created by auto configuration Use option 5 to display the device description Verify that the device type is 3812 If it indicates 5219 then proc
258. control 4 0 1 1 Frame 2 Horizontal BLANK all pages 3 Vertical 4 Line 1 first page only 5 Text 6 Page number 2 page 2 and succ 7 Ink 8 Tabulator 9 last page only 9 Remap window I Image If then F PCL file G HP GL 2 file S Sub overlay Comment F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel The Type of sequence line 4 is already set to 1 equalling Frame and we press Enter to proceed into the actual values for the frame 82 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text IF400DEMO Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 id Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 d Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text 110 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Konge Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 4 0 1 Frame Top edge 714 100 Move right Left edge _0 200 Move down Right edge 4 120 Extra times EN Bottom edge 2 160 Thikness in pels cU NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S R Radius Im mS Pattern _ F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM Specify R for round corners but leave the fields NW NE SW and SE blank This means tha
259. cted for the interface type e g ASCII850 or ASCIIR8 Entering a symbolset here is normally for selecting special symbol character sets Override spacing Here you can override the spacing for fixed width fonts If you e g use a 10 CPI courier font and override to 5 then the 10 CPI font is written with a spacing of 5 CPI Note that changing the above parameters does not change the appearance of the font unless a font matching the changes can be found in the printer Print out a font list from the printers front panel to get an overview of available resident PCL fonts Example of Defining a Resident Printer font We want to define a 70 point Univers Bold Italic for use in our overlay definitions We know this font is available as a resident scalable font in HPIII compatible printers First we must print out a Font List from the printer s front panel Refer to the User s Guide of your printer Univers Bold Italic is listed on a HPIII Font List with the following PCL Escape Sequence lt Esc gt s1p__v1s3b4148T If we break it up we have the following information User s Manual for InterForm400 281 1p Proportional Spacing V Empty field for point size Height 1s Italic Style 3b Bold Stroke Weight 4148T Univers Typeface Blank Use the default We now only need to define the font ID which will be used to select the font when designing forms By pressing F4 we will get a list of the font ID s between 500
260. cters You are asked wether the barcode should be written as character set B only Normally InterForm400 will use character set A B and C in order to compress the barcode as much as possible However VERY few barcode scanners cannot read character set C compressed numeric characters For those scanners you should state Y Use N for all other scanners in order to make the barcode as efficient as possible For a description of character sets A B and C refer to the documentation of your scanner If you need to insert the character FNC1 in the Code128 barcode you should insert the character with the hexadecimal value BB in EBCDIC in the text that you convert into the barcode Refer to section assigning font ID s to barcode soft fonts page 295 for details on how to define wether the barcode should be printed as Code128 or EAN128 User s Manual for InterForm400 293 3 Interleaved 2 of 5 This bar code consists of the digits 0 9 only There can be blanks before or after the digits if the figure contains an odd number of digits the system will add a preceding zero The System also adds start and stop codes before and after the number If you try to use Interleaved 2 of 5 with non numeric data the contents will be printed with IBM font id 0011 10 pitch courier i4 NOTE The Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode must consist of an even number of digits If you activate l ithe checksum digit then InterForm400 might insert
261. d to InterForm400 to insert in the spool entry resulting from the split Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFA4000NLY Description Sort IF400 Pages Split detail description IF400 ONLY User exit program Program name GETFAXNR NONE name Library We a eer OGPL name Pormat Nr Ul 02 03 When to call 1 l Every page 2 When exit parm changes Exit parameter data 1 Linenbr 13 Position 57 3 60 6 Linenbr __ Position 2 Linenbr __ Position __ 7 Linenbr __ PosSEZtiom eS 3 Linenbr Position 8 Linenbr Position m 0 4 Linenbr Position __ 9 Linenbr __ POSICION 5 Linenbr ___ Position AIT x 10 Linenbr PosicTON s a Return data is to be printed in the following positions 1 Linenbr 14_ Startposition 60_ 6 Linenbr Startposition 2 Linenbr Startposition 7 Linenbr ___ Startposition 3 Linenbr Startposition 8 Linenbr ___ Startposition 4 Linenbr Startposition 9 Linenbr ___ Startposition __ 5 Linenbr BStartposition 10 Linenbr ___ Startposition F3 Exit F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 175 Note that there are no user exit programs delivered with InterForm400 as they must be written specifically for the application or database they should integrate to You can only add to not overwrite the contents of the spooled fi
262. defined in group 1 plus 1 page to the number defined in group 2 are inserted etc If pages for one recipient exceeds the highest page count defined in any group these pages will be printed to the upper bin Any set of pages that exceeds 5 pages excl enclosure will automatically be printed to the upper bin in order to be inserted manually into larger envelopes Enclosure Group 1 5 An enclosure can be defined for each of the groups as this of course affects the weight of the envelope Valid values are O no enclosure and 1 add enclosure Example 1 Non sorted We want all sets of pages from 1 to 3 pages to be inserted in the same order as the original spool entry Sets of pages from 4 to more pages should not be inserted but be printed to the upper bin All envelopes should have en enclosure Pages per envelope group 1 3 Enclosure group l 1 Pages per envelope group 2 Enclosure group 2 M iA Pages per envelope group 3 Enclosure group 3 M Pages per envelope group 4 Enclosure group 4 e Pages per envelope group 5 Enclosure group 5 Try stating 1 instead of 3 in the above sample for Pages per envelope Group 1 and run the test spool entry with this definition combined with the definitions of either example 1 on page 213 Or example 2 on page 214 You will then notice that the letters for Florence Flowers are not inserted as the number exceeds the maximum number of sheets in one envelope defined above When filled i
263. dge 2 080 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment L ULRCNBE Rotation 000 Font 1351 F4 List Blank original B B blank original version Condition Position Is gt lt N Fll Delete Blank after _ B Blank condition after The item sub header is found in the same line as the header ITEM but in position 15 70 We therefore define the same input line interval as befor e We define an upper edge of 1 6 0 040 in order to place the sub header one line below the header We select font 1351 which is a 12 point Time Roman Finally we also need to place the subsequent lines until the next item group We are using VAR so it can be a variable number of lines We remap the next 69 lines to be sure Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name SUB1 Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 9 Remap window 01 001 pos 10 014 top 0 000 left 2 000 L 0002 9 Remap window 01 001 pos 15 070 top 0 040 left 2 000 L 0003 9 Remap window 02 070 pos 01 070 top 0 080 left 2 100 L Seqnbr Type 3 0 9 Remap window Input line 2 _70 Position 1 70 Print From upper edge 0 080 Line spacing _40 From left edge _2 100 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment L ULRCNIB E Rotation 000 Font 1051 F4 List Blank original B B blank original version Condition Position a eee Is gt lt N Fll Delete Blank after B Blank condition after The lines are placed below the splitted header line with a line distance of 40
264. distance from the top of the first frame to the top of the next frame We want to place a frame behind every second item line and as the frame is 1 6 40 pels thick in the vertical direction and we want 1 6 inch between the frames we must add these two values This gives us 40 40 80 pels We want 6 frames total which means we should repeat the frame 5 extra times We press Enter to save our new sequence line 19 Step 12 Defining the 5 Item Coloumn Frames We now want to define some frames to divide the item lines columns in the spool entry We want to place the definition just after the previous definition of the raster frames and we enter 19 1 for inserting an overlay element before sequence line 20 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0017 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 C 0018 7 Ink Foreground BLACK Background UNALTERED 0019 1 Frame top 05 110 left 01 120 right 06 116 bottom 05 150 0020 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C 0021 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 100 left 3 000 C 0022 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 100 left 4 000 C 0023 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 100 left 5 000 C 0024 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 54 070 top 5 100 left 6 000 C Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 19 1 1 Frame Top edge 05 072 Move right Left edge 01 120 Move down Right edge 02 116 Extra times _ 4
265. duction library IMP820D Press F10 to move all resources to production Press F3 or F12 to cancel Resource Type Notice SAMPLE IFA400DEMO OVERLAY Exists SAMPLE RULER OVERLAY Exists End F3 Exit F10 Move all resources to production F12 Cancel This screen will inform you if the overlays being moved to the production library already exists In this case you might want to rename the overlays As mentioned before accepting the move of resources will cause existing resources with the same name to be overwritten Renaming resources to be moved to the production folder could be done under function 3 Working with resources in import library In this example we have chosen to work with overlay definitions Work with File sets in Import Library IMP412D Position Lo wo ww we File set Type options press Enter 1 Move to production 4 Delete 7 Rename file set 12 Work with overlays in file set Opt File set Description Notice 12 SAMPLE InterForm 400 Samples Exists End F3 Exit F12 Cancel Note Renaming e g file sets that already exists using option 7 Rename file set will prevent file sets from being overwritten Notice however that the users must be connected to the new file sets in order to use the overlays imported Option 9 Work with changes on the Import menu enables you to take advantage of the fact that every import requires journaling of InterForm400 files Using this option you can e g regret the
266. e 5 Image no 5 for InterForm End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 Read from Folder F12 Cancel Note that using 5 view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed Converting images to PCL5 format is not necessary in order to use the image from within an overlay but performance will increase when using converted images If necessary reverse the image when importing instead of reversing it in overlay design Importing black and white images Pressing F8 from the Work with Images will bring the Read image from Folder screen Read Image from the APF3812 Folder IMG370D Start with Select option Press Enter l Read without conversion 2 Read with conversion to PCL5 Opt File neme Size in bytes Date Time changed E CEB2SW 5 TIF 19 802 2003 02 21 20 47 25 E PP TIF 10 335 2003 02 22 08 23 28 m PRO1 TIF 21 079 2003 02 21 11432 03 End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 A11 file types F12 Cancel 320 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Select the TIFF file you want to read into InterForm400 and specify the member into which you want to add the image and which is referred to in an overlay definition If you select an image with grey tones you will see a screen like this Load Image from Folder APF3812 IMG375D Document name 171170 TIF File type TIFF Palette color compression 32773 WAAIEN erae tae Sia fl ed cae 400 HELGAS usc els veis vw obi 300 Output image name 1171170 Description I
267. e 201 8 Senders E mail address 0000 c cece eee eee 202 9 Encryption and Signature liliis lees 203 10 PDF bookmark definition 00000 cee eee 204 8 Work with E mail senders 0 00 0c cee lees 205 The File Naming Finishing Definition llle 206 1 Receipient Key Definition 02 00 cee eee 206 2 Variable Definitions 00 000 eee 206 3 PDF File Name Composition 00000 cee eee 209 5 Page selections and Document breaks 0 000 209 6 Receipient ID Information lille 210 7 Closing User Exit lliseessesllele ren 210 8 Encryption and Signature slsllesllslseessss 211 9 PDF bookmark definition lille 211 Define Level Break Conditions for Finishing 00 0005 212 Example 1 Level Break on Page Counter 5 213 Find Recipient ID in the Following Positions 214 Example 2 Level Break on Change in Customer Info 214 Example 3 Level Break on Customer ID and Attention Person 215 Using the Finishing Definition with Auto Forms Control 216 Activate the Finishing pre process definition 216 Merge with pre processed Finishing spool entry Ls 217 Distribute E mails with Auto Forms Control 218 User s Manual for InterForm400 7 User exit program ww tte 223 Detaillines iei ra
268. e InterForm400 menus This can be overwritten for each individual user Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 7 7 Do you want to use the APF3812 STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands to avoid a writer to be started with FORMTYPE ALL on one of the output queues defined in Auto Forms Control and if yes what formtype has to replace ALL when a writer is started on one of these output queues Use APF3812 STRWTRCHK as a validity checker N Y N Formtype to replace ALL This option is especially useful if you are using the same output queue for both input to AFC functions and for output to a printer as a writer never should be started with FORMTYPE ALL on such an output queue F3 Exit F12 Cancel If you want Auto Forms Control to monitor output queues with printers attached you now have the option to state a specific Form Type the writer should process only User s Manual for InterForm400 271 4 Work with InterForm400 Users When you choose the option Work with InterForm400 users on the administration menu you get the following screen Work with InterForm Users APF220D Positron Core dIa dou ok User profile Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 9 File set access Opt User Description JEC JEC JENSP Jens PDC E PETER Peter Hansen POULD Poul D Christiansen End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fl1l View 2 F12 Cancel You can
269. e barcode soft font 7 Work with TrueType font for PDF Work with ZEBRA fonts 11 Description of ZEBRA fonts 12 Work with ZEBRA soft fonts 13 Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory 14 Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel Selecting option 7 Work with fonts enables to you define new fonts to work with soft fonts for PCL including download to flash SIMM modules to specify soft fonts to be automatic downloaded to extract a soft font from a PC print to create a barcode soft font and to install a True Type Font for PDF 1 Description of Additional Fonts This function gives you the possibility of using all fonts available on HP printers or compatibles Work with Fonts APF360D Position Eo a 2 4 ons Font Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Assign new font number 8 Display overlays referring to font Opt Font Description 7001 Copy font 9901 Sample Universe 7 pt 9902 Sample Universe 8 pt _ 9903 Universe 10 pt 9904 Sample Universe 12 pt 9905 Sample Universe bold 9 pt 9906 Universe Sample 18 pt 9910 Sample Universe 7 pt End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Pressing F6 to add a new font brings up the following screen User s Manual for InterForm400 279 Create Font APF370D POMS a 4o GAG ux ag bet um ae 4e
270. e company name V1 Variables could also be specified for the PDF file name Like the variables you can also insert either FROM or TO in order to insert the name of either the sender or receiver of the e mail We can create several different text definitions e g one for each language code The fax cover page overlay is for fax support only Faxing directly from InterForm400 requires the InterFax module ie WARNING When you insert variables in the subject of the mail Make sure that you leave enough 6 Definition recipient ID A Recipient ID is a description that tells where to find the keys and variables on the spool file pages This is combined with a page selection criteria that is already known from the sorting definition The page selection criteria makes it possible to find the keys and variables in different places on the page depending on e g if either INVOICE or CREDIT NOTE is found in a special place User s Manual for InterForm400 199 In this example the keys and variables are always placed in a fixed position and therefor the page selection criteria is left blank Update Finish Recipient ID PRS330D Definition name DEMO Sequence number 1 Description Demo Spool Get keys and vars Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find recipient 3 ID in the following positions Print line Position _57 _60 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Regard
271. e costos os toy oss toe s oy os Spooled file name Device file LEIDLAPS Wm Geox pee ps Dx ees ps cce ns Program that opened file Library ea EX ws QS hl mg F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 217 Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue PFE IN Library QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 C DEMO Finish def PFEDEF1 outq PFE IN library QUSRSYS form type Seqnbr Function 2 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print DEFAULT Libvare lw Dx OS aS InterForm 400 printer type Interface a Be A xo Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Find overlay in form type table N Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel Distribute E mails with Auto Forms Control When distributing spool files as PDF an E mail Finishing Definition first has to be executed To do that you add a C z Prepare for Finishing function to the Auto Forms definitions of the relevant output queue This screen is shown Seqnbr Function Attributes of input file for which to execute the function 1 0 C BOZm VEY DG se sve ee ee exe Set ot DEMO Bave mettsibube ule Oe Sie TOT XT as Jobname Sve ud Spooled file name Device file Lira xcx Row 6 5e xi Program that opened file Library Here you can insert conditions for executing the finishing definition In this case we
272. e design screen a DOS window opens and shuts very quickly Solution Install SwiftView as described above in the first paragraph of Setting up a SwiftView user Make sure that the APF3812 folder is created at the C drive of the PC AND that the file SVIEW EXE has been copied to that folder If the folder and file has not been copied make sure that you are authorized to the VIEW folder see requirement 5 and that the AS400 system name in InterForm400 is the same as used on the PC see requirement 5 and then try installing SwiftView again Problem When starting up SwiftView you get a small window with the message Unusual file access failure check NDGDBUG as400 QDLS APF3812 ViEW user Solution Make sure that the AS400 system name set up in InterForm400 is the same as used on the PC see requirement 5 above If the AS 400 is not found on the same network and not on the DNS server you might need to add the AS 400 to the HOSTS file on the PC like described below Problem When starting up SwiftView you get a small window with the message Access to the file is not permitted as400 QDLS APF3812 ViEw user Solution1 You are not authorized to the APF3812 VIEW folder Do as described in requirement 3 as above You will also get this error message if your User ID and password on the PC does not fit with the User ID and password of the AS 400 Solution2 The problem may also be that the user profile is not added to the system directory It
273. e e ee e ces YR T n 52 Copy Management llli 53 Overlay elements 0000 c cette teens 54 T1SERAME 4x uh emet mrt ese eb E speci at edet added 54 2 HORIZONTAL LINE 0 000 cece eee 55 SSVERTICAL EINE Fresen ieii aee vette egent ie ed 56 A4SEINE ste enr o e ete est oto owe aye od ait atta t tees 56 Anz M Ip 57 6 Print info Print information lisse 58 7 INK fill pattern for succeeding sequence lines 59 Examples on use of Ink 1 1 0 0 0 0 cece eee 59 4 Users Manual for InterForm400 8 TABULATOR Paragraph tabulation 0005 61 9 REMAP WINDOW re mapping text areas 63 ISIMAGE set ates c deed pac aaa dig o Gangsta ayia de tue RUE 66 IF THEN conditional nesting of overlays 67 F PGL FILE ey a tng talent e t DEBES S de ERR RU 70 G2HP GE 2 FILE cscs Rp e Ge hed eaten eats d 71 S SUBOVERLAY sssssss sn 72 COMMENT rire aeni eese rat ee Rd ends 72 How the sequence lines in overlay design are executed 74 Getting Familiar With Overlays l l llle 76 Step 1 Making a Work Copy of the Overlay IF40Q0ODEMO 77 Step 2 Make a Test Print of the Overlay Spool Data 79 Step 3 Entering the Design Window 0 00 c cece eee 81 Step 4 Printing the Overlay Definition List 0 00 00 eee eee 82 Step 5 Adding Round Corners t
274. e first line of a new page All other lines must have a blank in this position This command can substitute the OS 400 commands PRTASCSTMF and CVTPCLSPLF The input for CVTPCLSPLF and PRTASCF have to be symbol set ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 The Split Spooled File Command The command APF3812 SPLITSPLF makes it possible to split an SCS spooled file without Auto Forms Control You only identify the spooled file and an InterForm400 split definition Split Spooled File SPLITSPLF Type choices press Enter Split definition SPLITDEF Name db Namens i a wea EA JOB Name user Name a x6 Name Job Number 000000 999999 Spooled File Name FILE Name Spooled File Number SPLNBR LAST 1 999999 ONLY LAST Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Split definitions will normally be executed through a function B in Auto Forms Control Refer to page 148 and 173 for more information Spooled File Inspector SFI User s Manual for InterForm400 411 The purpose of this feature is that InterForm400 can look for a special string in a spool file and change the form type of the spool file depending on wether the string was found or not This can be done without any programming To maintain SFI definitions use the APF3812 WRKSFID command See Sample SFI definition below To use run an SFI definition enter a line in an Auto Forms Control definition using
275. e has been defined in the previous screen the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here Note that the keyword DEFAULT apply to both Output queue and library InterForm400 printer type and Interface Printer type Interface A PCL printer type and protocol conversion method according to the choices listed on page see page 374 and 378 Note that only ASCII850 and ASCIIR8 interface types can be used see page 378 Note if you want to make use of this feature to transform AFPDS spool entries into USERASCOII and these AFPDS spool files are using resource libraries not listed in the system library list then the APF3812 AUTO FORM job description must be changed in order to include these libraries in the library list ie WARNING 6 i The transformation can not convert bar codes and AFP images into PCL These 144 Users Manual for InterForm400 4 Copy Spooled File Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue PRTHP3 AFC Library e Ex ow wc QUSRSYS Seqnbr Function 1 0 4 Copy Spooled File New output queue s gt LibfaqQ A 4404 0340 8 a Hold output spooled file NO_ NO YES Save output spooled file NO NO YES F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel New Output queue Output from this process will become a spool entry in the new output queue with the same attributes as the original
276. e of the maximum width User s Manual for InterForm400 S 439 Define X axis points and X axis groups When selecting Define X axis points you get the screen below which overviews the existing X axis groups Work with X axis groups CHX100D CHATE eene oru ee Per vs ES MYBAR LYDE mo qe oe gx XR rx cx po Se GE BAR Position to Seq number Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Assign new seq nbr to x axis grp 12 Work with X axis points Opt Seq number ID Text 10 MON Month End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel It is possible to change copy and display the X axis groups it is also possible to change sequence numbers and to work with X axis points for the specific group Pressing F6 for creating a new X axis group will display this Create X axis group CHX110D Chart a s LU o2 MYBAR Tope osd we um Leena WE BAR Seq number X axis group ID Text Text font Text font color F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Seq number Specify a sequence number This will decide the order of the groups X axis group ID ID of the specific X axis group Text Text used to specify group on print out Printed below chart Text font color Font and color of the text above The position of the text is based upon the legend fields on the General Layout display and the layout of the x axis Using option 12 it is possible to change sequence numbers and to work
277. e paper for the cover page should be taken from Default is OVERLAY specified in the global settings of the overlay Seqnbr Type 2 0 2 Index F4 Prompt Description Overlay name Name F4 list From upper edge Indention text Indention page no Rotation Font text Font page no Line spacing Overflow limit Drawer F4 prompt F4 Prompt OVERLAY 1 2 3 4 6 Overlay name From upper edge Indention text 260 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The overlay used for the index page to the report This overlay should only consist of text constants one of the text constants is likely to be Table of Contents The vertical start position of the first index line in Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of the page according to the rotation specified below The horizontal start position of the index lines in Inches pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the rotation specified below Indention page no Rotation Font text Font page no Line spacing Overflow limit Drawer The horizontal start position of the index page numbers in Inches pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the rotation specified by the global settings for the Overlay Rotation of the index lines Valid values are 000 090 180 270 Note that 180 and 270 rotation is only possible for interface type on IBM3812 and IBM3816 Font type for the index lines Prompt by F4 Font type
278. e procedure explained on page 370 Attaching through a TCP IP Print Server in order to configure queue AFC_OUT1 as a remote writer Step 2 Checking if Auto Forms Control is running Select option 5 Work with Auto Forms Control on the main menu and enter menu item 12 Work with active subsystem AUTO FORM If the sub system is not active return with F3 and start the subsystem with option 10 Start AUTO FORM subsystem If the AFC_INPUT1 job does not start up with the subsystem you can manually start it by selecting 1 Functions attached to Output Queues from the AFC menu followed by option ezStart AFC job for the AFC_INPUT1 outq User s Manual for InterForm400 155 Work with Active Jobs INTERO1 27 02 98 10 20 02 CPU 9 7 Elapsed time 00 03 36 Active jobs TO Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Hold 4 End 5 Work with 6 Release 7 Display message 8 Work with spooled files 13 Disconnect Opt Subsystem Job User Type CPU Function Status AUTO_FORM OSYS SBS 0 3 DEQW z AFC_INPUT1 AFCOPER BCH 0 2 PGM AFC700 DEQW Slut Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh FlO Restart statistics Fll Display elapsed data F12 Cancel F23 More options F24 More keys Use this screen to verify that your AFC jobs are running and for replying on messages in error situations Step 3 Entering Auto Forms Definition AFC_INPUT1 Now enter option 1 Functions attached with to Output Queues and select the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1
279. e rest is inserted on the next page 2 Like 1 if there is space for all total lines otherwise next page This works like a block protect Transfers all the total lines onto the next page if necessary 3 In foot Prints the totals in the footer Press Enter to proceed to this screen Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Extra total page Extra total page is created if number of output detail lines on the last page is above a certain limit Limit detail lines if last page is page 1l 0 detail lines if last page is i 0 Limi Total line ID If only 1 total page If 2 total pages first total If 2 total pages extra total F3 Exit F12 Cancel The header may be larger on page 1 for each document so there might room for fewer detail lines on the first page than on the subsequent pages You state here the number of detail lines that there are room for You can also state various line ID s depending on if the total is spread across two pages or not User s Manual for InterForm400 227 If only 1 total page This denotes the line ID to be inserted if the total is not Spread across 2 pages If 2 total pages first total The specifies the line ID for the part of the total lines that are placed on the page before the last if the total lines are split across pages If 2 total pages
280. e way of setting up AFC Insert library or leave blank to search library list For your own information The contents of the field job name AUTO FORM job is used as name for the job in the subsystem which performs the automatic functions It is recommended to use the same name as used for the output queue If Y is entered the AFC functions for this queue will be started automatically after IPL or when the subsystem AUTO FORM is started If N is entered the subsystem job has to be started manually This defines if a specific code page should be forced for the spool entries processed by this AFC definition SYSVAL means that the default code page specified for the system will be used unless a specific code page is defined as attribute for the spool file Default Output Output Queue and Printer Type Output Queue Library Printer Type Interface A default output queue for the result of e g AFC merges can be entered here This queue will be used for the AFC definition lines having DEFAULT as keyword For AFC definitions having a specific queue defined this default queue setting will be ignored If these fields are left blank the keyword DEFAULT will not be accessible in the AFC definition lines i e a specific queue must be entered for each AFC definition line Same functionality as above but for Printer Type and Interface Type User s Manual for InterForm400 137 Template AFC definition to be executed after t
281. eading from output queue the PCL driver must be defined to print on a local printer on the AS 400 through Client Access When PCL File and Load From is defined the selection for the PC file will appear If selecting read from the folder APF3812 you will be able to use F4 to list available files Load PCL file PCL110D BOL CIEIGC EEG PH Description LL L2 5 gs Load E 5om JL h e e woe 1 1 PC file in folder APF3812 2 Output queue From PO RLIS wv 4 0 0 es F3 Exit F4 List F12 Cancel TIP You can use the PCLTOMBR command to import multiple B W PCL files from e g the i APF3812 folder User s Manual for InterForm400 327 328 Users Manual for InterForm4009 10 Work with palette Change the definition of the colors This option is designed for optimizing the color palette for your color printer Work with palette PAL100D BOSICION TO no cx K Mo Color nbr Type options press Enter 2 Change Opt Color nbr Description Red Green Blue 1 Black 0 0 0 2 Grey 128 128 128 3 Red 255 0 0 4 Green 0 29023 0 Pe 5 Blue 0 0 255 6 Yellow 2955 255 0 E 7 Orange 255 128 64 8 Brown 128 64 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Ti 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F10 Print palette F12 Cancel Start of list It is recommened to print out the color palette on your color printer as a reference The predefined 8 colors are fixed and cannot be changed Adding a new color is done
282. ecide if the nested bookmarks should be expanded and to what level or not when opening the PDF file If you use 0 or blank for this then all levels are expanded Any other value will expand all levels down to the specified number Level 1 6 Select one of these to specify the bookmarks at a certain level Change PDF Bookmark details BMK330D Sequence number 000 DESCRIPELON i e Q9 QW 4 All pages Level 2 Field Prefix Print line Position 1 Zip 8 228i mer SE 2 City 8 _13 _40 Color P F4 List F3 Exit F12 Cancel Above we have defined the second level The fields 1 and 2 will be concatenated to make the full text of the bookmark So you can insert fixed text prefix followed by text from the spooled file page to define each field You can use any colour for the bookmark Define your own colours if necessary by use of option 10 Work with palette from the InterForm400 administration menu Refer to page 329 for more information of how to do that The information used from the spooled file will be inspected by the bookmark generator Only when this information changes a new bookmark will be generated User s Manual for InterForm400 239 id NOTE Text for bookmarks must be placed in a fixed position on the page If you want to search for a certain text and insert bookmarks if found you could consider to use the APF3812 CRTPBSPLF command to do copy the floating information into a fixed spot of a 240 U
283. ed CAAPF3812 and copy the program SVIEW EXE from the folder system QDLS APF3812 VIEW into this directory on the PC 2 If InterForm400 is running in test mode F14 in menu 1 Design overlays and option 5zdisplay in menu 10 Work with actual output queue will now activate PCL viewing See page 40 for more information on using F14 If InterForm400 is running in production mode you will only have permission to one license If a code is installed for activating more SwiftView licenses the user profiles activating the viewer will automatically be assigned to the group of users for access to SwiftView The administration menu point 51 Swiftview users If all licenses are already occupied every new user will be informed about this when trying to activate the viewer In this case either order the needed number of SwiftView licenses or replace an existing user profile in menu 51 SwiftView users with the user profile that needs access to PCL viewing Setting up Client Access Express enabling PCL viewing 1 Share the folder system as QDLS with this command APF3812 ADDFI LSHR SHARE QDLS 0BJ QDLS TEXT QDLS j It is not necessary to share the complete QDLS You can also choose to share either i APF3812 or APF3812 VIEW However if you choose that you need to state the i sharename in option 2 Configure InterForm400 of the InterForm400 Administration 2 Use the command APF3812 DSPNETSVRA User s Manual for InterForm400
284. ed are standard operators known from e g Query 400 EQ Equal to compare value NE Not equal to compare value LT Less than compare value LE Less than or equal to compare value GT Greater than compare value GE Greater than or equal to compare value The character string or numeric value which the operator should compare with Calling a User Exit Program with the extracted spool pages Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFA4000NLY Description e e e Sort IF400 Pages Split detail description IF400 ONLY User exit program Program name NONE NONE name HID aAByY e eL Der Een name F3 Exit F12 Cancel This screen can be used to call a user exit program that inserts information in the spool entry resulting from the split InterForm400 will call the program with a set of parameters consisting of up to either 5 or 10 lines each containing a field of up to 30 positions The amount of exit parameters depends on the format 01 equals 5 exit parameters 02 equals 10 exit parameters 03 equals the 10 exit parameters as well as 300 character parameter that contains all attributes of the original spooled file For additional information on return parameters look into the sample programs SPLEXIT SPLEXITO02 and SPLEXITOG in the source file APISRC in library APF3812 An example could be a customer ID which the user exit program uses to look up a fax number in a database which is returne
285. ed by InterForm400 Encrypt already existing PDF files created by InterForm400 with the command APF3812 ENCIFPDF Password protect PDF files created earlier by InterForm400 Password protect the new PDF files when created Digitally sign the created PDF files This is possible for all ways of creating PDF file in InterForm400 except through option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay of the InterForm400 Main Menu You mainly encrypt the PDF file in order to prevent a third party froim reading confidential information and you digitally sign a PDF file with a certificate so that the receiver can be certain that you have created the file and that it has not been altered by anyone else A example of how to encrypt a PDF file and or sign the file with a certificate can be found on page 203 Requirements for the PDF security module Apart from the PDF security module these requirements must also be met before you can encrypt and digitally sign the PDF files in InterForm400 You need to run InterForm400 version 2004M01 or newer The OS 400 version must be at least V5R1 You must have installed this on your iSeries Product 5722881 Option 385 OS 400 Cryptographic Service Provider Product 5722SS1 Option 34 Digital Certificate Manager is also required for V5R3 These options are delivered with the standard OS400 CD roms You must have installed this on your iSeries Product 5722AC3 BASE Crypto Access Provider 128 bit for AS 400
286. ed in InterForm400 and does not need to be generated It can be used immediately by Remap Window a Tabulator and Text constant commands within the overlay design window by selection of font ID 3998 The font will to the user function as a resident printer font InterForm400 will automatically add start and stop codes and check digits OCRA Soft Fonts Two soft fonts IF OCRA and IF OCRAEXT are distributed with InterForm400 IF OCRA is BMP based and IF OCRAEXT is based on a True Type Font IF OCRAEXT contains some extra characters compared to IF OCRA Font number 19 is intended to be used with these soft fonts Remember to specify automatic download the soft font in option 3 of the fonts menu OCRB Soft Font Font ID 0003 OCRB is predefined in InterForm400 with font ID 3 but the soft font is not automatically downloaded to the printer when selected The font will need to be downloaded to the printer according to the description on page 287 3 Auto Download Soft Fonts Two font members IF OCRB and IF OCRB L represent the OCR B in portrait and landscape You will only need to download both fonts if you are using OCR B in both portrait and landscape and only for HPII PCL4 compatible printers HPIII PCL5 printers will automatically rotate a soft font The selection field when adding the OCRB font to an Auto Font Download definition should for a HPIII or HP4 compatible printer always state font number 3 Update Auto download
287. ed in the LIMITS parameter This specifies the limitations of the access to the PDF file when a user opens the PDF file with the USERPWD password Possible values are NOPRINT NOCOPY and NOEDIT Details for each value can be found on page 204 The primary target device for the PDF file d NOTE Password protection and or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the The subject and message is used for the e mail The End of line escape character parameter states which characters are to be interpreted as an end of line code in the message field used only for e mails Resources that can be used for PDF output If you want to insert images you can insert TIFF images B W images converted to PCL5 or BMP images color images in the overlay You can also insert JPEG images from IFS But note that you can only insert JPEG images by inserting amp amp IMG COLOR commands in the merged spool file see page 392 Design elements entered in overlay design e g frames lines shadings etc are also supported for PDF output PCL files and can not be used for PDF output They are ignored if included in the overlay Fonts used in PDF output When referring to specific type faces which e g normally could be printer resident type faces the type faces are converted as follows Proportional Type faces fonts like 52 4148 4168 16602 24580 and 24607 are printed as Arial Proportional Type faces fonts like 5
288. eed with section Changing device description from 5219 to 3812 If the device indicates a 3812 model 1 you just need to start the printer writer STRPRTWTR PRTXXX Go to section Print font reference list for testing the connection Note that if Auto Configuration is enabled on the AS 400 the protocol converter might change the device description back to 5219 the next time it is powered ON Disable auto configuration to prevent this problem CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL QAUTOCFG VALUE 0 Configuring a Printer Device Manually The following describes how to create a new device without the use of Auto Configuration 1 366 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The following information for the device must be provided by the system administrator Port Number 0 7 the Switch setting 0 6 and the Attached controller CTLOx Make sure Auto configuration is disabled by the following CL command CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL QAUTOCFG VALUE 0 Follow the instructions of your protocol converter in order to set the Twinax address switch setting 0 6 Attach the protocol converter to the Twinax network and power it ON The following CL command will create a new device description called PRTXXX for a 3812 model 1 on port 2 switch setting 3 and controller CTLO1 CRTDEVPRT DEVD PRTXXX DEVCLS LCL TYPE 3812 MODEL 1 PORT 2 SWTSET 3 CTL CTLO1 FONT 11 If you are not able to fit the entire command on the command line you can prompt the command CRTDEVPRT w
289. een above Now fill in Enclosure Enclosures can be pre folded folded manually or folded by the Prinserter Flap size mm Flap size of the Envelope measured in millimetres as the widest point of the envelope flap This is mainly important in connection to sealing 182 Users Manual for InterForm400 Seal envelope Seal envelope with water When pressing Enter the Prinserter definition is updated Go to section Using the Prinserter definition with Auto Forms Control on page 216 in order to test the definition You can use the spool entry which can be created under Service Functions in the administration menu This spool entry will be referred to for the examples in the following sections Defining Prinserter amp pre process Definition Variable number of pages The more advanced pre processors can on basis of boolean equations determine the level break between pages in a spool entry and thereby allow varying number of pages to be inserted into envelopes The pre processor can additionally define that the varying pages should be sorted in to groups where each group contains a fixed number of pages This is in reality a postage group sorting mechanism Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions in the Auto Forms Control menu Press F6 to create a new Finishing definition and select 01 to make it valid for the Prinserter Create Finishing Definition PRS310D Definition name TESTDEF Desc
290. efault output queue for AFC to send the processed print OUTPUT OUTPUT QUEUE Name of output queue AFC is monitoring for incoming spool files INPUT QUEUE Add Auto Forms Control Definition Output queue Library Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Description Autostart job _ Y N Code page Number SYSVAL Default output output queue and printer type Output queue Dibr amp rw ok SA ees InterForm 400 printer type Interface Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Template AFC definition Output queue Library F3 Exit F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel Name of other AFC defintion which functions also should be used for AFC Functions for this AFC defintion the monitored INPUT TEMPLATE QUEUE based on the spool file selection cri teria Attributes Update AFC functions attached to output ques AFC305D Queue Library Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0002 6 DEMO Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function TO 1 Form type DEMO Save attribute Jobname de ra Spooled file name Device file Library ou Program that opened file Library du Ae A es ae Ae ee Se ee F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F11 Delete F12 Cancel 134 Us
291. el F13 How to use this display F24 More keys The Link Joint Report Command The command APF3812 APFLNK is intended to be included in your CL program Normally you would use it together with the APFRPT command Before you can use the APFPRT command to print out a joint report you must establish a link between the individual printouts in the report and spool entry For this you use the User s Manual for InterForm4006 403 APFLNK command which contains the following parameters Link spooled file to joint rep APFLNK Type choices press Enter InterForm 400 file set KARTSET Character value Report name RAPNVN Character value Link name srs so co 50x 00x x LNKNVN Character value Spooled fil6 5 sri 5 409525 25 3 BILNVN Name NONE WOO WAM C ME MC nh tp ee oe OB Name WSS pte GS ce pL Gaps ce NES NO ES Name Job dumb X ume ue pe ee ee x 000000 999999 Spooled file number SPLNBR Number ONLY LAST Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys The Print Joint Report Command The APF3812 APFRPT command is intended to be included in your CL programs It provides you with the facility to print out a complete joint report as an integrated part of your application instead of having to use the print facility behind option 7 on the InterForm400 system main menu Print joint report APFRPT Type choices press Enter
292. ell as printing PCLS on a PCL4 printer definitely will go wrong It is recommended to use an HPIII driver to create the PCL files on the PC GzHP GL 2 FILE A HP GL 2 file can be file transferred to the system for storage as a member in the physical file APF3812 GL2 The PC file containing the HP GL 2 code must be transferred to the system by a File Transfer function This feature has been superseded by the PCL imports option Contact Intermate A S for details if import of HPGL files is needed Design APF3812 overlay APF300D Overlay name PROFIT Overlay text Final Result DM YTD Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type Inch pel 2 0 G HP GL 2 file From top edge From left Height Width Rotation Scale factor Line width File name F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel If you are using HP4 compatible printers only you should choose to use the F PCL file sequence line solely as this will treat a HP GL 2 files and PCL files equally This means you can use the procedures for reading in PC print into PCL files explained on page 325 to retrieve the HP GL 2 file from the PC environment instead of using the Client Access PC support file transfer function From top edge Inches pels vertical position of the HP GL 2 file is made absolute to the upper edge of the paper Vertical positioning of elements in the PCL file is added to this value Adding a minus after the value will cause an movement upwards e g 1 120 fo
293. ements for the Graphical Designer Requirements for the iSeries AS 400 The iSeries must run at least OS400 V4R5M0 and these services must be active TRTCPSVR SERVER DDM TRHOSTSVR SERVER DTAQ TRHOSTSVR SERVER NETPRT TRHOSTSVR SERVER RMTCMD TRHOSTSVR SERVER SI GNON TRHOSTSVR SERVER SVRMAP Or just use STRHOSTSVR SERVER ALL to start all host servers Select option 80 Prepare server to support InterForm Designer on the InterForm400 Service menu to start all necessary servers Cn co G CD CO CO InterForm400 version 2003M01 or newer must be installed and journaling of InterForm400 files must be started Refer to page 340 Execute the command DSPNETA Find the text parameter DDM request access This should normally be OBJAUT it can also refer to a user program but if itis REJECT the DDM server will not work Change the value if necessary with the command CHGNETA DDMACC 0BJ AUT Requirements for the PC The PC must be running Windows 98 or newer The PC must be connected to the iSeries via TCP IP Minimum 128 Mb RAM is required JAVA Runtime Environment version 1 4 or later must be installed version 5 0 is recommended and thus shipped with InterForm400 The InterForm400 graphical designer must be installed Requirements for the network If you access the iSeries through a firewall be sure that these port numbers are not blocked Host Server Port number CENT
294. en selected always should be printed on a front page when a overlay selector is used By stating YES you will avoid that an intended first page is printed on the duplex side of the previous page This value in the field states the width of the binding margin in n 240 inch This field can be left blank meaning that you want to use the same overlay on both sides of each sheet If the field is filled in with an overlay name only the front pages will be used for print and the back pages will contain the back page overlay without any spool data It is however possible to put variable data on both sides of the sheet with different overlays by leaving this field blank and using sub overlays A simple main overlay should be made that contains two sub overlays calls only In the two If then lines in the main overlay the field number of lines to remap will indicate the lines the sub overlay should process All formatting must be handled by the sequence lines in the sub overlays Entering VAR in this field will bring up a screen where the conditions for selecting the overlay must be stated Note that VAR can only be used with Code for placement B or blank User s Manual for InterForm400 39 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name TEST Overlay text Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin DOSDTELOMS e Andr NERE at ave teyens
295. entry Form type The Form type of the resulting printout Default STD Copies 1 99 Drawer Overwrite the drawer settings of the overlay global settings For details about how to select drawer by use of paper type refer to page 331 and 376 View You can specify what you want to view when you press F14 in overlay design If you choose 1 PCL pressing F14 will display the result of a merge to PCL in SwiftView Choosing option 2 or 3 will make InterForm400 create a PDF file and display it using Acrobat Reader assuming that Acrobat Reader is associated with PDF files on your PC Refer to page 430 for more information i4 NOTE 2 In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classic Output Queue The name of the output queue where the spool entry to be merged is placed Library The library of the above output queue If left blank the library list will be used F18 DSPSPLF With the Remap Window this function is relevant for displaying the spool entry in order to determine lines and columns for the Remap Window F18 prompts the command DSPSPLF with the job information set by F13 Set view Print parameters or by in menu 3 Merge spool entry with overlay page 117 Pressing F18 will only appear if this has been set prior to entering this menu 42 Users Manual for InterForm4009 F19 DSPPFM This function works like F18 but prompts the commands DSPPFM for displaying the spool entry as a physical file
296. ents su 356 Tabulator text area 2 2 0 2 eee 61 Max number 000 63 TCP IP Raw Socket 00005 368 CRD atalino aes 370 371 Temparature anunua eee eee 43 Test print overlay 000 116 JTIETOMBR 44 Eh EP 422 True Type font import EorPCE 22 Vv eWPEDOVEEVEN RA 284 Fot PDE 2 oii Ries 288 289 For Zebra 6 eee eee 313 TTF file import For POL wks tbs oh ae eos bas 284 For BDE iis oes denen PE PI 288 289 For Zebra cr Eel 313 Typaces known by PCL printers 386 Un formatted text 0 0 0 0 eee 61 Unusual file access failure 433 UPC A Barcode eee ee eee 294 Upgrade remote sites 362 USERASCII 00000 eee eee 132 144 Vertical line 02 eee eee ee 56 Vertical repositioning 68 View graphically PCL mne EORR uh Shee snare 430 Peete dose codes n sts dedi 430 Watermark Text as watermark sls 99 Work with output queue 120 Working with joint reports 258 Working with overlay selectors 122 Selection criteria entries 123 WRKGHT 54 see cated Wee eed as 436 WRKMAILADR 00 0000 e eee 420 WRKPRFJOB 0 000 cee ees 420 WRKSFID 0000 E EENES 412 WRKSTMFLCK 00000 eee eee 421 Xsret lists wanes gs eu aw eee eek D eA 420 Zebra Command MRGSPLFZPL 410 Dar
297. equence number 11 We will now have to change the text color ink for the column headers to white The sequence lines defining the column headers have now changed to the interval 12 to 16 due to the insertion of the frame We insert a change of Ink after the black box and before the first column header Remap Windows by selecting sequence line 11 1 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name IF400DEMO Overlay text IF400DEMO Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0009 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0010 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0011 1 Frame top 05 030 left 01 120 right 06 116 bottom 05 068 0012 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 08 014 top 5 060 left 2 000 C 0013 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 15 025 top 5 060 left 3 000 C 0014 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 26 039 top 5 060 left 4 000 C 0015 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 40 053 top 5 060 left 5 000 C 0016 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 C Seqnbr Type 7 11 1 Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern 0 blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We fill in 0 as pattern press Enter to save our new line 12 In order not to have the rest of the text in the overlay printed in white we will have to change the ink back to black after the last column header which now has sequence number 17 We insert a li
298. er 1 In the option field to select TEST and press Enter Now enter 1 Design Overlay on the main menu and press Enter Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO F3 Exit F4 List overlays F12 Cancel Here we type the name of the new overlay we want to create We can name this overlay MYDEMO We type MYDEMO and press Enter Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions 0 0 993 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top 0 0 99 Font 0066 INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def Y N Drawer PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 9 20 39 Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side E Copy management Y N Duplex print N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin 20 in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement _ B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Copy from another overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view This screen already has some options filled in All that will be overwritten by the settings of the overlay IFA00DEMO we are copying from We notice that since we are actually creating a new overlay it is possible to copy an existing overlay with F9 We press F9 to User s Manual for InterForm400 77 copy from another overlay Design InterForm 400 overlay A
299. er Command The APF3812 PCLTOMBR command can be used for inserting one or several PCL files from a folder into a physical file as members The PCL files can be specified as generic or ALL PCL file from folder to member PCLTOMBR Type choices press Enter Eromf obd f Que MIEL FROMFLR From PC file name DOCNAM Char generic From PC file extension EXTENSION Char generic To phyvsisel Pile 4o x7 Ex OUTFILE Name Iu brawy ei as a Se Ge utut Ul LIBL Name LIBL Member prefix PREFIX A Z2 NONE Add extension to member name MBREXT NO NO YES Delete PC file after copying DLTDOC NO NO YES Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys A member prefix can be specified A Z or NONE If the prefix is a letter the member name of the PCL files will then be the name of the PC file preceded by this character Note that in order to be able to use the PCL files when designing overlays the PC files 418 Users Manual for InterForm4009 have to be placed as members in the APF3812 PCL file for Black and white or the APF3812 PCLCOL file for colour files PCL files not placed in PCL and PCLCOL can only be used by inserting amp amp commands in the spool file TIF files can be inserted with a simular command as seen at page 422 The Print PCL member Command This command can be used in conjunction with PC
300. er to page 72 for more information Patterns Same as type 7 Ink in green screen design See page 59 for more details Inserts a PCL file in the design Note PCL files are not displayed in the graphical designer You can press this icon to view the correct result in SwiftView See page 70 for more information DES a User s Manual for InterForm400 473 xe Inserts a HP GL 2 file in the design HP GL 2 files are not displayed in LZ the graphical designer Refer to page 71 for more information Inserts a comment Comments are shown in blue in the graphical designer Refer to page 72 for more information When you have finished the design you need to upload save onto the InterForm400 databases on your iSeries AS 400 You can do that in these manners E Save the current overlay Select this icon to close the current overlay The designer will then ask if you want to save the current design you are not offered the possibility to save as a different name This is the same as File and Close current overlay Or select File and Save Save As Local save in the designer If you lose the contact with the iSeries you will get the message Lost connection to host and the designer will end But do not worry A backup of your overlay is on your PC and you reload that design when you restart the designer after regaining contact to the iSeries In that case the designer will start up with the mes
301. erForm400 Autodownload of soft fonts for Zebra printers works differently than for PCL printers Soft fonts for a font number are automatically downloaded unless the soft font is registered as already downloaded into the flash memory of the printer in 13 Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory 11 Description of Zebra fonts Work with Zebra fonts ZEB360D Position to 2 ox we ow Font Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Rename Opt Font Description _ 2000 CG Triumvirate H 10 00 W 5 00 _ 3001 Dot Matrix 11x7 H 5 W 5 4450 PDF417 EC 1 Lsep CR Esc H 3 W 3 4545 EAN8 Narrow bar width 4 H 100 00 4600 CODE39 Width 4 H 100 YYYY 4700 CODE128 Width 4 Height 100 4900 I20f5 Width 4 Height 100 Rel 2 5 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel With this option you can define fonts used for Zebra printers in addition to the fonts that are already known by the printers For the standard fonts delivered with the printers see page 385 Press F6 Create to create a font or barcode 308 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Create ZEBRA font ZEB370D EODD uc tue sc See ee 2000 9999 2000 2999 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed 3000 3999 Dot Matrix fonts 4400 4499 PDF417 barcode 4500 4599 EAN8 EAN13 UPC A Barcode 4600 4699 Code 3 of 9 barcode 4700 4799 Code 128 barcode 4900 4999 Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode 5000 9999 Other fonts F3 Exit F12 Cancel Note that you cannot use any
302. erfaces Protocol Converters 378 IBM Compatible Font List 0 000000 cece BI 383 Shipped Zebra Fohts 2 2 svereoseem ieebe5nbnr REPE eben ed 385 Typefaces known by PCL Printers 0 000 ccc eee enna 386 Appendix G Limitations of the Light Version 388 Appendix H Commands in Spooled Files 390 Example of using Escape Commands in the Data Stream 397 Appendix I InterForm400 CL Commands ees 400 NetServer Commands csse 400 The Add Netserver File Share Command sss 400 The Add NetServer Printer share Command 400 The Change Netserver Attributes Command 400 The Display Netserver Attributes Command 400 The End Netserver Command 0 000 401 The Remove NetServer share Command 0005 401 The Start Netserver Command 00000 e anann 401 User s Manual for InterForm400 11 Save Restore and Export Import Commands 0000 00es 401 The Export Chart Command 0020 cece eee eee 401 The Import Chart Command 00 0 cece eee eee eee 402 The Restore Library from Folder Command 5 402 The Save Library to Folder Command lsuu 402 Joint Report Commands 000 cee ren 403 The Clear Link to Join
303. erlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 E Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 Image DEMOIMAGE Top 09 100 Left 02 120 0003 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0004 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L I 8 9 0005 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0006 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0007 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0008 5 Text 110 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kong Seqnbr Ty 1 1 7 pe Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern c blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We select C for pattern which is a medium shading We press Enter to save the new line 2 As usual we will need to set the Ink back to default just after the logo we enter 3 1 and select 7 for Ink Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 I Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 7 Ink Foreground Background UNALTERED 0003 aE Image DEMOIMAGE Top 09 100 Left 02 120 0004 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0005 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0006 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0007 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0008 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right
304. ers Manual for InterForm400 The INPUT QUEUE mentioned above is a created output queue without a device attached This enables InterForm400 to pick up the spool files without the printer writer is processing the spool file AFC usually operates with both an INPUT QUEUE and the standard defined OUTPUT QUEUE with a printer attached but AFC can operate on one output queue shared with a printer For more about this feature refer to page 27 and page 160 User s Manual for InterForm400 135 Auto Forms Control Definitions When selecting option 1 Functions Attached to Output Queues in the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control on the main menu we get this screen Work with Auto Forms Control output queues AFC300D Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Start AFC job 9 End AFC job Opt Outq Library Description AFC INPUT1 APF3812 Job for sample printout End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel The first time this screen is entered only the Sample queue AFC_INPUT1 will exist see the Getting Started section page 21 Press F6 to create a new AFC definition When created press F5 to update the screen above Entering queue and job names to an AFC definition When changing or adding an AFC definition the entry screen below will be shown Add Auto Forms Control Definition AFC302D Output queue Library Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit
305. ers consisted of more than 1 page where page 2 and succeeding pages only indicate the customer ID but not MateSert or InterMat We add an extra sort definition where we search for the customer ID Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position Ascending Descending T bes Gel 28 A 2 ashe DA 2260 A Example 4 Sort by Customer ID and type Another approach could be to sort by customer ID s first and then by the type being MateSert or InterMat This is achieved by reversing the order of the sort fields from the previous example Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position Ascending Descending 1 zd 91 50 A 2 245 el 228 A In an AFC definition we can activate the sort definition SORTDEMO by using function B Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue AFC_INPUT2 Library APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program No functions defined Seqnbr Function 1 0 D Sort Spooled File Sort definition name SORTDEMO Outque for sorted print INPUT Library Qe ones ON Ge Se ee Form type SORTDONE__ F3 Exit F12 Cancel This will cause the demo spool entry to have pages sorted into another SCS spool entry with form type SORTDONE is created and placed after the original spool entry in the same queue We can now merge the new spool entry
306. erted randomly according to the input spool entry but with an enclosure ie max 3 sheets total Secondly all sets with 3 or 4 pages plus an enclosure are processed ie max 5 sheets total Finally we prevent moving into the higher charge which starts with 6 pages per envelope by defining that envelopes with 5 pages should not have an enclosure We do not have to take into account what to do when 6 or more pages are attempted to be inserted as InterForm400 automatically outputs these pages in the upper tray for manual insertion It can then be decided at that stage if the enclosure should be added manually When filled in press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition User s Manual for InterForm400 189 Defining Stapling Pre process Definitions Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions on the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 02 for making the definition valid for stapling Create Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name STAPLE Description 4 2 4 2 x best PH Type Of Finishing cx x 02 01 Prinserter 02 Stapling per Recipient 03 Prepare for inserting 04 PFE Mail Printer 05 Prepare for E mail Fax 06 PDF Filenaming 07 Reformat Spooled File F3 Exit F12 Cancel If Copy Management is used in the overlay intended to be used for the inserted pages
307. ess definition for the Finishing definition Alternatively the program APF3812 PRSCOPY delivered with InterForm400 can be used to create a new SCS spool entry with multiple copies of selected pages from an input spool entry with data type SCS The program can be used with AFC function 8 Call Program The input spool entry should have a number from 1 9 placed in position 1 line 1 which PRSCOPY takes as information on how many copies to generate The copies will be placed immediately after the original in the new spool entry Page one of the copies the original will have a C placed in position 1 line 1 This field can be used for selecting specific forms using the Overlay Selector Pages with a blank or characters other than 1 9 in position 1 line 1 will be copied to the resulting spool entry as they are The resulting spool entry can be recognised by the characters PRS which has been added as the last 3 characters of the formtype If the original form type name used all available characters the last 3 characters of the form type will be replaced with PRS User s Manual for InterForm400 153 154 Users Manual for InterForm400 Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control The following sections are structured so you will be brought through a process of creating AFC definitions for processing of the IFAQ00DEMO from the Getting Started section The chapter requires you have Performed step 13 14 18 and 19 in the Gett
308. eue DELETE HIDRALY ft Wee APF3812 All input spooled files will be moved to the specified output queue or will be deleted if DELETE is specified F3 Exit F12 Cancel When the OSC jobs have been executed we can define what should happen with the original spool files taken from the OSC output queue As per above entry screen we can define if we wish to delete the spool files or we could enter an output queue for archiving purposes Specify job priority Specify job priority OSC300D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 Library ere s ee m en eed APF3812 Type choices press Enter Job priority RUNPTY Pee 50 11 99 HOLM XEype a bee kre AM OSC F3 Exit F12 Cancel Above we enter the desired run priority of the OSC job and the form type used for the merged spool files The OSC definition has now been completed and upon exit from the OSC definitions we will be asked to save the definition Now you only have to setup Auto Forms Control jobs to monitor the output queues AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2 User s Manual for InterForm400 257 Working with Joint Reports Enter menu point 7 Work with Joint Reports on the main menu 1 Compose Joint Report In this menu point you can compose a report from a number of overlays Work with report composition APF310D Report name F3 Exit F4 Overview reports Report name The name of the report composition you wish to create update
309. eue The output queue where the resulting spool entry from the split should be sent to The value NONE means that the pages are not printed but the user exit program is called This allows for a user exit program to take data from pages which are not printed and transfer them to the following pages The rest of the values are corresponding to the spool file attributes found in a printer file PRTF Blank fields equals INPUT which means the attributes of the original spool entry will be copied to the resulting spool entry from the split A user exit program can overwrite these values if any of the fields are filled out when returning from the exit program The original spool entry will after the split remain untouched with status RDY and could be processed immediately by other AFC definitions even another Split definition 176 Users Manual for InterForm400 Example Using Split The following makes use of the demo spool entry delivered with InterForm4009 You can print this from the menu 12 Service Functions under the administration menu The distinction between MaterSert 400 and InterMate400 letters is the text MateSert or InterMate which is located on each page in line 15 position 21 29 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE Pile 4 fo aes ow QPRINT Page Line 3 15 FURCELOR X 4 1 Columns 1 78 Search for M ANEO IETEN EREET Hay EA EEE ASS eee os eere e ets EROS Are dece tos ene o ETETE E AEE rete Re Your new InterMate 400
310. extra total States what line ID to insert for the part of the total lines that is placed on the last page if the total lines are split across pages When you press Enter you will proceed to this screen Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Reformating totals 0001 1 01 050 060 1 50 0002 2 Total 1 40 Seqnbr Type 2 0 d Reformat input Text constant F3 Exit Fll Delete F12 Cancel Here you can edit and rearrange the total lines in the output spooled file This works exactly as for the detail lines Refer to page 225 for more information Footer Here you key in the placement of the footer i e in which line number it starts in the original spooled file and how many of the footer lines that you want to include in the new reformatted spooled file NOTE The footer lines will in the output spooled file be placed between the header and the detail lines Insert reformatting in production When you have defined your reformat finishing definition you go to Auto Forms Control and insert a function C Prepare for Finishing for the relevant output queue Refer to page 148 for more information 228 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 229 Sort Definitions This function is used if pages in a spool entry for the same receiver ID are not consecutive and there is a demand for them to be
311. f no PCL printer group is found InterForm400 will automatically create the printer group PCL User s Manual for InterForm400 295 j If you want easy to see the connection between the font number and the font file i member name you can insert BARCOD followed by the font number for the FONT file member name instead of GEN If you do not do this then the only way to find out which Editing of font ID s for barcodes are done under 1 Description of additional fonts in the Work with Fonts menu Example of editing a font ID for Code39 barcode Code39 can be defined in the font ID interval 4600 4699 Change Font Replace unprintable with blank Full ASCII mode Print characters beneath bar code F3 Exit F12 Cancel 4622 Code 3 2515 96 00 Code 39 soft fonts 9 2 75 CPI 0 10 49 99 1 00 792 00 Y N Y N Y N Y N APF370D 96 00 points Downloading a Barcode Soft Font A bar code is regarded as a PCL soft font and has to be downloaded according to the description on page 283 2 Download soft fonts or page 287 3 Auto Download Soft Fonts In order to select the barcode soft font from an overlay it has to be described to the system on page 279 1 Description of additional fonts The next section contains an example of downloading a barcode soft font 296 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm4006 297 Getting Familiar with So
312. fferently in each country if the code page is not specified in the spool entry This option will allow the code page of spool entry to be overruled this field is left blank and the spool file does not specify a explicit code page the system value will be used Some spooled files will not react as expected when merging with an overlay This is the case when spooled files use overprinting i e printing two lines on one e g for printing in bold or if the output fields are defined in the wrong order in the printer file Enable this feature and the overprinted spooled file lines are printed as one meaning e g that bold created in this manner will be ignored If you press F19 DSPPFM in the green screen designer and you see 0 s in the left side of the screen then this option should most probably be activated The Form type of the resulting printout Default STD 1 99 Overwrite the drawer settings of the overlay global settings NOTE Labels Continuous media type and print mode are all active for ZPL Zebra output only Labels Continuous Media type Print mode 118 Users Manual for InterForm400 Select 1 Labels if the media contains of separate labels select 2 Continuous if the media is not separated into labels in this case you would probably select 4 Cut for the print mode parameter Select 1 Termo transfer if you use a non heat sensitive media otherwise use option 2 Transfer media 1 Tear off mean that you w
313. fine X axis point 1 point p 446 Users Manual for InterForm4009 amp amp CHAO1 INT1 XPLO amp amp CHAO1 INT1 OSLO amp amp CHAO1 INT1 OSDA amp amp CHAO1 INT1 PRCH Define X axis point 2 point Define observation set layout Add data Print chart Create delete internal chart commands Create internal chart CRIC 01 Colom OOOO T BAR or LINE Description Creates a new internal chart definition Description Deletes an internal chart definition User s Manual for InterForm400 447 Load commands Load external chart LOEC 01 amp amp CHA 18 Chart name LOEC Load sample data for observation set ID NONE ALL Description Loads or reloads a chart definition 448 User s Manual for InterForm400 General layout commands Define general layout GNLO 01 M ospuew 0000000 ow 0 Celem OOOO O O O s mo SCS a njome w olom n sm owtewetnza oo 20 cannognnper SSCS af spomene 7 m we ramwema SS Description Describes general layout of chart Define general layout GNLO 02 GNLO Legend margin INPEL Legend width INPEL Legend spacing in pels Desciption Describes general layout of chart User s Manual for InterForm4006 449 X axis commands Define X axis layout XALO 01 18 Chart name INET XALO 26 X axis line width in points X axis
314. font you may notice that the font size should also be specified in height even though pitch or CPI would be the normal way to measure it 312 Users Manual for InterForm4009 12 Work with ZEBRA soft fonts When you select this option all installed soft fonts for Zebra printers are shown Work with ZEBRA soft fonts FNT461D Position EO 2 4x4 x3 Member name Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print Opt Member Symbolset Description i FRUTBOCE Central European TrueType Frutiger Bold x FRUTBOWE Western TrueType Frutiger Bold 2 LOGOFONT Special TrueType Company Logo End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel 5 Display You can choose option 5 Display to display a sample of the font in SwiftView if installed You are prompted for the codepage to use State the codepage with preceding zeroes 6 Print Some few characters in some soft fonts cannot be printed on a Zebra printer To make sure that an installed soft font can be used it is recommended always to do a test print before using the soft font in production Press F6 to install a True Type Font file as a new soft font for Zebra Make sure that you do not violate any copyrights when installing the font Install TrueType font to ZEBRA from the APF3812 folder FNT465D Document name FONT TIF MONG Damen id do ws ae is ude ds 3 CRONE Font name PCL eg ioe noes oe UP ONE Symbol Set i4 lt 54 9 6 0 d 1 Western 2 Centra
315. fonts already defined for PCL You need to create fonts especially for Zebra printers Below are descriptions that can help you understand the specifications of the fonts and barcodes CG Triumvirate Change ZEBRA font ZEB370D Font 2000 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed Description CG_Triumvirate H 10 00 W 5 00 Height unaoa W wowWw ww LOO 12007792 00 Relative width 5 00 20 5 00 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here you define the size of the font in Height but you can even change the width of the font relatively to the standard width e g a relative width of 2 creates a font twice as wide as the standard font with the same height User s Manual for InterForm4006 309 Dot matrix Change ZEBRA font ZEB370D Fento x xw aoe aoe ox ao ee 3 OBL Dot matrix font Descrrpbd 5f sas do de de de x3 Dot Matrix 11x7 H 5 W 5 Font SOUPOB Q 393 t 4 1 9x5 dot matrix 2 11x7 dot matrix 3 18x10 dot matrix 4 26x13 dot matrix 5 60x40 dot matrix 6 OCRA dot matrix 7 OCRB dot matrix Height factor 2 weox wed 5 lr Width GacUoE X WO lt 5 5 1 10 F3 Exit F12 Cancel The height and width of dot matrix fonts can only be defined as a whole integer factor times the standard width height Defining barcodes for Zebra printers Barcodes for Zebra printers are defined as barcodes for PCL printers with these deviations a Barcodes are interpreted directly on the printers m
316. for LIPPE M p D E NEU NER NUR EN TENE PUE SEPERATOR PAGE 1001 InterFor Florence Flowers Tulip Road 16 4000 Marigold DK Denmark 1001 PH 30 04 97 Re Your new InterMate 400 Forms Management System Congratulations with your new InterMate 400 software InterMate 400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform advanced data remapping and copy management of you existing SCS print data InterMate 400 exploits the advanced features of F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys You can use the sort selection criteria that is included on the separator page in this example 1001 or InterForm400 to have an overlay selector pick an overlay that prints the separator page to be with a special overlay or from another drawer e g with coloured User s Manual for InterForm400 237 PDF File Bookmarks From the InterForm400 main menu select 5 Work with Auto Forms Control followed by 6 PDF bookmark definitions Here you can define how bookmarks should be inserted when you create a PDF file in InterForm400 Note that alternatively you can also include amp amp BMK commands in the SCS spooled file you merge with to insert bookmarks Refer to page 396 for more information i4 NOTE In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classic package ifor InterForm400 You can then later refer to a bookmark definition when you create a PDF file in InterForm400 When you create a new
317. ft fonts and Barcodes This example will bring us through all the menu items under 7 Work With Fonts At the end of this section we will have made the following 1 Installed the TrueType Font ARIAL from the PC environment and stored it as a resource soft font member Created a Code128 bar code That includes a soft font which is assigned to a font number and specified to download the soft font when used Created a font number 5001 to be used with the arial soft font Defined that the OCR B soft font delivered with InterForm400 is to be downloaded to any printer queue automatically when the font number 3 is used in overlays and defined that ARIAL soft font is to be downloaded whenever font number 5001 is used In order to get the exact result as described in the following it would require you to have a PCL5 compatible printer assigned to printer queue AFC_OUT1 Step 1 Installing the Arial True Type Font In the following we install the True Type Font directly from the APF3812 folder Note This procedure is describing how to install a TTF file to be used for printing PCL If the TTF file is to be used for PDF output the procedure is different see page 289 1 2 Upload the TTF file to the APF3812 folder From the InterForm400 main menu select option 80 Administering InterForm 400 7 Work with fonts and 2 Work with Soft Fonts for PCL Press F6 Create This screen is presented F3 Exit Document na
318. g Y in this field you can override the global settings of Line Spacing Extra blank lines on top and Font Formatting is done for intervals of lines and is especially convenient if large areas of text should be re mapped or if you want to format the spool data into columns Depends on the printer type Valid values are INPUT The drawer specified in the spool entry PRINTER Printer default paper source 1 255 Printer specific paper source Name Paper type prompt with F4 to list valid types The values 1 255 is inserted in the HP PCL command Esc amp l H see Cassette Selection page 376 For details about how to select drawer by use of paper type refer to page 331 and 376 Is only visible if you have allowed individual paper sizes for the overlays If you specify 0 in Paper Size the default value from the administration menu option 2 Configure InterForm 400 will be used for this overlay more info page 269 Blank or 1 indicates no multi up functionality When 2 or more are indicated the overlay definitions Tabulator and Remap Window will be able to handle the total number of lines set for the Multi up E g a spool page has 66 lines and multi up is set to include 2 spool pages on one laser printed page A Tabulator will then be able to handle line 1 132 2 x 66 resulting in both spool pages will have the same tabulator The same applies for the Remap Window The spool pages included in the multi up function could also be forma
319. ge one and the succeeding pages The example contains some bit images to give a feeling of this Notice that the address field text and the reference text are printed with a different font than the rest of the text The lines and columns where these text strings are found in the spool entry are re mapped by definitions in the sample overlay IFA00DEMO Enter 1 Design Overlay on the main menu and select overlay IFA00DEMO and look at the overlay elements defined in here Do not make changes to this overlay as it will be used as template in section Getting familiar with Overlays Try entering 5 Work with Auto Forms Control on the main and select 1 Functions attached to Output Queues Select 2 for Change AFC_INPUT1 and look into the definitions found in here You should now investigate further on your own You will probably be amazed how simple the concept really is We suggest that you either proceed with the section Getting familiar with overlays which leads you through a process of adding more advanced overlay elements to the sample you have been working on Alternatively you can start building your own definitions ie WARNING DO NOT create new overlays intended for production in the file set SAMPLE A future i release update will not update the changes you make in the file set SAMPLE Neither will changes made to AFC definitions in AFC job queue AFC_INPUT1 unless a Light ie WARNING DO NOT make any changes to the overlay
320. ght F24 More keys The distinction between MateSert 400 and InterMate 400 letters is the text MateSert or InterMat which can be located on each page in line 15 position 21 28 Note that we must compare the same number of characters which is the reason why we check for InterMat and not InterMate in order to match the length of the word MateSert User s Manual for InterForm400 233 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE Bite o x ow x QPRINT Page Line 3 15 P netiof ux wo 1 Columns 1 78 Search for Bose Hho lew thos econ ace ete ie a tetas tutu uer cubes b ecutv woe ede edie eon Re Your new InterMate 400 Forms Management System Congratulations with your new InterMate 400 software InterMate 400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform advanced data remapping and copy management of you existing SCS print data InterMate 400 exploits the advanced features of standard HP PCL printers and is the chosen forms management solution for several hundreds of organisations The following license code s will be needed to activate InterMate 400 permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code 200 P10 4449079 F2 E7 20 AA F35 P20 44B2031 2 AA BB 01 23 E60 P30 44D3971 1A BC DE 44 F45 P20 44A1460 T9 10 22 F1 F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys Example 1 Sort by Type InterMate400 letters first A sort definition could monitor the field w
321. gn screen F18 DSPSPLF will appear and the contents of the spool file can now be viewed directly from the design screen By typing 1 and pressing Enter a few times we find the word MateSert in line 15 position 21 to 28 on all letters regarding the MateSert 400 program DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE Pade seen o OPRINT Page Line 1 15 Funetiofn uu s tI Columns l8 Search for oto bete e eee ee Dates biete dee adhe tw A than Uae tees moe e Dus ete Ga ers bres Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code F45 4402971 1 81 20 01 3A 320 4429032 3 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on 45 43 26 02 99 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on END F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys By typing P 1 page forward and pressing Enter a few times we find that the text InterForm is found in line 15 position 21 to 29 on all pages regarding InterForm400 128 Users Manual for InterForm400 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE Rade uu x04 43 QPRINT Page Line 3 15 Functi
322. group Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 5 MUHNHH Try running this example with the test spool entry combined with the definitions of either example 1 on page 213 or example 2 on page 214 You will then notice that the letters for Forrest Friends are sorted so it is printed before the envelope with the two letters for Florence Flowers When filled in press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition Example 3 Sorting in Franking groups By measuring the weight of envelopes with varying number of pages we have determined that an envelope with 2 page and 1 enclosure is within the lowest postage group informed by our governmental post office The next postage group allows max 5 pages in all which means we should decide if we want to pay the higher charge just for adding the enclosure which will bring the total number of pages in the envelope to 6 We decide not to add an enclosure for these envelopes in order to stay in the cheaper postage group We enter the following definitions Pages per envelope group Enclosure group l Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 5 our BRD The above definition will cause all sets of pages of 1 or 2 to be ins
323. h to use temporarily Library Specify the library of the queue or leave blank to search library list Printer type If users are allowed to override standard printer type refer to 2 Set default output queue and printer type page 268 you can select printer type and Interface Refer to page 374 For more information Interface Selects interface Always use ASCII850 Once you press Enter the system returns to the main menu and the new output queue Printer and Interface type will appear in the upper right corner of the screen For more information on selection of printers and interfaces refer to page 268 and page 374 10 Work with actual Output Queue If you choose option 10 on the main menu you will work with the output queue which is currently active for output from the InterForm400 system This is convenient when operating with different forms types which causes the spool queue to generate messages requesting your reply This function activates the command APFWRKOUTQ and adds your default InterForm400 output queue to the command This screen however has extended features compared to the usual WRKOUTQ screen If you have installed the PCL Viewer Swiftview you can e g use option 5 display to view spool entries containing PCL data 120 Users Manual for InterForm400 datatype ASCII Refer to Appendix L for more information on the PCL Viewer The following command can be entered from outside InterForm4008 APF3812 APFWRKOU
324. has been printed and inserted by BOMateSert 400 NO The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your BOAS 400 NO CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code NL NL F45 4422971 1 81 20 01 3A NL 320 4429032 3F 78 66 99 NL Should you have any questions regarding the driver to call our technical support hotline on you are welcome UL 45 72 26 04 00 NO Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on BOhttp www intermate com NO Regards NL INTERMATE A S As mentioned before in this chapter a Merge with overlay has to be made in order for the User s Manual for InterForm400 397 Escape sequences in the spool file to take effect Create a similar overlay as defined below and call this overlay in a AFC definition Design InterForm 400 Overlay name Overlay text Line spacing Rotation Extra left margin positions Maximum number of print positions Extra blank lines on top Font Extended page def Drawer Papertype Paper Size Pages per side Copy management F3 Exit F4 Promp F13 Set view print pa overlay APF300D NOOVERLAY Escape sequences in datastream 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 INPUT INPUT 0 90 180 270 _0 0 99 378 1 379 0 0 99 INPUT INPUT fontnumber F4 List Y N 5 INPUT PRINTER 1 255 Name F4 List 4 F4 List Y N t F
325. have all resources This screen is shown 316 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images ZRL300D Output queue ZEBRA LzDrdbys 4e7x kDde Rode QUSRSYS Plash APIYE 2 i Geek Gee Ae Qe ae He E E B ROTM type i hee ww fer fey fe ey be STD F3 Exit F12 Cancel State the output queue where the printer is attached the flash memory drive and the form type to use for the spooled file that will execute this function The spooled file will have the name ZEBRAFLASH and user data field INZ RELOAD with status RDY When the printer is done it will print samples of all installed soft fonts and a list of all resources in the flash memory including how much memory they take up and the amount of memory that are free ie WARNING When you press Enter on the screen above you will NOT be asked to confirm So User s Manual for InterForm400 317 318 Users Manual for InterForm4009 8 Work with images Images can be imported from the AS 400 folder system The following image standards are supported for black and white images TIFF format Rev 4 0 non compressed or with data compression Scheme 2 TIFF Huffman Compressed TIFF format CCITT T 6 fax group 4 MOD CA including black and white image tags If the MOD CA file includes more images only the first image will be used LZW compression Grey images These formats are available wi
326. he Refer to section Getting familiar with soft fonts and barcodes and page 301 Define auto download of fonts for an example of how to define the underlying menus Please note this when adding printers to a printer group You can specify either of these values instead of an output queue ALLPCL Download the soft fonts in a printer group if used to any printer or file if merging to OUTDOC with the command APF3812 APF3812 Use this if in doubt OUTDOC Download the soft fonts in a printer group if used to all files if merging to OUTDOC with the command APF3812 APF3812 User s Manual for InterForm400 287 Work with auto download soft fonts PGR300 Start with Type option press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 6 Update output queue 8 Update fonts Opt Printer group Description m PDF Output to PDF files HPIII HPIII printer group HPIISHIP HPII Shipping department HP4 HP4 group no Flash card pe HP4Flash HP4 Flash Management F3 exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel In order to select the soft font from an overlay it has to be described to the system in 1 Description of additional fonts page 279 If it is required to use True Type Fonts in PDF output the TTF file has to be installed by using option 7 Install TrueType font for PDF Following you can specify if a certain font number is used when creating PDF output then a specific PDF soft font member should be used You add a new font to be used in
327. he base line of the current print line PCL files can not be used on IBM 3812 and 3816 printers Used for control of paper trays The command must be stated in line number 1 of the print file On IBM3812 and IBM3816 1 top paper tray 2 bottom paper tray On other printers 1 top paper tray 2 manual feed 3 manual envelope feed 4 bottom paper tray 6 envelope feeder When duplexing this command will cause forced front page Executes an HP macro The macro must be down loaded to the printer prior to this command call In order to avoid mixing of the internal use of macros in the InterForm400 system it is recommended to define macro numbers larger than 09999 Changes the ink of any preceding text being printed Example of valid use of amp amp INK amp amp INK B W amp amp TXT amp amp BLA amp amp BLO amp amp BLO amp amp INK W B TIP To avoid any problems you shoudl allways reset foreground ink to black and the background ink to white immediately after having used any special ink in your command lines BLA Block attributes ht nd the attributes for any sign distance top edge preceding block commands See distance to paper top edge INPEL BLO These attributes will be used sign distance left edge for any BLO commands until distance to left paper edge another BLA is issued rotation font Maximum line width of lines in the block INPEL when being printed S
328. he horizontal bars are missing Q Did you use a HP4 or HP4D printer type A Your printer might not be fully supporting 600 dpi which is used for the patterns in this example Some printers emulate 600 dpi by printing 300 x 600 dpi You should then either change the pattern according to a pattern printout on your printer see page or User s Manual for InterForm400 105 Final print of MYDEMO merged with the sample spool entry The illustration is a screenshot of the InterForm400 PCL viewer function inter mate Herring Marine Research 1004 PH 13 09 99 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s P Gro o of de e Code 44A2971 1 81 20 01 3A E 4449032 3 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on 45 72 26 04 00 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on http www intermate com Intermate A S Kongevejen 194A DK 3460 Birker d Tel 45 72 26 04 00 Fax 45 72 26 04 04 106 Users Manual for InterForm400 Example of Advanced use of Sub overlays Random text lines
329. he overlays and printers InterForm400 requires no programming of any kind in order to operate with existing print jobs All logical definitions for searching and selecting print jobs are set up in the InterForm400 menus The manual describes functions that may require the purchase of additional modules Whenever additional module s are required it should be mentioned but that cannot be guaranteed For guidelines refer to page 19 Ask your local InterForm400 reseller if in doubt The terms AS 400 iSeries and i5 may be used in the manual Unless mentioned they refer to all 3 types of machines How the manual is organized This manual is built as a technical reference as well as a self study on creating overlays fast and easy The self study sections are constructed as follows Getting Started Work through this chapter if you are installing the system for the first time You will end up with an illustrative sample printed through the AutoFormsControl sub system Getting Familiar with Overlays This section will use the demo overlay as template and lead you through virtually all the design features in InterForm400 To gain full benefit of this section you should have worked through the section Getting Started Getting Familiar with Overlay Selectors The overlay selector is a vital element of InterForm4008 It enables specific pages in a spool entry to have unique overlays attached according to the contents of the spool
330. he resources in the export import libraries Charts can only be imported using the APF3812 IMPCHT command Charts can be imported several times from the APFIMPORT library The rebuild journal function can not be used for charts Prior to execution of the command it is required that the APFEXPORT library has been created See how on page 341 User s Manual for InterForm4006 401 The Import Chart Command The APF3812 IMPCHT command is used for importing charts from the APFIMPORT library Previously the chart have to be exported using the APF3812 EXPCHT command When importing it can be specified wether or not an existing chart can be overwritten Important notes are stated below the description of the APF3812 EXPCHT command at page 401 Prior to this command you have to import resources into the APFIMPORT library See how on page 343 The Restore Library from Folder Command The command APF3812 RSTLIBFLR command is intended to be used for support purposes to restore a complete library from a folder originally saved with the command APF3812 SAVLIB2FLR Restore Library from Folder RSTLIBFLR Type choices press Enter Libary XE he Bee a Ais Auk SAVLIB Name Pua FORE 20 gt te tel xA AM FROMFLR Era dokument x c oLoLL X Xx xLE FROMDOC Character value OD EdOIE ke Let hh depustauet SELL e ver ah ule OPTION ALL NEW OLD FREE Database member option MBROPT MATCH ALL NEW OLD Allow object differen
331. he spoll entry which do not specifically have an overlay call overlayname will be printed without overlay Defining a Virtual printer in Client Access In Windows Click Start Printer and Click the Add Printer icon The same printer should be used as input to InterForm400 Tag Network Printer and click Continue Locate your AS 400 under the Client Access network and chose a printer on the AS 400 Note If no printers are displayed if all printers are defined as remote writers or if you do not have a printer available on the AS 400 to use as input queue to Auto Forms Control you must create a dummy writer This automatically creates an output queue which you can use as input queue to Auto Forms Control CRTDEVPRT DEVD DUMMY DEVCLS VRT TYPE 3812 MODEL 1 FONT 11 ONLINE NO The printer installation wizard will now ask you to select a driver for the printer Select a PCL driver that corresponds to the PCL emulation supported by the laser printer connected to the AS 400 ie WARNING Note that the each page in the ASCII spool entry must not exceed 80kb If you receive l an error because of this you should try to remove elements especially graphics in order to stay within this limi 428 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm4006 429 Appendix L PDF and PCL Viewing The PCL Viewer SwiftView included with InterForm400 will view PCL spool files with data type ASCII containi
332. he spool file attribute SAVE of the moved spooled file 6 Hold Spooled File This function holds the original input spool entry for the AFC definition 7 Delete Spooled File This function deletes the original input spool entry for the AFC definition 8 Call Program Seqnbr Function L0 8 Program call Program Names xc x uuo 9 ox Wes TIE sa ae oe 0x ix ve I al ae a US6 profitens 2008 4 oe ae a es AFCOPER___ AFCOPER OWNER F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel This function gives you the possibility of letting Auto Forms Control perform operations that are not contained in this system It could for instance be to store spooled print ina spool archive Other useful features is to make a merge using the APF3812 CL command in order to create a PCL file in the folder system as seen on page 405 or even E mail the merged file as a PDF file using the MRGSPLFPDF command see page 349 Program name A program to be called at this point The program can be called with the following 7 parameters regarding the relevant spool entry Job name CHAR 10 User CHAR 10 Job number CHAR 6 File name CHAR 10 File number CHAR 4 Output queue CHAR 10 Library CHAR 10 An example of an exit program can be seen in the source member FUNKT 8 in source file APF3812 APISRC User profile The user profile under which the user exit program will run If e g a merge is done by use of the APF3812 APF3812 command the
333. hen option 41 to end the job if wanted If you want to release a lock of overlay in InterForm400 you can also do that in InterForm400 by selecting option 80 Administering InterForm 400 followed by 52 Work with Designer job overlay locks and ending the job locking the relevant overlay Work with Stream File Locks With this command APF3812 WRKSTMFLCK you can list which jobs that has a lock on a certain file in the IFS You state the path as the only parameter Here you can see any job that locks the object Work with Stream File Locks WRKSTMFL Position COA s wx ow Job name Type options press Enter 5 Work with job Opt Job name User Job number OZLSFILE QUSER 074244 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel From this screen you can select to work with the job that has the lock e g in order to end it Be sure that you are not causing a problem by ending the job it might be doing something important User s Manual for InterForm400 421 The TIF file from folder to member Command The APF3812 TIFTOMBR command can be used for inserting one or several TIF files from a folder as members in a physical file The TIF files can be specified as generic or ALL TIF file from folder to member TIFTOMBR Type choices press Enter Pon Boktder kw ke wel x6 FROMFLR Prom PC file name oe wes DOCNAM Char generic From PC file extension EXTENSION Char generic To physical TElB LL Xo xp OUTFI
334. here affects these other options 1 By key It will open up option 2 Key definitions but with the user exit program disabled Also option 7 E mail addresses and Fax numbers will be enabled 2 By user exit program Will open up option 2 Key definitions with the user exit program enabled Option 7 E mail addresses and Fax numbers will be disabled 3 Find in spooled file Options 2 Key definition and 7 E mail addresses and Fax numbers will both be disabled The elements for the e mail is found in option 6 Definition recipient ID 196 Users Manual for InterForm400 2 Key definitions Change E mail Fax key definition MAI310D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Length key field 1 cmd 1 530 Field type key field 1 4 1 Numeric 2 Alfanum 3 Alfanum lowercase Allow blank key field 1 N Y N Key field 1 description Customer number Length key field 2 1 30 Field type key field 2 m 1 Numeric 2 Alfanum 3 Alfanum lowercase Allow blank key field 2 RA Y N Key field 2 description Length key field 3 1 30 Field type key field 3 E 1 Numeric 2 Alfanum 3 Alfanum lowercase Allow blank key field 3 x E Y N Key field 3 description ail exit program s o ew NONE name lGBratw kr arer Ao Us CU F3 Exit F12 Cancel Up to 3 keys can be defined They are identifying the customers by e g
335. his definition Output Queue Library If these options are filled in the same spool entry will be processed by the AFC definitions defined for the output queue stated here This is done immediately after the processing of this set of AFC definitions as if the other queues AFC definitions were placed in direct extension to these queues definitions Note that if the AFC definition 9 Exit is executed in the original queue the spool file will not be processed by the AFC definitions for the queue stated here This option is especially relevant when several printers should have the same AFC definition A Template AFC definition can be made which then can be referred to from other AFC defintions Additional parameters Job name Job description Library list option Separator Drawer The name of the job handling this output queue The job will run in the subsystem AUTO FORM OUTQ means that the job will be named the same as the output queue The job description to use for this job DEFAULT refers to job description APF3812 AUTO FORM Specifies the initial library list of the AFC job Possible values are CURRENT JOBD SYSVAL and NONE Default drawer to select for separator pages A separator page can be printed as a front page of each merged spool file The separator page has to be requested for each merge The separator page contains the following information Output from InterForm400 merge Overlay name
336. his function is used for departmental printing with need for immediate stapling folding and or insertion into envelopes and other related functions Currently the following finishing functions are supported 1 2 6 7 Folding and insertion into envelopes using the Prinserter Winserter in the US Stapling on Canon HP Kyocera Lexmark IBM Oc Ricoh and Xerox models Individual insertion systems attached to a PCL printer Folding and insertion into envelopes using the PFE MailPrinter E mail and fax distribution Fax distribution requires the purchase of a fax module for InterForm400 PDF file creation Reformatting of spooled files Note that the Interface type of InterForm400 must be ASCII850 or ASCIIR8 and the printer type must be a HP4 HPA4D HP4 PJL type device when using the finishing functions Defining Prinserter Pre process Definition Fixed number of pages This function is typically used for mailings which is based on the same number of pages for all recipients Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions on the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 01 for making the definition valid for the Prinserter Update Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name TESTDEF Description test of prinserter Type of Finishing 01 Prinserter F3 Exit F12 Cancel If Copy Management is used in the overlay intended to be u
337. ich are used on specific pages only Code page If the system is used by multiple countries the national characters in the overlays will get printed differently in each country This option will allow the default code page of the central computer to be overruled Form type The Form type of the resulting printout Default STD Copies 1 99 Drawer Overwrite the global drawer settings of the overlay 116 Users Manual for InterForm400 3 Merge Spool Entry with Overlay With option 3 on the main menu you are able to create a printout in which a spool entry is merged with an overlay and placed in the default output queue for your session Overlay name or Overlay Selector Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Spool file no Output queue Library F3 Exit Merge Spooled File with Overlay APF730D Primary Secondary set Code page Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Form type A4 Copies 1 1 255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Labels Continuous 1 1 Seperate labels 2 Continuous Media type 1 l Termo transfer 2 Termo media Print mode 1 l Tear off 2 Rewind 3 Peel off 4 Cutter Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown l Primary 2 Secondary Number ONLY LAST F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Overlay Name Primary Secondary Set Overlay Selector Spooled File Name of an overlay in the file set you have open F
338. ich means we will have to fill in Copy Management By entering values for Primary set and not for Secondary set we define that our copy management definitions apply to the Primary set only see Copy management page 53 User s Manual for InterForm400 99 We now proceed by entering type 5 for Text Seqnbr Type Inch pel 3 1 5 Text constant From top edge 2 120 From left 1 120 Rotation 000 Font 7001 F4 List Text COPY F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel We place the text approximately in the middle of the address field If you want to tilt the copy watermark you can define a rotation of 030 120 210 or 300 degrees For the font out line we can prompt the font list with F4 The largest font currently assigned to the system is font ID 2103 with point size 24 see font list on page 383 We can now choose to use this font or we can assign a new font ID a larger font If you feel comfortable enough with InterForm400 by now you should try to assign the large font Go to 80 Administration Menu either in this session by exiting with F3 or by using another session Go to section 7 Work with fonts and select 1 Description of additional fonts Now perform the steps described in the Example of defining a resident Printer Font on page 281 Afterwards we re enter sequence line 4 in our overlay MYDEMO If you have chosen for now to use the existing 24 point font you should enter font ID 2103 If you used the example on page 281
339. ific file sets Several users may be connected with the same file set User profile F3 Exit F4 List InterForm users F12 Cancel Enter the user profile of the user in question and you will get this screen 274 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Connect users with overlay and report file sets A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets Several users may be connected with the same file set User profile PETER Peter Hansen This user is connected with the following file sets Specify name of file set to be connected with disconnected from user F3 Exit F4 List InterForm 400 file sets F12 Cancel If the user had already been connected with one or more file sets these would have appeared in the sub file at the centre of the screen However in this case we are looking at a new user and the sub file is blank Once you enter the name of an existing file set you will get the following screen Connect users with overlay and report file sets A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets Several users may be connected with the same file set User profile PETER Peter Hansen This user is connected with the following file sets Specify name of file set to be connected with disconnected from user TEST Peter Hansen s personal test file set Connect file set with user Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel The text which now appears to the right of the file set name is the one that
340. ile From top edge From left File name The overlay element that defines the PCL file to be inserted is quite simple It is however possible to fine adjust the placement of the PCL form compared to the positions defined in the original PCL file This frees you from starting up the PC applications if only the overall placement needs to be changed From top edge Inches pels vertical position of the PCL file is made absolute to the upper edge of the paper Vertical positioning of elements in the PCL file is added to this value Adding a minus after the value will cause an movement upwards e g 1 120 for 172 negative movement From left edge Inches pels horizontal position of the PCL file is made absolute to the left edge of the paper Horizontal positioning of elements in the PCL file is added to this value Adding a minus after the value will cause a movement to the left e g 1 120 for 172 movement to the left Color printing When working in a file set defined for color printing the PCL file settings will have an additional definition for color PCL files The Black White PCL file definition is available to facilitate printing of the same overlay both on black and white and color laser printers 70 Users Manual for InterForm4009 ie WARNING i The system does not check the contents of the PCL file to be PCL4 PCL5 or PCL5e code Printing code made for a PCL5e on a PCL5 printer might cause problems as w
341. ill be ignored Tabulators Remap Window If then statements Copy management Extended page definition InterForm400 will also ignore all global settings of the overlay used for pre formatting variable spool data except for the ROTATION When defining INPUT for ROTATION InterForm400 will detect the PCL orientation command in the spool file and print the overlay with the same orientation Merging of overlays and data can be done by either the APF3812 CL command interactively with 3 Merge spool entry with overlay or by Auto Forms Control The overlay selected for merge in InterForm400 will be applied to all pages in the PCL ASCII spool entry Should you require another overlay to be applied to specific pages in the PCL spool entry you can insert the text string overlayname in the document InterForm400 will pick this overlay instead of the one defined in the merge definition but User s Manual for InterForm400 427 will pick it from the same file set Note that the string overlayname must be written in the document with a font that is resident in the printer e g Courier In order to avoid the overlay to be added to certain pages in the overlay you must create an empty overlay eg with the name blank and insert the text blank on all pages which should be printed without overlay Alternatively you can define the merge on the AS 400 to use the overlay blank which means all pages in t
342. ill manually tear of the labels 2 Rewind can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll This requires special hardware installed 3z Peel off will print only one label at a time waiting for the current label to be peeled off This also requires additional hardware 4 Cut requires hardware cutter normally cuts the media for each print job unless you use 2 Continuous then 4 Cut will cut out each label Output Queue The name of the output queue where the spool entry to be merged is placed Library The library of the above output queue If left blank the library list will be used After a merge with an overlay the spool attributes are saved in this screen for future test j prints until the InterForm400 menus are left As long as these information are kept you will be able to view the contents of the spool entry directly by pressing F14 F18 or F19 8 Select File set A file set consists of related files defining overlays and report compositions If the system administrator has granted you rights to access more than one file set your main menu will include the option 8 Select file set When you choose option 8 on the main menu you get the following screen Select File set Select one of the following file sets then press Enter 1 Select Opt File ID Description TEST Testing InterForm 400 possibilities SAMPLE Sample overlay F3 Exit You select the file set you wish to use by typing 1 in
343. ill visible On purpose we have not used B Blank after in the Remap Window commands as we have not been sure that we would have needed the text for other purposes Instead we have waited to this moment where we will clean all remaining text by a single command We define our last sequence line 31 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text MYDEMO Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0025 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C 0026 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 100 left 3 000 C 0027 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 100 left 4 000 C 0028 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 100 left 5 000 C 0029 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 54 070 top 5 100 left 6 000 C 0030 If lin 030 042 pos 047 047 2 Then LIGHT Seqnbr Type 31 0 8 Tabulator Input Line 1 S80 Position 1 _70 Print From left edge 14 Adjustment L U L C RN B Font 11 F4 List Condition Position aes ee Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Here we define one large tabulator which operates on the area from line 1 to 70 and position 1 to 80 Anything which not already have been fomatted by Tabulators or Remap Window commands will now be moved 14 inches to the right Moving text beyond the paper edge will cause InterForm400 to discard the text We press Enter to save our last sequence line 104 Users Manual for InterForm400 Step 18
344. in the APF3812 folder Use NAMEDEF to refer to the path and file name stated in the PDF file naming definition stated in NAMEDEF Remember that files that are digitally signed cannot be created in QDLS If you insert a PDF file naming definition and use TOSTMF NAMEDEF then the information in the PDF file naming definition will be used for the bookmark definition BMKDEF Signature certificate CERTIFIC and encryption ENCRYPT OWNERPWD USERPWD and LIMITS unless these parameters have the value NONE or have a specific value other than blank States if the PDF file created is allowed to replace an existing PDF file NAMEDEF refers to the REPLACE value of the PDF file naming definition stated in the NAMEDEF parameter If you are creating an E mail the TOATTACH parameter states what to call the attached file Specify the e mail address and name of the user who is the sender of the e mail CURRENT will retrieve the information from directory entry of the user running the current job States if you want to encrypt the PDF file OWNERPWD States the owner password of the PDF file Requires that the ENCRYPT USERPWD LIMITS PRITGTDEV 352 Users Manual for InterForm4009 parameter is YES When you open the file with this password all is allowed This is the same as Master password in the PDF file naming and E mail finishing definitions The user password can be used to open an encrypted PDF file with the limitations specifi
345. in the Remap Window and instead insert an 8 Tabulator to tabulate the text out of the page after the If Then has been executed If you have several zIf Then lines remapping the same line s then only the last condition met will have the lines remapped The other conditional overlays are executed but no lines are transferred i4 WARNING A deviation from the rules above are seen if you transfer 2 or more lines to a sub overlay by use of If Then The second and following lines are transferred first even i4 NOTE Ink lines in the main overlay will have no effect in conditioned sub overlays called by i hen id NOTE i If you use absolute positioning for the sub overlay called by If Then you will notice this Tabulators in the sub overlay are unaffected by the positioning of the sub overlay Remap Windows in the sub overlay add the vertical position specified in the If Then command whereas the horizontal position is i d Regarding design of Zebra overlays If you want to insert text frames or images in i reverse i e white on black background you can do it by first adding a frame with black filling pattern and then place the text or image on top of the black frame without i specifying white in an Ink command In this manner you reverse the part of the text or 74 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 75 Getting Familiar With Overlays The following sections
346. inal with a printer port is in reality working as a Twinax protocol converter The printer session has a dedicated device address which corresponds to a printer device description on the AS 400 You should therefore follow the instructions in section Attaching through a Twinax protocol converter The requirement to the printer session of a 5250 terminal is that it understands ASCII transparency This is supported by terminals such as IBM 3197 IBM 3477 and IBM 3487 Other brands like Memorex Telex will in most cases also work Consult the documentation of the terminal or your agent for further information 368 Users Manual for InterForm4009 In most cases the terminal will emulate either a 5219 or 3812 SCS printer Some may only provide a 4214 emulation which will require Host print transform to be enabled on the system in order for ASCII transparency to be transmitted In case the printer session of your terminal configures as eg a 4214 you should perform the following steps to enable Host Print Transform for the device Note that Host Print Transform can be enabled for any SCS printer device description including 5219 and 3812 InterForm400 makes the protocol transformation itself which means IBM Host Print Transform will only be interpreting the ASCII transparency command thereby preventing Host Print Transform to consume processor power Enabling Host Print Transform on an existing Printer Device Description This procedure will wor
347. ine PDF file name ATTACH demo pdf From e mail adr FROMADR kse intermate com Name FROMNAME Name of e mail sender The spooled file should trigger a function P Send spooled file as PDF email in Auto Forms Control and the merged spooled file will then be sent as an attached PDF file Refer to page 152 for more information 3 Splitting the spooled file into parts for e g each customer inserting e g information from the spooled file into the subject or contents of the E mail or even into the name of the attached PDF file This is done by use of an E mail finishing definition Refer to page 195 for more information Setup of SMTP The created E mails can be sent out from the AS 400 either directly from the AS 400 or through a mail server These are the commands that you User s Manual for InterForm400 459 should use 1 CFGTCP Option 10 Work with TCP IP host table entries Insert IP address and Hostname of the mail server if used 2 CHGTCPDMN Insert the IP adresses of Domain Name Servers at INTNETADR 3 Add possible unknown routes to the mail server CFGTCP Option 2 Work with TCP IP routes 4 CHGSMTPA press F4 to prompt Insert YES to AUTOSTART SMTP server after IPL Insert HOSTNAME of mail server at MAILROUTER if used If you want to mail directly from the AS 400 you should specify NONE for the MAILROUTER Insert YES as FIREWALL if the AS 400 is not able to send directly
348. ine column positions on the invoices than on the credit notes In this case you should create two Sort Definition Details where one compare with the text INVOICE and the other with CREDIT NOTE and each has its own specification for the customer ID sort field If some of the invoices consisted of several pages of which only the first page indicate INVOICE the successive pages will automatically follow the first page of the invoice That means pages which are not recognized by any Page Selection criteria will in the final sort automatically succeed the last recognized page Print Line The print line in the spool entry to search Position The column interval to search Oper The boolean operator relating to the compare value The operators used are standard operators known from e g Query 400 EQ Equal to compare value NE Not equal to compare value LT Less than compare value LE Less than or equal to compare value GT Greater than compare value GE Greater than or equal to compare value Compare value The character string or numeric value which the operator should compare with The comparison is in reality done on hexadecimal values This means that e g the figure 1 which has EBCDIC value F1h is greater than the character Z which has EBCDIC value E9h Find sort fields in the following positions The Sort fields indicate the detail level of the sort process Pages will be sorted in the same order as the sort fields Sort field no 1 is the
349. ing Started section A PCL5 capable printer attached and configured Not made changes to the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 The following two examples will cover the following Example 1 We will edit the existing AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 to move spool files with type STD to the output queue AFC_OUT1 without adding an overlay and to move spool files with formtype DEMO the sample spool entry to the queue AFC INPUTS after doing a merge Example 2 We will define a new AFC definition AFC INPUT2 and use the same queue as input and output for Auto Forms Control We will make a merge overlay definition for processing printjobs with formtype DEMO the sample spool entry These printjobs are automatically transferred from AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 by the definitions made in example 1 Example 1 Using Separate queues for Input and Output Step 1 Checking the Writer First we will assign our writer to the correct queue Printer Writer Twinax or TCP IP TN5250E or Raw Socket If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue the following command will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue AFC OUT If the writer is not started just replace CHGWTR with STRPRTWTR CHGWTR WTR PRTXXX OUTQ APF3812 AFC_OUT1 Remote Writer TCP IP LPD You can not change a remote writer to use another queue as it is the queue itself which contains the definition of the writer IP address You should instead follow th
350. ing the recipient ID You should also specify the recipient ID s keys in the bottom This is used as a way to force a level break Normally it is advisable to specify all of the keys and only the keys here But you can use this to split up one e mail into several A problem could be that one E mail address one set of keys is sent to for several companies but in order to ease distribution you want to create one E mail per company Specify for recipient ID a place on the page that identifies the different companies as well as the keys and that is done automatic Press Enter Update Finish Recipient ID PRS330D Definition name TEST3 Sequence number a Description Demo Spool Get keys and vars Enter where to find key s and variables in the print Field Description Length Printline Startposition Key 1 Customer Number 4 13 eel cs Key 2 0 Key 3 0 XVI Company Name 25 c 1 E A Contact Name 25 _11_ em ec ae 73 Customer number 4 l3 EI V4 Subject 50 _15_ EE F3 Exit F12 Cancel On this screen you define where the keys and variables should be found for the page selection stated on the last screen If you in option 1 How to find E mail address Fax 200 Users Manual for InterForm4009 number defined that you want to find the e mail address in the spooled file this screen will also include fields that 7T E mail addresses and fax numbers E mail addresses and fax numbers are lists of addresses that InterForm400
351. initiated by choosing option 1 Run OSC from the OSC menu The merged SCS spool file can be distributed to one or more output queues using a workload factor These output queues should be monitored by Auto Forms Control and then merged For this merge an overlay selector is recommended The incoming spool files can after the merge be either deleted or moved to another output queue In the following example the output queue controlled by OSC has 3 spool files In output queue 01 Spool file 1 has 5 pages first page is for customer 1 next for customer 2 etc the second spool file spool file 2 has 6 pages and spool file 3 has 4 pages We have defined that the resulting print job 1 spool file should be shared by 2 printers with a workload factor of 4096 for output queue 02 and 6096 for output queue 03 As we have 15 spool pages in total to process the resulting two spool files 4 and 5 will be as per below Contents of a Output Queue being monitored by OSC Output Queue 01 250 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Spool file 1 Customer 1 Customer 2 Customer 3 Customer 4 Customer 5 Output Queue 02 Workload 6096 Spool file 4 Customer 1 Customer 2 Customer 2 Customer 2 Customer 3 Customer 4 Customer 4 Customer 5 Customer 5 Spool file 2 Customer 2 Customer 4 Customer 5 Customer 7 Customer 8 Customer 9 Contents in the OSC defined Resulting Output Queues Workload 40926 Spool file 5 Customer 7 Custo
352. inter types If your printer supports PJL you should use a PJL printer type in InterForm400 Using i this kind of printer type will enable you to use page range print only a part of on the merged PCL spooled file if you change the spooled file from the APF3812 APFWRKOUTQ command IBM4019 The printer should be set to native mode PPDS The system will when printing automatically change mode to PCL4 HPII and set the mode back to PPDS when finished The general limitations for this printer are the same as described for HPII If the printer is default set to PCL4 you should use the HPII definition IBM4029 This type is intended for 4029 printers with PCL5 HPIII option The printer should be set to native mode PPDS The system will when printing automatically change mode to PCL5 and set the mode back to PPDS when finished If the 4029 has not been upgraded to PCL5 you should select the IBM4019 type If the printer is default set to PCL5 you should use the HPIII definition IBM4039 PCL5e compatible However the first models could have some funny PCL interpretations We hope we have compensated for them all and recommend using the HP4 and HP4D drivers IBM4216 Model 010 in its primary data stream Same functionality and limitations as for IBM4019 and HPII HPII For HPII and PCL4 compatible printers These and other PCL4 compatible printers have no possibilities of printing diagonal lines which means that lines defined as
353. ion deactivation To activate MEL you create a data area of any type named APFEXPORT in library APF3812 To deactivate MEL simply delete the data area APF3812 APFEXPORT Usage When MEL is activated the F10 Select export library command key will be enabled and option 6 Delete export library APFEXPORT will be removed from the InterForm 400 export menu At the InterForm400 export menu press F10 and overwrite APFEXPORT with another name in the Export library field to select another library to be used for export All options at the InterForm400 export menu will now work on objects in this library Once you use option 1 Create export library with empty files all necessary InterForm400 work files and a data area named EXPORTLIB will be created in the specified library Note If the library does not exist it will be created d NOTE IMPORTANT Libraries created using option 1 Create export library with empty files iat the InterForm400 export menu CAN NOT be used after a release upgrade of InterForm 400 The Import InterForm Ressources IMPAPFRSC command The purpose of the IMPAPFRSC is to import InterForm 400 resources without any or with very limited user intervention The APF3812 IMPAPFRSC command Import InterForm resources IMPAPFRSC Type choices press Enter Save ELLS L5 LS ww cA vA AT UAR SAVF Name DO h n oer Ja tase tee ET LODS LIBL Name LIBL CURLIB User s Manual for InterForm400 477
354. ion name DEMO MAN Demo for manual Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit PDF output path file Invoices KEY1 Inv VB pdf gt Composition USEREXIT Create directory N Y Yes N No Replace file method G Y Always N Never G Gen when dupl Available variables Var Type Description Len Info KEY1 Keydef Customer Numbers 4 Numeric Allow blanks N VA SpoolVar Customer name 40 Inputlen 40 Position VB SpoolVar Invoice number 10 Inputlen 10 Position EVC AutoNum Global counter 6 SYS Len 6 Str 0 Incr 0 FIXED Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Expand F12 Cancel F14 Test In the top of the screen you state either the composition of the PDF file names to be created or USEREXIT to let a user exit program determine the names of the PDF files As a part of the path you can use the keys and variables that you have already defined They are all listed in the bottom of the screen If you specify USEREXIT for the PDF file name s you should call a program simular to the source in file APF3812 APISRC and member PNMEXIT The program will be called with amp EntryStep NAME You can press F4 to get the list of the defined variables to select from when typing the path file name F9 to get access to the full length available for the PDF file name composition or F14 to test the composition with a specific spooled file and see what PDF file names it will create
355. ions Split definitions Sort definitions 9 Finishing definitions 10 AFC definitions ll Form type table 12 Palette colors 21 ZEBRA fonts 22 ZEBRA soft fonts 23 ZEBRA images 1 Overlay definitions 2 Font definitions 3 Soft fonts 4 Images 5 PCL files 6 Ta 8 If you select option 2 you can copy selected InterForm400 resources to export like shown above User s Manual for InterForm400 341 Note that when entering a specific overlay only the definitions of the overlay are copied Any images PCL files fonts etc which the overlay definitions is referring to has to be copied separately e g by use of option 3 i WARNING 6 If you use option 3 Copy the resources used in already copied overlays the necessary Work with resources in export library When all selections have been made you can verify that all relevant resources have been copied to the export library by using option 3 Work with resources in export library in the export menu Work with distribution This option is used to create a distribution file Work with Distributions EXP600D Type options press Enter 1 Send savefile 4 Delete savefile and PC file 5 Display savefile 9 Save to tape 11 Create PC file in folder APF3812 Opt Distribution Description Status EXPORT 001 Export of overlay IF400DEMO BOTH End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel In this screen you will have an overview of existing dist
356. irements of the automotive industry Datamatrix barcodes Datamatrix barcodes can be used for ZPL Zebra output from InterForm400 For more information refer to page 310 MICR E 13B This font is normally used for cheque printing Just insert text or remap windows functions in the overlay using font number 3998 Assigning Font ID s to Barcode Softfonts When a barcode softfont has been generated it must be assigned as font ID which can be used to access the barcode from Remap Window Tabulator and Text constant commands in the overlay design window Besides this they can be used in command lines of the type amp amp TXT You can define the soft font font ID and autodownload in one step by selecting option 5 Create barcode soft font Create CODE 39 soft font FNT403D Font number v WE Ws 4646 4600 4699 Font height dots 300 30 1200 With thin line dots 4 3 13 Width broad line dots 10 6 39 Printer ype xx ia ek 2 1 PCL4 2 PCL5 Orientation k x Sree A x 000 000 090 FONT file member name GEN GEN Name Auto download Y Y Yes N No F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel This will create the soft font member CODE39xxx where xxx is a number in the sequence AAA AAB AAC ZZZ when using GEN for the FONT member name If activated the specification of autodownload is added to the first printer group and the output queue ALLPCL is added to this printer group I
357. is overlay should be manipulated The attributes number of lines per inch font etc of the spool entry will be overwritten by these settings Overlay text Line spacing Rotation Extra Left Margin Max Print pos Extra blank lines Font For your own information Is dissolved in n 240 inch For example 6 lines per inch corresponds to 40 240 inch You may have been expecting to have to specify line spacing in number of lines per inch We have chosen this method to give you a higher degree of freedom of choice This setting can be overwritten by Extended Formatting By stating INPUT the value is set according to the attribute of the spool entry Informs the system how the contents of the input spool entry should be rotated on the paper You may specify 000 090 180 or 270 degrees counter clockwise The values 180 and 270 can only be used in connection with IBM3812 16 In connection with other printer types these values will be perceived as 000 By stating INPUT the value is set according to the attribute of the spool entry The attributes COR and AUTO is also inspected Number of character the print should be offset from the left margin Extra positions defined here will be included in Extended Formatting Maximum Print Position should normally be set to 240 However in case the spool entry intended for merging with the overlay contains unwanted characters to the right the number of print positions to be trunca
358. is to flip through the places where this condition is true on the current page The conditional tab will show you the lines transferred to the conditioned overlay This function is very handy when remapping the spooled file text in the conditioned overlay Decide the sort key for the font listing Select Setup followed by Font sort order to decide in what order you want to have the available fonts sorted when listed You can chose to either list the fonts by the font number default or by the font description name Designing the overlay Open up the General folder to view the general settings for the overlay that you are designing 4 General Laser Document Duplex disabled Copy Management disabled 3 4 Page Definitions Default page definition Elements 3 General Zebra Document zebra Copy Management disabled 9 Page Definitions Default page definition Ez Elements The options within does the following In dept information of these options can be found on page 37 Document Displays the file set and overlay name You can change the description of the overlay size and orientation of the paper multi up Pages per side and margins number of lines and or characters to move the spooled file down or right Here you also specify the size of the label for ZPL output User s Manual for InterForm4006 467 Duplex Activate duplex if needed Not available for ZPL output Zebra Sets
359. ise so we fill in N in this field When we press Enter we re enter the design window Step 15 Defining the COPY Symbol as Watermark The intention of the copy sign is to place this information as a watermark in the address field We can therefore place the definition between the two Ink changes we made for the logo watermark and thereby exploit the same raster pattern definition We create a new sequence line 3 1 between the two Ink changes Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 I Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 F Ink Foreground Background UNALTERED 0003 T Image DEMOIMAGE Top 09 100 Left 02 040 0004 7 Ink Foreground BLACK Background UNALTERED 0005 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0006 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0007 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0008 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C Seqnbr Type Copy management 3 1 T 1 Frame 2 Horizontal From To 3 Vertical 4 Line Primary 2 2 5 Text 6 Page number Secondary xs 7 Ink 8 Tabulator 9 Remap window I Image If then F PCL file G HP GL 2 file S Sub overlay Comment F3 Exit F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM Before we enter a type we remember that this forms element should only be activated on the copy wh
360. ith F4 and fill in the rest Vary on the device with the following command VRYCFG CFGOBJ PRTXXX CFGTYPE DEV STATUS ON Start the printer writer with the following command STRPRTWTR DEV PRTXXX 8 Note that if Auto Configuration is enabled on the AS 400 the protocol converter might change the device description back to 5219 the next time it is powered ON Disable auto configuration to prevent this problem CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL QAUTOCFG VALUE 0 Changing Device Description from 5219 to 3812 In order to change a device description it is necessary to delete the device description for the Twinax attached printer emulating 5219 and create a new description for a 3812 model 1 In the following we assume the name of the device to be PRTXXX 1 First you must determine the controller number the port number and the device address of the existing 5219 device The following CL command will display the existing device description DSPDEVD PRTXXX Display Device Description INTEROL 16 01 01 09 27 57 Device description PRTXXX ODEdOIE jets A dv 6 eden fee ert as der Jer uer oer s BASIC Category of device PRT Device DISSE QU ie t yo yw LCL BD vice VENDS vr tertetnrlet veo Itu 5219 Device model t1 D2 Advanced function printing NO Port number u son www owl 2 Switch setting 3 Online mc TEL ote ee g i ae ee ee ee A YES Attached controller
361. ith Overlay APF730D Overlay name or Overlay Selector MYSELECT Primary Secondary set 1 Primary 2 Secondary Spooled file Job name DSP010700_ User PETER Job number 073534 File name QPRINT Spool file no 0005_ no ONLY LAST Code page Number INPUT Merge overprint lines NO_ NO YES Form type STD Copies zl 1 255 Drawer Papertype PRINTER PRINTER INPUT OVERLAY 1 256 Name Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue Library F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel We use the same procedure as in Getting Familiar With Overlays but instead of stating an overlay we enter our selector MYSELECT We notice that page 1 2 and 4 uses overlay IFAO00DEMO see page 32 and page 3 uses overlay MYDEMO see page 106 The selector can also be used in an Auto Forms Control definition You can try the selector in the section Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control later User s Manual for InterForm400 131 General Description of Auto Forms Control Sub system Auto Forms Control AFC is a unique facility of the InterForm400 system which enables you to define automatic control of merging spool entries with overlays without the need of any programming Auto Forms Control is monitoring data queues of defined output queues looking for spool files to become ready When a spool file becomes ready a dataqueue entry will be created which wakes up the AFC job associated with the spe
362. ith the text MateSert or InterMat The spool entry would then be sorted with all the InterMate 400 letters first followed by the MaterSerter letters InterMate 400 letters will appear before MateSert 400 letters in the resulting printout as the sort is done alphabetically on the contents of the sort fields Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position Ascending Descending 1 L5 _21 _28 A 2 ad Example 2 Sort by Type MateSert 400 letters first It is not necessary to control the entire text MateSert or InterMat As the search is done alphabetically the search could be made on column position 22 only For InterForm letters position 22 contain the character n second character of the word InterMat and for MateSert 400 letters position 22 contain the character a This means the sorted spool entry would have MateSert 400 letters before InterMate 400 letters Note that a separator page would then also only indicate n for InterMate 400 letters and a for MateSert 400 letters 234 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position Ascending Descending T 2 15 E LN A 2 Example 3 Sort by Type and Customer ID To increase the detail level of the search we could have the groups of MateSert 400 and InterMate 400 letters sorted according to Customer ID This would also be necessary if some of the lett
363. itions Sort Definitions User output queue O01 0 P r n 8 Work with E mail senders 10 Start AUTO FORM subsystem 11 End AUTO FORM subsystem 12 Work with active subsystem AUTO FORM Option F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel Beside the above definitions the function Overlay Selector can be used within the AFC definitions The overlay selector is used when the spool data should be the trigger for the 132 Users Manual for InterForm400 merge in AFC This function is found as option 4 in the main menu 10 Start AUTO FORM subsystem Auto Forms Control is running as an ordinary AS 400 subsystem and therefore has to be started as such It is a good idea to let the subsystem start automatically at IPL This is done by inserting the following commands in your startup program STRSBS SBSD APF3812 AUTO FORM MONMSG CPF0000 Of course you can always start the sub system manually by the command STRSBS APF3812 AUTO FORM 11 End AUTO FORM subsystem Before applying a new license code or making upgrades to the AUTO FORM sub system this should be ended This can be done in the menu or by the command check first if jobs are currently being processed ENDSBS SBS AUTO FORM OPTI ON MMED 12 Work with Active Subsystem AUTO FORM This menu item is a shortcut to the command WRKACTJOB SBS AUTO FORM User s Manual for InterForm400 133 Overview of AFC Main Definitions The d
364. ividual overlays Y Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel The specified type of forms will be used throughout the system unless you state Y to allow individual paper size definitions for different overlays Note that the Paper size selection on the Design overlay menu see screen with Global overlay settings on page 37 will only appear if Y has been stated in this screen If N is inserted all overlays throughout the system will use the default paper size stated here Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 3 1 Number to be added to the macro numbers the system works with 0 The reason to add a number can be that printers are equipped with flash simm cards that does not correspond to the HP standard saying that a macro in the printers internal memory should be selected even if it has the same number as a macro in the flash simm F3 Exit F12 Cancel The next screen is a possibility of defining an offset to the macros generated by InterForm400 InterForm400 will always load the overlay as a macro prior to the spool data for performance reasons The macro ID can in some rare cases conflict with resident macros installed in the printer This default value of zero should normally not be touched User s Manual for InterForm400 269 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 4 1 Do you want to use DDM to InterForm files on other AS 400 Use DDM lw XoW X ws Y N F3 Exit F12 Cancel This screen will allow InterForm400
365. k So here you should point to a place where a document reference number is found e g invoice number Next you should state a place where the page number within each new document is to be placed Finally you can choose where to print the line id of each detail line in the reformattet output The line id is identification of each line that can be useful for making conditions in the overlay that you merge with later on 222 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User exit program From the reformat finishing definition you can call a user exit program in order e g to extract certain information from the spooled file transfer that to the program where you e g calculate other values which then are placed back into the new spooled file When you select this option you will see a screen like this if you press Enter a couple of times Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file User exit program AL NONE Libary an get eiea ELE EE Name LIBL Exit fields from 1st head in level to user exit program Field 1 linenbr __ position length Field 2 linenbr __ position length Field 3 linenbr __ position length Is user exit program to be called when processing lst head Am leveli amp 4 4 lw NO YES Placing of return fields in output head Field 1 linenbr __ position Field 2 linenbr __ position Field 3 linenbr __ position F3
366. k for any existing SCS printer device description 1 In order to make changes to the device description you must end the printer writer PRTXXX The following command will end the writer immediately ENDWTR WTR PRTXXX OPTI ON I MMED 2 Now you must vary off the device by the following command VRYCFG CFGOBJ PRTXXX CFGTYPE DEV STATUS OFF 3 The following CL command will enable host print transform CHGDEVPRT DEVD PRTXXX TRANSFORM YES MFRTYPMDL HP4 Note that the choice of manufacturer model MFRTYPMDL is indifferent for InterForm400 as it controls the protocol conversion itself Only printing not controlled by InterForm400 will be formatted by Host Print Transform For this type of printing the choice of manufacturer model should be HP4 4 You can now vary on the device VRYCFG CFGOBJ PRTXXX CFGTYPE DEV STATUS ON 5 Start the printer writer again by the following command STRPRTWTR DEV PRTXXX Attaching through a PC Printer Port If your PC emulates a 5250 Twinax terminal through a Twinax adapter card you should consult your documentation for setting up a Printer session Refer to the section Attaching through a 5250 Terminal for configuring the printer session to the AS 400 Client Access 400 for Windows 95 NT The following steps will take you through how to configure a printer emulation on a PC with Client Access for Windows 95 NT 1 First ensure the PC printer most likely on LPT1 is configured and recognized by
367. k with 2 Work with Option _ F3 Exit with PCL files PCLOO1D the following options B W PCL files color PCL files F6 Display messages F12 Cancel The menus for black white and color files appear identical but InterForm400 needs to operate with the two file types separately Selecting e g 1 Work with B W PCL Files will bring up the following screen Work Position to Type options 2 Change CEBIT Opt PCL file with PCL files PCL100D PCL file press Enter 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Rename 8 Display information Description Size Cebit 2003 logo 24 576 End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Load PCL file F12 Cancel Note that using 5 view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed 326 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Import PCL file Press F6 to load a PCL file into InterForm4009 Load PCL file Description PCL110D Load from F3 Exit F12 Cancel l PC file in folder APF3812 2 Output queue Enter the member name into which you want to add the PCL file and which is referred to in an overlay definition Enter whether you want to read the PCL file from a spool file or from the folder system In both cases a HP PCL driver have been used to format the overlay created in a PC application If reading from the folder APF3812 the PCL driver should be configured to print to a file Either directly into the folder APF3812 or to the local hard drive and copied to the folder If r
368. kckckckckckckckck ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ckck ok Program Library Description TEST AUT KSE Sample source for a AFC function 8 program Bottom F3 Exit F10 Change owner to QSECOFR F12 Cancel You must confirm the change of object owner for all the programs with F10 before the installation proceeds You are then prompted to choose your preferred language for the installation InterForm 400 version 2006 M01 INTERO2 DE Wahlen Sie bitte eine Sprache aus w hrend verwendet zu werden installieren Eingabetaste Weiter DK Velg sprog for instruktioner under denne installation Tryk pa Enter for at forts tte ES Seleccione por favor un lenguaje para ser utilizado durante instalan Pulse Intro para continuar FR Veuillez choisir la langue utiliser pendant l installation Appuyez sur ENTREE pour continuer GB Please select a language to be used during install Press Enter to continue PT Favor selecionar uma lingua a ser usada durante a instala o Aperte Enter para continuar GB DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English PT Portugu s F3 Exit F12 Cancel The Installation will automatically detect if a version of InterForm400 is on the system and if so the following screen will be displayed 358 Users Manual for InterForm4009 INS0104 InterForm 400 version 2006M01 INTERO2 A previous version of InterForm 400 is currently installed Curre
369. kness Temperature 43 File sets ueste Senne Raises 273 Flash memory Initiate and reload 316 FORIS es NU anne ante esce odii e 308 Images in flash memory 324 Import Images 00 0 323 Overlay Design 0000 43 Print speed 4x anite Rena 43 Printer Types 0040 375 Setting up a printer 371 Several codepages on one label 312 Shipped fonts ssusu 385 SOM fonts ios ele Mt E al 313 Soft fonts into flash memory 314 490 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Substitute residentfonts Temperature 0005 Zip files in InterForm400
370. l this window will pop up Exit fields Detail exit field 1 Line __ position length Detail exit field 2 Line position length Detail exit field 3 Line __ position length Placing return fields Return field 1 Lineno position Return field 2 Lineno position Return field 3 Lineno position F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here you can specify the information that you want to transfer from the spooled file onto the user program and where you want to place returned information The line numbers are all relative to the line where the condition is met If you above have chosen REFORMAT for the action to take you will see a list of lines describing how the output detail line s should look You can insert 2 types of definition lines 1 Reformat input Seqnbr Type Input line position length Output line position 1 0 n User s Manual for InterForm400 225 2 z Text constant Seqnbr Type Text constant Output line position 2 0 2 With these 2 types of lines you can decide how the input detail line s should be presented in the output spooled file ie WARNING Plan how you want to structure the sequence of these lines as there is no tool for Totals When you select this option you are asked if the print out has totals If you answer NO then itis assumed that the original spooled file has no totals and that no totals should be inserted in the new reformatted spooled file Below is described
371. l European 3 Baltic 4 Turkish 5 Cyrillic 6 Greek 7 Arabic 8 Hebrew 9 Special Member name in FONT file Font F4 List F3 Exit F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 313 When installing you are prompted for what symbol set to use Use the symbol set that you want to use this soft font for If the font is a specially designed font including e g the company logo you should use 9 z Special 13 Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory As opposed to PCL output the soft fonts used for Zebra output are always downloaded when used You can however decide to download soft fonts or images into the printers flash memory InterForm400 use the table below to find out which soft fonts are already loaded in the flash memory of the printer and therefore does not need to be downloaded when used Work with fonts in Zebra flash memory FNT481D POS PELON SEO uq x Outq Library Fontmember Type options press Enter 4 Delete Opt Outq Library Fontmember Flash drive ZEBRA QUSRSYS COURIER E End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Download a soft font into flash memory Press F6 Create to download a soft font into the flash memory of a Zebra printer Create spooled file with soft font download FNT482D OUI nA ce lt 0 cio Mee Sot Ae fone n ZEBRA Library QUSRSYS Fontmember s e ARIAL F4 List Plkash Opies gue ge vet venue E E B Output queue ZEBRA QUSRS
372. l insert into the same envelope or be stapled together The attention person in the test spool entry is found in line 11 column 13 to 30 DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 11 Function Columns 1 78 Search for SO eee ui MMC ME ME SEG METER UE OME Sens eA SE ND MUT ARS Att Martin Merman 1004 PH 30 04 97 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver The following definition should be made Note that the Page selection criteria is left blank Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find recipient ID in the following positions Print line Position EN 57 _60 11 13 30 F3 Exit F12 Cancel This definition will cause the two pages for Florence Flowers to be inserted in two separate envelopes or stapled separately as they have different attention persons In order to test the above definitions proceed with the next section User s Manual for InterForm400 215 Using the Finishing Definition with Auto Forms Control Prior to making the following definitions for Finishing control in Auto Forms Control a Finishing Definition must exist Enter menu point 5 Auto Forms Control on the main menu and select 1 Functions Attached to output queues Either create a new AFC queue to be used as input queue for the PFE MailPrinter Prinserter or printer with Finishing equipment or edit an existing definition Please refer to the InterForm40
373. l on the main menu the following screen is displayed Start with Work with Split Definitions AFC300D Type option 2 Change 3 Copy Opt Split name F3 Exit Press Enter Description F5 Refresh 4 Delete 5 Display End F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new split definition Split Definition Entries Create Split Split definition name Description Seqnbr Split detail Seqnbr Split detail F3 Exit Definition SPL310D SHIPPING Extract invoices only description description F5 Resequence F12 Cancel You can now enter the specific requirements your spool entry data should meet for selecting a certain overlay When Entering a sequence line you will get the following screen User s Manual for InterForm400 173 Split definition name Change Split Definition SPL310D SHIPPING Description Extract invoices only Seqnbr Seqnbr Split detail description 1 0 F3 Exit AND OR Print line Position Oper Compare value Fll Delete F12 Cancel Split detail description AND OR Print Line Position Oper Compare Value 174 Users Manual for InterForm400 Description of the pages selected by this detail line Relate this statement to the previous statement The print line in the spool entry to search The column interval to search The operator relating to the compare value The operators us
374. last import IMPORT or changes done in the graphical designer PC SAVE and roll the InterForm400 back to the state prior to the import Use e g option 1 Rebuild to status before change on the Work with changes menu User s Manual for InterForm400 345 40 Install upgrade InterWord 400 This option can be used for installing or upgrading InterWord400 installing a PTF which must be placed in the APF3812 folder This is done by You are prompted for what PTF you want to install like option 50 Apply PTF from folder APF3812 Enter the PTF number that you want to install press Enter and this screen below is shown Press F10 to confirm the install or upgrade of InterWord400 Apply PTF from folder APF3812 PTF number 2010 Press F10 to install this PTF or press F3 or F12 to cancel PIP description 3 Install InterWord version 2 This PTF installs product InterWord 400 Library DCA400 will be created during installation of this To enter InterWord issue the following command GO DCA400 INTERWORD See InterWord 400 manual for more information F3 Exit F10 Install PTF 130 PTF100D PIRA F12 Cancel 50 Apply PTF from folder APF3812 Apply PTF from folder APF3812 Enter PTF number F3 Exit PTF100D F12 Cancel With this option you can load InterForm400 PTF s from the folder system These PTF s can be used to correct minor problems that will not result in
375. le by use an exit program If you want to overwrite the contents you need to use the CRTPBSPLF i command see page 406 All exit programs called by InterForm400 must be owned by QSECOFR If it is not the AFC job will halt with an error message Change the owner with the command Defining the spool file attributes for the result of a Split Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name SHIPPING Description Extract invoices only Split detail description Split Invoice Credit Output queue ue xe sey VM Ve Ves L0 INPUT NONE Name RIDESI MAE E RE CC Page size Length Lines per page INPUT 1 255 INPUT 1 378 INPUT 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 12 INPUT 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 12 INPUT 5 10 12 13 3 15 INPUT 1 255 Length positions per line Lines pet Ih 2 4 3 x0 x X04 x73 Lines pev Ih qox x0 Woo See XR Characters per anche ak Seok Fs Overflow line number FONE ID cxx wA ws ie Re INPUL GBET 3 5 Xl 12 Degree of page rotation INPUT AUTO COR 0 90 FORM EYPe dq used we wei Se ues Aci ae INPUT Character value STD Spool Tile Name je eese ee ay let chee Uses date do de de ten Mu e Tah los eb Soe Tens Hold sSpooled Eiles ih oe ege ege ede INPUT NO YES Save spooled file INPUT NO YES F3 Exit F12 Cancel INPUT USER JOBNAME Name INPUT USER JOBNAME Output qu
376. led file s form type doesn t exist no action will be performed All comparisons in SFI are case sensitive including the SFI definition form type comparison The Zip Stream File s Command The APF3812 ZIP command can be used for zipping compressing stream files in IFS or folders QDLS 412 Users Manual for InterForm4009 ZIP stream file s ZIP Type choices press Enter Archive path 60 es lay e ARCHIVE Create Add to archive CREATE CREATE CREATE ADD Current directory v CURDIR From stream file FROMSTMF Work dir if FROMSTMF is QDLS WORKDIR Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Archive path This is the path and name of the archive the zipped file This must have the extension zip Create Add This specifies if you want to add files to the archive If you select CREATE the file will be replaced if it already archived Current directory This directory will be added in front of the path stated in From stream file This command APF3812 ZIP ARCHIVE ZIPDIR ARCHI ZI P CURDIR MYDIR FROMSTMF STATEMENT This will zip all files in the directory MYDIR STATEMENT and in the archive the files will be named STATEMENT file ext From stream file This is the path and name of the file s to be zipped If you are zipping file s in the folder syste
377. ler choy ley ey LS ey cer ur ev ue WUBIECL NONE More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter Message 2 2 MSG NONE End of line escape character MSGESCCHR NONE NONE amp Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter From e mail address FROMADR CURRENT Name Save e mail SAVE NO_ NO YES Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys 350 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Type choices pres CC e mail address Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF s Enter cc Name NONE F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys More Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter BCC e mail address BCC Name NONE Encrypt PDF file ENCRYPT NO NO YES Owner Password OWNERPWD User Password USERPWD User Access Limitations LIMITS NONE NONE NOPRINT NOCOPY F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys for more values Bottom
378. line color X axis text direction Displacement group texts TE Bar width in 96 1 Note 1 For BAR charts only Description Describes layout of the X axis 450 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Y1 Y2 axis commands Define Y1 axis Y2 axis layout Y1LO 01 Y2LO 01 INIT ow 0 s Ce een YALO Y2LO Text 1 BLANK Text 2 BLANK Description Describes layout of the Y1 or Y2 axis User s Manual for InterForm400 451 Y1 Y2 axis commands continued Define Y1 axis Y2 axis layout Y1LO 02 Y2LO 02 C oz w SS 18 Chart name Text font 34 Text direction o memene o w ve moewipema m wesmweweaee Description Describes layout of the Y1 or Y2 axis 452 Users Manual for InterForm4009 X axis group commands Add change X axis group layout XGLO 01 amp amp CHA Ts s a apao a mxmewst SSS m s swwmenenkewsaso O o wma 7000 a e wmm SSS oi reste 700 Description Adds or changes the layout of a X axis group Delete X axis group DLXG 01 a vus ter X axis group ID Description Deletes a X axis group User s Manual for InterForm400 453 X axis point commands Add change X axis point layout XPLO 01 1 35 initi 91 95 2 Cc 31 X axis point ID 35 Copy definition from X axis point ID 86 Text BLANK 2 X axis group ID 1 Text font Text font color 99 Relative spacing
379. line type 4 line in free format will be ignored when printing 374 Users Manual for InterForm4009 You will have no possibility of printing text with different rotation on the same page either Text constants with a different rotation than the rotation defined for the contents of the overlay will be ignored On the same printer types printing white text on black background reverse printing line type 7 ink will be ignored HPIID As above but with duplex support On back page overlays HP GL 2 files will be ignored HPIIP As for HPII Special for this definition is that a frame with pattern 80 can be used for blanking out text when printed on top of the text HPIII For HPIll and compatible PCL5 printers HPIIID For HPIIID and HPIIISi and compatible PCL5 duplex printers On back page overlays frames will have sharp corners even if they are specified to be round due to a limitations of having HPGL included in PCL macros Any HP GL 2 command will be ignored on back page overlays including Diagonal lines line type 4 line HPIIIP As for HPIll HP4 For HP4 HP5 and HP6 and compatible PCL5e printers e g Lexmark Optra and the Kyocera FS series Note that some printers such as OptraE are not preset to PCL and therefore needs a PJL command to switch to PCL In these cases the setting HP4 PJL must be used HP4 PJL Same as HP4 but using PJL Printer Job Control language e g to set resolution to 600 dpi Note that the use of
380. ll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel rameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM The resulting PCL file from the merge will look as per below Notice that the amp amp commands are not printed Furthermore you will see the effect of the BLOCK defined spool lines which are formatted according to the total width length of the BLOCK Unless a NL New Line is inserted blank lines will be ignored and the spool text from each line will be reorganised according to block width and consequently a full justification will be obtained Equal left and 398 Users Manual for InterForm4009 right margin Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 3000 Battleaxe DK Denmark e Att Martin Merman inter mate 1004 PH 13 09 99 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver Congratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver You are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your AS 400 applications In fact this letter has been printed and inserted by MateSert 400 The following license code s will be needed to activate the driver permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code F45 44429711 81 2001 3A 320 4449032 3 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on 45 72 26 04 00 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on http www intermate com Regards INTERMATE A S Use
381. ll be displaced relative to each other according to the settings of Move right and Move Down NW NE SW SE Color Printing Radius in pels for the North West corner of the frame Radius in pels for the North East corner of the frame Radius in pels for the South West corner of the frame Radius in pels for the South East corner of the frame When working in a file set defined for color printing the frame definitions will offer an additional pattern setting for color print When having selected a color INK setting prior to the frame settings this color INK selection will then be used for the printed frame and pattern Frames defined with Thickness in pels if any will always be printed as a solid line Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 3 0 ay Frame Top edge Move right Left edge Move down Right edge Extra times uns Bottom edge Thickness in pels sd NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S S Radius me m RT Pattern B W prt F4 List Pattern color prt B F4 List F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view 2 HORIZONTAL LINE Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 1 2 Horizontal line From top edge Move right Left end m Move down pou Right end Extra times 1 Thickness in pels ___ F3 Exit F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr From Top Edge Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay
382. lly defined chart is defined using the WRKCHT command before printing First time you issue a amp amp CHA command for an externally defined chart all parts of the chart definition except the sample data are automatically loaded To load the sample data use the LOEC command Internally defined chart names must begin with an asterisk character as appose to externally defined charts which can not begin with the asterisk character To reload an externally defined chart use the LOEC command Command examples To print the Samplebar chart two inches down and two inches from the left margin print amp amp CHA01 SAMPLEBAR PRSM 02000 02000 000 To print the Samplebar chart with the following data Observation set S1 Observation set S2 G112 1 2 G11 2 3 1 G12 2 4 G22 1 5 G21 1 4 G22 2 2 Print amp amp CHA01 SAMPLEBAR OSDA S1 G11 1 20000 G12 2 40000 G21 1 40000 G22 2 20000 amp amp CHA01 SAMPLEBAR OSDA S2 G11 3 10000 G22 1 50000 amp amp CHA01 SAMPLEBAR PRCH To print an internally defined bar chart amp amp CHA01 INT1 CRIC amp amp CHA01 INT1 GNLO amp amp CHA02 INT1 GNLO amp amp CHA01 INT1 XALO amp amp CHAO1 INT1 Y1LO amp amp CHAO1 INT1 Y1LO amp amp CHAO01 INT1 XGLO amp amp CHAO1 INT1 XPLO Create internal chart General layout General layout Define X axis layout Define Y1 axis layout Define Y1 axis layout Define X axis group layout De
383. looking at active jobs As we will use the same queue for Input and Output for our AFC definitions we assign the same queue name for the default output queue For printer and interface type we state values matching our specific printer There should be no criteria for changing the writer so we press Enter twice to get the AFC function entry screen User s Manual for InterForm400 161 Step 3 Restricting the writer to process type STD jobs only Note This step can be ignored if you restrict the writer jobs using the STRWTRCHK option as first mentioned We create our first AFC function by entering 1 followed by Field Exit Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue i AFC INPUT2 LuXb afty 4 wee ges s Us APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program No functions defined Seqnbr Function 1 0 F Change writer Writer name OUTQ Name OUTQ Form type STD F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel The first AFC function we enter is FECHGWTR This function is the first action taken for any spool file printed to queue AFC_INPUT2 By stating DUTQ instead of a specific writer name PRTXXX we define that the writer to change should be the one currently assigned to the default queue AFC_INPUT2 defined in the previous screen Step 4 Preventing following AFC functions to process type STD In order to let all spool files with form type STD be p
384. lues press Enter ID Value Text Dec P01 Jan P02 Feb P03 Mar P04 Apr P05 May P06 Jun P07 Jul P08 Aug P09 Sep P10 Okt P11 Nov P12 Dec End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Prior to this an X axis group has been created In this case the group includes the ID s P01 P12 with the text Jan Dec The Work with sample observations has value fields for all X axis points no matter what axis group they belong to Now we have been through all states of creating a chart If you have done this you can now view and print out the chart in the following ways If you have Swiftview installed you are able to view the chart by pressing F5 Display chart from the chart definition display You can print out the chart using option 6 from the Work with Chart definitions You can print out the chart when merging with a spool file if the spool file has either the amp amp CHA01 PRCH or amp amp CHA01 PRCM command inside See descriptions of the amp amp CHA commands below User s Manual for InterForm400 445 The amp amp CHA Chart commands General format of the amp amp CHA commands EnNUIC C ON e w mamm 25 Dep Function data General description of the amp amp CHA commands Chart naming To create an internally defined chart the first command issued must be the CRIC command Internally defined charts are completely defined using the amp amp CHA commands in a spool file An externa
385. m QDLS this can only hold the file name the path should be stated in current directory Generic names can be used e g and A Work directory If you want to archive files placed in the folder system QDLS you need to state a work directory InterForm400 will create a temporary subdirectory in the work directory called ZIP nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the jobnumber which is removed before the command ends Other Utility Commands The Edit Print Command The APF3812 APFEDTPRT command makes it possible to edit a spool entry before merging with an overlay User s Manual for InterForm400 412 Copy and edit print APFEDTPRT Type choices press Enter Input spool file e e 2 9 ab ey FILNVN SELECT Name SELECT Input output queue FROMOUTO Name Ti brary Ud fey ey d ooh teh chou San Je Name LIBL Output queue for edited print TOOUTQ Name Iud Mae Vic ts uem verte et ri aer M Name LIBL Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys State the output from where you want to select the spooled file to be edited and on what output queue you want to create the edited spooled file After selecting the spooled file with 1 you enter an editor SEU where you can change the contents as you please When done with the editing just press F3 and press Enter on the next screen to confirm the changes The edited spooled file is cut off to the width of
386. mage 171170 in double size Magnitude factor s 2 1 2 3 4 6 8 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel InterForm400 will show you the size of the image in dots 300 equals an inch If you intend to print the image larger it is a very good idea to enlarge it here If you do so the grey areas will be presented as fine as possible in the final output The magnitude factor states how many times you want to enlarge the image Using 2 will double the size Working with color images From the Work with images menu you select option 2 if you want to work with color images Work with color images BMP 100D POSIt TON TOY Seve we Image name Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print 8 Display information 12 Work with colors in image Opt Image name Description Status Color 1 InterForm Color image 1 e Color 2 InterForm Color image 2 Color_3 InterForm Color image 3 End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Load BMP file Fl1l View 2 F12 Cancel Note that using 5 view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed User s Manual for InterForm400 321 Import color images To load a new BMP image from the AS 400 folder system press F6 Type in an image name to be used in InterForm400 and a description of same In the field From PC file press F4 to retrieve a list of available BMP files Select with option 1 Load BMP file BMP200D Image name Color 9 Description Color image no
387. me F4 List Install TrueType font to PCL from the folder APF3812 FNT431D F12 Cancel 298 Users Manual for InterForm4009 You can either write the name of the TTF file to be installed or prompt with F4 to get a list of all files in the APF3812 folder Select the TTF file here with option 1 Press Enter A description is retrieved from the TTF file and displayed as the font name Following you are prompted for the code page Type Face number and what to call the font member Install TrueType font to PCL from the folder APF3812 FNT431D Document name ARIAL FTIF Font name 1 Arial Font nane FED 2 3 shoe 8 7 Arial Code Page s x Tu wu uus 1 1 CodePage850 2 CodePage852 Type Pace x x soe a ow ooh ox 40000 Member name in FONT file ARIAL F3 Exit F12 Cancel A new type face number have to be entered for the font Enter a number higher than 32767 in order to assure that this will not conflict with any typefaces of the resident fonts Enter a member name for the new soft font 40000 is chosen Press Enter and wait for the font member to be created be patient When finished you will return to the Work with PCL soft fonts menu Press F3 to go back to the Work with fonts menu User s Manual for InterForm400 299 Step 2 Creating the Code128 Barcode 5 Select option 7 Work with fonts in the InterForm400 administration menu and then select 5 Create b
388. me output queue for both Input and output it is highly recommended to include the form type when starting the writer jobs in program QS TRUPPGM in order ito be sure that the writers are started up with the correct Form Type after IPL However j Note that some PC emulated writers such as the Client Access printer session automatically starts the writer with FORMTYPE ALL when initialising Then the only Step 2 Creating the AFC Definition Enter menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control and select option 1 Function attached to Output queues Here we press F6 to create a new definition Update Auto Forms Control Definition AFC302D Output queue I AFC_INPUT2 TP Daa cxt x0 xe APF3812 Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit Description EAE DEMO queue for both input and output A tostart job x c nox Y Y N Codes pages X e Ex SYSVAL Number SYSVAL F4 List Default output output queue and printer type Output queue AFC OUT2 GIDRA wey e ur er rk of Co APF3812 InterForm 400 printer type HPIII Interface s x x xw xoxo ASCII850 Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Output queue RES m ee ue qe Rue uu F3 Exit F4 Prompt F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel Here we define the queue to monitor should be AFC_INPUT2 We assign the same name for the AUTO_FORM subsystem job as it will be easier to recognise the correct job when
389. ment the Conditional tab will light up making it possible to view the lines transferred to the specific overlay by activating this tab You can use the conditional tab to define tabulators and remap windows in the conditioned overlay User s Manual for InterForm4008 46 The Result view The result view looks like this Att Martin Merman l004 PH 12 05 55 Your new MatesSert 400 driver ongratulations with your new MateSert 400 driver ou are now able to fully exploit the features of your Inserter in relation to your A3 400 applications In fact this letter has beer printed and inserted by MatesSert 400 he following license code s will be needed to activate the driver p ced to your AS 400 CPU s P Gx cap Serial No No 81 20 0l 2a 2F 98 g SS 44AS022 regarding the driver you are welcome Should you hawe ww questions o call our technical support hotline on 45 77 22 02 00 desnload the latest documentation from the Internet on r http w intermate ccom You can mark an element and drag it to the position you want The current position of the mouse pointer is shown in the bottom in inches and pels 470 User s Manual for InterForm400 User s Manual for InterForm400 471 Inserting design elements To start editing or adding design elements for an overlay you need to open the Elements folder of the overlay Elements I e Top This is a remark Text Rotation 090 Print Info
390. mer 7 Customer 8 Customer 9 Customer 9 Customer 9 Spool file 3 Customer 2 Customer 7 Customer 9 Customer 9 Output Queue 03 The resulting two spool files are now ready to be used as Input for Auto Forms Control User s Manual for InterForm400 251 Getting Familiar with OSC Output Schedule Control When selecting option 1 Functions Attached to Output Queues in the menu 6 Work with Output Schedule Control on the main menu we get the screen below Work with OSC definitions OSC100D POSTERO Bou uu ux Output queue Type options press Enter l Run OSC 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print definition 12 Work with output queue 15 Hold output queue 16 Release output queue Opt Output que Library Description Sts 2 OSC_OUTQO1 APF3812 Output Schedule Control DEMO definition RLS End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fll View 2 F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new OSC definition When created press F5 to have it updated in the above screen Create OSC definition OSC110D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 TTD Cae so Se Ae ge See ee Os APF3812 Description Output Shedule Control DEMO definition To update and change an OSC definition enter 2 in front of the OSC output queue The following OSC definitions will appear Enter 1 in front of the OSC entries you wish to change Change OSC definition OSC300D Output queue 1 OSC_OUTQO1 Labrary 2 te sky Geet e she APF3
391. mes Fish Pets etc should be moved down and placed as sub headers below the header ITEM and should be printed with a 12 point font 3 The items should be printed just below the item group name with a 10 point font 4 The footer should be placed in a fixed position with Courier 10 User s Manual for InterForm400 107 Creating the Main overlay This overlay will be used to call the different sub overlays which will perform the actual formatting of the spool entry We enter 1 Design overlay and we create a new overlay named MAIN We leave the global overlay settings untouched and enter the design window Here we define the If then line that will search for the item groups Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MAIN Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type 1 0 If Input line 1 70 Position _11 14 Is N ITEM Then Overlay SUB1 Nos of lines to remap VAR Upper edge 0 040 A Left edge A Blank after _ B blank original text F3 Exit Fll Delete F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view F18 DSPSPLF F19 DSPPFM We are not sure in which line the item group will appear so we will just check all lines from 1 to 70 The horizontal position of the text ITEM will always be fixed in position 11 14 We enter the name of the sub overlay SUB1 which we will create later for formatting of the footer We define VAR for Number of lines to
392. n command is met provided that it is within the line interval of the original If then command If conditions for more If then commands are true concurrently the field Lines to remap is only used from the last If then command This feature is designed specifically to format item lines printed in varying lines and with varying number of lines between the item groups see example page 107 Vertical cursor repositioning When you enter a number of lines to remap other than 0 you are prompted for a vertical repositioning like below Vertical cursor repositioning before execute of sub overlay Position related to actual position Number of pels 288 98 Or reposition related to previus non blank input line Number of pels CO 999 F3 Exit F12 Cancel With this function you can vertically reposition the rest of the spooled file i e move the spooled file contents and all relatively positioned elements e g tabulators and remaps Position related to actual position This will move the rest of the spooled file up negative value or down positive value See page 107 for an example which uses this option Reposition related to previous non blank input line Use this repositioning e g in order to close the gap of blank lines on the original spooled file Use the If Then on the next non blank line Upper Edge Inches pels position according to the entry of the following field A Vertical position of
393. n overlay or overlay selector for a label printer i e Zebra User s Manual for InterForm400 141 Seqnbr Function 1 0 i Merge with overlay Labels Continuous _ 1 Labels 2 Continuous Media type _ 1 Termo transfer 2 Termo media Print mode 1 Tear off 2 Rewind 3 Peel off 4 Cut Labels Continuous Select 1zLabels if the media contains of separate labels select 2 Continuous if the media is not separated into labels in this case you would probably select 4 Cut for the print mode parameter Media type Select 1 Termo transfer if you use a non heat sensitive media otherwise use option 2 Transfer media Print mode 1 Tear off mean that you will manually tear of the labels 2 Rewind can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll This requires special hardware installed 3 Peel off will print only one label at a time waiting for the current label to be peeled off This also requires additional hardware 4 Cut requires hardware cutter normally cuts the media for each print job unless you use 2 Continuous then 4 Cut will cut out each label In the following screen the spool attributes for the final output is entered Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue PRTHP3 AFC Libsa wu are i x QUSRSYS Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program Seqnbr Function 1550 1 Merge with overlay Output spooled file name INPUT
394. n press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the Prinserter definition Example 2 Sorting in Ascending Weight Same example as above but all envelopes with only one page should be printed first then envelopes with 2 pages and finally all envelopes with 3 pages 184 Users Manual for InterForm400 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 1 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group Enclosure group 5 MUHNHH Try running this example with the test spool entry combined with the definitions of either example 1 on page 213 or example 2 on page 214 You will then notice that the letters for Forrest Friends are sorted so it is printed before the envelope with the two letters for Florence Flowers When filled in press Enter and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the Prinserter definition Example 3 Sorting in Franking groups By measuring the weight of envelopes with varying number of pages we have determined that an envelope with 2 page and 1 enclosure is within the lowest postage group informed by our governmental post office The next postage group allows max 5 pages in all which means we should decide if we want to pay the higher charge just for adding the enclosure which will bring the tot
395. n the data stream InterForm400 detects if the code is defined to be printed outside the i printable area and will then just ignore it In case you have made many re mappings you ican define a tabulator as the last sequence line which takes an area from line 1 to 72 and position 1 to 132 and move it outside the page thereby deleting any remaining You can align numbers where some are negative by use of numeric adjustment N See below Input data is formatted for fixed pitch font tabulation 0 1 2 1234567890123456789012345 1 MICKEY MOUSE 1 100 00 2 refund EARS 2 100 00 3 total 1 000 00 If the above was uncritically printed with a proportional spaced font we would experience the result displayed below on the left due to varying width of characters in the font If we made a tabulator that defined column 16 to 25 of line 1 to 3 to be printed with numeric adjustment we would get the result displayed to the right Notice that the minus is compensated for in the right alignment Proportional font without tabulator Proportional font with a numerical adjusted tabulator MICKEY MOUSE 1 100 00 MICKEY MOUSE 1 100 00 refund EARS 2 100 00 refund EARS 2 100 00 total 1 000 00 total 1 000 00 9 REMAP WINDOW re mapping text areas Definition of a Remap Window gives you the possibility of taking a particular part of a given text line and print it elsewhere on the page e g with rotation and another f
396. n the future If you use N the certificate will be encrypted but will follow the InterForm400 installation i e if you restore the APF3812 library on another machine the certificate will still run For maximum security Y is recommended The data under Imported Certificate Information is updated automatically after the import and use of the certificate Recommendations related to JAVA Performance Below are some recommendations for setup of your iSeries ib that you can consider if the JAVA performance is not satisfactory These changes could be considered if it takes too long to add certificates or to encrypt pdf files ie WARNING 6 None of the changes below should be done without the acceptance of the person s i responsible for the iSeries i5 as these changes can generally affect the performance of i the iSeries i5 i4 NOTE 4 Intermate A S or InterForm A S cannot be held responsible for any problems directly or indirectly related with the recommended changes below User s Manual for InterForm400 483 MAXACT for the BASE pool You could increase this value to reduce tread transitions into the ineligible state OS 400 System values These are the system values you could consider to change to get better JAVA performance on your iSeries QACTJOB Initial number of active jobs Increase this from default of 20 to 400 QADLACTJ Additional number of active jobs Increase this from default of 10 to 50 Q
397. name library 36 56 is only used if the image is located in another file than APF3812 IMAGE If 7 16 is PATHTIF a TIF file is looked for in the IFS path in position 36 98 If 7 16 is PATH or PATHBMP a B W BMP file is looked for in position 36 98 gg IMG COLOR sign distance to top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance to left edge distance to paper left edge INPEL resolution horizontal resolution vertical color image name IFS JPEG file Prints a text line for which the appearance is independent of the normal text lines in the data stream Prints an image with the same rotation as the paper rotation If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relatively to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to the base line of the current print line If no resolution is stated the image will be printed with 300 api PATHTIF is also supported for PDF output but only for compressed TIF files PATH is also supported for PDF output The BMP file must be sharp Black white i e no grey This image extension COLOR makes it possible to insert color BMP or JPEG images in PDF output This is ignored when specifying COLORSUPP NO JPEG images can only be inserted in PDF output and they need to be formatted for 16 mill colors BMP color image name or JPEG GIF file in IFS include the slash
398. nce line User s Manual for InterForm400 241 Create PDF Bookmark details BMK330D Sequence number 000 Description e weai oe All_pages Type option Press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition Page selection Initial open level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Through Page selection we could have inserted conditions so we could handle bookmark differently for some of the pages but as this spooled file is the same for all pages this will not be used here Initial open level tells to what degree the bookmarks should be expanded Here we use 1 as we want this display when we open the PDF file HDS Cust No D Cust No Dy Cust No The definitions for the individual levels are shown below Level 1 Field Prefix Print line Position 1 Cust _No 13 57 B0 2 Z Color e F4 List Level 2 Field Prefix Print line Position 1 Zip 8 _ 8 11 2 City 8 l3 40 Color D F4 List 242 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Level 3 Field Prefix Print line Position 1 dp cud o7 35 2 E Color 8 F4 List When done defining the levels you just press Enter several times and the bookmark definition has been saved As the final thing we want to use the PDF Bookmark definition You can do it in this manner Create the demo spooled file as described on page 337 With the same interactive job you go to a command line and
399. ncel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys User s Manual for InterForm4008 41 Encrypt InterForm400 PDF File With this command APF3812 ENCIFPDF you can take an existing InterForm400 PDF file and copy it to another encrypted PDF file You can add an owner password which will enable any function and a user password that will open the PDF file with the restrictions stated under User Access Limitations It is possible to encrypt some PDF files that have not been created by InterForm400 but it cannot be guaranteed that all pdf files can be encrypted in this manner i4 NOTE 4 Password protection encryption and or digital signature of the PDF file requires a Encrypt InterForm PDF File ENCIFPDF Type choices press Enter Input BDR Rile crine RS FROMPDF Output PDF Eiter de E TOPDF Replace stream file REPLACE NO NO YES Owner Password OWNERPWD User Password 331A Se USERPWD User Access Limitations LIMITS NONE NONE NOPRINT NOCOPY for more values NOEDIT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Note that the input PDF file cannot be the same as the output PDF file The HP Macro Command The command APF3812 HPMACRO is intended to be included in your CL programs or activated from the command line This command can only be used in relation to HP printers and compatibles
400. nd WRKACTJ OB SBS OSCCTL If the subsystem is started it will look like this User s Manual for InterForm400 247 Opt Subsystem Job User Type CPU Function Status OSCCTL OSYS SBS DEQW OSCSERVER AFCOPER ASJ PGM OSC500C MSGW 0 0 Note that the status MSGW message waiting is normal and does not indicate an error as it usually does Describing the OSC definition lines If you from the InterForm400 main menu choose 6 Work with Output Schedule Control and then 1 Functions attached to Output Queues then the screen below is shown Work with OSC definitions OSC100D Position Bo uuu odios Output queue Type options press Enter 1 Run OSC 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print definition 12 Work with output queue 15 Hold output queue 16 Release output queue Opt Output que Library Description Sts des AFC INPUT2 APF3812 Merge several spoolfiles to one RLS BATCH QUSRSYS Batch printing RLS End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fll View 2 F12 Cancel Press F6 to add a new OSC definition enter the output queue to be monitored by OSC a description of the job and press Enter Now this screen is presented Create OSC definition OSC300D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Library ars wwe we ae cd APF3812 Type options press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition Specify input spooled file priority Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output Define sort fields as Specify gro
401. nd be printed as normal We will also notice that the demo spool entry form type DEMO has been moved to queue AFC_INPUT2 where it is placed with status RDY WRKOUTQ APF3812 AFC INPUT2 User s Manual for InterForm400 159 Example 2 Using same Queue for Input and Output We will now create a new AFC queue which will be used for both input and output for Auto Forms Control Step 1 Checking the Writer First we will make sure our printer only prints out one specific form type and leave others to AFC The easiest way to do this is from the InterForm400 Main Menu to choose 80 Administering InterForm 400 2 Configure InterForm 400 and then press Enter several times to get the screen below Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 7 7 Do you want to use the APF3812 STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands to avoid a writer to be started with FORMTYPE ALL on one of the output queues defined in Auto Forms Control and if yes what formtype has to replace ALL when a writer is started on one of these output queues Use APF3812 STRWTRCHK as a validity checker N Y N Form type to replace ALL This option is especially useful if you are using the same output queue for both input to AFC functions and for output to a printer as a writer never should be started with FORMTYPE ALL on such an output queue F3 Exit F12 Cancel In this screen you state Y to use
402. nd line by entering APF3812 APF MENU You will then be presented with the InterForm400 main menu InterForm 400 MAIN MENU System INTERO1 Workstn ID QPADEV0003 Select one of the following options User ID PETER Administrator ALL 1 Design overlay File set PETER 2 Test print overlay Output queue PETER 5SI 3 Merge spool entry with overlay library QGPL 4 Work with overlay selectors Printer type HP4D 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Interface ASCII850 6 Work with Output Schedule Control Version 2006M01 7 Work with joint reports 8 Select file set Mo Select output queue and printer type Work with actual output queue Administering InterForm 400 Exit InterForm 400 MD Oe pt e Ox Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel In the upper right corner of the display you will find a selection of information System The system name of the AS 400 machine you are currently running on relevant when two or more systems are connected Workstn ID The name of the workstation you are sitting at User ID The name of your user profile Administrator The user profile name of the InterForm400 system administrator This person is the only one who can use the option Administering InterForm400 on the main menu If an administrator has not been appointed this option is open to anybody File set The name of the file set you are currently operating on Refer t
403. ne that marks the border between to element listing and the views to extend or reduce the space available for the views Previewing the result in Acrobat reader or SwiftView If you select Setup and Viewer you can select how you would like to view the merged result Select PCL to use SwiftView and PDF to use the application associated with the PDF extension on your PC most likely Acrobat Reader InterForm Design SAMPLE IFAO0DEMO Job 078151 File Edit EET Display Help 3 Hi Grid Pa 9 Language gt PDF mr a dun Font sort order gt To view the current result press this icon i I Other Design preferences Use of Grid As default the graphical designer has a grid activated which is 40 pels by 40 pels 6 lines per inch When the grid is activited the cursor will snap to the grid making it easier to align design elements Change the size of the grid Grid Grid Height idth 0 040 0 040 0 416 159 Conditional reposition v Close User s Manual for InterForm400 465 Activate Conditional repositioning to reposition the grid when designing conditioned suboverlays Press this icon to temporarily disable the grid and place elements El freely without the corsor is snapping to the grid Designing for colour or B W For laser pdf overlays only You can shift between looking at the B W output or colour output by A pressing this icon in the upper toolbar Thi
404. ne 1 800 Eunction 4 4 4 Columns Le 78 Search for 2 Leiche hen MIEL AE USUS A AEE PES ERU EAE NE MORE E ME nM RETE Florence Flowers Tulip Road 16 4000 Marigold DK Denmark Att Susan Sunflower Forrest Friends Inc Oak Street 88 4000 Marigold DK Denmark Att Archie Acorn Herring Marine Research Seaweed Street 14 9000 Battleaxe DK Denmark Att Martin Merman F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys 3 Create the forms document in e g MS Word which you want to use as mail letter but do not include any codes for position of merge records address field Now create an InterForm400 overlay including this document Refer to section Importing PCL Overlay from PC Print File page 325 on how to import the document as an overlay in InterForm400 4 Locate the spool file from step 2 on the AS 400 and use it to insert remap lines in the overlay created in step 3 5 You can now either make a manual merge of the overlay with the forms document and the spool file or you can activate Auto Forms Control on the queue for which you created the printer in step 1 Adding overlays to ASCII PC printjobs PCL InterForm400 only requires the spool entry to be of data type ASCII and the input data to be PCL4 PCL5 or PCL5e Including PCL color commands InterForm400 will add an overlay to the print job while maintaining the formatting of the document Therefore the following overlay command lines w
405. ne 10 and 11 is done by typing the sequence line number 10 1 followed by Field Exit Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0009 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0010 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0011 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 08 014 top 5 060 left 2 000 C 0012 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 15 025 top 5 060 left 3 000 C 0013 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 26 039 top 5 060 left 4 000 C 0014 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 40 053 top 5 060 left 5 000 C 0015 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 C 0016 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 10 1 al Frame Top edge 05 030 Move right Left edge 01 120 Move down Right edge 06 116 Extra times ae Bottom edge 05 068 Thikness in pels 001 NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S S Radius Fill pattern 8 F4 List F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel 92 User s Manual for InterForm4009 We use our ruler to find proper coordinates for our frame see page on how to print a ruler We prepare the values for the edges to match the formatting we will make for the item lines later This step usually requires some test printing in order to find the exact values unless very exact calculations are performed We enter 8 as fill pattern for our frame which is a black pattern see patterns page We press enter and our line is given s
406. ne additional printing information such as paper size and orientation and number of drawers The AS 400 can override much of this information Click OK 6 Back at the Session panel select Save As from the File menu At the Save WorkStation Profile as screen enter the printer ID in the File Name field and select the folder in which you want to store the printer emulation profile The file name should have a WS extension Click OK You will be asked whether you want an icon and in what folder it should be placed suggest that you say Yes to the icon and the location recommendation Attaching through a TCP IP LPD Printer Server Remote Writer A TCP IP LPD Printer Server exists in form of interface boxes integrated Printer interfaces Spool Servers and Workstation Daemons No device description is used when printing by use of a remote writer The TCP IP address of the Printer Server is defined directly in the output queue definition You can create or change an existing output queue to define an output queue to send print to an LPD Printer Server Creating or Changing an Output Queue for TCP IP LPD Printing The following presuppose that TCP IP has been configured and started on the AS 400 1 In case a printing program is already assigned for the queue use the following command to end it ENDWTR WTR PRTXXX OPTI ON I MMED 2 Enter the following command to change the queue CHGOUTQ OUTQ QUSRSYS PRTXXX and press F4 For creating
407. ne after line 17 by entering 17 1 User s Manual for InterForm400 93 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0017 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 C 0018 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C 0019 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 100 left 3 000 C 0020 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 100 left 4 000 C 0021 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 100 left 5 000 C 0022 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 54 070 top 5 100 left 6 000 C Seqnbr Type bist 7 Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern 8 blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We enter 8 for 100 shading Black which will ensure that the following sequence lines will be visible We press Enter to save our new sequence line 18 Step 11 Defining the Item Line Bars We would now like to exploit the Repetition and Pattern options in the overlay element Frame to make shaded horizontal bars to provide a better appearance of the item lines We place this definition before the first remapping of an item column The item column Model now has sequence line 19 We therefore enter sequence line 18 1 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0017 9 Remap window 28 028 pos 54 070 top 5 060 left 6 000 C 0018 7 Ink Foreg
408. ng PCL4 PCL5 and PCL5e data This is a true WYSIWYG feature which is unique for verifying results of forms design and to view the contents of spool files in the AS 400 output queues that has been merged with InterForm400 overlays i4 NOTE 4 For easy design of your overlays you can also install a graphical designer on your PC PDF viewing If you have Acrobat Reader or another PDF file viewer installed on your PC you can also choose to use this program to view the PDF result of a merge This requires 1 That this program e g Acrobat Reader is associated with the extension PDF on the PC Try to double click on a PDF file on your PC It should open up the PDF file viewer and display the file 2 That the PC can reach the qdls apf3812 view folder on the AS 400 follow the steps as indicated for PCL viewing 3 That the Netserver is running and the name is registered as described for PCL viewing below 4 IMPORTANT The PDF viewing option is limited for users that has a user profile with max 8 characters Refer to page 42 for how to activate the PDF view PCL viewing SwitftView exploits the Client Access connection to a Windows PC and is currently integrated with the menus 1 Design Overlay and 10 Work with actual output queue The command for 10 Work with actual output queue is APF3812 APFWRKOUTQ SwiftView licenses 6 WARNING 6 When InterForm400 is running in test mode you can setup an unlimited
409. ng large mailings The following is a short description of the procedure for setting up the environment in Windows9x NT with Client Access 1 In Windows Click Start Printer and Click the Add Printer icon The same printer should be used as input to InterForm400 Tag Network Printer and click Continue Locate your AS 400 under the Client Access network and chose a printer on the AS 400 Note If no printers are displayed if all printers are defined as remote writers or if you do not have a printer available on the AS 400 to use as input queue to Auto Forms Control you must create a dummy writer This automatically creates an output queue which you can use as input queue to AutoFormsControl CRTDEVPRT DEVD LAN FSP DEVCLS VRT TYPE 3812 MODEL 1 FONT 11 ONLINE NO The printer installation wizard will now ask you to select a driver for the printer Select an older twinax printer type like an IBM 5256 or IBM 4214 Now finalise the add printer wizard 2 Create a simple forms document in e g MS Word to merge the data into This forms document should be without any formatting It should contain nothing but the fields where the data from the data source are inserted Now merge the data source with this forms document and send the merged document to the printer created in step 1 The spool file would look like this on the AS 400 426 Users Manual for InterForm4009 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE FLLS XX xxx QPRINT Page Li
410. ng screen will be displayed Update extended page definition APF305D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Start AFC job 9 End AFC job From Top Left Line Opt linenbr margin margin spacing Font No extended page definitions Press F6 to create End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel The Global settings Line Spacing Extra blank lines on top and Font will be decisive until the first line of extended page definition is met From line number Top margin Left margin Line spacing Font F4 F18 A line number of the spool entry from which the formatting should change The formatting will be valid until a new line number is defined Absolute margin from top edge of the page dissolved in whole inches and pels see Measuring formats page 48 Absolute margin from the left edge of the page dissolved in whole inches and pels see Measuring formats page 48 Note that this value will be added to the leftmargin value of the overlay command type 8 Tabulator Measured in n 240 For instance 6 lines per inch 1 6 will give the value 40 The font ID of the formatted text Prompting of the font list This function will display the spool entry with the job information used for merge in option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay page 117 Pressing F18 will only work if this merge has been made prior to entering this menu User s Manual fo
411. nged to use the sample queue which the InterForm400 demo is preset for Printer Writer Twinax or TCP IP TN5250E or Raw Socket Make sure the printer writer PRTXXX determined in step 3 is started If not the following command will start the printer writer with our sample output queue AFC_OUT1 which was created by the installation program previously STRPRTWTR DEV PRTXXX OUTQ APF3812 AFC OUTI If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue the following command will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue AFC_OUT1 CHGWTR WTR PRTXXX OUTQ APF3812 AFC OUTI Remote Writer TCP IP LPD Using a TCP IP LPD attached printer does not require a printer device description You should instead follow the procedure explained on page 370 Attaching through a TCP IP Print Server in order to configure queue AFC_OUT1 as a remote LPD writer The entire environment should now have been set up The AUTO FORM sub system is running and we have a PCL compatible printer attached to a predefined AFC output queue AFC OUT1 You can verify that the AFC job AFC_INPUT1 is actually started in sub system AUTO FORM by entering the InterForm400 main menu and select option 12 Work with Active subsystem AUTO FORM in menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control In a new installation the job AFC_INPUT1 is set NOT to automatic start with the subsystem AUTO FORM You can change it this way From the InterForm400 main menu ch
412. nk original version Condition Position ee Le IS gt SKN Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel By using F18 we find the column header Model to be in line 28 position 8 to 12 However we state position 14 for safety reasons Line spacing and Ignore blank lines are not important as we are operating with only one line However a good working rule is always to set the line spacing to 6 Ipi 1 6 40 240 40 pels Note that we are not blanking the original text as we might want to use the text later Blanking of unwanted text is done as the last step in this exercise We press Enter to save and procede with column header P Group We type 12 to create a new sequence line followed by Field exit and 9 Seqnbr Type 12 0 9 Remap window Input line _28 28 Position 15 25 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing _40 From left edge 000003 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment Cc ULRCN ID E Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original B blank original version Condition Position NE S ME Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We press Enter to save and procede with column header Serial No We type 13 to create a new sequence line followed by Field exit and 9 88 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Seqnbr Type 13 0 9 Remap window Input line 28 _28 Position 26 39 Print From up
413. nother AS 400 to copy from You can then copy overlays from InterForm400 on another AS 400 using DDM see page 270 for more information If the overlay is not known or if placed in another file set press F9 once more to get a list of file sets to choose from Select the file set containing the overlay you want to copy from and select the overlay you want to copy 36 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Global settings of an overlay The global settings of the overlay depends on the type of file set in which the overlay is placed These are the settings for file sets used for PCL printers and PDF output Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name TEST Overlay text Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions _0 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _0 0 99 Font 0066__ INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def Y N Drawer Papertype PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 255 Name F4 List Paper Size 0 F4 List Pages per side ES Copy management Y N Duplex print N no S short edge margin L long edge margin Duplex margin uU in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay Code for placement B back page F front F3 Exit F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set view print parameters F14 PCL view The data entered on this page describes how the spool file to be merged with th
414. nt speed Specify the printing speed in number of inches per second Note that the highest possible print speed varies from one model to another User s Manual for InterForm400 43 id NOTE Make sure that the label length stated is correct If not this will affect the positioning of ie WARNING i Use a relatively low temperature e g 0 in order to avoid burn through of the ribbon and potential damage to the print head The wear of the print head increases when using a j higher temperature or using a lower distance between paper and print head j Regarding barcode printing on label printers If possible it is a good idea to place the lines of the bars parallel with the travelling direction of the paper In such a setup the print head will not need to cool off and heat up for each bar thus making it possible to id NOTE The actual commands within a merged Zebra spooled file is ZPL That is the main reason why you cannot view the overlay or the merged result using SwiftView or Acrobat Reader So when designing for Zebra you need to do test prints instead of viewing the 44 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Extended Page Definition Extended formatting is used to format intervals of lines from the spool entry This method can be used as alternative to using the design command type 9 Remap Window and will work with 8 Tabulator lines If the global setting Extended Page Definition equals Y the followi
415. nt version e e 4 2003M04 Libary A086 Ae Je se de 9 OF APF3812 Press Enter to continue Following you will be prompted for entry of the InterForm400 license code unless your machine is a known machine by the installation program then it will know the license code and just proceed If you enter a code here it will be validated You can also leave it blank but then you cannot use InterForm400 before a valid code has been entered INS0125 InterForm 400 version 2006 M01 INTERO2 Type license information press Enter InterForm 400 license code Notice License type and code must match InterForm 400 cannot be used before a valid license code is entered F3 Exit F12 Cancel In the following screen you can set the preferred language used in InterForm400 The language can be changed later if needed This is done by option 2 at the Administration menu to change the global settings for InterForm400 or use option 4 to select language for specific InterForm400 users Note InterForm400 CL commands like MRGSPLFPDF APFEDTPRT etc will be installed in the language chosen here and can not be changed unless a re installation is made User s Manual for InterForm400 359 INS0121 InterForm 400 version 2006M01 Select primary language press Enter Current value e 1 GB Primary language is used for 1 The language of commands 2 The language of displays 3 The language of the m
416. nterForm 400 version 2004 M01 INTERO1 Select journal press Enter douxned See a ntu utet vut us APFJRN DE nae ni xMMEEgES S N35 208 10 n APF3812 If a journal is selected changes are recorded to a journal receiver It is recommend to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812 This journal will be created during install if used If you select a journal in a other library this journal must already exist F3 Exit The installation guide now gives you an overview of parameters you have chosen for the installation of InterForm4009 Press F10 to start installation Note that Status messages will be shown at the bottom of the screen during installation User s Manual for InterForm400 23 INS0129 InterForm 400 version 2004 M01 INTERO3 Start installation with selected options DENFIOE X e Bane pO So ee Be et o LE OPTO1 CategoBby ow hx Be oe se ee Cae US OPT CISC RISC a ues quu ues ts RISC License type Demo Licensed modules Classic PDF Security InterWord Primary language is Se siis Sy Se a GB Journals 4 55 eie ED E Sel vem Ga ue APFJRN LIDEALY dg QR eI exte APF3812 Press F10 to install F3 Exit F10 Start installation F12 Cancel 8 Press F10 to complete the installation 24 Users Manual for InterForm4009 3 Setting Up the System The system is now ready for setting up administrators file sets print queues and printers Enter the InterForm400 menus APF3812
417. nterForm400 191 Defining Insertion Pre process Definitions Enter Menu point 4 Finishing Definitions on the menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 03 for making the definition valid for external insertion systems Update Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name Stapltst Description Test af stapling Type of Finishing 03 Prepare for inserting Inserting equipment 01 Prinserter 02 Stapling per Recipient 03 Prepare for inserting 04 PFE Mail Printer 05 Prepare for E mail Fax 06 PDF Filenaming 07 Reformat Spooled File F3 Exit F12 Cancel These inserter systems are supported 01 Pitney Bowes 02 PFE Minimailer 2 3 Plus 03 BOWE OMR 04 Neopost SI 68 72 76 Select 01 and press Enter to define the pre process definitions for the Pitney Bowes insertion system Update Finish Definition PRS310D Inserting equipment Pitney Bowes Placement of optical marks Rotation From top edge From left Print sequence 1 Normal 2 Pages in reverse order 3 Reverse order per recipient F3 Exit F12 Cancel 192 Users Manual for InterForm400 Placement of optical marks Refer to the documentation of your insertion system for further information on the optical marks Rotation From top edge From left edge Print Sequence The available values for rotation are 000 090 180
418. nual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 265 Administering InterForm400 Environment and Users When the InterForm400 system is installed for the first time the option Administering InterForm400 is open to everyone Once an administrator of the system has been appointed this person is the only one who can select this option When you choose option 80 from the main menu you will enter a menu with the following contents InterForm 400 ADMINISTRATION System Inter01 Workstn ID Qpadev0003 Select one of the following options User ID Peter 1 Appoint administrator 2 Configure InterForm 400 4 Work with InterForm 400 users 5 Work with file sets 6 Connect users with overlay file sets 7 Work with fonts 8 Work with images 9 Work with PCL files 10 Work with palette 11 Work with paper control options 12 Service functions 20 Import Certificates 50 License Information 51 SwiftView Users 52 Work with Designer job overlay locks Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel The menu items 1 to 6 regards setup of the environment Option 20 Import Certificates is only shown if you run OS400 V5R1 or newer and can only be used if you have a license code for the PDF security module of InterForm400 The options are described individually in the following paragraphs 266 Users Manual for InterForm4009 1 Appoint Administrator When you choose the option 1 Appoin
419. number of i users to use SwiftView 1 SwiftView license is included with InterForm400 free of charge Additional licenses can be ordered from your local InterForm400 dealer The i minimum licenses to order is 5 You will receive the license in form of a code which i matches the serial number of your AS 400 Refer to page 356 for more information on Requirements for running SwiftView 1 You must connect to the AS 400 via TCP IP from a Windows 95 98 NT with Client Access or other 5250 emulator supporting both STRPCO and the STRPCCMD 430 Users Manual for InterForm4009 commands 2 The user must have full authorisation over the folder system QDLS APF3812 VI EW You can grant these rights with the command CHGDLOAUT DLO VIEW FLR APF3812 USRAUT PUBLI C CHANGE 3 The user must be added to the system directory You can add a user to the system directory with the following command ADDDIRE USRID KURT SYSTEM USRD Jensen Kurt USER KURT 4 The system name defined in the InterForm400 administration menu 2 Configure InterForm 400 see page 26 must correspond to the system name shown with the command APF3812 DSPNETSVRA or use the IP address of the iSeries AS 400 5 Port number 445 must be open in any firewall the PC may access the iSeries through Setting up a SwiftView user al Use option 70 Install SwiftView at drive C located in 12 Service Functions to create a directory on the users PC s C drive call
420. o Select File set page 119 for further description Output queue The name of the output queue for your session in the InterForm400 system when printing from within the menus not via Auto Forms Control Printer type The default printer type of your session which is only shown if the administrator has allowed users to select Printer type this is done under option 9 on the main menu Refer to page 374 for more information Interface The protocol conversion mode you are using for the default printer User s Manual for InterForm400 33 Version The release number of InterForm400 also reflecting the year of the release The number will be followed by an M which is the modification number M23 would mean modification 23 At the bottom of the display you can see which command keys can be used everywhere in the system How to use them is only described here F3 Brings you back to the previous menu In the main menu F3 exits the InterForm400 system F12 Always takes you one screen backwards in the system F6 Displays the message queue Additionally using the ATTN key when your job is a group job will bring you out of the InterForm400 system temporarily When you return to the InterForm400 system you will continue from the point at which you pressed ATTN 34 Users Manual for InterForm4009 1 Design Overlay Note that InterForm400 comes with a graphical designer See Appendix O on page 461 and onwards to see how to
421. o outsort the pages for this recipient ID according to the selections on the next screen More than 1 envelope InterForm400 will automatically continue insertion in new envelopes Can there be code for outsorting in the printout Yes InterForm400 will insert the outsorting command selected on the next screen only when the code value defined below is found No InterForm400 will insert the outsorting command selected on the next screen whenever a set of pages for a recipient exceeds the number defined in Max pages per envelope If YES to the above Line number The line number to find the outsorting code Position The coloumn position to find the outsorting code Value The character value for the outsorting code that will inform InterForm400 to insert the outsorting command according to the selection on the next screen Press Enter to define the type of Outsorting mark Update Finish Definition PRS310D Inserting equipment Pitney Bowes Which types of marks are used leselect Benchmark BM End of collation EOC End of collation mark absence ECA Beginning of collation BOC Divert to Deck DID Wrap around sequence WAS Ascending Wrap around sequence WAD Decending Parity PR Safty SF F3 Exit F12 Cancel Refer to the documentation of your Pitney Bowes insertion system for a thorough description of the outsorting marks When filled in press Enter and continue with the next
422. o page on how to print the pattern sheet In the sequence lines after we have defined 4 small frames with fill pattern vertical stripes and 4 text constants printed with font 2103 which fits in the large frames In frame 1 and 2 we state an Ink just before the text line You will notice that the pattern of the elements are placed on top of the previous placed elements If you want the small frame and text to be shown without the lines of the larger frame you could choose to first place the same frame and text with fill pattern O erase background before reprinting it with the wanted Ink as seen in frame 3 Here F is used for the small frame and is used for the text Frame 4 shows the result when choosing pattern 0 erase background for the Ink and printing TEXT See the results below User s Manual for InterForm400 59 Black Ink Slash Ink 0 Ink followed 0 Ink by Ink Ink NA NURS SNNN AV You can also insert an image as a watermark if you change the ink to be shading Note however that you cannot use Ink to change PCL files into watermarks Color Printing When working in a file set defined for color printing the INK settings will have additional options as per below Seqnbr Type 2 0 7 Ink Select ink for the succeeding lines Pattern B W prt E blank unchanged 0 100 white shading 1 8 1 100 shading Pattern color
423. o page 382 displays a list of the emulated IBM font ID s which are selectable in InterForm400 as default Note that font outlines might vary between the different printer models attached to your system depending on their HP compatibility and their PCL emulation level It is therefore advisable to print a font reference on all the different printers in your AS 400 environment and base your corporate standard on fonts that looks the same on all of your printers You can also define new font numbers based on typefaces known by the printers using option 1 Description of additional fonts SOFT FONTS Should you require to use fonts which are not currently available among the resident fonts of your printers you can choose to import fonts to InterForm400 from your PC environment InterForm400 supports import of True Type Font files TTF These can be converted to a soft font by InterForm4008 You need to install create the soft font for each kind of possible output that you want to use i e PCL PDF and ZPL for Zebra printers If you want to use barcodes for PCL output you will need to create a soft font for the barcode in InterForm400 Barcode soft fonts are not necessary for PDF and Zebra output 278 Users Manual for InterForm4009 7T Work with Fonts Work with Fonts FNTOO1D Select one of the following options 1 Description of additional fonts Work with Soft Fonts for PCL 3 Auto download soft fonts N 5 Creat
424. o the Address Field 82 Step 6 Edit Subject TERT 5m uote ER Rer RS Re a rera eia aac 84 Step 7 Formatting the body text 0 0 ccc eens 87 Step 8 Making Equal Distance Between Column Headers 88 Step 9 Making Equal Distance between Item Line Columns 90 Step 10 Defining the Column Headers White on Black 92 Step 11 Defining the Item Line Bars 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 94 Step 12 Defining the 5 Item Coloumn Frames 00 eee eee 95 Step 13 Defining the logo as a water mark lllllslllsless 96 Step 14 Defining the Copy Management 0000 0c eee eee 98 Step 15 Defining the COPY Symbol as Watermark 05 99 Step 16 Defining the Relatively Positioned Sub form 101 Step 17 Cleaning the Overlay for Remaining Text 104 Step 18 The Result oet Wahab ed eed wc Red rere e nte 105 Example of Advanced use of Sub overlays Random text lines 107 Creating the Main overlay llis isle 108 Creating the sub overlay for formatting item groups 109 Creating the sub overlay for formatting the footer 112 ThieiresullEs o ee sheer ae anes thure um eunte a ud 113 Main Menu Local Environment Setup lsssss 116 2 Test Print Overlay LvekeAeEeR e ERE ev G Be bee ag ewe 116 3 Merge Spool Entry with Overlay llsllsllllslslee
425. oA ie Rt Ae Wie Bee Mt XA Name Number xx a he Ae ee he ARR 000000 999999 Spooled file number SPLNBR LAST 1 9999 ONLY PCL command subset 6 a PCLSUBSET 001 001 POL application je Jd edeeds PCAPPL ANY ANY ONEWORLD Output queue OUTO INPUT Name INPUT Libzafy xxx ae Bede Drek Name LIBL PORN CYPE cue Cee Cee ehe ret he qr FORMTYPE INPUT Character value User datas usse qe TRIS Ub Sese uu Mae Se USRDTA INPUT Character value we output spooled file SAVE INPUT INPUT YES Cod page e wd So 42 Se de WAS SA CODPAG INPUT_ INPUT SYSVAL Inputs page width 24 4 a 2 INPWID DFT 1 28 DFT A4 Maximum page length OUTPAGLEN 255 10 255 Maximum page width OUTPAGWID 360 80 360 Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys The Merge Spooled File PDF Command This command APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF can be used for creating PDF files containing the result of a merge in InterForm4009 This PDF file can even be e mailed as an attached file directly from your AS 400 See more information at page 349 The Merge Spooled File ZPL Command The Merge Spooled File ZPL Command APF3812 MRGSPLFZPL can be used e g to merge into a Zebra spooled file from an Auto Forms Control user exit program This command is the Zebra printer equivalent to the commands APF3812 APF3812 and APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF For details of the parameters
426. oaded from the InterForm400 graphical designer Listed with function PC SAVE User s Manual for InterForm400 343 Receive Distribution into Import Library Select one of the following 1 Receive distribution from tape 2 Receive distribution from network file 3 Receive distribution from PC file in the APF3812 folder 4 Receive distribution from save file Option res F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel Transfer resources to the production library Work with import of InterForm 400 resources Distribution 4 s amp o EXPORT 0OL From system INTERO2 From version 2002 M01 Promo user sce eue POOLI Description Export of Overlay IF400DEMO Select one of the following 1 Create empty APFIMPORT import library 2 Receive distribution into import library 3 Work with resources in import library 4 Move resources to production library 5 Delete the APFIMPORT import library 8 Start journaling 9 Work with changes Option LL 27 F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel Entering the Import menu after having received the distribution file into the import library the details of the distribution file will be stated in the top of the Import menu Selecting option 4 Move resources to production library will give you an overview of the resources ready to be moved to the production library 344 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Confirm move of all resources to pro
427. ograms 175 Code128 barcode 00 293 gy e po 293 Code39 Barcode 0 0 eee 293 Codepage support 00 380 Color limage n eee i 67 Images a 1e cira ee ere eee ena 321 INK Lv hee sini dubi nnsa keng Yasui 60 Palette coss meinen im ege 329 PGCLfiles 2 1 Reve Rees 325 Printer Types escacs cece eee eee 375 Commands in the data stream 390 446 Comment AFC definitions 152 Overlay coe eke s eR LCD EE ARS CN 72 Compress or Zip files 412 Copies amp amp CGBPY iioc ptr ehe 396 Copy management 39 46 Like copies attr 141 PRSGOBY i ere alone Bake Senate 153 Copy Management sss 46 53 Primary Set eer rS 46 53 Secondary set 0 46 53 Copy overlay from another overlay 36 Copy spool file 0 000 424 Copy using PRSCOPY 153 CGPYGPISPEE ies ate ce Slee nde eer 406 Creating a new overlay 35 Cross reference list 00 420 CRTPBSPL F keb riesi hese eann inis ARS 406 GVIPCLSPLR 43 euh Rn et es oes 409 Datamatrix barcode 005 310 Delete WING Sih 2 eoim tL uus 51 Demo Spool Entry 213 215 337 Design overlay lulu 35 463 Design window usus 49 470 Digital signatures In PDF files i cse E IR 480 Display Netserver Attributes
428. oks as follows Create Observation set CHS11 GN fy Are fey ares rer sU _fay seis MYBAR TDYypOav Wee fee tee tes fob ie to ta hs BAR Seq number Observation set Text Text font Text font color Use Xl1 Y2 8 8 2 so amp a amp x l Y1 2 Y2 Line yDe wn wow ee a gt 1 9 Lune Waal hte thee eee YE SN Dots Color Pt s uno d amp avd ee amp 0 8 Pattern color F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel OD For charts with type LINE the screen looks like this User s Manual for InterForm400 443 Change Observation set CHS110D Quant as Sapa lowe o cu BS SAMPLELINE TIPE A X piss Bs iuo Bee vies Dus ys tee G88 LINE Seq number Observation set Text m o Aya A eo A Text TORNE y pw sv Biter ID Ux Text font color as 4 Use YIl Y2 aX iS8 2 x xx 1 Y1 2 Y2 Line type ee es Ge ee ee 1 9 Line width 4 A 235 2 32 E Dots Point marker s 2 2 4 2 e C1 08 Color GG se due amp oe amp 2 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Seq number The sequence number of this observation set The sequence number is used for in which sequence this observation set is shown in relation to other observation sets Observation set Name of this observation set Text Description of the observation set Printed below the chart Text font color Font and color used for the text above Use Y1 Y2 axis Links the observation set to either the Y1 or Y2 axis
429. olor images 00000 e eee eens 321 Import colorimages 0 60 esses 322 Work with Zebra images 2 eee et 323 11 Work with ZEBRA images 000 cece eee 323 12 Work with images in ZEBRA flash memory 20200005 324 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts andimages 324 9 Work with PCL Files sese et 325 Import P Ok flle suere Sia weed wit Pied ag Belen eh RR EGOOKDR Swe 327 10 Work with palette t i i inia a io N Rh 329 Change the definition of the colors sssaaa aaaea 329 11 Work with paper control options ssn nnn 331 1 Paper type to PCL drawer conversion 20000 ce eae eee 331 2 Output Sorter Bin Support 0 0 00 ee 332 Defining an Output Sorter Bin fora User 2 0005 332 20 Import Certificates leen 336 Service FUNCTIONS dra nita setas i ee iit na aetas 337 1 Create Demo Spool Entry 0 000 337 5 Display All Displayable Characters 00 0c cece eee eee 338 6 Save spooled file to the folder APF3812 0 00 ea eeeee 338 7 Print Saved Spooled File from the folder APF3812 339 8 Print Resource X reference 0 0c cece eee 339 9 Work with Journaling 1 2 2 cette 340 21 Export of InterForm400 resources 0 00 cece eee eee 341 Copy resources to export library 0 000 c eee eee 341
430. ompare Length The length of text to compare Compare type The type of compare to do Refer to page 67 for an explanation Compare value The text that should be compared with Occurrence States which of the lines fitting the condition that should be selected FIRST will be used only for the first time this line is found after a level break and LAST will be used for the last time only that this line is found within a level break Number of lines to handle Here you state how many detail lines that should be taken from the original spooled file if the condition is true All the lines from the original spooled file will be available for reformatting when progressing If you use VAR this line will get all the detail lines of the original spooled file until this or another condition is true Action Select REFORMAT if you want the text of the input detail line s on the output spooled file as well Use DELETE if this line or lines should not be visible on the output spooled file Line ID code A code for this kind of detail line This will be inserted on the output spooled file e g to be used for conditioning in the overlay design The position where this is placed is decided as described on page 222 Call user exit program Tells InterForm400 if the user exit program should be called for this detail line The program to call is defined as described on page 223 where you also can find additional information If you activate this cal
431. on P 1 Columns 28 Search for gt E eus L y y s 2 an ao deus koaua Aa taa Rna eae Tes vaga a AO a at Rene ue bes Re Your new InterMate 400 Forms Management System Congratulations with your new InterMate 400 software InterMate 400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform advanced data remapping and copy management of you existing SCS print data InterMate 400 exploits the advanced features of standard HP PCL printers and is the chosen forms management solution for several hundreds of organisations The following license code s will be needed to activate InterMate 400 permanently to your AS 400 CPU s Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code 200 P10 4449079 F2 E7 20 AA F35 P20 44B2031 2 AA BB 01 23 E60 P30 44D3971 1A BC DE 44 F45 P20 44A1460 79 10 22 F1 F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys We are now ready to make a selector which picks the correct overlay according to the above conclusion Step 3 Entering the Selection Criterias in the Selector We select option 4 on the main menu and press F6 to add a new selector Add Overlay selectors AFC300D Selector name MYSELECT Description Selection for MateSert and InterMate letters File set TEST End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel We define the name MYSELECT which should be placed in file set TEST and we press Enter User s Manual for InterForm400 129 Add Overla
432. on above option 4 For each receiver you specify what e mail text version to use Note Use the command APF3812 WRKMAILADR to give users access to these addresses without entering InterForm400 see page 420 i4 NOTE A PDF user password can only be used if the InterForm400 security module is enabled 8 Senders E mail address Work with E mail sender information MAT350D Definition name DEMO Description Distribution of the Demo spool file Code for sender 1 1 Use fixed sender 2 Use owner of spooled file as sender 3 If possible use owner of spooled file else use fixed sender Organisat VOW e Ce lt a tete When Code for sender 2 or 3 Fixed sender name Kim Egekjaer Fixed sender E mail adr support intermate com Send Bcc to sender N X N E mail adr for Bcc copy blank senders E mail adr F3 Exit F12 Cancel In this option you specify who should be specified as sender on the e mails 1 Use fixed sender 202 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Use the name and E mail address specified in the bottom for all E mails 2 Use owner of spooled file as sender If you specify this then the user profile of the original spool file will be retrieved and the name and E mail address is extracted from information in the list of E mail sender addresses found in 8 Work with E mail senders in the Auto Forms Control menu Note tha
433. ondition Position Is gt lt N Blank After F18 62 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Opens up for Extended Adjustement for definition of Underline of text in the tabulator and or lines of periods known as punctuation or dot leaders made after each line of the tabulator The following options appear when is entered Adjustment The adjustement of the underlined or punctuated lines Values U L C R or N acording to the above Underline Underlining of text in the tabulator spaces are not underlined Punctuation Length If the last position of a line in the tabulator defined by the second Input Position field is a period sign a line of punctuation will be printed The punctuation will start after the last printable character and end at the position inches pels stated in this field counting from the position stated in From Left Only Adjustment values U and L can be used No punctuation will be made if other values are used if no period sign is found or if the text exceeds the punctuation length The new font of the formatted text An optional set of values used if the tabulator should be executed on a certain condition Only activate the tabulator If a character string in the interval of lines defined by the Tabulator matches this character string according to the following condition Only run tabulator if this following field contains a text string or a number which match one of the following valid operators
434. one of the lines Once you press Enter the system returns to the main menu The selected file set now appears in the upper right corner of the main menu If you have access to more than one file set then the above screen will be presented to you already when you enter the InterForm400 main menu if you enter with the command APF3812 APFMENU KARTSET SELECT User s Manual for InterForm400 119 9 Select Output Queue and Printer Type When you enter the InterForm400 main menu the system is connected with the output queue which has been specified as the user output queue in your user profile for the InterForm400 system refer to the page 268 and 272 If you choose option 9 on the main menu you will be allowed to change the name of the output queue to be used for test printouts from the InterForm400 system Select output queue Enter the name of an output queue to be used for InterForm400 output Output queue PRTXXX Library QUSRSYS Also select the type of printer to be used Printer type HP4D IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 HPII HPIID HPIIP HPIII HPIIID HPIIIP HP4 HP4D HP4_PJL HP4D_PJL HP5C HP4500 HP4500D ZEBRA203 ZEBRA300 Interface ASCII850__ SYSTEM SYSTEM850 SYSTEM852 ASCIIR8 ASCII850 ASCII852 WORKSTN WS31N WS347N WS348NIDA3X IDA5219 IDA812N When the display appears it already contains the name of the output queue which is currently active Output queue Specify the name of the output queue you wis
435. ont A maximum of 300 Remap Window lines are allowed in one overlay Additional remap window lines are ignored If this limitation is a problem you should use If Then lines instead to create overlays that are more efficient and easier to maintain Contact your local InterForm400 dealer to get more information of how to do that if in doubt User s Manual for InterForm400 63 Seqnbr Type T 9 Remap window Input line DEM Position L Print From upper edge Line spacing __ From left edge Ignore blank lines Y N Adjustment ULRCNBE Rotation mc Font F4 List Blank original _ B blank original version Condition Position a 3 LT Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after Input Line Position Upper edge From left edge Line Spacing Ignore Blank Lines Adjustment 64 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The line interval to read including both lines entered here If the end line is left blank or the same as the begin line only one line will be remapped The Column interval to read including both positions entered here The maximum position interval is 198 characters Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of the page according to the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Inches pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Measured in n 240 which means 6 lines per inch will give the
436. oose 5 Work with Auto Forms Control 1 Functions attached to Output Queues choose option 2 for AFC_INPUT1 Change Autostart job from N No to Y Yes Start and stop the subsystem and the job will run We will now create a demo spool entry which the AFC system will merge automatically with a sample overlay called IFAO00DEMO and send to the AFC output queue AFC_OUT1 The demo spool entry will appear on the output queue AFC_INPUT1 which is defined as input queue for the AFC_INPUT1 job The names of the input queue and the AFC job are in this example identical User s Manual for InterForm400 29 You could work with spool entries of your own as input to the AFC_INPUT1 job A new spool entry will after a while appear in output queue AFC_OUT1 as a result of the merge process However for best understanding of the example we recommend that you create a demo spool entry according to the following description Enter the InterForm400 menus again with the command APF3812 APFMENU You will this time be asked to select a file set Select file set SAMPLE Select 80 Administering InterForm400 Enter 12 Service functions and select option 1 Create Demo Spool Entry more info on the demo spool entry on page 337 You should now receive four pages on print queue AFC_OUT1 with text and Intermate overlays You will find a re print of one of the pages in the printout in the following section TROUBLE SHOOTING NOT PRINTING Q I
437. or the AFC definition will be used Formtype The formtype which the writer program will be restricted to process All other formtypes will be left for InterForm400 to process This function makes it possible to use the same OUTQ for both input to and output from InterForm400 and in cases where you have to use more than one type of paper and need to receive a message for changing paper In cases where you only use one type of paper in the printer you place an AFC function F CHGWTR and change the formtype to e g STD This will restrict the writer to process spool entries of this type only The next AFC function must be 92 EXIT conditioned by formtype STD This will cause InterForm400 to stop processing print jobs of this type and leave them for the AS 400 to print normally If you actually use more than one type of paper in your printer and want to get the message to change forms in the printer then you can define a F CHGWTR for each formtype you want to receive a message for changing paper For instance if you want the formtypes STD and IF400 to be used for output to your printer while other formtypes should be used for input conditions to other AFC functions the following 4 AFC defintions should be made in the beginning 1 For formtype STD use F CHGWTR to change formtype to STD 2 For formtype STD use 9 EXIT 3 For formtype IF400 use FZCHGWTR to change formtype to IF400 4 For formtype IF400 use 9 EXIT Note that
438. or width are not stated the plot can reach the lower right edge The GL2 command only works on PCL5 printers e g HPIII and HP4 User s Manual for InterForm400 393 Command Position Contents Description 394 Users Manual for InterForm4009 c PCL file name sign distance to top edge distance to paper top edge INPEL sign distance to left edge distance to left paper edge INPEL file name library 36 56 is only used if the PCL date is located in another file than APF3812 PCL If 7 16 is PATH a PCL file is looked for in the IFS path in position 36 amp SKU tray number g8 KPM macro number 00000 32767 Foreground color B black W white U unchanged 1 7 HP raster Background color B black W white U unchanged 1 7 HP raster WARNING This command will change the ink of any text being printed after this command has been issued Print sequence considerations The sequence of printing command lines versus normal text lines and constants in the overlay cannot be predicted Only a sequence of command lines in succession can be guaranteed to be printed in the specified sequence Prints a PCL file with the same rotation as the paper rotation i e which edge is regarded as the upper edge is of no importance If a distance is stated without a leading sign the distance is calculated relatively to the paper edge If a sign is stated the distance will be calculated according to t
439. ork with soft fonts for PCL 0 nes 283 File transfer HP SFP Font files fromaPC 286 3 Auto download Soft Fonts 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 287 5 Create barcode soft font 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ees 289 7 Install True Type font for PDF 0 00 c cece eee 289 InterForm400 Predefined Soft Fonts 0 0 0 e eee e eee ees 289 MICR Soft Font Font ID 3998 0 0 20 c cee eee 290 OGRA Soft Fonts 52 o esu data cd uie orae ul e dr a ets 290 OCRB Soft Font Font ID 0003 000022 290 Barcode Support Lu LL Lure a ataca aai an Paca a aad 292 Barcodes in PDF output else 292 Calculating barcode height 0 0 c eee 292 5 Create bar code soft font 0 0 0 ccc eens 293 1 G60d6 397 odoris way os ee ivtnt vom Mae Yet nd erae ees 293 Extended code 39 ccc vets peewee are Pe NUT 293 2 Code 128 and EAN128 jeson o enero ees 293 3 Interleaved 2 0f D ais pa prn a ety e ea wa ee e 294 4 EAN8 EAN13 and UPC A 0 eee 294 Postnet Barcode oc ib EEErwREEeVERI ER E WEE wie 294 Barcode PDF417 ac Sa sce eR eam e ODE ECL dees 294 Datamatrix barcodes oko eb sa eR Gab end ncm p wie 295 MIGR ES13B ad auc e See ime aee doeet era cate deed 295 Assigning Font ID s to Barcode Softfonts anaana aaa aaaea 295 Example of editing a font ID for Code39 barcode 296 Downloading a Barcode Soft Font 2 0 0 0 ccc eee 296
440. orm400 will know from your specification of printer type which emulation the output should be formatted to but will not know which optional paper feeders etc are installed on the printer For HP and other PCL compatible printers the code specified in e g the field Drawer on the design menu will be used as value for the HP Paper Source PCL command ESC amp I n H You should refer to the user s guide delivered with your printer to verify which paper Source is used for each value of n For HP and other PCL compatible printers we have some more possibilities The following is the standard definitions for the value of n and for the value stated for Drawer in the InterForm400 system when printing on HP 5Si compatible printers 1 Tray 2 upper drawer 2 Manual feed tray 1 right side tray 3 Manual envelope feed tray 1 Right tray 4 Tray 3 lower drawer 5 High Capacity Input HCI first tray 6 Optional envelope feeder 7 Autoselect 8 Tray 1 right side tray 20 39 High Capacity Input HCI trays 2 21 Select Drawer using Paper Type It is advisable to use paper types for controlling drawer selection for each printer The advantages when comparing to the traditional setup where a drawer number is specified on the overlay design instead of a paper type are The same overlay can be used for printing on printers with totally different drawer setup The paper type and not the drawer number on the overlay will be
441. orm4009 3 Auto download Soft Fonts This menu enables you to create groups of HP compatible printers which should have ordinary soft fonts and bar code soft fonts downloaded automatically when the soft fonts are addressed in an overlay The printers are defined for auto download according to their AS 400 printer queue names The soft fonts will be downloaded as temporary fonts in the beginning of a spool entry and deleted after the job is printed It is recommended to keep the amount and size of downloaded fonts to a minimum in order to reduce the traffic on the network and the workload on the AS 400 An alternative is to create spool entries containing the soft fonts to be downloaded manually e g in the morning when the printer is powered on refer to the previous section 2 Download soft fonts The fonts will then be downloaded as permanent soft fonts into the HP printer The soft fonts will only be removed from the printer memory at power off and on some printer models when switching between PCL and PostScript emulations When downloading into Flash SIMM modules the font will stay resident also after power off and emulation switching For each printer group you define a number of printer queues and a number of fonts to be downloaded automatically ie WARNING 6 j The queue you define for automatic download must be the one with the physical printer device attached l e when using Auto Forms Control the Auto download queue is t
442. ortugal 282 1140 850 Spanish Speaking 284 1145 850 United Kingdom 285 1146 850 France 297 1147 850 Greece 875 Latin 870 n a 852 Iceland 871 1149 850 Cyrillic Russia 1025 880 1154 Turkey 1026 Latvia 1112 1148 850 Lithuania 1112 1148 850 380 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 381 Appendix F Font ID Information This appendix lists the standard fonts shipped with InterForm400 for both PCL PDF and Zebra printers Also a list showing typefaces of the most used resident fonts of PCL printers is included IBM 3812 font ID Information The system uses the IBM font ID s to select fonts This font list will include the standard IBM 3812 font set 3 to 2103 If printed on a PCL printer the fonts will be emulated by the selection of PCL printer type refer to page 120 268 and 374 The most complete emulation is obtained by selecting the HP4 or HP4D printer types The available font definitions can be prompted by F4 from different locations in the system and will include the fonts defined under option Description of additional fonts in the menu Work with Fonts see page 279 Note that the extra fonts e g 9903 predefined for use in the sample described in the Getting Started section on page 21 has been added to the prompted list These fonts are not available on standard IBM SNA printers such as 3812 4028 3916 and 3116 but only on HPIII and HP4 compatible printers Note that your printer m
443. oss tasks finishing definitions User s Manual for InterForm400 207 i NOTE All the autonumerators change for each new PDF file Except TASKKEY and KEY Date Inserts the current date It can be the 12System date 2 Job date the date of the AFC job or the 3 Spoolfile creation date Many different formats without delimiters are supported Time Inserts the current time It can be either 1 System or 2 Spool creation time System environment info At the moment only 1 System name can be selected User exit Select this possibility and you will see this User exit program Name NONE User exit program Library LIBL Exit fields variables KEY1 3 VA 9 Pam db but centes Parme eU yx oe So with this option you can call your own program to insert a value in a variable e g found by using other variables You can only use variables with names that are lower e g V2 can be calculated with the values from VA VZ and V1 TIP j For a demo source of a user exit program look in source file APF3812 APISRC in member PNMEXIT The program will be called with amp Entrystep VAR You return the d NOTE The same exit program can be called several times from different places in the PDF 208 Users Manual for InterForm4009 3 PDF File Name Composition Select this option to state how the PDF file name is determined Create PDF Filename Composition PNM330D Definit
444. ou are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a i split definition If you e g create new spooled files with a split definition and these new spooled files are placed back on the same outq then the new spooled file should NOT C Prepare for Finishing Seqnbr Function l 0 C Prepare for Finishing Finish definition name Output queue for prepared print DEFAULT libbaf w 1 4 Wo ee ae Eor CYPE w ede SW ee po ee F3 Exit F4 prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel This function is used to pre process an SCS spool entry in order to insert information for the Finishing Equipment Refer to section Finishing Definitions page 181 for more information Finishing Definition Name The Finishing definition name Use F4 to select from a list Output queue library Output from the pre process will be a new SCS spool entry If a default queue has been defined the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here INPUT in this field Indicates that the new spool entry must be written to the same output queue where the input spool entry exists As the new spooled file afterwards will be input to a merge operation INPUT will often be appropriate Note that the keyword DEFAULT and INPUT apply to both Output queue and library 148 Users Manual for InterForm400 ie WARNING Even though DEFAULT is the default value it is most likely WRONG DE
445. ou select this from the InterForm400 Main Menu 5 Work with Auto Forms Control 4 Finish Definitions Press F6 Add State a name and description and select type 07 Reformat Spooled File Then you will see this screen Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Type option Press Enter 1 Select Opt Definition Head User exit program Detail lines Totals Footer F3 Exit F12 Cancel Below each of the elements are described When you select this element the first screen will look like this Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Input head Number of lines IU 1 200 VAR User s Manual for InterForm400 221 Here you can state how many of the first lines including the blank lines from the input spooled file that are considered a part of the header i e that they are not detail lines If you state e g 10 then all line 1 10 of the input spooled file is considered to be the header If you specify VAR this will part of the screen will change to this Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Input head Number of lines VAR The last line of head is found as the first line that has
446. ound in the IFS is described Refer to page 462 for information It is made clear that remapping spooled file text out of the paper will not remove the possibility to find the text in the resulting PDF files Unadjusted tabulators will fully remove the text Additional and hidden function keys on the license screen are now documented in the user manual refer to page 356 for more information Even tough it was claimed for the 2004 versions the limitation of 300 remap window lines have not been removed This limit is however very high so it should not be a problem for anyone Overlays using many remap window lines can be made smaller and more efficient and are easier to maintain by using IF then lines instead Ask your local InterForm400 contact for more information if needed A link to IBM helping you to setup SMTP in combination with Domino have been added The link can be found on page 460 18 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The modules of InterForm400 From the 2004 versions of InterForm400 a number of modules are offered for InterForm400 Below basic InterForm400 package and the modules are described As minimum you need to buy either the InterForm400 Light version or the basic InterForm400 package If wanted you need to install the additional modules InterWord400 and InterFax400 InterFax400 is installed via option 80 on the InterForm400 Service menu and requires the InterForm400 CD The other modules are installed along wi
447. output queue However the users want the merged spooled files to be printed on the nearest printer To do that the users with their preferred printer should be added to the table above Next you need to activate this in Auto Forms Control This could be done like below 1 Insert a 1 Merge command e g conditioned on the formtype of the original spooled file which e g could be DEMO The merged spooled file is to be created on the same AFC monitored output queue The formtype of the new merged spooled file could be DISTRIBUTE 2 Insert a bZMove command in AFC depending on the resulting formtype DISTRIBUTE and move the spooled file to output queue USER If the owner does not exist in the list the Move is ignored a 9 Exit is performed indicating an error and the spooled file remains in the output queue Instead of merging before you move the spooled file you could also decide to move the SCS spooled file to an AFC monitored queue depending on the user profile that owns the 244 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 245 General Description of OSC Output Schedule Control Output Schedule Control OSC is a sub system in InterForm400 which main purpose is to optimize the daily mail procedures in an organisation and thereby reduce the postage costs significantly The key element with this function is that rather then sending 10 envelopes to the same customer all documents should be sent together
448. outside the ty WARNING amp Extended Adjustment and Full Adjustment E does not support fixed width fonts ie g Courier ie WARNING amp Even though you can remap text out of the visible paper the text is still possible to find ithe resulting PDF file when you merge with a spooled file If you want to eliminate that possibility use an unadjusted tabulator to remove the spooled file text ei If you want to compare a column of numbers Right justified to a specific value using lt tor gt and want to condition a Tabulator Remap or If Then on the result you should i include a space in front of the number that you compare with j This compare will work fine also for large numbers that are much wider than the i compared value I IMAGE Seqnbr Type Inch pel 1 T Image From top edge From left Image name Reverse Image _ R Reverse Image Resolution mae 75 100 150 200 300 600 F4 overview images F18 View Spool file From top edge Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of the page according to the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay From left edge Inches pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Image name The image imported under 8 Work with Images in the administration menu Refer to page 319 for details Reverse Image Entering R here will cause the image to be
449. pacing between lines PEL Percentage of line width to cause right margin adjustment If printing a line in the block using normal spacing would exceed this percentage of the block width spaces between words will be increased in size to cause the line of text to occupy the entire line 42 44 45 48 50 52 Escape sequence 01 Escape function 01 Escape sequence 02 Escape sequences and functions are used together Sequence 01 are used in conjunction with 53 56 Escape function 02 function 01 and so on 58 60 Escape sequence 03 61 64 Escape function 03 66 68 Escape sequence 04 69 72 Escape function 04 74 76 Escape sequence 05 77 80 Escape function 05 82 84 Escape sequence 06 85 88 Escape function 06 90 92 Escape sequence 07 93 96 Escape function 07 98 100 Escape sequence 08 101 104 Escape function 08 106 108 Escape sequence 09 109 112 Escape function 09 114 116 Escape sequence 10 117 120 Escape function 10 122 124 Escape sequence 11 125 128 Escape function 11 Escape sequence 1 11 defines the allowed escape sequences in the text of the amp amp BLO commands An escape sequence can consist of 1 to 3 characters Escape function 1 11 defines the function of an escape sequenc The following functions are supported Function Description Start underlining text End underlining text Syllable hyphen A is inserted only if a part of the word the part before syllable hyphen can fit the line width Then the rest of the
450. paper edge e g 14 the data will be removed from the data stream Note that the Left edge is measured from the physical paper edge unless the line interval of the Tabulator is included in an Extended Page Definition interval In this case the Left Edge of the Tabulator is measured from the Left Margin defined in the Extended Page Definition Adjustment Formatting of the text field The Valid values are U Un formatted The area is printed without any changes to formatting and spaces L Left adjustment Spaces proceeding the first character in text lines in the tabulator area are removed causing the area to be left adjusted at the position indicated by From Left C Centred Spaces within the tabulator area before and after text lines are being removed and the area is centred around the position indicated by From Left R Right adjustment Spaces following the character in text lines in the tabulator area are removed causing the area to be right adjusted at the position indicated by From Left N Numeric Indicates if the text lines in the tabulator area should be considered as numbers amounts B Print succeeding spaces in barcode data Indicates if the spaces in the coloumn interval succeeding the barcode data should be converted to barcode This only apply to the barcodes 128 and 3of9 The barcodes will always be left adjusted Normally succeeding spaces will be ignored User s Manual for InterForm400 61 Font C
451. part of the overlay constants and for which there is no input in the form of printed data This definition is usually used for a front page Overlay with Index A reference to the overlay which contains the text constants for the index page one of the text constants is likely to be Contents This definition also defines the formatting of the index text and numbering User s Manual for InterForm400 259 Overlay spool entry This is the reference to the overlay used with a spool entry which is being included in the report Spool entries included in the report will each require a sequence line of this type 1 Empty Overlay front page Seqnbr Type Description 1 0 1 Empty overlay Overlay NAMES e ea e a a EDS Name F4 list Index texere i rte bor me REDAS Front page for monthly report Include Gi Gndex 2lelaedeew eer un Y N Reset page numbering 1 _ Y N DEPANSE s d AE TR EOP OVERLAY 1 2 3 4 6 F4 Prompt Overlay name Index text Include in Index Reset numbering Drawer 2 Overlay with index The overlay used for cover page to the report This overlay should only consist of text constants A text for recognition of the front page in the index optional Y Includes the above text in the index Reset continuous numbering This is of no importance unless you have cover pages for other sections in the same report where you want the numbering to be reset A specific drawer th
452. patible printer types and the printertype HP4 should always be used The Interface type used in conjunction with the Prinserter and PFE User s Manual for InterForm400 219 ie WARNING The Finishing definitions will not work with copies If more copies have been defined for the Copy Management defined for the overlay is only supported for the overlay entered in the pop up window when you defined your pre process You can however alternatively use the program PRSCOPY to generate the copies Refer to page 153 for more information 220 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The Reformat finishing definition In InterForm400 you are always limited by the page breaks of the original SCS spooled files You never able to move information from one page to another or to change the height of the page making it possible to print more information on the final output BUT with the Reformat finishing definition things have changed The reformat definition makes it possible to change the page breaks of an SCS spooled file It is intended for SCS spooled files that contains documents for different customers with detail lines The reformat will create a new SCS spooled file with new page numbers within each document rearrange text for each detail line and following text lines and e g even call a user exit program to include advanced calculations for each new detail line In order to create a new Reformat finishing definition y
453. pe Seal envelope FYES NO YES Pages per envelope group 1 Enclosure group l Pages per envelope group 2 Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group 3 Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope group 4 Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group 5 Enclosure group 5 User s Manual for InterForm400 187 Seal envelope Seal envelope with water Pages per envelope Group 1 5 Up to 5 different postage franking groups can be defined Valid values are 1 t0 5 If none of the postage groups are defined all pages will be printed to the upper bin If only the first group is filled in with 5 pages all sets of pages will be inserted into envelopes in the same order as the original spool entry If more postage groups are filled in the original spool entry will be sorted so sets of pages from 1 page to the number of pages defined in group 1 are inserted first Then sets with pages defined in group 1 plus 1 page to the number defined in group 2 are inserted etc If pages for one recipient exceeds the highest page count defined in any group these pages will be printed to the upper bin Any set of pages that exceeds 5 pages excl enclosure will automatically be printed to the upper bin in order to be inserted manually into larger envelopes Enclosure Group 1 5 An enclosure can be defined for each of the groups as this of course affects the weight of the envelope Valid values are O no enclosure
454. pecific drawer the paper for this spool entry should be taken from Default is KOVERLAY specified in the global settings of the overlay User s Manual for InterForm400 261 Link name This field only have to be filled in if you want to use the APFLNK command for printing the report instead of doing it interactively from within the InterForm400 menus 2 Test Print Report Overlays With option 2 Test Print Report Overlays you are able to make a test print of a report composition Print Joint Report APF710D Report name F3 F4 Exit Overview report definitions Report Name Name of report composition in the file set you have open F4 will prompt for overlay names If you type the name of an existing report composition and press Enter you will get a printout consisting of one page per overlay which is associated with this particular report name No data is merged with the overlays 3 Test Print Report 1 Page per Overlay If you choose option 3 Test Print Report 1 Page per Overlay you will be able to make a printout of a report in which only the first page of the individual printouts that constitute the report are printed Apart from the fact that only the first page associated with each overlay comes out the program works in exactly the same way as option 1 Print Report Refer to the next section concerning operation 4 Print Report If you choose option 4 Print Report you will be able to print out
455. per edge 05 060 Line spacing 40 From left edge 000004 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment C ULRCNIBB E Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original _ B blank original version Condition Position a Qus e Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We press Enter to save and proceed with column header No of dev We type 14 to create a new sequence line followed by Field exit and 9 Seqnbr Type 14 0 9 Remap window Input line 28 28 Position _40 53 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing _40 From left edge 000005 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment C ULRCNBE Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original _ B blank original version Condition Position af er IS T sN Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We press Enter to save and proceed with column header License Code We type 15 to create a new sequence line followed by Field exit and 9 Seqnbr Type 15 0 9 Remap window Input line 48 28 Position 54 T0 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing _40 From left edge 000006 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment C ULRCNIBB E Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original _ B blank original version Condition Position um VE ary Is gt lt N Blank after 4 B Blank condition afterF3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We press Enter to
456. ported Disk space required for InterForm400 is 500 Mb not including additional modules e g InterWord400 Interfax400 If you intend to use the InterForm400 Graphical Designer it is required that the OS 400 is version 4 release 5 modification 0 or newer See page 461 for details on the Graphical Designer The printers which are used with the InterForm400 system should be configured as 3812 model 1 non IPDS Auto configuration will on most protocol converters for HP printers or compatibles result in a 5219 device definition This will bring some limitations to the system and if the protocol converter can not be configured to report to the AS 400 as a 3812 device it is recommended to make the device description manually see page 367 and disable auto configuration on the system Only exception to the rule about configuring as a 3812 is when the printer port of a 3197 display station is used In this case the configuration should be for a 4214 First Time Installation The system is delivered on CD ROM It is recommended that you follow the steps described in the Getting Started section on page 21 License Codes The license code can be entered through the menu 50 License Information in the InterForm400 Administration menu To supply you with a license code you need to provide the serial number the model of your iSeries and feature code DSPSYSVAL QPRCFEAT This information can be displayed in menu 50 License Informa
457. previous section and we therefore type 9 to create a new sequence line and we press Field exit fol lowed by type 8 to create a new tabulator Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 T Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 T Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text 3T10 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kongev 0008 8 Tabulator lin 015 015 pos 08 070 left 4 000C font 9907 Seqnbr Type 9 0 8 Tabulator Input Line 18 26 Position 8 80 Print From left edge 4 Adjustment C U L C RNB Font 9903 F4 List Condition Position ENEE Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Again we define a safety margin by stating 80 for maximum position We select a 10 point Univers font for the text We use F18 to find the line interval for the upp And we format the text with a 10 point Univers er part of the body text Congratulations font from the font list We press Enter to save sequence line 9 and type 10 followed by Field exit and 8 to create the next tabulator for the lower part of the body text Design In
458. printed in negative This option is meant to reverse images to normal in relation to 66 Users Manual for InterForm4009 some scanning utilities which saves TIFF reversed Note that performance wise it is better to reverse if necessary during install of the image in InterForm400 refer to page 319 for more information Resolution The resolution by which the image was scanned This option can also be used to scale the image For example an image scanned in 300 dpi can be scaled to double size in the print out by entering 150 here Entering 600 here will cause the same image to be scaled to half size but only if the printer supports a 600 dpi resolution HP4 and compatibles The resolution of 200 dpi is commonly used if the overlay is intended for faxing through the BlueFax fax program also Color Printing When working in a file set defined for color printing the Image settings will have an additional definition for color images The resolution of the color image can be adjusted from the original settings by stating an specific resolution for Horisontal and Vertical values respectively 1 600 DPI If the resolution settings are left blank the original resolution settings of the imported image will be used The Black White image definition is available to facilitate printing of the same overlay both on black and white and color laser printers ie WARNING Note that you can not specify rotation An image always has the orient
459. printer using PING from an AS 400 command line PING RMTSYS 222 5 1 235 5 Creating and changing a queue for printing LPR will automatically create and start a printing program on the AS 400 Alternatively the printing program can be started with the following command STRRMTWTR OUTQ QUSRSYS PRTXXX Attaching through a TN5250E Print Client TN5250E print clients exist incorporated in print server devices and as software in relation to terminal programs like Client Access version 3R2 Intermate A S produces external and internal print servers that connects to the AS 400 via TN5250E Please refer to the User s Guide for details on how to configure such a device User s Manual for InterForm400 371 Testing the Connection In order to test if the connection is working you can print the InterForm400 font list If this list prints properly the connection is working Compare the list with the list in the back of this manual Note that the font list should be printed directly to the output queue where the printer is connected The AUTO FORM sub system does not need to be active If you have other HPIII or HP4 compatible printers in your network you could try printing the font reference to these printers as well Trouble Shooting Missing printout Printer Writers 1 Check that the printer is varied on WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE DEV CFGD PRT 2 Check if the writer is started or if messages are waiting not for LAN attached prin
460. processing all pages your PageBuilder program is called once more having parameter 1 END The parameters of the command are these PAGBLDPGM The PageBuilder program that the command is to call for each page DTAPARM Use this to define each of parameters DATAO1 DATA10 Insert a in the first or last line to insert and define another DATA field Each of the DATA fields are defined like this User s Manual for InterForm4008 407 Find string Type in e g PAGE to transfer the contents of whole spooled file page to the page builder program without the use of DATAO1 DATA10 Use of ANY tells that you do not want to search after any specific text Other values are interpreted as a string to search for in each spooled file page String length The length of the string to search for compare with in Find string Use of STR indicates that you want to use the length of the that string Return length The number of characters to insert in the spooled file from the DATAxx that is returned from the page builder program Minimum maximum line The interval of lines in the spooled file to search for the string If you know what line you want to use just specify this for both Minimum maximum starting position The interval of positions to search in the spooled file for the Find string Pass data from position You can pass some spooled file data from the line where the string of text is found onto the page builder program in
461. pt are subdivided into members The idea is to enable individual users or user groups to maintain their own file sets It is not possible to operate on more than one file set at a time in the system This means for example that all overlays to be used in a particular report must be saved in the same file set as the report definition The program starts with the following screen Work with File sets APF410D Positron EO 4e x4 33 File set Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 9 User access 12 Overlays in file set Opt File set Description m A Files for A x BALT File Set Balt Test I BE Be M BROCK Brock CARMEN Rot file set ae CERDO Cerdo oS COLOR Test of color fileset I CONCORDE Overlays for concorde print c DEMO demo E EURO Overlay for euro m EX EX a FARBEN Farbe druck GARDEN Garden More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel You may now enter the name of the file set you wish to create update or delete Since the file sets in the system are file members they must meet the requirements to member names i e the first character must be within the range A Z The succeeding characters can be A Z underscore 0 9 or blanks with the restriction that blanks may only appear at the end of the name If you press F6 Create you get the following screen Create File set APF411D File set name TST Description Printer class w 1 Black White laser 2 8 Color laser Label printer
462. ption wile 2 x Find inserted sort fields Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position T at 110 119 2 cd 120 2 129 3 p 4 x 5 fx 6 P F3 Exit F12 Cancel In the above entry screen we define in which positions OSC will find the SORT fields which we previously defined An extra feaure is the Page selection criteria where we can define which spool pages should be sorted based on the spool data contents For further information about the page selection criteria see page 212 232 254 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Specify Grouping and separator page Specify grouping and separator page OSC300D Output queue l OSC_OUTQO1 PAPE Oye We se 8 oe oe APF3812 Type choices press Enter Group by number of Bore fields 2 p x mm 2 3 1 1 6 Insert separator page before start of new group Y Y Yes N No A new group occurs when the content of one or more sort fields from sort field one to Group by number of sort fields changes All pages of a group will always be sent to same the output queue F3 Exit F12 Cancel A group is a number of successive pages having identical values in one or more sort fields In the above entry screen specify how many sort values should be included in a group Furthermore specify if you wish a separator page between groups Define resulting ou
463. quired and only minor OS 400 knowledge is needed The final result of the following will print a sample spool entry with a predefined overlay by means of the Auto Forms Control AFC system which is an essential part of the InterForm400 system The result will be printed on a PCL printer of your own choice 1 Preparation 2 Installation Make sure your OS 400 level is at least Version 4 release 4 or newer Refer to System Requirements page 356 Make sure you have QSECOFR rights on the AS 400 or similar with USER CLASS SECOFR authority The user profile used for the install must at least have ALLOBJ SECADM and SPLCTL authorities and must be in the system directory WRKDIRE Make sure you have a PCL4 or PCL5 compatible printer attached either through Twinax direct or through a Terminal or a PC emulator card or a LAN SNA APPC TCP IP LPD Raw Socket port 9100 or TN5250E Any PCL5 Printer configured to use IBM Host Print Transform can be used Refer to Appendix B page 365 for detailed information on attaching printers Note that Laser printers with IPDS as the only language can not be used Now you are ready to install the InterForm400 system from a CD ROM Note Refer to page 357 if you are performing the below steps as an upgrade to an existing InterForm400 installation 1 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive of your AS 400 Enter the following CL command on a command line to install LODRUN DEV Devi ce
464. r 3 Font member name 0 IF OCRB Font member name 90 F3 Exit F4 Prompt PGR332D F4 List 0 A11 symbol sets barcodes only l Roman 8 2 PC 8 DM 3 CodePage8s50 4 CodePage852 5 Baltic 6 CodePage858 7 Cyrillic 8 CylillicEuro 9 1S0 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish A ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek F4 List F4 List F12 Cancel Note that the OCR B font must have font number 3 User s Manual for InterForm400 303 14 The barcode font number 4700 was added automatically earlier and we will get the following updated screen Soft Fonts to be down loaded automatically PGR300 Printer group name PCL Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Update 4 Delete Opt Font number Symbol set Font member 0 Font member 90 0003 3 CodePage850 IF_OCRB 4700 0 All sym set CODE128AAA 5001 3 CodePage850 ARIAL F3 exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel 304 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Step 5 Testing the Barcodes in an Overlay 15 16 We can now try to create an overlay with text constants using the fonts 0003 5001 and 4700 The following example is testing the OCRB font font 3 and the barcode font 4700 only The spool entry used for testing will be the demo spool entry delivered with InterForm400 Refer to section 1 Create Demo Spool Entry on how to print it See page 337 Enter 1 Design Overlay on the main menu and type the name FONTTEST Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overl
465. r 1 negative movement From left edge Inches pels horizontal position of the PCL file is made absolute to the left edge of the paper Horizontal positioning of elements in the PCL file is added to this value Adding a minus after the value will cause a movement to the left e g 1 120 for 1 movement to the left WARNING amp i Note that the system will wrap the HP GL 2 code into a PCL macro when printing and User s Manual for InterForm400 71 S SUBOVERLAY If you are printing general company info in several overlays i e the company letter head it is convenient to place this info in a separate overlay With this function you can place such information in an overlay that can be called as a sub overlay from any other overlays le changing e g the phone number only have to do be done in this overlay Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name Invoice Overlay text Invoice overlay Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type 1 0 S Suboverlay Overlay name COMPINF F3 Exit F12 Cancel The name of the overlay to be used as sub overlay If the name entered here is MACROxxxxx where xxxxx represents a numeric number e g MACROO00001 InterForm400 will make a PCL macro call using this number This will require the PCL macro to be loaded into the printer prior to using the main overlay The PCL file can be loaded into the printer by the InterForm400 HPMACRO command see page 402 416 ie WARNI
466. r Type 1 0 8 Tabulator Input Line _30 _36 Position 30 42 Print From left edge 3 000 Adjustment L U L C RN Font 4700 F4 List Condition Position a Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF Fll Delete F12 Cancel Here we define the characters which should be printed as barcode data and define our barcode font Now exit the forms design window and make a printout using option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay A part of the printout is illustrated in the following figure Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code F45 LLL TELLE 1 81 20 01 3A 320 y A L 3 3F 78 66 99 User s Manual for InterForm400 307 Work with Zebra fonts Fonts and soft fonts which are created installed for PCL or PDF output cannot be used for Zebra output You need to create install special soft fonts for zebra The options below are reached through 7 Work with fonts which can be reached from the InterForm400 Administration Menu Note that the Zebra font menu options are only shown if you have defined a Zebra Label file set in InterForm400 You may notice that the resident fonts on the Zebra printers are limited to 2 different typefaces CG Triumvirate Bold Condenced and Dot Matrix i4 NOTE You can type text in several different codepages on one label You can specify a i4 NOTE Creation of ZPL output for Zebra requires the purchase of the ZPL module for Int
467. r InterForm400 45 Copy Management Copy management is used to define the number of copies one single overlay should produce when triggered The following screen will automatically appear when pressing Enter from the global settings menu where Y is filled in for Copy Management Overlay name Primary set F3 Exit Design InterForm 400 overlay IFA400DEMO Secondary set APF300D Overlay text Demo overlay for InterForm 400 Number of copies of each page INPUT 1 9 VAR 1 9 INPUT VAR F12 Cancel Two sets of copies each consisting of up to 9 copies from a single spool entry can be defined The overlay elements boxes lines images etc used on the primary and the secondary sets can be different according to the definitions of a single overlay See Copy Management page 53 Primary set A value of 1 to 9 copies can be defined By selecting VAR you will be able to define a line and a column number in the spool entry where the desired number of copies are specified This of course requires the application to insert this in the spool entry INPUT will use the COPIES attribute of the original spooled file Notice however that values higher than 9 will be interpreted as 1 When used with Auto Forms Control this set PRI is the default set to be used in 1 Merge with overlay see page 140 Primary set Print line Position Secondary set 46 Users Manual for InterForm4009
468. r s Manual for InterForm400 399 Appendix I InterForm400 CL Commands NetServer Commands The Add Netserver File Share Command The APF3812 ADDFILSHR command can be used for sharing objects on the AS 400 It can e g be used for sharing the QDLS as below Add NetServer File Share ADDFILSHR Type choices press Enter Share name QDLS Name Giro E QDLS Text descriptubonj zoe cue Geode cu ODLS Data authorities RW R RW Maximum users NOMAX Number NOMAX The Add NetServer Printer share Command With the APF3812 ADDPRTSHR command you can share a printer on the AS 400 Add NetServer Printer share ADDPRTSHR Type choices press Enter Share name Name Output queue Name LZDEZaEy A Xt xx e et ek LIBL Name LIBL Text description xe lx v OUTO Print r drivers5 vox RD HP LaserJet III Spooled file type USERASCII USERASCII AFP SCS The printer driver is default HP LaserJet IIl and describes a printer driver to use when installing this printer on e g a PC The Change Netserver Attributes Command The APF3812 CHGNETSVRA command can change the netserver name and domain of the AS 400 Related commands DSPNETSVRA STRNETSVR ENDNETSVR and the netserver share commands ADDFILSHR ADDPRTSHR and RMVNETSHR The Display Netserver Attribu
469. r that refers to this overlay through an if then line Overlays referring to the overlay with function S2Suboverlay are listed with SUBOVL User s Manual for InterForm400 339 Information inserted in autodownload will also be listed Here you will be able to see what soft font is downloaded with what font number and in which printer group s this is defined It will also list all user exit programs referenced and list each place where they are referenced 9 Work with Journaling The import function see page 343 and the graphical designer see page 461 of InterForm400 requires journaling active for some files in the APF3812 library We recommend that you keep the default journal APFJRN in the InterForm400 library APF3812 If you wish to use an existing journal type in the name and library of the journal If you do not want to use a journal leave these fields blank Notice In order to undo changes made by the import function the journal receivers has to be on the system at the time of the undo Journal menu JRNOO1D Select one of the following options 1 Start journaling files in InterForm library APF3812 2 End journaling files in InterForm library APF3812 3 Delete journal and receivers in InterForm library APF3812 Option _ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel 340 Users Manual for InterForm4009 21 Export of InterForm400 resources This option is to enable users in distributing InterForm400 resour
470. r type Output queue TEMPLATE __ Library M A vede veo QGPL InterForm 400 printer type HP4 PJL___ Interface 4 sg Wed urs ASCII850 Optional template AFC definition to be executed after this definition Output queue Library F3 Exit F4 Prompt F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 167 We will create a simple AFC entry for this AFC definition where we want to merge the spool files with Form Type DEMO with overlay IFA00DEMO and send the resulting print to the DEFAULT output queue as follows Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Output queue TEMPLATE Library ue QGPL Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 1 0 1 Form type DEMO Save attribute Jobname B uu Spooled file name Device file IST ue onte ect Program that opened file Library deo hv er queer Cur Care C 0 ieee itt e ane F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel We will define that the print should be directed to the Default output queue Seqnbr Function 1 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print DEFAULT Libca y dox IL x ox x InterForm 400 printer type Interface UAR TUR UTE opt es Merge overprint lines NO NO YES Find overlay in forms type
471. rallel output from 3197 display station Parallel output from 3477 display station Parallel output from 348n display station IDA3X IDA5219 and IDA812 protocol converters All INTERMATE 5250 interfaces other 5219 compatible 5250 interfaces TokenRing 4033 OS 400 V3R1 using LexLink protocol Any TCP IP LPD compatible LAN print server OS 400 V3R1 TCP IP Raw Socket LAN print servers supporting bi directional PJL communication As a guideline the printer device should be configured on the AS 400 as a 3812 model 1 printer type non IPDS The exception is attachment via a 3197 display station This should be configured on the AS 400 as a 4214 printer see also System requirements SYSTEM A printer type setting valid for e g Intermate Twinax interfaces This selection translates overlay text into Roman8 ASCII code and implies that the protocol converter is configured for conversion of EBCDIC into ASCII Romana SYSTEM850 The recommended printer type setting valid for e g Intermate Twinax interfaces This selection translates overlay text into PC850 ASCII code and implies that the protocol converter is configured for conversion of EBCDIC into ASCII PC850 Note that if the attributes of a spool file indicate code page 870 Eastern Europe System852 will automatically be selected for conversion of this spool file SYSTEM852 Same as above but for Latin2 character set Eastern Europe ASCIIR8 Transforms EBCDIC data into transparent PCL
472. ram BPSAMP INVOICE NO 10 10 1 80 51 51 specification of DATA01 Value will be INVOICE NO or blank if not found in line 1 80 position 51 Length 10 characters Length 10 characters when returned from the program BPSAMP ANY 9911 11 12 12 specification of DATAO2 ANY indicate whatever found in line 11 position 12 Pass 9 characters to program BPSAMP Return 9 characters from program BPSAMP i4 NOTE 4 The DATAO1 DATA10 parameters can be used for searching for a specific text in the PageBuilder program parameters Lm CRTPBSPLF call option STR PAG or END ia Value from the APPIDPARM keyword V O DATAO2 input from spool file DTAPARM 12 O DATA10 input from spool file DTAPARM V O DATAO 1 input from spool file DTAPARM For examples of sources for a Page Builder Program see member PAGBLDPGM and PAGBLDPGM in source file APF3812 APISRC PAGBLDPGN 2 illustrates how to use the PAGE option The Convert PCL Spooled File Command The APF3812 CVTPCLSPLF command converts a PCL spool file to a SCS spool file This command has been created mainly for converting J D Edwards OneWorld spool files to SCS making it possible to merge the spool file in InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm4006 409 Convert PCL Spooled File CVTPCLSPLF Type choices press Enter Spooled file FILE Name WOW wiame dou o ut un Y to shel a LT ir cde JOB Name USGI x
473. rarpteolu e ee Ge Ser the See us Our first Prinserter definition Pages per envelope VAR VAR 1 5 Plape size mms eek woke eo 40 36 61 Seal envelope YES NO YES Pages per envelope group 1 _ Enclosure group l Pages per envelope group 2 Enclosure group 2 Pages per envelope group 3 Enclosure group 3 Pages per envelope group 4 gt Enclosure group 4 Pages per envelope group 5 Enclosure group 5 F3 Exit F12 Cancel Definition name Referred to by the sub system function CzPrepare for Finishing Pages per envelope Define VAR Variable for Pages per envelope When Enter is pressed the above screen will appear Now fill in Flap size mm Flap size of the Envelope measured in millimetres as the widest point of the envelope flap This is mainly important in connection with sealing Seal envelope Seal envelope with water User s Manual for InterForm400 183 Pages per envelope Group 1 5 Up to 5 different postage franking groups can be defined Valid values are 1 to 5 If none of the postage groups are defined all pages will be printed to the upper bin If only the first group is filled in with 5 pages all sets of pages will be inserted into envelopes in the same order as the original spool entry If more postage groups are filled in the original spool entry will be sorted so sets of pages from 1 page to the number of pages defined in group 1 are inserted first Then sets with pages
474. rary to create an empty import library Work with import of InterForm 400 resources IMPORTD System INTERO2 Version 2002 M01 Select one of the following Create empty APFIMPORT import library Receive distribution into import library Work with resources in import library Move resources to production library Delete the APFIMPORT import library OO 0 NDP oo Start journaling 9 Work with changes Option EL F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel After the import library has been created use option 2 to receive the distribution into the library Select the required method for receiving the distribution Work with resources in import library Upon having received the relevant InterForm400 resources you will be able to see the various resources in the import library by using option 3 Work with resources in import library Before transferring the resources in the import library to the production library you MUST start Journaling This gives you the possibility of undoing the import Note that if a resource i e a overlay called INVOICE is imported and a overlay also called INVOICE already exists this will be overwritten without further notice Journaling can be started by the option 8 Journaling in the Import menu If you should regret an Import to the production library use the option 9 Work with changes Here you can also see and roll back any change of overlays upl
475. rator page e g stating 3 will insert a separator page if one or more characters changes within any of the intervals defined in sort field number 1 to 3 The separator page will additionally list the contents of each sort field Pressing Enter will bring up the following screen Work with Sort Definition Details SOR320D Definition name PETER Start with a Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Seqnbr Description No sort definition details F6 to create End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new definition More definitions can be created but is only relevant if the Page Selection criteria is used User s Manual for InterForm400 231 Create Sort Definition Details SOR330D Definition name DEMO Sequence number v Description x cud ok Sort by Customer ID Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find sort fields in the following positions Sort field no Print line Position Ascending Descending 1 A D A D A D A D A D A D F3 Exit F12 Cancel Nu Ff WD Page Selection criteria The page selection criteria should only be used if the same spool entry contains more than one page layout This could be the case if a spool entry contains invoices and credit notes and the customer ID intended for use as sort field is placed in different l
476. referred to when creating font numbers using this soft font 9 Download This function gives you the possibility of downloading soft fonts to HP printers or printers emulating a HP printer via AS 400 spool entries The following screen is shown User s Manual for InterForm400 283 Create spool entry to download of soft font FNT700D PONESTO Lxx EAE 0001 9999 Description Place into Flash Memory E 0 No 1 HP Flash memory option 2 Lexmark Flash memory option 3 File system for HP5 HP4000 F3 Exit F4 Prompt Font member Type the file member name from the APF3812 FONT file in the field Font member Font id Must be given a number in the interval 0001 9999 It is used to manage more than one soft font in the printer simultaneously l e if you download a font with an ID that is already used by another down loaded font in the printer it is replaced with the new font Otherwise there are no restrictions to the id number Description The text you enter in this field is used as user data on the spool entry that is output from this program Place into flash memory This feature works on any HP laser printer or Lexmark laser printer 4039 and Optra equipped with an optional Flash SIMM module or Harddisk contact your local printer supplier for further information When using this method the font will not disappear when powering off the printer Output from this program is a spool entry with HOLD YES
477. ributions made Use F6 to create a new distribution Create Distribution EXP610D Type choices press Enter Suffix Description Create ty cos a ae a d 1 Savefile only 2 Savefile and PC file Notice When you create a distribution all the current resources in the export library are copied to a savefile named EXPORT xxx where xxx is the suffix If you create a document a PC file based on a distribution it will be placed in the folder APF3812 having the same name and content as the savefile The content of a distribution can not be changed later F3 Exit F12 Cancel 342 Users Manual for InterForm4009 You have the possibility of choosing conversion to a save file only or both a save file and a PC file The suffix you enter is a way for you to separate the distribution from other already created distributions After you have entered the details for a particular distribution a save file will be created in the APFEXPORT library and optionally a PC file will be added to the APF3812 folder You can now locate the export PC file in the APF3812 folder with file name export xxx This file can be send by e mail to your consultant or to another InterForm400 site d NOTE It is possible to operate with more than one export import library at a time Refer to 22 Import of InterForm400 Resources Use this option to import InterForm400 resources Select option 1 Create empty APFIMPORT import lib
478. rinted without further processing by InterForm4005 we define an Exit in a new sequence line We type 2 and press Field Exit Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC INPUT2 jore a NEC S APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 F Change writer OUTQ Form type STD Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 2 0 9 BOP HDOEVDS Qu ge Tr ee re qe a ee qoo qe So qoc SIT Save attribute Jobname epera Spooled file name Device file Librtarty iae g a C T Program that opened file Library ud rione d d e Be n A F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel 162 Users Manual for InterForm400 By function 9 EXIT we define that all spool files with form type STD should not be processed further by any sequence line after this Step 5 Defining the Overlay Merge Now we want to define the merge of our demo spool entry with our overlay IFAO0DEMO We enter sequence line 3 and press Field Exit We enter form type DEMO as the criteria for executing the move operation and we press Enter Update AFC functions attatched to output queues Output queus s r lx A AFC INPUT2 Diba ty E A e fe i e triss APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file 0001 F Change writer OUTQ Form type STD 0002 9 STD Exit 3 0 1 Porm CY DOs a ke Mieke Rio Mt ei A A ce et e DEEMO Save attribute Jobname sh
479. rinters to the iSeries 365 Attachment Methods 0 0c ccc e 365 Attaching through a Twinax Protocol Converter 365 System Configuration by Auto Configuration 365 Configuring a Printer Device Manually lusus 366 Changing Device Description from 5219 to 3812 367 Attaching through a TCP IP Raw Socket Port 9100 3700 368 Attaching through a 5250 Terminal 00000 e eee eee eee 368 Enabling Host Print Transform on an existing Printer Device Description hou dde Sh Grane donload diapers wth de pee ai ume tat 369 Attaching through a PC Printer Port 0 000 c eee eee eee 369 Client Access 400 for Windows 95 NT 0000 eee eee 369 Attaching through a TCP IP LPD Printer Server Remote Writer 370 Creating or Changing an Output Queue for TCP IP LPD Printing 370 Attaching through a TN5250E Print Client 0 00 e eee 371 Testing the Connection 0 000 cee eee 372 Trouble Shooting 0 00 c eects 372 Black and white printer types llle 374 Color printer types 7 oxoesive vu RE eR REGE Pde UTR ee 375 Zebra printer types cor sex ee SERLO San RS E Seen sie 375 Cassette Mapping Drawers 0 00 ccc eee 376 Selecting drawer by drawer number 0 000e0 eee 376 Select Drawer using Paper Type 0 000 cece ae 376 Appendix D Int
480. ription m ool Customer Name Max outputlength 30 1 40 Variable type X 6 wo Sx 1 1 Spooled printinfo 2 Spoolfile attribute 3 Auto numerator 4 Date 5 Time 6 System environment info 7 User exit F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel The variable can by of various types Spooled print info Contains information from the contents of the spooled file Refers to text in a certain line and interval of positions Size can be up to 40 characters Spoolfile attribute Can be any of these values 1 Unique spoollD 40 2 Spoolname 3 Spoolno 4 Jobname 5 Owner 6 Jobno 7 Formtype 8 Userdata 9 Programm name A Program library Auto numerator A counter that increases each time a certain break occours You can state The number of digits to use If it should be fixed in length FIXED or if preceding blank signs should be removed TRIM What to do if counter value exceeds the highest value allowed 1 Wrap means start from the initial value again and 2 Error means that the AFC job will halt with an error The increment value for the numerator The level of the numerator SYS TASK SPOOL TASKKEY KEY SYS One common numerator for InterForm400 TASK A numerator for this finishing definition SPOOL It is reset for each new incoming spooled file TASKKEY A numerator within this task finishing definition that increases each time the key s change KEY Like TASKKEY except this works acr
481. rm 400 file set KARTSET Character value Overlay name KLICHE Character value or Overlay Selector name SELNAM Character value Primary Secondary set VRSION PRI PRI SEC Spool d file o ete we FILNVN NONE ame NONE OW AMS us Cur Cue Cor Mor eC Corm te JOB ame USE e Wu MEI META TTA SET ame dob Sumber 4 2 2 4 304 00 X303 000000 999999 Spooled file number SPLNBR ONLY_ umber ONLY LAST Codes pages a wong Ss CODPAG INPUT umber INPUT Color SUPOTE xo 5 ux COLORSUP YES YES NO Bookmark definition name BMKDEF NONE ame NONE Signature Certificate CERTIFIC NONE ame NONE Output Cype wx oc eS ee eX OUTTYPE STMF_ STMF EMAIL VIEW OLS 0 0 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter To stream file a amp e IOSTIMP Filenaming definition name NAMEDEF NONE Name NONE Replace stream file REPLACE NO NAMEDEF NO YES TO attachment 4 4 eae oe s TOATTACH More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys User s Manual for InterForm400 349 Merge spooled file and overlay MRGSPLFPDF Type choices press Enter To e mail address TOADR Name 4 4 s we se NONE Subject ur ey c
482. roduct capable of delivering an output for a HP page printer PCL4 5 or 5e compatible The following are examples of products which have been tested MS Windows 3 xx 95 Write MS Windows 3 xx 95 Paintbrush Word Perfect DOS and Windows MS Word DOS and Windows MS Publisher Aldus PageMaker CorelDraw Forms Designer Professional JetForm V3 0 and V4 0 It is recommended to work with applications making use of PCL drawing text commands etc instead of just creating a large PCL bit image The PCL driver must correspond to the AS 400 attached printer intended for using the overlay We recommend to use an original HP driver even though your printer is another brand Non HP drivers sometimes include native commands which will appear in the print out on genuine HP printers or other HP compatible printers No matter how many pages the PC print consist of only the first page is stored This is due to the fact that the PC print is intended to be a part of an overlay for use on only one page The program cleans the PC print for unwanted control codes such as form feed tray selections and printer reset When the PC print has been read into a member in the PCL file it can be used in design of an overlay when selecting overlay element F PCL file When selecting option 9 Work With PCL Files on the InterForm400 administration menu you will get the following screen User s Manual for InterForm400 325 Work Select one of 1 Wor
483. rom the parameters specifying the actual size and security level Line separator With this you can state if line breaks of the SCS spooled file text should be ignored specify NONE or what character should be included in the PDF417 barcode to represent the line breaks found Blank CR Carriage Return CRLF Carriage Return and Line Feed and NONE are the possible values Escape code character This parameter has been included in order to make it possible to insert specific ASCII characters specified by the hexadecimal value State a special character here and when this is found in the text to be printed as PDF417 barcode the next two characters are interpreted as the hexadecimal value for the ASCII character to be inserted instead If you e g use T as the escape code character the text JOA will be printed as the ASCII character having the hexadecimal value 0A This option make it possible to print PDF417 barcodes for e g the GM 1724 A B C Label standard used in the automotive industry 294 Users Manual for InterForm4009 You use the PDF417 font number by remapping a window of text When you specify a PDF417 font number you are prompted for a Maximum line width and Maximum line height You are expected to specify only one of them Normally you would probably use a maximum line width and let the height vary with the variable amount of characters to be converted but a maximum line height has been added to meet requ
484. round BLACK Background UNALTERED 0019 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 08 014 top 5 100 left 2 000 C 0020 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 15 025 top 5 100 left 3 000 C 0021 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 26 039 top 5 100 left 4 000 C 0022 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 40 053 top 5 100 left 5 000 C 0023 9 Remap window 30 042 pos 54 070 top 5 100 left 6 000 C Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 18 1 1 Frame Top edge 05 110 Move right Left edge 01 120 Move down 0 080 Right edge 06 116 Extra times cu Bottom edge 05 150 Thikness in pels 000 NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S S Radius Fill pattern B F4 List F3 Exit F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel We want the shaded frames to be 1 6 thick with a distance of 1 6 between First we must find out where to place the first frame We want to place our first frame behind every second item line starting with item line number two This means 0 175 240x0 175 42 pels lower than the black frame We see that the black frame sequence 94 Users Manual for InterForm4009 line 11 ends 5 068 from the top We add 42 pels to 5 068 and get 5 110 We state the same values for left and right edge as the black frame and define the thicknes of our frame to be 1 6 40 240 by adding 40 to the top edge We do not want a border only a raster filling and therefore we leave this blank But we will have a light shading and we enter the value B which is a light 600dpi pattern For the repeated frames we must first state the
485. rt ETT Print chart PRCH 01 i 2 a z o Distance to paper left edge INPEL Description Prints a chart 458 User s Manual for InterForm400 Appendix N Sending E mails from the AS 400 InterForm400 can be used for sending email using the OS 400 SMTP feature To email spooled files as attached PDF files do one of the following 1 Sending a complete merged spooled file as an attached PDF file in an E mail For that purpose you would probably use the APF3812 MRGSPLFPDF command Refer to page 349 and 410 for more information 2 Send a complete spooled file having a program generated front page The Spooled file must have PAGERANGE 2 n where n Any number or END The e mail front page must include lines with each of these keywords in any sequence Pos 20 30 Keyword FROMADR FROMNAME TOADR TONAME SUBJECT ATTACH MSG up to 10 lines can be used Positions from 31 to 286 are used for the value of each keyword except MSG For MSG the text must be placed from position 31 to 106 This is an example of a front page ossi Datei lee ete a aca flO late de e Be a tha due e cete Ede oie slates De eoe feta doh pe te de pat eei e petal Te fate deed rete ee Pon n To e mail adr TOADR kse intermate com Name TONAME Kim Egekjaer Subject SUBJECT This is the e mail subject E mail text MSG Up to 10 lines of e mail text This is line 1 Second MSG l
486. rt Description DEMOSALES Demo of Bar chart SAMP LEBAR Sample bar chart SAMPLELINE Sample line chart End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fll View 2 F12 Cancel Pressing F11 will result in an alternative display as seen below where the size of the charts is displayed Status is PARTIAL if the setup of the chart is not complete Pressing F11 again will alternate between the two displays Work with Chart definitions CHA100D Position EO 2 2 4 4 Chart Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print chart Opt Chart Type Chart heig Chart widt Status o DEMOSALES BAR 4 000 4 000 SAMP LEBAR BAR 4 000 4 000 SAMPLELINE LINE 7 000 7 000 PARTIAL End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fll View 2 F12 Cancel If a chart is complete it is possible to printout the chart using option 6 Print chart The chart will be printed out on the default output queue for the current job 436 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Press F6 to create a new chart Create Chart definition CHA110D Chart EE yo BAR LINE Description F3 Exit F12 Cancel Chart The name of the chart which is been created Type Write BAR for a Bar chart and LINE for a Line chart Description Description of chart not printed After entering the parameters above and pressing Enter the Create Chart definition display is shown Create Chart definition CHA300D Chart 2 4 ee 4 4 Be cd MYBAR EVDO
487. s a line Same as type 4 Line refer to page 56 Inserts a frame Refer to page 54 Tabulator Mark first the area of text on the input view that you want to tabulate and then mark the place where it should be printed Refer to page 61 for more information Remap window Mark the window of text that you want to remap in the input view and where to place it in the result view See page 63 for more information If Then Mark the area for the condition in the input view On the If Then option you will see these icons next to the conditioned suboverlay Insert an existing overlay as the overlay to call for this condition Clear the reference to the suboverlay does not delete the actual suboverlay 3 Creates a new suboverlay to be called by the If Then 7 pressing this icon When remapping spooled file contents in a conditioned overlay you should use the Conditional view instead of Input view When finished editing this return to the main overlay by selecting File and Close current overlay or by ES ressing this icon in the toolbar p ae fy Bi When you have selected a conditioned overlay you can edit it by L Note the Remap condition parameters in the bottom Until another is true is default disabled and the number of spooled files lines transferred to the conditioned overlay is 0 Refer to page 67 for more information of the zIf Then function Suboverlay Inserts an unconditioned suboverlay Ref
488. s can increase the time to download the merged spool files to printers If printing multiple pages the system makes extensive use of PCL macros which are stored in the printer and called for all pages in the spool entry If a paper jam occurs and the printer loose its resources the macros will be placed in the printer again as the spool entry is released again When using imported PC forms PCL files see page 325 it will be the application producing the PCL file which is decisive for the size Imported PCL files will also be loaded as PCL macros as described above Processing It is difficult to calculate the exact processor time consumption of the system In general the most process demanding operations of the system is to calculate right adjustment of proportional spaced fonts and complex conditional search routines Adding overlay elements like frames lines images and PCL files requires a minimum of processing j When importing TIF images then convert the file to PCL5 It will print out quicker and can then also be used for PDF output If the imported image needs to be reversed then User s Manual for InterForm400 363 364 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Appendix B Attaching Printers to the iSeries This chapter provides information on how to configure the physical attachment of HP compatible Laser printers to your AS 400 network Note Below it is proposed to change the system value QAUTOCFG This change may ca
489. s there a message on the printer e g a request to change the forms iA Reply G to such messages You can enter queue AFC_OUT1 from the InterForm400 main menu by selecting option 10 Work with output queue from the main menu Q Is the sub system AUTO FORM active and is the AFC job AFC_INPUT1 started iA Check the sub system by entering WRKACTJOB more info page 133 247 Q Do the spool entry in queue AFC_INPUT1 have status READY iA Try to HOLD the spool entry in queue AFC_INPUT1 and release it again the AFC TROUBLE SHOOTING PRINT IS GARBLED Q Is the printer type chosen in InterForm400 matching your printer same PCL level A Your printer must be at least HPII compatible so try defining this printer type in InterForm400 More info on printer types page 374 Instead of printing the document you can use the SwiftView PCL viewer delivered with i the InterForm400 Refer to Appendix L PCL Viewing SwiftView for information on i4 NOTE When you merge a spooled file in InterForm400 make sure that the first line in the spooled file containing text does not include characters in position 300 or above These 30 Users Manual for InterForm4009 5 About The Print Results Maybe you noticed that page 2 4 was printed slightly faster than page 1 The reason is that the overlay is loaded into the printer as a macro at the beginning of the spool entry and is being called from the printer memory on pa
490. s will affect what you see in the graphical design and when you preview the result in SwiftView and Acrobat Reader Designing for 203 or 300 DPI For Zebra overlays only The printed ZPL result depends on if you run a 203 or 300 dpi printer 7 Click this icon to change the resolution view so that it fits that of the printer Debugging the design i Press this icon to disable a design element This can be used e g to QJ solve problems with conditions that does not execute as you thought Disabling enabling the spooled file Press this icon to temporarily disconnect connect the spooled file and L2 view the overlay without any spooled file text Flipping through the pages of the spooled file On the right side of the tool bar you will see this 7 b This can be used for flipping through the pages of the merged spooled file and e g looking at the merged result page by page You can drag in the pointer press the arrows to flip through the spooled file or type a specific page number that you want to look at 466 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The tool bar changes its function If you activate copy management you can use this to see each of the resulting copies P1 denotes e g the first primary copy version of the output If you use an If Then line and you transfer 1 or more lines onto the conditioned overlay then you can press the Conditional tab in the input view When looking at the conditional tab you can use th
491. s will allow you to verify the changes you make on the screen 80 Users Manual for InterForm4009 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING i No printout select option 10 to view your output queue Are there any messages Is Step 3 Entering the Design Window Now we will enter menu 1 Design overlay again MYDEMO is still remembered and we press Enter until we get the design window Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 T Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text T10 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kongev Seqnbr Type F3 Exit F5 Service F12 Cancel Here we have a list of the overlay elements we copied from the original IFA0O0DEMO overlay User s Manual for InterForm400 81 Step 4 Printing the Overlay Definition List Print out a list of the definitions by pressing F5 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 ab Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08
492. sage Found previous unsaved overlay Movement of elements in the result view When you want to move an element you can do either of these things Move the mouse pointer to the element in the result view The element lights up in green Click left or right mouse button to select the element Now you can drag by holding the button down the element to the new position Note that the element snaps to the grid making it easy to align more elements Find the element on the list on the right and type in the new position in inches and pels Mark an element with the mouse and now you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the element The element will move 10 pels 1 24 of an inch each time you press an arrow key Combine the arrow keys with Ctrl to move 80 pels 1 3 of an inch at a time or combine the arrow keys with Shift to move the elements just 1 pel at a time Note that this movement is independent of the grid l 6 WARNING amp If you move a group while the grid is active all the elements of the group will snap to the 474 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Grouping and ungrouping elements You can group several elements in order to reposition them all in one process Note that you can only create one current group You can group elements together in the following manners By holding down the Ctrl key and marking each element in the element listing to the left of the screen By holding down the
493. scribed in example 3 but you are sending out letters to customers and these letters have only customer information on the first page for each customer The setup of the primary functions of Output Schedule Control is managed by selecting menu option 6 from the main menu The same menu can be entered directly by the program call CALL APF3812 O0SCADM The menu appears like this 246 Users Manual for InterForm4009 InterForm 400 Output Schedule Control System INTEROZ Workstn ID IF400_PDC2 Select one of the following options User ID POULD 1 Functions attached to Output Queues 10 Start OSCCTL subsystem server 11 End OSCCTL subsystem and server 12 Work with OSCCTL subsystem Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel 10 Start OSCCTL subsystem Output Schedule Control is running as an ordinary AS 400 sub system and therefore has to be started as such It is a good idea to let the sub system start automatically at IPL This is done by inserting the following command in your startup program STRSBS SBSD APF3812 0SCCTL MONMSG CPF0000 Of course you can always start the sub system manually by the command STRSBS APF3812 OSCCTL 11 End OSCCTL subsystem Before making upgrades the OSCCTL subsystem should be ended This can be done in the menu or by the command ENDSBS SBS OSCCTL OPTI ON I MMED 12 Work with Active Subsystem OSCCTL This menu item is a shortcut to the comma
494. se sensitive ora number entered in the following field lt Less than a number entered in the following field N Not equal to a number or a text string case sensitive or a number entered in the following field A Acceptable characters All the characters in marked interval must be one of the characters in the following field U Unacceptable characters None of the characters in the marked interval must be one of the characters in the following field See page 66 for a tip on use of gt and lt The name of the overlay to be used as sub overlay If the name entered here is MACROxxxxx where xxxxx represents a numeric number e g MACROO0001 InterForm400 will make a PCL macro call using this number This will require the PCL macro to be loaded into the printer prior to using the main overlay The PCL file can be loaded into the printer by the InterForm4009 HPMACRO command see page 402 416 This parameter is used to pass on a line interval to a sub overlay which can process the lines with Remap Windows or Tabulator commands The first line of the interval will be the line defined by Input line of the line interval and will be regarded as line 1 in the sub overlay i e the sub overlay will consider the interval as a virtual spool entry to process Defining VAR for this function will cause this If then command to continue checking all lines starting from the beginning of the input line interval until another If the
495. se type 4 Lh etude ge JOCA Test Licensed modules Primary language GB Journal s s e ela ele r a s APFJRN TASB DY uo Ww x l wx E APF3812 Installation method l Rename without warning SURXL AR ssp ne xp Ge peed Se ps gm l Start subsystem Current version 2003 M525 E Dray Sd decRope ox pxpow pe OE APF3812 Press F10 to install F3 Exit F10 Start installation F12 Cancel Note If you had any spooled files in any output queues in the library APF3812 before the update took place these spooled files will now reside in output queues in library APF3812OLD having the same name as the original output queues User s Manual for InterForm400 361 You should keep the old InterForm400 library APF3812OLD on the System until you are sure that you have tested that everything operates to your satisfaction with the new version of InterForm4009 Upgrade remote sites You can upgrade InterForm400 on another AS 400 from your local machine as follows On the local machine restore the library APF3812NEW Restoring from the CD ROM drive RSTLIB SAVLI B APF3812NEW DEV OPTO1 OPTFILE APFRI SC Distribute the library to the remote AS 400 s and execute the following command from the command line APF3812NEW APF3812NEW amp WARNING 6 i The command APF3812NEW will delete all overlays in file set SAMPLE and copy new sample overlays into this file set If you have created overlays in file
496. section Define Level Break Conditions 194 Users Manual for InterForm400 How to distribute E mails and faxes in InterForm400 Setup of E mailing is done in three steps 1 Create a new type of finishing Definition Type 05 E mail This splits up the spool file depending on the spool file page data and places details in the User Defined Data field 2 Insert execution of the e mail Finishing Definition in Auto Forms Control 3 Insert execution of function P Send PDF E mail in Auto Forms Control Note that the E mail Fax finishing definition can send both e mail and faxes in one procedure Faxing requires purchase of InterFax If both a fax number and an e mail is found in the spooled file or returned via a program for one customer then InterForm400 will use the e mail address If the field for the e mail address is blank InterForm400 will look for a fax number id NOTE In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF module or the classic The E mail Fax Finishing Definition You can work with the finishing functions if you from the InterForm400 main menu choose 5 Work with Auto Forms Control and 4 Finish Definitions You can now add a new finishing Definition by pressing F6 Create Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name DEMO Descrrptrom xoxo Bee Sos Distribution of the Demo spool file Type of Finishing 05 01 Prinserter 02 Stapling per Recipient 03 Prepare for inserting 04 P
497. sed for the inserted pages the next screen must be filled in The Prinserter definition will then check the overlay for the number of pages defined in Copy Management User s Manual for InterForm400 181 Create Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name PRINS Description Already during the Prepare for Finishing function the System has to know the number of copies of the individual page If a succeeding merge with overlay function uses copy management you will have to tell here which overlay will be used during the merge function Overlay name File set Or Selector name r Primary Secondary set PRI SEC F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel F3 Exit F12 Cancel Now enter the fixed number of pages that should go into the envelope If an enclosure is required this is included in this number Update Finishing Definition PRS310D Definition name TESTDEF Description Mailing 4 pages per envelope Type of Finishing 01 Prinserter Pages per envelope 4 VAR 1 5 Enclosure ss N NO YES Flap size mm 36 61 Seal envelope NO YES F3 Exit F12 Cancel Definition name Referred to by the AFC function C Prepare for Finishing Pages per envelope State a fixed set of pages e g by stating 4 will produce 10 envelopes from a 38 page spool entry When Description and Pages per envelope are filled in pressing Enter will bring up the scr
498. see other informations of the users by pressing F11 View2 and you can add remove access to file sets with option 9 File set access When adding a user profile by pressing F6 you will be prompted to enter language and printer information for the user Create InterForm user APF102D User profile KSE Language of user GB DE DK ES FR GB Users output queue PRTO1 LID rary oe 19 xxx QUSRSYS Printer type HP4D_PJL__ IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 HPII HPIID HPIIP HPIII HPIIID HPIIIP HP4 HP4D HP4_PJL HP4D_PJL HP5C HP4500 HP4500D ZEBRA203 ZEBRA300 Interface ASCII850 SYSTEM SYSTEM850 SYSTEM852 ASCIIR8 ASCII850 ASCII852 WORKSTN WS31NN WS347N WS348N IDA3X IDA5219 IDA812 If output queue printer type are left blank then InterForm 400 system standard default values will be used F3 Exit F12 Cancel The language of the user will affect the menus in InterForm400 If left blank the default language of the installation as entered in 2 Configure InterForm 400 will be used Refer to page 271 It is not necessary to define an output queue a printer type and an interface type If left blank the definitions from 2 Configure InterForm 400 described on page 268 will be used Refer to page 378 for detailed information on printer types and interfaces 272 Users Manual for InterForm4009 5 Work with file sets The files in which overlay and report definitions are ke
499. ser data xeu 0 User data SAME Restart with sequence no 1 E X N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel With this you can change FORMTYPE or USRDATA attributes of the input spool entry The idea of changing the form type is the requirement for a spool entry which has been processed under e g the overlay name INVOICE to be run through the statements defined for the overlay SHIPPING If the original spool entry had form type Invoice a sequence line 1 Merge with InterForm400 overlay would have made one printout After this sequence line you change the forms type of the original spool entry to Shipping which will cause another 1 Merge with InterForm400 overlay to add the SHIPPING overlay and produce a new print out Form Type The new form type assigned to the original input spool entry User data The text description attached to a spool entry when viewing an output queue Changing of USRDTA will normally only be done to User s Manual for InterForm400 147 indicate that a spool entry has been processed B Split spooled file Seqnbr Function n O B Split spooled file Split definition name F3 Exit F4 prompt Fll Delete F12 Cancel This function is used to split a spooled file into several separate spool files which can be processed independently A Split definition must exist before this function can be selected See Split definitions on page 173 for more information ie WARNING amp Make sure that y
500. sers Manual for InterForm4009 Getting familiar with PDF Bookmarks In order to demonstrate how to insert PDF bookmarks we will go through the process necessary to insert these bookmarks when creating a PDF file based on the InterForm400 demo spooled file EHA Cust No 1004 EHA Zip 9000 City Battleaxe DS Att Martin Merman EHA Cust No 1001 E DS Zip 4000 City Marigold A Att Susan Sunflower DS Att Wolly Weed EDS Cust No 1003 EHD Zip 4000 City Marigold DS Att Archie Acorn The idea is that the first level contains information of the customer number Each customer could have subsidaries in different cities so level 2 refers to each zipcode and city Level 3 finally points out each contact person for each subsidary Refer to page 337 for information of the demo spooled file and how to create it From the InterForm400 main menu select 5 Work with Auto Forms Control and 6 PDF bookmark definitions followed by F6zCreate to start creating a new PDF bookmark definition Create PDF Bookmark definition BMK310D Bookmark definition name DEMOSPOOL Description s ox x s Bookmarks for the Demo Spooled File Display bookmarks at open 1 0 No 1 Yes Above we have stated a name and description for the definition and decided that the bookmarks should be visible when opening the PDF file later Press Enter to proceed Here you will see a list of bookmark detail lines that is empty Press F6 Create to create a new seque
501. snss 117 8 Select File Set s vooP rie Slo ein m s Ri eI e Saeed sre eed 119 9 Select Output Queue and Printer Type 2 00 0 eee eee eee 120 10 Work with actual Output Queue 26 es 120 Working with Overlay Selectors llle 122 Selection Criteria Entries lee ee 123 Getting Familiar with Overlay Selectors 126 Step 1 Placing overlays in One File set 0 0 0 0 cece eee 126 Step 2 Examining Spool Entry Selection Criteria 000 128 Step 3 Entering the Selection Criterias in the Selector 129 Step 4 Testing the Selector 0 0 0 ccc tenes 131 General Description of Auto Forms Control Sub system 132 10 Start AUTO FORM subsystem 2 0 00 e eee ee 133 11 End AUTO FORM subsystem 0 000 eee eee 133 User s Manual for InterForm400 5 12 Work with Active Subsystem AUTO FORM 0005 133 Overview of AFC Main Definitions c l 134 Auto Forms Control Definitions le 136 Entering queue and job names to an AFC definition 136 Default Output Output Queue and Printer Type 137 Template AFC definition to be executed after this definition 138 Additional parameters 0 000 c cee esee 138 AFC Definition Entries 0 000 tee 138 1 Merge with Overlay llis 140 2
502. so Alternatively you can consult your printers technical reference for information on the resident fonts 280 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Spacing Indicates whether the font is mono spaced fixed pitch or proportional spaced 0 monospaced 1 Propotional spaced Pitch This field is only of importance if you have chosen fixed spacing Then enter e g 10 00 for 10 CPI If you have chosen proportional spacing just enter a value within the valid interval as the width of the individual letters is relative to the height of the font Height The height of a font is expressed in typographical points A point is 1 72 of an inch A font height of 1 3 of an inch therefore has to be specified as 24 00 The height of a font is slightly greater than the distance from the top of a capital letter to the bottom of e g the letter g Style Style has the following meaning 0 Upright 1 Italic Stroke weight This describes the thickness of the characters 0 Medium 3 Bold Typeface This field has to be filled in with an ID number of the typeface to be used There is a lot of possible typefaces refer to the font list or the technical reference of the printer Here the scalable typefaces of the HPIII PCL5 are shown 05 CG Times Roman 52 Univers PCL5 4148 Univers PCL5e 16602 Arial 16901 Times New Roman For other typefaces refer to page 386 Symbol Set The symbolset of the font Leaving it blank will use the symbolset sele
503. stomer ID between two successive pages in the spool entry does not change these two pages will be inserted in the same envelope or stapled together The Customer ID is found in line 13 column 57 to 60 DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 13 Functron 1 Columns 1 78 Search for Re eee eed ee eee eeebeeie Bie et ond Peet ei Ae ec shen aie oie eeuibeetes xu tese ee edes 1004 PH 30 04 99 Re Your new MateSert 400 driver The following definition should be made Note that the Page selection criteria is left blank 214 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find recipient ID in the following positions Print line Position _13 Aah 50 F3 Exit F12 Cancel This definition will cause the two pages for Florence Flowers to be inserted in one envelope or stapled together In order to test the above definitions proceed with the next section Example 3 Level Break on Customer ID and Attention Person This example extends the previous sample to consider that several persons could exist for the same customer ID and the letters therefore should be inserted in separate envelopes or not stapled together The following example monitors two fields in our test spool entry The Customer ID and the attention person That means if there is no attention person or the attention person is the same all pages wil
504. t Text font color Font and color of the text Relative spacing Specifies the spacing in pels between the bars only used for bar charts User s Manual for InterForm4008 441 Define layout of the Y1 and Y2 axis InterForm400 offers the possibility to define two Y axis This can be used for printing graphs on the same chart with two different units of measure Choose this option from the chart definition display and the following is displayed Define layout of the Yl axis CHA300D Chart Spt poe du ens es PS ES MYBAR TYPE uw Wege nes Be Es cx p XP D BAR Type choices press Enter T xt lo a wow Lom s Number of installations Tex Ae amp X03 wq E ee ext EON osse up eee z T Text font color c Text direct ron eee 1 l Right 2 Up 3 Down Lines WEEDS Zee acces yas ee tee us 2 Dots LANE color gee Www c Minima MA erg Qr eI veo xs 0 00000 INC Emen sce ee mM 1 00000 Maximum lt lt 546 ee E 10 00000 Oe WOE X xd Mog o s e e d t T Values font 11 Values font color Lo Grid line type 9 1 9 Grid line width _2 Dots Grid dine color iz x xx eni F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Texti First line of text for the Y1 axis Text2 Second line of text for the Y1 axis Text font color Font and color for the text fields above Text direction Specifying the direction and rotation of the text for the Y1 axis text Right means horizontal text Up or down means vertical text
505. t F12 Cancel 19 All the spool file attributes have now been inserted and we can now press Enter to print the Overlay TESTFONT merged with this spool entry and we will automatically be returned to the main menu We now re enter our overlay TESTFONT Here we want to create a tabulator line for replacing the Serial No information as a barcode But first we press F18 to determine the column and line interval for the Serial No information 306 Users Manual for InterForm4009 DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE File QPRINT Page Line 1 28 Function 2 20 FL Columns L T8 Search for Tc eda TEE dean eos fetu ded Dope dep es Moe oL obs deo tepore once ES Model P Group Serial No No of dev License Code F45 44A2971 1 81 20 01 3A 320 44A9032 3 3F 78 66 99 Should you have any questions regarding the driver you are welcome to call our technical support hotline on 45 43 26 02 99 Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on http www lcigroup com intermate ftp ftp lcigroup com intermate Regards INTERMATE A S al Florence Flowers Tulip Road 16 4000 Marigold END F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys Here we find the Serial numbers to be in position 30 to 36 in line 30 to 42 We now create a tabulator Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name FONTTEST Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 8 Tabulator lin 030 036 pos 30 042 left 3 000L font 4700 Seqnb
506. t Report Command 5 403 The Link Joint Report Command 20000 cee eee eee 403 The Print Joint Report Command 0000 0c eee 404 AFC and OSC Commands 00 elles 404 The End Auto Forms Control Job Command 404 The Start Auto Forms Control Job Command 405 The Start OSC Job Command 0 02 0 405 Utilities relevant for AFC Exit programs 2000 cece eee eee 405 The Transform AFPDS print Command 20 5 405 The APF3812 Overlay Merge Command issus 405 The Copy CPI Spooled File Command lsulussus 406 The Page Builder Spooled File Command 406 The Convert PCL Spooled File Command issue 409 The Merge Spooled File PDF Command 410 The Merge Spooled File ZPL Command lsulusssue 410 The Print ASCII File Command llle 441 The Split Spooled File Command 00 00 cee nee 441 Spooled File Inspector SFI 0 0 00 cece eee 411 The Zip Stream File s Command 0000 cee eee 412 Other Utility Commands 0 0 0 cece eee 413 The Edit Print Command 0 000 cece eee eee 413 The APF Work Output Queue Command 2005 414 The Display Black White image Command 415 Encrypt InterForm400 PDF File 0000 eee eeeee 416 The HP Macro
507. t administrator on the administration menu you get the following screen Appoint InterForm 400 Administrator APF100D Choose a user to be administrator of the InterForm 400 system or enter ALL to indicate that all users are given authority to the administration menu ALL F3 Exit F12 Cancel It may be wise to appoint a frequent user of the InterForm400 system to be administrator You may also choose a person in your computer department Once you have specified an administrator and exit the system only the appointed administrator will be given access to the administration menu The administrator may later pass on the authority to another user or re open the administration menu to everyone ALL User s Manual for InterForm400 267 2 Configure InterForm 400 When you choose option 2 Configure InterForm 400 on the administration menu you get the following screen Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 1 7 Specify default output queue for users with no individual output queue Users may override value when using the system Output queue Library Specify default printer type Printer type IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 HPII HPIID HPIIP HPIII HPIIID HPIIIP HP4 HP4D HP4 PJL HP4D_PJL HP5C HP4500 HP4500D Interface SYSTEM SYSTEM850 SYSTEM852 ASCIIR8 ASCII850 ASCII852 WORKSTN WS31N WS347N WS348NIDA3X IDA5219 IDA812N Allow users to override standard printer type Y YN F3 Exit F12 Cancel If
508. t the systems default radius of 24 pels will be used for the corners We press Enter to save the changes for line 4 9 TIP Keeping a second terminal session open with the InterForm400 main menu will enable you to access 2 Test print lad or 3 Merge spool file with overlay quickly without User s Manual for InterForm400 83 Step 6 Edit Subject Text Now we will change the appearance of the subject header text Re Your new We therefore type 8 and press Field Exit in order to add our first new sequence line As we want the text to remain in the same vertical position we can use a Tabulator command to adjust the text and change the font We chose type 8 to select a tabulator Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Segnbr Type Overlay definition 0001 I Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01 100 Left 04 180 0002 8 Tabulator lin 003 003 pos 72 072 left12 000L font 0011 0003 9 Remap window 06 011 pos 08 040 top 1 160 left 1 000 L 0004 1 Frame top 01 100 left 00 200 right 04 120 bottom 02 160 0005 9 Remap window 13 013 pos 57 072 top 1 220 left 5 200 C 0006 2 Horizontal top 10 120 left 00 200 right 07 120 0007 5 Text 110 160 L01 200 000 Font9902 Intermate A S Kongev Seqnbr Type 8 0 8 Tabulator Input Line e Position HEC ME Print From left edge Adjustment U L C RN Font F4 List Condition Position ex E a n Is gt lt N Blank after B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4
509. t when you do this then the sender e mail address will be found by going through this list in this specific order when comparing with the registrations in Work with E mail senders 1 User profile and organisation 2 User profile 3 Organisation 3zIf possible use owner of spooled file else use fixed sender A combination of the two codes above You can decide that the sender should receive a copy BCC Blind Carbon Copy of the sent E mails Organisation If filled out it can be used for the digital signature Then it will be the digital signature of this organisation that is used for authentication of the PDF file and not the personal digital signature 9 Encryption and Signature ie WARNING Password protection and or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the Work with Encryption and Signature Information MAI380D Definition name FILENAME Description file naming Type choices press Enter Encryption information Encmept POF EITS 2 2 254 2 84 N Y Yes N No User Access Restrictions NONE___ NONE NOPRINT NOCOPY NOEDIT New PDF Master Password Confirm Password lt lt Lene eee ws Old password when change Digital Signature Information Digitally Sign PDF File N Y Yes N No Certificate 2 x o6 x XD XD 8 Name OWNER Organisat ronsat a So Oe Se de S d X F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel In this screen you can
510. table N Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel The spool file should be merged with overlay IF400DEMO in file set SAMPLE and the resulting spool file should have Form Type MERGED Seqnbr Function 1 0 Merge with overlay Overlay name IF400DEMO_ War Ses Oe ene a te We Ss SAMPLE Or overlay selector rss ers ped Primary Secondary set PRI PRT SEC Form type MERGED Copies of each page INPUT INPUT 01 99 F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel The attributes of the resulting spool file we leave as INPUT and set NONE for Separator Drawer and NO for Hold or SAVE spool file 168 Users Manual for InterForm400 Seqnbr Function 1 0 al Merge with overlay Output spooled file name INPUT____ INPUT Navn USED data Ak oXD xx INPUT INPUT JOB FUSER sas Seperator drawer NONE NONE DEFAULT Nummer Hold output spooled file NO NO YES Save output spooled file NO NO YES F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel Now start the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 and TEMPLATE with function 8 in 1 Functions attached to output queues If you do not already have the demo spool entry in output queue AFC_INPUT1 you can create this demo spool file using function 1 Create Demo Spool Entry in 12 Service Functions which you will find from the 80 Administration menu When you
511. tarted manually by the option 1 Run OSC in 1 Functions attached to output queues Specify automatic start options Specify automatic start options OSC300D Output queue OSC_OUTQO1 Libtary wm etka ke c APF3812 Type choices press Enter Send message s 4 l Do not send message 2 Before processing output queue 3 After processing output queue 4 Both before and after Delayed auto start 1 Start job OPETOR x X Wes pe Se tet ale US 1 2 Send inquiry message 3 Skip delayed jobs Message queue OSYSOPR Library R 4 OSYS Delayed auto start can occur if Output Schedule Control OSC or the entire system is ended and later restarted F3 Exit F12 Cancel When the hour has come for OSC to start a OSC job we can define some options in connection with the OSC job First we define when or if we wish to be notified about an OSC job In addition we can define what should happen in the event that there has been taken back up of the AS 400 IPL has been performed or any other reason for the OSC job not being able to run at the scheduled time Finally we define where possible messages are to be sent 256 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Specify output queue for processed spooled files Specify output queue for processed spooled files OSC300D Output queue 1 OSC_OUTQO1 LIDESCY a ss a w ee eed APF3812 Type choices press Enter Output queue ARCHIVE Output qu
512. tarting position 1 378 for more values Spooled fil amp a 4 2 45 sux 4 FILE Name WOM NaM 2 a we Be we Be wer WR WE d JOB Name USef c p Alg A Xs X 52 we Name Nambe uo sores oe Up ete uer VERE eo yee VE 000000 999999 Spooled file number SPLNBR LAST 1 9999 0NLY LAST Application ID parameter APPIDPARM Qutput queue er e SMS OUTO INPUT Name INPUT jones SENE TE Name LIBL RORMN EY DS Ur Aut ere vermes Cups FORMTYPE INPUT Character value Output spooled file name SPLFNAME INPUT Name INPUT F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys First the CRTPBSPLF command calls the PageBuilder program specified by the PAGBLDPGM keyword with parameter 1 STR Then the CRTPBSPLF command reads all pages from the input spooled file specified by the FILE JOB and SPLNBR keywords For every page in the spooled file the PageBuilder program is called having parameter 1 PAG and parameter DATA01 DATA10 equal to the data found on the active page according to the values for the DTAPARM keyword unless you use PAGE then the contents of the current page is transferred in an array 378 char wide by 255 The PageBuilder program now updates parameters DATAO1 DATA10 according to program logic or the array if you use PAGE The CRTPBSPLF command creates a new page in a new SCS spooled file with the updated values DATAO1 DATA10 After
513. te to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the Bottom Edge Thickness in pels Round Sharp Pattern Repetition Move right Move Down Extra times 54 Users Manual for InterForm4009 rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Thickness of a border in pels 1 240 Zero means no border Determines whether the corners of the frame will be round or sharp You can also specify the radius in pels of each of the 4 corners NorthWest NorthEast SouthWest SouthEast You can mix sharp and round corners by entering a radius in pels for the corners you want round and state zeros for the corners you want sharp If you specify R for round corners without entering radius in any of the 4 fields the system will use the default value of 24 as radius for all 4 corners Unfortunately HPII HPIID HPIIP and other PCL4 printers can not draw round corners On those printers corners will always be sharp Defines a fill pattern for the frame Left blank means no pattern Refer to page 59 on how to use patterns Inch pels of the right movement of a duplicate of the frame relative to the value for left edge Inch pels of the vertical movement of a duplicate of the frame relative to the value for Top edge Extra copies of the frame excluding the original Extra copies wi
514. ted can be specified here Extra blank lines inserted before line one of the spool entry This value can be suppressed by Extended Formatting This font will be the global font for the entire spool entry unless User s Manual for InterForm400 37 F4 otherwise specified by Extended Formatting or the overlay definitions Remap Window and Tabulator By stating INPUT the value is set according to the attribute of the spool entry Gives a list of available fonts The standard IBM 3812 font ID s is predefined refer to page 382 or look at the font list in the back of this manual Other fonts can be defined to the system and will then be available here See section 1 Description of additional fonts page 279 0281 0290 0751 1051 1053 1056 L351 1653 2103 3998 3999 9902 9903 9904 9906 F3 Exit Overview Fonts FNT100D Type Selection Press Enter 1 Select Font Select one of the following Gothic Text 20 Gothic Text 27 Sonoran Serif 8 pt Roman Medium Sonoran Serif 10 pt Roman Medium Sonoran Serif 10 pt Roman Bold Sonoran Serif 10 pt Italic Medium Sonoran Serif 12 pt Roman Medium Sonoran Serif 16 pt Roman Bold Sonoran Serif 24 pt Roman Bold MICR E 13B POSTNET barcode Sample Univers 8p Sample Univers 10p Sample Univers 1p Bold Sample Univers 18p Bold F12 Cancel Extended page def Drawer Paper Size Pages per side Multi up 38 Users Manual for InterForm4009 When statin
515. ter set mappings By making a print screen of this screen you can verify if the displayable characters will appear the same in print Displayable characters First hex char 01456789ABCDEF First hex char gt 01456789ABCDEF 0 amp G n a NO 8 ciClhqy amp 4HQY8 1 aj AJ 1 9 ABN irz IRZ9 2 a AEbks BKS2 A dug 8i 2 123 Second hex 3 AeAEclt CLT3 Second hex gt B A E 6ad00 char 4 dmuODMU4 char C lt 0 6 00 5 i fenvSENV5 D O y f76800 6 a TfowTFOWG E t p P 6 6 7 i lIgpxM4GPX7 F 1 r 8x6y F3 Exit F12 Cancel 6 Save spooled file to the folder APF3812 This function provides a possibility to save a spool file to a folder The file can then be attached to an E mail and send to the support engineer or forms designer The file can be restored with menu 7 Print Saved Spooled File from the folder APF3812 and can be used to define re mapping in overlays or to solve support issues Save spooled file to the folder APF3812 Spooled file Job name User Job number File name Spool file no no ONLY LAST Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown Output queue Library F3 Exit F12 Cancel Fill in the output queue name where the spool file resides and select with option 1 The spool file details will automatically be filled in Following enter a name for the file 338 Users Manual for InterForm4009 7 Print Saved Spooled File
516. terForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0009 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 Seqnbr Type 10 0 8 Tabulator Input Line A3 _55 Position 8 80 Prints From left edge 4 Adjustment C U L C RN B Font 9903 F4 List Condition Position SNE S Is gt lt N Blank after _ B Blank condition after F3 Exit F4 Prompt F18 DSPSPLF F12 Cancel Again we use F18 to find the line interval for th we format the text identical to sequence line 9 e lower body text Should you have And User s Manual for InterForm400 87 Step 8 Making Equal Distance Between Column Headers We now want to Format the column headers in the middle of the page Model P Group in intervals of 1 inch As we want to adjust the vertical position as well we will use the Remap Window command We type 11 to create exit and we select type 9 a new sequence line followed by Field Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name MYDEMO Overlay text Mydemo Seqnbr Type Overlay definition 0009 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 0010 8 Tabulator lin 043 055 pos 08 080 left 4 000C font 9903 Seqnbr Type 11 0 9 Remap window Input line 28 28 Position _8 14 Print From upper edge 05 060 Line spacing _40 From left edge 000002 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment C ULRCN IB E t Rotation 000 Font 9902 F4 List Blank original B bla
517. ters Reply to any message regarding forms type with l Ignore WRKWTR PRT 3 Check for messages on the queue WRKOUTQ QUSRSYS PRTXXX Remote Writers 1 Check if a printing program is assigned to the queue by pressing F20 If not start the printing program with the following command STRRMTWTR QUSRSYS PRTXXX 2 For TCP IP attached printers only If the print job hangs in the queue with status SND check that the IP address setting and LPD port name defined for the output queue corresponds to the Printer Server 372 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 373 Appendix C Printer Types The InterForm400 system can be used in connection to the following printer types IBM4019 IBM4029 IBM4039 IBM4216 model 010 prim data stream HP LaserJet II IID HP HP LaserJet III IID HIP HISI HP LaserJet 4 4 4Si 4V 5 5Si 4000 8000 HP LaserJet 6 HP Color LaserJet HP4500 Lexmark Optra Series Kyocera FS series other HP PCL4 PCL5 PCL5e PCL5c compatible printers Some differences exist between the function sets of various printers You could experience differences in the printout according to the printer being used Consult your printer distributor for information The definitions for an overlay is the same regardless of the defined printer type Differences will not show until the final printout You will therefore be able to use the same overlay on several printer types Black and white pr
518. tes Command The APF3812 DSPNETSVRA command displays the netserver name and domain name used for the AS 400 This can be used when configuring the netserver 400 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Display NetServer Attributes Server name QS4449079 Domain name WORKGROUP Bex e doce eo ust deus Je ims 0s 400 The End Netserver Command The APF3812 ENDNETSVR command ends the netserver on the AS 400 The Remove NetServer share Command The APF3812 RMVNETSHR command can be used to remove a share of an object that previously has been added either by use of Operations Navigator or ADDFILSHR or ADDPRTSHR The Start Netserver Command The APF3812 STRNETSVR command can be used to start the Netserver on the AS 400 without the use of Operations Navigator Save Restore and Export Import Commands The Export Chart Command Chart resources can not be exported and imported in the usual way through the menus The APF3812 EXPCHT can however save resources for a chart e g in the APFEXPORT library which then can be saved as a save file or as a PC file using the normal export procedure This command is used in conjunction with the APF3812 IMPCHT command When exporting and importing charts the following must be noted Charts can only be exported by the APF3812 EXPCHT command Charts can not be renamed or deleted from the export library when they are exported Charts are not shown when viewing t
519. th InterForm400 and only need to be enabled with a new license code Refer to Appendix G on page 388 for details of the light version The Basic InterForm400 package The basic InterForm400 does not contain any of the functions that are available as a module That means that the following is NOT included in the basic package ZPL output PDF output and E mailing with attached PDF files Possibility to encrypt and digitally sign PDF files created by InterForm400 InterWord400 OV400 replacement and AS400 mail merge Possibility to fax Interfax Swiftview licenses apart from 1 license that is delivered with InterForm400 for free And any other module that may be offered for InterForm400 However the number of output queues supported for PCL output in the basic package is unlimited The InterForm400 Classic package The InterForm400 Classic package fits the functionality of the previous versions of InterForm400 The Classic package includes PCL output on an unlimited number of output queues ZPL output PDF output and e mailing If you already have purchased the full InterForm400 license prior to the 2004 versions and have maintenance then you will get a 2004 license code for the classic package If you already have bought InterWord400 or additional SwiftView licenses then the 2004 code will of course also include that The ZPL Module Purchase this module and you will be able to print on ZPL compatible printers In order
520. th most scanners Colour images must be in standard windows BMP format in colour Sharp B W BMP images can only be inserted with the amp amp IMG PATHBMP command JPG images can be inserted in the PDF output but only by using the amp amp IMG command in the spool file see page 392 When selecting option 8 from the Administration menu the following screen appears Work with images IMG001D Select one of the following options 1 Work with black white images 2 Work with color images Work with Zebra images 11 Work with ZEBRA images 12 Work with images in ZEBRA flash memory 19 Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images Option __ F3 Exit F6 Display messages F12 Cancel From here you can select either if you want to work with or import black white or color Images If you want to use images for Zebra output these images should be imported specifically for Zebra in option 11 Work with ZEBRA images User s Manual for InterForm400 319 Working with black and white images Selecting option 1 Work with black and white images the following screen will appear Work with Images IMG360D Start with Select option Press Enter 2 Change description 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 View 6 Print 8 Display attributes 9 Convert to PCL5 Opt Name Description Image 1 Image no 1 for InterForm Image_2 Image no 2 for InterForm Image_3 Image no 3 for InterForm ES Image 4 Image no 4 for InterForm as Imag
521. that this command has the parameter Confirmation of delivery CFMDEL With this you will get a confirmation e mail when the receiver opens the e mail Note however that this confirmation does not work with e g Notes The Work Mail addresses Command The APF3812 WRKMAILADR command enables the possibility to give access to maintenance of E mail addresses without entering the InterForm400 menues These addresses are used in combination with the E mail finishing function see page 201 The command should be called with a parameter MAILTASK that identifies the E mail finishing definition to work with The Work with Profile Jobs Command The APF3812 WRKPRFJOB command can be used to list all active jobs for a specific user profile This command will also display all server jobs serving this user profile Server jobs are used for the Graphical Designer and this command can be used for ending all jobs for a user profile is necessary This is the list shown if e g you have the graphical designer running for this user profile 420 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Work with Job WRKPRFJO POSITION XR AW s Job name Type options press Enter 5 Work with Opt Job name User Job number OGYSERVER QUSER 029983 ONPSERVS QUSER 029837 m ONPSERVS QUSER 029972 x OPADEVOOOB KSE 029982 EE ORWTSRVR QUSER 029849 OZHOSSRV QUSER 029843 OZRCSRVS QUSER 029956 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Use option 5 to work with a job and t
522. the next screen must be filled in The Prinserter definition will then check the overlay for the number of pages defined in Copy Management If the field below is left blank and the overlay selected for the pages to be inserted does contain Copy Management the result will be unpredictable Note that the overlay entered here is not necessarily the one being printed but is merely used for pre defining a value for the Copy Management Create Finish Definition PRS310D Definition name STAPLE De scriptloh eges oe CES PH Ty All ready during the Prepare for Finishing function the System has to know the number of copies of the individual page If a succeeding merge with overlay function uses copy management you will have to tell here which overlay will be used during the merge function Overlay name File set Or Selector name d Primary Secondary set PRI SEC F3 Exit F4 Prompt F12 Cancel F3 Exit F12 Cancel Select the printer manufactorer and printer model via the screen below 190 Users Manual for InterForm400 Select printer type for stapeling HP Lexmark IBM Kyocera Xerox Oc Canon Ricoh Minolta Printer Manufacturer OMDAIADGOBWNHER i Notice Stapeling requieres use of printertype HP4_PJL or HP4D_PJL F3 Exit F12 Cancel Continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 212 to finalise the stapling definition User s Manual for I
523. the file SVIEW EXE Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 5 1 The Name that is used for this AS 400 under Other computers on PC s Networkname QS4449079 Sharename VIEW Public authorisation to files that are created in the APF3812 VIEW folder 0 0 EXCLUDE 1 ALL F3 Exit F12 Cancel The selection of Primary language for operating InterForm400 was chosen during the installation of InterForm400 It can be altered here if needed Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 6 1 Select primary language for 1 The language of displays 2 The language of the manual Language code GB DE Deutsch DK Dansk ES Espafioles FR Frangais GB English F3 Exit F12 Cancel If you want Auto Forms Control to monitor output queues with printers attached you now have the option to state which form type to print from the shared output queues State N for not using the program APF3812 STRWTRCHK program if in doubt User s Manual for InterForm400 27 Configure InterForm 400 APF101D 7 1 Do you want to use the APF3812 STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands to avoid a writer to be started with FORMTYPE ALL on one of the output queues defined in Auto Forms Control and if yes what formtype has to replace ALL when a writer is started on one of these output queues Use APF3812 STRWTRCHK as a validity checker N Y N Formtype to repla
524. the sub overlay is made absolute to the upper edge of the paper Vertical positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value The sub overlay is re positioned downwards relative to the position of the string matching the criteria for the sub overlay to be called Vertical positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value The sub overlay is re positioned upwards relative to the position of the string matching the criteria for the sub overlay to be called Vertical positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value Left Edge Inches pels position according to the entry of the following field A Horizontal position of the sub overlay is made absolute to the left edge of the paper Horizontal positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value The sub overlay is re positioned to the right relative to the position of the string matching the criteria for the sub overlay to be called Horizontal positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value The sub overlay is re positioned to the left relative to the position of the string matching the criteria for the sub overlay to be called Horizontal positioning of elements in the sub overlay is added to this value Blank After Stating B will remove the text string or the number which has been used for the condition from the resulting print out i6 WARNING Global settings of the sub overlay inserted
525. this function can be substituted by a more efficient method as described on page 27 150 Users Manual for InterForm400 G Archive to MultiArchive 400 This option is only visible when the program MultiArchive 400 library MLTARC400 is detected on the system MultiArchive 400 is a software only archiving system developed by the Danish company MultiSupport A S As InterForm400 MultiArchive 400 exploits SCS type spool entries The interaction between InterForm400 and MultiArchive 400 controls that spool files are archived with the necessary spool file information and AutoFormsControl is controlling that data is not archived again when reprinting from the archive through InterForm4008 Read more about MultiArchive 400 on http www multi support dk Seqnbr Function 3 0 G Archive to MultiArchive 400 Archive name Item type F3 Exit F12 Cancel HzArchive in InfoStore 400 This option opens up when InfoStore 400 is installed on the same AS 400 as InterForm400 You can use this to archive SCS spooled files in InfoStore 400 Seqnbr Function 1 0 H Archive in InfoStore 400 Archive ID For archiving both PCL and SCS spooled files see page 143 InfoStore 400 is an archiving system developed by Solitas AG Read more about InfoStore 400 on http www solitas com User s Manual for InterForm400 151 P Send PDF E mail Seqnbr Function 1 0 P Send spooled file as PDF email
526. through a firewall The firewall parameter is ignored if you use NONE for the MAILROUTER 5 CHGPOPA NO at AUTOSTART MSGSPLIT NOMAX or limit of mail server 6 STRMSF Starts the Mail Server Framework 7 STRTCPSVR SMTP Starts the SMTP server on the AS 400 The commands STRMSF and STRTCPSVR should be called from the IPL Startup program of the AS 400 More information can be found on the IBM web pages http publib boulder ibm com pubs html as400 v5r1 ic2924 index htm Click on Networking TCP IP and E mail and http www 912 ibm com s_dir slkbase NSF 0cf528a492c9b4a886 2025680b00020371 34879f5e413 aa5cd8625697b0053f36a OpenDocument amp Highlight 0 SNDDST 2520SNADS Combining SMTP and Domino 400 on the same machine If you are already running Domino on the same iSeries as the one where you have InterForm400 installed there will be a problem sending via SMTP unless you e g bind the OS400 SMTP to another IP address than used for Domino An IBM Technical Document describing how to do that can be found via this link http www 912 ibm com s dir slkbase NSF 1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e b8a7 2a25678830686256c1c0052e8fa Document number 27850433 460 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Appendix O Graphical Designer Install and use From InterForm400 an unlimited number of graphical designers can be installed Below is a description of the requirements and how to install and use the designer Requir
527. tion in the InterForm400 Administration menu 356 Users Manual for InterForm4009 License Information for InterForm 400 LIC320D InterForm 400 version 2006 M01 Model Feature 270 22A2 Serial number 65BDI1BB Operating system V5R2M000 Type choices and then press Enter Press F3 or F12 to exit InterForm 400 license code Module Type Subtype Expirydate Classic Demo Full PDF Security Demo Full InterWord Demo Full E boks Demo Full SwiftView 0 Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F16 Save Enclose a printout of this screen when ordering a production code or write the first five lines of information on your purchase order Enter or paste the license code into this screen and press Enter once and then F16 to save it InterForm400 can run a permanent code and a temporary code simultaneously When the temporary code runs out InterForm400 will fall back to the permanent code Press F17 to change the field for the license code to easier paste a new code Press F22 to display the current licence code s used Press F23 to clear a license code entered earlier When you press F23 you enter e g test or prod as the license code type ie WARNING i After you have entered a license code you should not press F5zRefresh before you i6 WARNING 6 If your current InterForm400 is configured as a light version the text LIGHT version will be displayed in the heading
528. tion of the level break between recipient information Or in other words when to start insertion into a new envelope when to staple the pages or create a new pdf file e mail or fax Work with Finishing Recipient ID PRS320D Definition name TESTDEF Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Seqnbr Description No recipient ID definitions F6 to create End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to create a new definition More definitions can be created but is only relevant if the Page Selection Criteria field is used Normally a Finishing definition will contain only one Recipient ID definition line Create Finishing Recipient ID PRS330D Definition name TESTDEF Sequence number 1 DesScprpEXOR cu wee ctetu Customer number in Demo Spool Page selection criteria Print line Position Oper Compare value Find recipient ID in the following positions Print line Position 13 ah oc 60 F3 Exit F12 Cancel We enter 1 for the first Finishing Recipient ID definition Page Selection Criteria The level break is made when a condition of one of the 3 Page Selection Criteria lines is true If the condition of line one is not true the second line will be checked etc If non of the 3 lines are true the rest of the lines on this screen are ignored and the next Recipient ID sequence number is processed Read more on
529. tion where all letters using overlay IFA00DEMO printed to queue PRTO2 are printed to output bin 8 except when printed by PETER which will result in printing to bin 9 All other print jobs submitted by PETER will be printed to bin 4 Any print job submitted by other users and with other overlays will be printed to the Default output bin defined for this Sorter definition 334 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Output queue Library Start with Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy Opt Overlay IF400DEMO IF400DEMO F3 Exit Work with Output Sorter Details PRTO2 QUSRSYS 4 Delete 5 Display Pri Sec User profile Binno 1 PETER 009 1 008 PETER 004 End F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel User s Manual for InterForm400 335 20 Import Certificates Refer to page 481 for details of how to import certificates to be used for digital signatures in PDF files 336 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Service Functions The service functions are accessed by selecting option 12 on the administration menu Service Functions APF900D Select one of the following options 1 Create Demo Spool Entry Display all displayable characters Save spooled file to the folder APF3812 Print Saved file to the folder APF3812 Print Resource X reference Journal menu o00 J10 WH 21 Export of InterForm 400 resources 22 Import of InterForm 400 resources 40 Install upgrade InterWord 400 50 Apply PTF from folder APF38
530. to create a 70 point font you should enter font ID 7001 The text is of course COPY We press Enter to save sequence line 4 100 Users Manual for InterForm400 Step 16 Defining the Relatively Positioned Sub form When looking through the demo spool entry some may wonder why the number 2 appear in the No of dev column for InterForm400 license codes The customers might have had the same question and we would therefore like to add a note next to these item lines explaining that this is a light version and 2 means it is limited to two printers This is one of the more advanced features of the system generally known as nested overlays We will have to create a new simple overlay where we will define the text we want printed when 2 appears in this column We press F3 to exit this overlay We re enter 1 Design overlay and we create a new overlay with the name LIGHT Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name LIGHT Overlay text Sub overlay for MYDEMO Line spacing 040 in 1 240 of an inch INPUT 1 720 Rotation 000 INPUT 0 90 180 270 Extra left margin positions _0 0 99 Maximum number of print positions 378 1 378 Extra blank lines on top _0 0 99 Font 0066_ INPUT fontnumber F4 List Extended page def X N Drawer PRINTER INPUT PRINTER 1 9 20 39 Pages per side E Paper Size 0 F4 List Copy management Y N Duplex print N no S short edge margin L long edge m
531. to section Sort Definitions page 230 for more information Sort Definition Name The Sort definition name Output queue library Output from the Sort process will be a new SCS spool entry If a default queue has been defined the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here INPUT in this field Indicates that the new spool entry must be written to the same output queue where the input spool entry exists User s Manual for InterForm400 149 As the new spooled file afterwards will be input to a merge operation INPUT will often be appropriate Note that the keyword DEFAULT and INPUT apply to both Output queue and library Formtype The formtype entered here should be used as condition for a 1 Merge with overlay following this AFC definition The formtype could typically be SORTED i4 WARNING j Make sure that you are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a sort i definition If you e g create a new spooled files with a sort definition and these new spooled files are placed back on the same outq then the new spooled files should NOT FzChange Writer Seqnbr Function 2 0 F Change writer Writer name Name OUTO POEM type we 0o F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold Fll Delete F12 Cancel Writer name The name of the writer to change When stating OUTQ the writer attached to the output queue specified in the default settings f
532. tor From To Primary 1 1 Secondary Use this overlay element on the first copy of the Primary set and the first copy of the Secondary set 1 1 1 Frame 2 Horizontal From To 3 Vertical 4 Line Primary 1 1 5 Text 6 Print info Secondary 1 T 7 Ink 8 Tabulator Use this overlay element on all copies of the Primary set 1 1 1 Frame 2 Horizontal From To 3 Vertical 4 Line Primary 1 6 5 Text 6 Print info Secondary m 7 Ink 8 Tabulator Use this overlay element all copies of both sets except the first one in the Primary set 1 1 1 3 5 7 Frame Vertical Text Ink 2 Horizontal 4 Line 6 Print info 8 Tabulator From To Primary 2 6 Secondary 1 6 User s Manual for InterForm400 53 Overlay elements Up to 9999 overlay elements can be made in one overlay 1 FRAME Seqnbr Type Inch pel Repetition 11 0 1 Frame Top edge Move right Left edge Move down Right edge Extra times Bottom edge Thickness in pels NW NE SW SE Round Sharp R S _ Radius Pens SPE Pattern _ F4 List F3 Exit F11 delete F12 Cancel F18 View Spool entr Top Edge Inches pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Left Edge Inches pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay Right Edge Inches pels absolu
533. tput queue to which the spool entry belongs This is entered at the bottom of the screen You can then fetch the information about the spool entry by selecting it with option 1 Work with Output Queue Queue PRTHP3 Library QUSRSYS Type options press Enter 1 Select 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 8 attributes Opt File User User Data Sts Pages Copies Form Type Pty zs OPRINT INTERMATE INVOICE RDY NE 1 STD 5 L OPRINT INTERMATE PROFIT RDY 5 1 STD 5 QPRINT INTERMATE BALANCE RDY 1 1 STD 5 Parameters for option 2 gt F3 exit Fll1 View 2 F12 Previous F21 Description F24 More keys Output Queue The name of the output queue where the spool entry to be merged is placed Library The library of the above output queue If left blank the library list will be used F3 If you press F3 you will return to the main menu Actual printing is not performed until all spool entry specifications for this particular report have been made This means that the use of F3 somewhere in the process prevents anything from being written at all F12 If you press F12 the system returns to the preceding screen without any selection being made After a merge with an overlay the spool attributes are saved in this screen for future test prints until the InterForm400 menus are left If you want to repeat the printing of the report later the system will suggest the same spool entries as first specified All you 264 Users Ma
534. tput queues Work with OSC resulting output queues OSC350D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Lipa A ak Se aA APF3812 Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Destination Workload Opt Output que Library factor EE AFC INPUT1 APF3812 40 AFC_INPUT2 APF3812 60 End F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel In the above entry screen we define one or more resulting output queues for OSC to send the resulting spool file As the resulting spool file could be quite big it is possible to define more output queues to share the resulting spool file Furthermore we can define which workload factor the resulting output queues should have Above we have defined two resulting output queues to share the resulting OSC spool file The workload have been set to be 40 for output queue AFC INPUT1 and 60 for output queue AFC_INPUT2 User s Manual for InterForm400 255 Specify automatic start scheduling Specify automatic start scheduling OSC300D Output queue 1 OSC_OUTQO1 PAPE PY Oe sce ee ours Us APF3812 Type choices press Enter Monday Tuesday Wed day Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 15 00 15 00 15 00 15 00 14 00 F3 Exit F12 Cancel F20 Sort by time In the above entry screen we can define a scheduled start time of each day of the week if an automatic run of the OSC job is required As an alternative to a scheduled start of a OSC job the job could be s
535. tted in Copy Management separate ways l e removing of headers and footers of the additional pages included in multi up print Stating N in this field will enable you to define advanced pagination within the overlay for use with spool entries consisting of different types of contents see using Page control page 52 Stating Y will enable you to create several copies of each page Also design elements can be dedicated to specific copies This is for instance used when making copies of Invoices where the overlay for the copy should have basically the same elements as the original but should be characterized by the text COPY printed across Duplex options These options are only visible if you have selected duplex print for the actual file set Option 5 Create Delete Overlay File Sets page 273 If the field Duplex print is filled in with N only the front of the paper is used Duplex print Forced front page Duplex margin Back page overlay If you answer S or L in the Duplex print field both sides of the paper is used including the answer you have given about the duplex margin being at the long or short edge of the paper When filling in S or L for Duplex print together with N for Copy Management the Page Control on the Design Overlay screen will be extended to include selection for restricting overlay to odd or even pages See Page control page 52 Controls if the overlay for which the Duplex function has be
536. type and Interface type has been defined in the previous screen the keyword DEFAULT will be preset for this field This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here Note that the keyword DEFAULT apply to both Output queue library InterForm400 printer type and Interface Printer Type Interface The printer type refer to page 374 and protocol conversion refer to page 378 used for the above printer Note that the keyword DEFAULT entered for output queue will apply for these settings as well i e the settings for Printer type and Interface type from the previous screen will be used Merge overprint lines Specifies that overprinted lines will be printed as one line Refer to page 118 for more information Find overlay in forms type table Stating Y will cause the Forms type table to be used for the form type stated for this entry See page 170 for information on how to use the Forms type table If stating N you will get the below Screen In the following screen the definitions for the overlay is entered 140 Users Manual for InterForm400 Seqnbr Funct Seqnbr Function 1 0 d F3 Exit Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D NE PRTHP3 AFC yw QUSRSYS Output queue DLibrary aca a Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program Merge with overlay Overlay name URNIONE S we al ET BN E NET Or overlay selector x o Primary Secondary set
537. uen 346 Reformat SCS spool Ls 221 Relations to other applications 362 Release update 0 000 357 Remove NetServer share 401 Resident PCL fonts 005 278 Restore library from folder 402 Right adjustment 000 61 64 RMVNETSHRY niece Seng xr ueber n 401 Rotation 2 nines cate er nit sk niahi is 57 RSTLIBFLR CL command 402 RUNSFI amp asi xeczcees tUriemh Ret ees 412 SAP print Conversion asa ai riunioni a inai 152 153 Datatype IBMSCS2 153 Save Library To Folders 035 nes r eee 402 Save Spool File From Folder 0 e ee eee 339 To Folder rte crt ps 338 SAVLIB2FLR CL command 402 Security of PDF files 480 Selectfile set cee eese 119 Select output queue 120 Selecting an existing overlay 35 Service Functions 00 337 Create demo spool entry 337 Display all displayable characters 338 Print saved spool file 339 Save spool file to folder 338 Service options 00005 50 Setting up the system 25 SEI sasha Gone eed eae oe oe 412 Share one output queue 27 SIMM module 0 00 5 417 SMTP and Domino 460 SMTP setup isis eite ceriicis 459 SNDMAIL eese sen 420
538. uping and separator page R Define resulting output queues Specify automatic start scheduling _ Specify automatic start options R Specify output queue for processed spooled files Specify job priority F3 Exit F12 Cancel The R required indicates the lines which must be filled out before this OSC definition can be used 248 Users Manual for InterForm4009 The various definition lines does the following Specify input spooled file priority This definition line is only used for defining what spool file attributes to sort on if no sorting fields are selected Normally it is not necessary to fill this out Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output If you decide to sort on the spool file attributes in combination with text of each spool page e g customer number you can do this using this function This places the attributes on each page Define sort fields Here you state where to find the sorting keys e g customer number on each page You also refer to positions where the attributes have been inserted If all spool files have the sorting fields in the same positions you only need one sequence line If the placement of the sorting fields varies it is necessary to have more sequence lines and to use the page selection criteria For a description of the page selection criteria see page 212 232 Specify grouping and separator page Here you decide how many sorting fields that should
539. use problems in certain rare setups Remember always to have the approval of your AS 400 responsible before changing any system value Attachment Methods Most modern laser printers are designed for operation with an MS Windows platform and is equipped with a Parallel Centronics port Most of these printers understands HP PCL5 which is an ASCII based print language In order for the printer to operate on the AS 400 a physical and logical protocol conversion must be used The attachment of printers can be made by any of the following methods Twinax to Centronics protocol converter 5219 3812 SCS compatible Printer port of a 5250 Terminal Printer port of a PC with AS 400 printer session capabilities ASCII transparency compatible Internal or external LAN Print Server supporting TCP IP LPD TN5250E or Lexlink Lexlink connection is not explained in this manual Other attachment which can print through a server receiving ASCII print data from the AS 400 InterForm400 contains an EBCDIC to ASCII conversion program When using the interface types ASCII850 and ASCIIR8 in InterForm400 this protocol conversion program is used for spool data as well The following sections describe attachment of printers using the interface types ASCII850 and ASCIIR8 Attaching through a Twinax Protocol Converter The printer can be attached through any protocol converter emulating an IBM SCS printer and which understands the ASCII transparency SCS
540. usine CREER ORENSE ND ERE eremo Jf o RS tire er Maximum number of Variable Back Page Overlay print positions Extra blank lines o IPEHBI3X Lo L l5 x on top Line number _ Font i POSTE TOT et a 4 4 iie EIL Extended page def Drawer Paper Size Multi up F3 Exit F12 Cancel Copy management t Duplex print Suen he DOO tele a aa aa aa aaa a a Oe ap Mar TLN Duplex margin 0 in 1 240 of an inch 1 720 Back page overlay VAR Code for placement B B back page F front F4 Prompt Fll Delete this overlay F12 Cancel F13 Set print parameters Prefix The first part of the back page overlay name The overlay which is called by this function consists of this prefix plus the character string found by Line number and Position For instance if the prefix is INV and Line Number and Position finds the string 001 the back page overlay should be named INVOO1 The Prefix must consists of minimum 1 character which can not be a number The Prefix plus the string found with Line Number and Position can not exceed a total of 10 characters Line Number The print line in the spool entry defining the last part of the back page overlay name Position The column interval containing the last part of the overlay name Code for Placement The possibility of placing the back page overlay on the front of the physical printed page is a unique feature of the system which overcomes a common problem for duplex printing on pre printed forms Normally a
541. uto Forms Control nor the interactive merge with option 3 Merge spool entry with overlay 3 PDF files cannot be created when merging with OV 400 or InterWord400 spooled files 424 Users Manual for InterForm4009 User s Manual for InterForm400 425 Appendix K Forms Server for non AS 400 environments InterForm400 can act as a Forms Server for other environments such as WindowsNT UNIX Novell etc For instance it is possible with Client Access to create a printer in Windows which directs print jobs either as PCL datatype ASCII or print jobs which has been converted to SCS datatype SCS to an AS 400 attached printer The latter function was originally designed for printing PC print jobs on twinax printers but can be used as input for InterForm400 to print electronic forms Adding Overlays to SCS PC Print Jobs PC Mail Merge This function is a popular way of doing large mailings with advanced graphics For example the normal situation when merging database records with a graphical MS Word document is that each page in the resulting output will have all graphics included This takes long time to process on both the PC and the printer it requires lots of hard disk space and not least it generates a lot of network traffic With InterForm400 you can load the form document as an overlay and send the data records as a simple SCS print job to a queue monitored by InterForm400 This is an extremely effective way of maki
542. w sequence line and we fill in that this split definition should run if the text in line 15 from position 21 to 29 equals EQ InterMate case sensitive When we press Enter a screen for specifying a user exit program is shown The exit program can be used for collecting data from other applications or databases for insertion in the document We are not using this facility so the value NONE is kept Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFLETTER Description Extract InterMate Letters Split detail description Split InterMate MateSerter User exit program Program name NONE NONE name DXb asry Lu entTeeuM us name F3 Exit F12 Cancel When we press Enter again a screen is shown where we can state the spool file attributes of the spool entry created by the split function Note that the original spool entry used for making the split will remain untouched 178 Users Manual for InterForm400 Change Split Definition SPL310D Split definition name IFLETTER Description Extract InterMate letters Split detail description Split InterMate MateSerter Output queue AFC INPUT1 INPUT NONE Name Tit Dawe ELEC EE APF3812 Page size Length Lines per page INPUT 1 255 Length positions per line INPUT 1 378 DxriespecxesHnohDste neg ee A Pees eee yee INPUI 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 12 Lines per Inch eet age WP ae
543. we will just check all lines from 1 to 70 The horizontal position of the text This will always be fixed in position 11 14 We enter the the name of the sub overlay SUB2 which we will create later for formatting of the footer We define 5 for Number of lines to remap as we do not expect the footer to consist of more than 5 lines We define A or blank for upper edge which means the sub overlay will control the vertical position We press Enter and we get the following screen Vertical cursor repositioning before execute of sub overlay Position related to actual position Number of pels 0 499 99 Or reposition related to previous non blank input line Number of pels CO 55999 F3 Exit F12 Cancel The sub overlay will control the vertical placement so we just state 0 for this offset Creating the sub overlay for formatting item groups We now press Enter to save the If then line and press F3 to exit the overlay We enter 1 Design Overlay again and we create the first of our sub overlays SUB1 Here we create a 9 Remap Window line which we will use to format the item header User s Manual for InterForm4006 109 Design InterForm 400 overlay APF300D Overlay name SUB1 Overlay text Seqnbr Type Overlay definition Seqnbr Type 150 9 Remap window Input line 1 1 Position 10 14 Print From upper edge Line spacing _40 From left edge _2 000 Ignore blank lines N Y N Adjustment
544. wer for COLOR drawer for CARDSTOCK NONNNN ANN WD n Li Li Li Li Li Li Li Li n F3 Exit F12 Cancel Here you can specify what drawer number each of the standard paper types should be translated into Note that the paper types maybe are translated into your native language on the printer display User s Manual for InterForm400 331 2 Output Sorter Bin Support This function is used in departmental printing environments with the following purposes Several users share the same printer and want their print output in a specific output tray depending on the User name Printing of jobs where an output tray should be selected depending on the overlay chosen for the job Combinations of the above This option has been tested and approved with the standard sorter units available for HP5Si and the Lexmark Optra series Defining an Output Sorter Bin for a User Enter Menu point 11 Output Sorter Definitions on the Administration menu The following screen will appear Work with Output Sorters STALE WLCD ar a0 iee acer Type option Press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Outq Library Sorter type Default bin No output sorters defined Press F6 for add F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add F12 Cancel Press F6 to add a new Output sorter definition One output sorter definition corresponds to one output queue Additional output sorter definitions must be
545. what to go through if you select YES The first screen looks like this Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Localization of totals total lines starts e na 0 33 lines before the last occurrence of the text QT 4 ES URS ae Ta a QUI o ue vet hg euros emen Vendgbhe ced e se Gta NEL F3 Exit F12 Cancel InterForm400 will search for any of the texts you type in You can tell how many lines before the hit that should be considered to be a part of the total If e g you search for the text Total and there is a line just above this line then you should enter 1 in total lines starts lines before the last occurrence Press Enter to proceed to the screen below 226 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Work with reformat definition RFM300D Definition name DEMO REFOR Description Reformat the Demo spooled file Placing of totals Select one of the following options 1 Just after the last detail line 2 Like 1 if there is space for all total lines otherwise next page 3 In foot Option F3 Exit F12 Cancel On this screen you can decide how the total should be inserted 1 Just after the last detail line This choice will insert the totals just after the last detail line If there is no room for all lines for the total then th
546. with an overlay conditioned by the Form Type SORTDONE or by using an Overlay Selector User s Manual for InterForm400 235 Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue AFC INPUT2 Library APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 D DEMO Sort def SORTDEMO outq DEFAULT amp form type SORTDONE Seqnbr Function Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function 2 0 1 Form type e SORTDONE Save attribute Jobname Scrat Lis Spooled file name Device file Libresvo owes eo Pen Program that opened file Library fe te BEN DR eae oe FETESTE FEFE F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel Update AFC functions attached to output queues AFC305D Queue AFC INPUT2 Library APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 D DEMO Sort def SORTDEMO outq DEFAULT amp form type SORTDONE Seqnbr Function 2 0 1 Merge with overlay Output queue for merged print DEFAULT LIDL e oer w ey eee ArtForm 400 printer type Interface DIESES NE e OUTRE NE RS Find overlay in form type table _ Y N F3 Exit F13 Fold Unfold F12 Cancel The Sorted spool entry from example 4 including a definition of insertion of a separator page if break in sort field number 2 would look like this 236 Users Manual for InterForm4009 DISPLAY SPOOL FILE Biles xou wu cw QPRINT Page Line 1 1 P netiof ux wx Columns 1 78 Search
547. y Module iisiselseessleeeee es 20 The InterWord400 Module sss RR RR RR III 20 The InterFax400 Module sss RR IRR IRR 20 Getting Started uu cua saneta aa Rok a a ara Lan d a a RR Ta a NUR aa Ra Ca DN a DR taa aC 21 1 Preparation J cepelss t eevosbckErveisexwckeeg x deed ess vi ik 21 2 Installation esaet th Devas Bite i e pda benda a eris 21 3 Setting Up the System isses sce rp eR ea xig eed E RR ERR AORTA A 25 4 Work With Overlay AFC Sample 00 0 0 eee eee eee 29 5 About The Print Results lsse eens 31 Menu Structures and General Operation Lese 33 Selecting an existing overlay 0 00 ects 35 Creating a new overlay l lislilslseee ee 35 Copy Overlay from Another Overlay 0 0c cece ee een eee 36 Global settings of an overlay 0 000 cece 37 Duplex options 0 0 eee 39 Function keys for display of a spoolfile 00 00 40 Considerations for Zebra overlays 20 00 cee eee eee 43 Extended Page Definition 00 60 45 Copy Management 0 00 ccc eee tenet ene 46 Measuring Methods uaaa cece ete 48 Orientation of design elements 00 cece een eee 48 The Design Screen 0 00 49 Service ODIIOrS 3 elt set e eate ento owe a tpe cw i Hr es E aen 50 Overlay Element Selection Filters ccc eens 52 Page Control oa eec ente Ce Ne rn tic
548. y be moved to AFC_INPUT2 as result of sequence line 3 function 5 move If you did not make the changes you will have to move the spool file manually from outq AFC_INPUT1 to AFC_INPUT2 and release it As in Example 1 you can try changing your default print queue to AFC_INPUT2 with the command CHG OB OUTQ APF3812 AFC I NPUT2 Try to make a screen dump or print a log or another system report Example PRTDEVADR CTLO1 It will now be printed to queue AFC_INPUT2 but the formtype STD will cause the job to print without interference from Auto Forms Control We will also notice that the demo spool entry formtype DEMO has been deleted after it has been used to generate the merged printout 166 Users Manual for InterForm400 Using a TEMPLATE AFC defintion As all printers being used together with InterForm400 has to have an AFC definition defined the use of a TEMPLATE AFC definition is very useful A lot of the printers being monitored by AFC will often have the same requirements in terms of which spool files are to be merged with which overlays In the following example we delete the AFC entries made for AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 even though the use of a template definition will also work when AFC entries is made in the main AFC defintion The template AFC entries will always be executed after the AFC entries made in the main AFC definition Update Auto Forms Control Definition AFC302D Output queue AFC INPUT1 L
549. y selectors AFC300D INTERMA_ Selection for INVOICE TEST Seqnbr Overlay name 150 INV FRONT AND OR Print line Position Oper Compare value PAGE FIRST al d s 7 __EQ INVOICE Fll Delete F12 Cancel Overlay name AND OR Print Line Position Oper Compare Value 124 Users Manual for InterForm400 The name of the overlay to call in the file set defined in the entry screen for the Overlay Selector page 122 Relate this statement to the previous statement The print line in the spool entry to search The column interval to search The operator relating to the compare value The operators used are standard operators known from e g Query 400 EQ Equal to compare value NE Not equal to compare value LT Less than compare value LE Less than or equal to compare value GT Greater than compare value GE Greater than or equal to compare value PAGE Select only for certain pages This can be used for spooled files with unknown contents The character string or numeric value which the operator should be compared to If the operator is PAGE you can use these values FIRST Only for the first page of the spooled file LAST Only for the last page of the spooled file ODD Only for odd page numbers EVEN Only for even page numbers User s Manual for InterForm400 125 Getting Familiar with Overlay Selectors The following makes use of the demo spool entry delivered with InterForm4
550. y selectors AFC300D Selector name MYSELECT Description Selection for MateSert and InterMate letters File set TEST Seqnbr Overlay name Overlay description Seqnbr Overlay name 1 0 IFA400DEMO AND OR Print line Position Oper Compare value 15 21 28 EQ MateSert Fll Delete F12 Cancel We enter a new sequence line by typing 1 followed by Field Exit and we type in the overlay name IFA00DEMO which we want to use if the conditions stated in this sequence line are true We now define that if we in Print line 15 position 21 to 28 has a text string which equals MateSert case sensitive the condition is true We press Enter to save this sequence line and enter sequence line 2 Add Overlay selectors AFC300D Selector name MYSELECT Description Selection for MateSert and InterMate letters File set TEST Seqnbr Overlay name Overlay description 0001 IFA400DEMO Demo overlay for InterForm 400 Seqnbr Overlay name 2 0 MYDEMO AND OR Print line Position Oper Compare value 15 21 29 EQ InterMate Fll Delete F12 Cancel In this we just define that if we have InterMate in line 15 position 21 to 29 we will choose the overlay MYDEMO We press Enter and press F3 to leave the Overlay Selector menus 130 Users Manual for InterForm400 Step 4 Testing the Selector We now enter menu point 3 Merge Spool Data with Overlay on the main menu Merge Spooled File w
551. y to edit If another already has opened the overlay you will get the error message Locked by another user To see exactly which job it is you need to try to edit the same overlay through the green screen If it is a graphical designer job that is inactive you can end that job from the InterForm400 menues if you select 80 Administering InterForm 400 followed by 52 Work with Designer job overlay locks Open a Spooled File If you want to design the overlay for a specific kind of spooled file you can see the spooled file with the overlay if you select this icon on the right side of the screen header Tern prs or select File and Open Spool File You will then see a list of all the output queues that contains spooled files The output queues are sorted by library name followed by output queue name 464 Users Manual for InterForm4009 Settings and tools for the design Before you start the actual design you want to setup the graphical designer Changing the displayed size You can zoom in or out by selecting Display and Zoom In Zoom Out or Size or by use of the icons looking like magnifying glasses You can also click on either of these 4 icons to select how you want to divide the screen between the result and input view Eu You can even also drag in the corners of the spool and result view to change the size and position of these windows Finally you can also drag the vertical li
552. ype STD to the output queue AFC_OUT1 without adding any overlay When we press Enter we see the AFC function appear as the first line Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue AFC_INPUT1 Dibra ny ee us Ge An ee A t APF3812 Seqnbr Funct Form type Save Jobname Filename Device file Program 0001 5 STD Move spooled file new outq AFC OUT1 library APF3812 0002 1 DEMO Merge Overlay IF400DEMO Fileset SAMPLE 0003 6 Hold Spooled File Seqnbr Function 0T F3 Exit F5 Service F13 Fold Unfold Step 5 Defining move of Print jobs with Formtype DEMO Currently sequence line 3 defines that all files should be put on hold when they have been processed by line 1 and 2 This means that currently the sample spool entry with form type DEMO is put on hold and stays in the queue We now want to move this type of spool file to queue AFC_INPUT2 so it can be processed by the AFC definition for that queue We enter a sequence line between sequence line 2 and 3 meaning that we will move the demo spool entry after it has been used to create a merged spool file on queue AFC_OUT1 but before it would get put on hold by sequence line 3 We enter sequence line 2 1 and press Field Exit We enter form type DEMO as the criteria for executing the move operation and we press Enter 158 Users Manual for InterForm400 Update AFC functions attatched to output queues AFC305D Output queue xw og ed A

Intermate i5 Stepper Machine User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents